Mader/Biology, 10/e – Chapter Outlines
Chapter 1
1.1 How to Define Life
A. Living Things Are Organized
1. Organization of living systems begins with atoms, which make up basic building
blocks called elements.
2. The cell is the basic structural and functional unit of all living things.
3. Different cells combine to make up tissues (e.g., myocardial tissue).
4. Tissues combine to make up an organ (e.g., the heart).
5. Specific organs work together as a system (e.g., the heart, arteries, veins, etc.).
6. Multicellular organisms (each an “individual” within a particular species) contain
organ systems (e.g., cardiovascular, digestive, respiratory, etc.).
7. A species in a particular area (e.g., gray squirrels in a forest) constitutes a
population.
8. Interacting populations in a particular area comprise a community.
9. A community plus its physical environment is an ecosystem.
10. The biosphere is comprised of regions of the Earth’s crust, waters, and atmosphere
inhabited by organisms.
11. Each level of organization is more complex than the level preceding it.
12. Each level of organization has emergent properties due to interactions between the
parts making up the whole; all emergent properties follow the laws of physics and
chemistry.
B. Living Things Acquire Materials and Energy
1. Maintaining organization and conducting life-sustaining processes require an outside
source of energy, defined as the capacity to do “work.”
2. Metabolism is all the chemical reactions that occur in a cell.
3. The ultimate source of energy for nearly all life on earth is the sun; plants and certain
other organisms convert solar energy into chemical energy by the process of
photosynthesis.
4. All organisms must maintain a state of biological balance, or homeostasis.
Temperature, moisture level, pH, etc. must be maintained within the tolerance range
of the organism. Organisms have intricate feedback and control mechanisms to
maintain homeostatic balance.
C. Living Things Respond
1. Living things interact with the environment and with other living things.
2. Response often results in movement of the organism (e.g., a plant bending toward the
sun to capture solar energy, a turtle withdrawing into its shell for safety, etc.).
3. Responses help ensure survival of the organism and allow the organism to carry out
its biological activities.
4. The collective responses of an organism constitute the behavior of the organism.
10
D. Living Things Reproduce and Develop
1. Reproduction is the ability of every type of organism to give rise to another
organism like itself.
2. Bacteria, protozoans, and other unicellular organisms simply split in two (binary
fission).
3. Multicellular organisms often unite sperm and egg, each from a different individual,
resulting in an immature individual which develops into the adult.
4. The instructions for an organism’s organization and development are encoded in
genes.
5. Genes are comprised of long molecules of DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid); DNA is the
genetic code in all living things.
E. Living Things Have Adaptations
1. Adaptations are modifications that make organisms suited to their way of life.
1.2 Evolution, the Unifying Concept of Biology
A. Organizing Diversity
1. Taxonomy is the discipline of identifying and grouping organisms according to
certain rules.
2. Taxonomic classification changes as more is learned about living things, including
the evolutionary relationships between species.
3. From smaller (least inclusive) categories to larger (more inclusive), the sequence of
classification categories is: species, genus, family, order, class, phylum, kingdom,
and domain.
4. The species within one genus share many specific characteristics and are the most
closely related.
5. Species in the same kingdom share only general characteristics with one another.
B. Domains and Kingdoms
1. Biochemical evidence suggests that there are three domains: Bacteria, Archaea, and
Eukarya.
2. The domains Bacteria and Archaea contain unicellular prokaryotes; organisms in the
domain Eukarya have a membrane-bound nucleus.
3. The prokaryotes are structurally simple but are metabolically complex.
4. Archaea can live in water devoid of oxygen, and are able to survive harsh
environmental conditions (temperatures, salinity, pH).
5. Bacteria are variously adapted to living almost anywhere (water, soil, atmosphere,
in/on the human body, etc.).
7. The domains Archaea and Bacteria are not yet categorized into kingdoms.
8. Eukarya contains four kingdoms: Protista, Fungi, Plantae, and Animalia.
9. Protists (kingdom Protista) range from unicellular forms to multicellular ones.
10. Plants (kingdom Plantae) are multicellular photosynthetic organisms
11. Fungi (kingdom Fungi) are the molds and mushrooms.
12. Animals (kingdom Animalia) are multicellular organisms that ingest and process their
food.
C. Scientific Name
11
1. A binomial name is a two-part scientific name: the genus (first word, capitalized)
and the specific epithet of a species (second word, not capitalized).
2. Binomial names are based on Latin and are used universally by biologists.
3. Either the genus name or the specific epithet name may be abbreviated.
D. Evolution is Common Decent with Modification
1. Natural selection is the process by which species become modified over time.
2. In natural selection, members of a species may inherit a genetic change that makes
them better suited to a particular environment.
3. These members would be more likely to produce higher numbers of surviving
offspring.
1.3 How the Biosphere is Organized
A. Levels of Complexity
1. The biosphere is the zone of air, land, and water where organisms exist.
2. A population consists of all members of one species in a particular area.
3. A community consists of all of the local interacting populations.
4. An ecosystem includes all aspects of a living community and the physical
environment (soil, atmosphere, etc.).
5. Interactions between various food chains make up a food web.
6. Ecosystems are characterized by chemical cycling and energy flow.
7. Ecosystems stay in existence because of a constant input of solar energy and the
ability of photosynthetic organisms to absorb it.
B. The Human Population
1. The human population modifies existing ecosystems which can upset their natural
nutrient cycles, causing harm to human populations and disrupting the ecosystem’s
natural energy flow.
C. Biodiversity
1. Two biologically diverse ecosystems, rain forests and coral reefs, are severely
threatened by the human population.
2. Destruction of healthy ecosystems has unintended effects including: loss of food,
medicine, raw materials, extinction of organisms.
3. Biodiversity is the total number of species, their variable genes, and their
ecosystems.
4. Extinction is the death of a species or larger group; perhaps 400 species become
extinct every day.
5. The continued existence of the human species is dependant on the preservation of
ecosystems and the biosphere.
1.4 The Process of Science
A. Scientific Method
1. Biology is the scientific study of life, and it consists of many disciplines.
2. The scientific process differs from other ways of learning in that science follows the
scientific method, which is characterized by observation, development of a
hypothesis, experimentation and data collection, and forming a conclusion.
12
B. Observation
1. Scientists believe nature is orderly and measurable, and that natural laws (e.g.,
gravity) do not change with time.
2. Natural events, called, phenomena can therefore be understood from observations.
3. Scientists also use the knowledge and experiences of other scientists to expand their
understanding of phenomena.
4. Chance alone can sometimes help a scientist get an idea (e.g., Alexander Fleming’s
discovery of penicillin).
C. Hypothesis
1. Inductive reasoning allows a person to combine isolated facts into a cohesive whole.
2. A scientist uses inductive reasoning to develop a possible explanation (a hypothesis)
for a natural event; the scientist presents the hypothesis as an actual statement.
3. Scientists only consider hypotheses that can be tested (i.e., moral and religious beliefs
may not be testable by the scientific method).
D. Experiments/Further Observations
1. Testing a hypothesis involves either conducting an experiment or making further
observations.
2. Deductive reasoning involves “if, then” logic to make a prediction that the
hypothesis can be supported by experimentation.
3. An experimental design is proposed to test the hypothesis in a meaningful way.
4. An experiment should include a control group which goes through all the steps of
an experiment but
lacks (or is not exposed to) the factor being tested.
5. Scientists may use a model (a representation of an actual object) in their experiments.
6. Results obtained from use of a model will remain a hypothesis in need of testing if it
is impossible to test the actual phenomenon.
E. Data
1. Data are the results of an experiment, and are observable and objective rather than
subjective.
2. Data are often displayed in a graph or table.
3. Many studies rely on statistical data which, among other things, determines the
probability of error in the experiment.
F. Conclusion
1. Whether the data support or reject the hypothesis is the basis for the conclusion.
2. The conclusion of one experiment can lead to the hypothesis for another experiment.
3. Scientists report their findings in scientific journals so that their methodology and
data are available to other scientists.
4. The experiments and observations must be repeatable or the research is suspect.
G. Scientific Theory
1. The ultimate goal is to understand the natural world in scientific theories, which are
speculative ideas that join supported, related hypotheses, and are supported by a
broad range of observations, experiments, and data.
2. Some basic theories of biology are:
13
a. Cell: all organisms are made of cells.
b. Homeostasis: the internal environment of an organism stays relatively constant.
c. Gene: organisms contain coded information that dictates their form, function, and
behavior.
d. Ecosystem: organisms are members of populations which interact with each other
and the physical environment.
e. Evolution: all living things have a common ancestor.
3. A principle or a law is a theory that is generally accepted by most scientists.
H. Using the Scientific Method
1. A controlled study ensures that the outcome is due to the experimental
(independent) variable, the factor being tested.
2. The result is called the responding (dependent) variable because it is due to the
dependent variable.
3. The Experiment
a. Observation: Nitrogen fertilizer in the short run exchanges yield and increases
food supplies.
b. Hypothesis: pigeon pea/winter wheat rotation will increase winter wheat
production as well as or better than the use of nitrogen fertilizer.
c. Prediction: wheat biomass following the growth of pigeon peas in the soil will
surpass wheat biomass following nitrogen fertilizer treatment.
d. Control group: winter wheat that receives no fertilizer.
e. Test groups: winter wheat treated with different levels of fertilizer; winter wheat
grown in soil into which pigeon pea plants had been tilled.
f. Environmental conditions and watering were identical in control and test groups.
g. Results: all test groups produced more biomass than control group, but high level
of nitrogen fertilizer produced more biomass than pigeon pea test group. Thus,
hypothesis is not supported.
4. Continuing the Experiment
a. To test the hypothesis that pigeon pea residues will build up over time and will
increase winter wheat production compared to nitrogen fertilizer, the study is
continued for another year.
b. The fertilizer-only treatment no longer exceeded biomass production with the use
of pigeon peas; biomass in the pigeon pea-treated test group was highest.
c. Conclusion: at the end of two years, the yield of winter wheat is better in the
pigeon pea-treated test group. Hypothesis supported.
d. Continuation of the study for another year showed that the soil was continuously
improved by the pigeon peas compared to the nitrogen fertilizer test groups.
e. Results were reported in a scientific journal.
I. A Field Study
1. Hypothesis: aggression of the male mountain bluebird varies during the
reproductive cycle.
14
2. Prediction: aggression will change after the nest is built, after the first egg is laid,
and after hatching.
3. To test the hypothesis, a male bluebird model was placed near the nest while the
male was gone and
observations were made upon his return.
4. Control: a model of a male robin placed near certain nests.
5. Results: resident male bluebirds did not bother the control model but were
aggressive toward the
male bluebird model depending on the stage in the
reproductive cycle.
6. Conclusion: hypothesis is supported.
7. Study was reported in scientific journal with evolutionary interpretation.
J.
The Benefits and Limitations of Statistical Studies (Science Focus box)
1.
Benefits of Statistical Studies
a. Benefits of statistical studies include: Basis for supporting null or alternative
hypotheses, gaining information and insights into problems scientists are
trying to solve.
2.
Limitations of Statistical Studies
a. One of the main limitations to statistical studies is that data collected supports
correlations, not causations.
b. There are always additional details that could be identified and quantified.
There is no scientific study that has collected the perfect quantity and quality
of data.
15
Chapter 2
2.1 Chemical Elements
1. Matter is defined as anything that takes up space and has mass.
2. Matter exists in three states: solid, liquid, and gas.
A. Elements
1. All matter (both living and non-living) is composed of 92 naturally-occurring
elements.
2. Elements, by definition, cannot be broken down to simpler substances with different
chemical or physical properties.
3. Six elements (carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, and sulfur—acronym
CHNOPS) make up 95% of the body weight of organisms.
B. Atoms
1. Elements consist of tiny particles called atoms.
2. An atom is the smallest unit of an element that displays the properties of the element.
3. One or two letters (e.g., H, Na) create the atomic symbol of the element
4. Atoms contain specific numbers of protons, neutrons, and electrons.
5. Protons are positively charged particles; neutrons have no charge; electrons are
negatively charged particles located in orbitals outside the nucleus.
6. Protons and neutrons are in the nucleus of an atom; electrons move around the
nucleus.
C. Atomic Mass and Atomic Number
1. The atomic mass of an atom depends on the presence of certain subatomic particles.
2. Atomic mass is the sum of protons and neutrons
3. Protons and neutrons have one atomic mass unit (amu of weight); electrons have zero.
4. All atoms of an element have the same number of protons, called the atomic
number of the element.
D. The Periodic Table
1. The periodic table shows how various characteristics of atoms of elements recur.
2. Groups are the vertical columns in the table, periods are the horizontal rows; atomic
mass increases as you move down a group or across a period.
3. The atomic number is above the atomic symbol and the atomic mass is below the
atomic symbol.
E. Isotopes
1. Isotopes are atoms of the same element that differ in the number of neutrons (and
therefore have different atomic masses). For example, carbon-12 has 6 protons and 6
neutrons, carbon-14 has 6 protons and 8 neutrons.
2. A carbon atom with 8 rather than 6 neutrons is unstable; it releases energy and
subatomic particles and is thus a radioactive isotope.
3. Because the chemical behavior of a radioactive isotope is the same as a stable isotope
of a particular element, low levels of the radioactive isotope (e.g., radioactive iodine
16
or glucose) allow researchers to trace the location and activity of the element in living
tissues; these isotopes are called tracers.
4. High levels of radiation can destroy cells and cause cancer; careful use of radiation
can sterilize products and kill cancer cells.
F. Electrons and Energy
1. Electrons occupy orbitals within various energy levels (or electron shells) near or
distant from the nucleus of the atom. The farther the orbital from the nucleus, the
higher the energy level.
2. An orbital is a volume of space where an electron is most likely to be found; an
orbital can contain no more than 2 electrons.
3. When atoms absorb energy during photosynthesis, electrons are boosted to higher
energy levels. When the electrons return to their original energy level, the released
energy is converted into chemical energy. This chemical energy supports all life on
Earth.
4. The innermost shell of an atom is complete with 2 electrons; all other shells are
complete with 8 electrons. This is called the octet rule.
5. Atoms will give up, accept, or share electrons in order to have 8 electrons in an
electron shell.
2.2 Compounds and Molecules
1. When atoms of two or more different elements bond together, they form a
compound (e.g., H2O).
2. A molecule is the smallest part of a compound that has the properties of the
compound.
3. A formula tells you the number of each kind of atom in a molecule (ex. Glucose,
C6H12O6)
4.
Electrons possess energy, and bonds that exist between atoms in molecules
therefore contain energy.
A. Ionic Bonding
1. An ionic bond forms when electrons are transferred from one atom to another atom.
2. By losing or gaining electrons, atoms fill outer shells, and are more stable (the octet
rule).
3. Example: sodium loses an electron and therefore has a positive charge; chlorine gains
an electron to give it a negative charge. Such charged particles are called ions.
4. Attraction of oppositely charged ions holds the two atoms together in an ionic bond.
5. A salt (e.g., NaCl) is an example of an ionically-bonded compound.
B. Covalent Bonding
1. Covalent bonds result when two atoms share electrons so each atom has an octet of
electrons in the outer shell (or, in the case of hydrogen, 2 electrons).
2. Hydrogen can give up an electron to become a hydrogen ion (H+) or share an electron
with another atom to complete its shell with 2 electrons.
3. The structural formula of a compound indicates a shared pair of electrons by a line
between the two atoms; e.g., single covalent bond (H–H), double covalent bond
17
(O=O), and triple covalent bond (N = N). Each line between the atoms represents a
pair of electrons.
C.
Nonpolar and Polar Covalent Bonds
1. In nonpolar covalent bonds, sharing of electrons is equal, i.e., the electrons are not
attracted to either atom to a greater degree.
2. With polar covalent bonds, the sharing of electrons is unequal.
a. In a water molecule (H2O), sharing of electrons by oxygen and hydrogen is not
equal; the oxygen atom with more protons attracts the electrons closer to it, and
thus dominates the H2O association.
b. Attraction of an atom for electrons in a covalent bond is called the
electronegativity of the atom; an oxygen atom is more electronegative than a
hydrogen atom.
c. Oxygen in a water molecule, more attracted to the electron pair, assumes a partial
negative charge.
2.3. Chemistry of Water
1.
The shape of water and of all organic molecules is necessary to the structural and
functional roles they play in living things.
2. A hydrogen bond is the attraction of a slightly positive hydrogen to a slightly
negative atom in the vicinity.
A. Hydrogen Bonding
1. A hydrogen bond is a weak attractive force between the slightly positive charge of
the hydrogen atom of one molecule and slightly negative charge of another atom
(e.g., oxygen, nitrogen) in another or the same molecule.
2. Many hydrogen bonds taken together are relatively strong.
3. Hydrogen bonds between and within complex biological molecules (e.g., DNA,
proteins) help maintain their proper structure and function.
B. Properties of Water
1. Water has a high heat capacity
a. The temperature of liquid water rises and falls more slowly than that of most other
liquids.
b. A calorie is the amount of heat energy required to raise the temperature of one
gram of water 1º C.
c. Because the hydrogen bonds between water molecules hold more heat, water’s
temperature falls
more slowly than other liquids; this protects organisms
from rapid temperature changes and helps
them maintain homeostatic
temperature.
2. Water has a high heat of evaporation.
a. When water boils, it evaporates, or vaporizes into the environment.
b. Hydrogen bonds between water molecules require a relatively large amount of
heat to break.
18
2.4.
c. This property moderates Earth’s surface temperature; permits living systems to
exist.
d. When animals sweat, evaporation of the sweat removes body heat, thus cooling
the animal.
3. Water is a solvent.
a. Water dissolves a great number of substances (e.g., salts, large polar molecules).
b. A solution contains dissolved substances called solutes.
c. Ionized or polar molecules attracted to water are hydrophilic (“water loving”).
d. Nonionized and nonpolar molecules that cannot attract water are hydrophobic
(“water fearing”).
4. Water molecules are cohesive and adhesive.
a. Cohesion allows water to flow freely without molecules separating.
b. Adhesion is ability to adhere to polar surfaces; water molecules have positive and
negative poles.
c. Water rises up a tree from roots to leaves through small tubes.
1) Adhesion of water to walls of vessels prevents water column from breaking
apart.
2) Cohesion allows evaporation from leaves to pull water column from roots.
d. Water has a high surface tension and is relatively difficult to break through at its
surface.
1) This property permits a rock to be skipped across a pond surface, and supports
insects walking on surface.
5. Unlike most substances, frozen water (ice) is less dense than liquid water.
a. Below 4º C, hydrogen bonding becomes more rigid but more open, causing
expansion.
b. Because ice is less dense, it floats; therefore, bodies of water freeze from the top
down.
a. If ice was heavier than water, ice would sink and bodies of water would freeze
solid.
b. This property allows ice to act as an insulator on bodies of water, thereby
protecting aquatic organisms during the winter.
Acids and Bases
1. When water ionizes or dissociates, it releases a small (1 x 107 moles/liter) but equal
number of hydrogen (H+) ions and hydroxide (OH-) ions; H – O –H → H+ + OH-.
2. Acid molecules dissociate in water, releasing hydrogen (H+) ions: HCl → H+ + Cl-.
3. Bases are molecules that take up hydrogen ions or release hydroxide ions. NaOH →
Na+ + OH-.
4. The pH scale indicates acidity and basicity (alkalinity) of a solution.
a. pH is the measurement of free hydrogen ions, expressed as a negative logarithm of
the H+ concentration (-log [H+]).
b. pH values range from 0 (1 x 100 moles/liter; most acidic) to 14 (1 x 10-14
moles/liter; most basic).
19
1) One mole of water has 1 x 10-7 moles/liter of hydrogen ions; therefore, has
neutral pH of 7.
2) An acid is a substance with pH less than 7; a base is a substance with pH
greater than 7.
3) Because it is a logarithmic scale, each lower unit has 10 times the amount of
hydrogen ions as next higher pH unit; as move up pH scale, each unit has 10
times the basicity of previous unit.
5. Buffers keep pH steady and within normal limits in living organisms..
a. Buffers stabilize pH of a solution by taking up excess hydrogen (H+) or hydroxide
(OH-) ions.
b. Carbonic acid helps keep blood pH within normal limits: H2CO3 → H+ +
HCO3-.
A. The Harm Done by Acid Deposition (Ecology Focus box)
1.
Acid deposition is rain or snow with pH < 5.0, and dry acidic particles that settle
on the Earth from the atmosphere.
2.
The burning of fossil fuels increases the amount of acid deposition that falls from
the atmosphere to the Earth.
3.
Impact of Lakes
a. Aluminum is leached from the soil converts mercury deposits to methyl
mercury, which is toxic and accumulates in fish.
4.
Impact on Forests
a. Acid rain damages plant leaves so they cannot conduct photosynthesis.
b. Acid rain stresses plants and they are then more susceptible to disease and
pests.
c. When toxins are leached into the soil, the toxins can kill vital soil fungi that
help roots absorb nutrients.
5.
Impact on Humans and Structures
a. Inhaling dry acidic particles can increase the chance of respiratory illnesses
such as asthma.
20
Chapter 3
3.1 Organic Molecules
Organic molecules contain carbon and hydrogen atoms bonded to other atoms.
1. Four types of organic molecules (biomolecules) exist in organisms: carbohydrates,
lipids, proteins, and nucleic acids.
2. Organic molecules are a diverse group; even a simple bacterial cell contains some
5,000 organic molecules.
A. The Carbon Atom
1. The chemistry of the carbon atom allows it to form covalent bonds with as many as
four other elements (generally with the CHNOPS elements).
2. Hydrocarbons are chains of carbon atoms bonded exclusively to hydrogen atoms;
hydrocarbons can be branched and they can form ringed (cyclic) compounds.
3. Carbon atoms can form double or triple bonds with certain atoms (carbon, nitrogen).
B. The Carbon Skeleton and Functional Groups
1. The carbon chain of an organic molecule is called its skeleton or backbone.
2. Functional groups are clusters of specific atoms bonded to the carbon skeleton with
characteristic structure and functions.
a. As an example, the addition of an –OH (hydroxyl group) to a carbon skeleton
turns the molecule into an alcohol.
b. Ethyl alcohol (ethanol) is hydrophilic (dissolves in water) because the hydroxyl
group is polar.
c. Nonpolar organic molecules are hydrophobic (cannot dissolve in water) unless
they contain a polar functional group (ex. ethane), while hydrophilic compounds
(such as ethanol) can dissolve in water because the –OH functional group is polar.
d. Depending on its functional groups, an organic molecule may be both acidic and
hydrophilic. An example is a hydrocarbon that contains a carboxyl group;
carboxyl groups ionize in solution by releasing hydrogen ions, becoming both
polar and acidic.
e. Because cells are 70–90% water, the degree to which an organic molecule
interacts with water affects its function.
3. Isomers are molecules with identical molecular formulas but different arrangements
of their atoms (e.g., glyceraldehyde and dihydroxyacetone).
C. The Biomolecules of Cells
1. Carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, and nucleic acids are called biomolecules because
certain foods are known to be rich in them.
2. Cellular enzymes carry out dehydration reactions to synthesize biomolecules. In a
dehydration reaction, a water molecule is removed and a covalent bond is made
between two atoms of the monomers.
3. Hydrolysis (“water breaking”) reactions break down polymers in reverse of
dehydration; a hydroxyl
(— OH) group from water attaches to one monomer and
hydrogen (— H) attaches to the other.
21
4. Enzymes are molecules that speed up chemical reactions by bringing reactants
together; an enzyme may even participate in the reaction but is not changed by the
reaction.
5. The largest biomolecules are called polymers, constructed by linking many of the
same type of small subunits, called monomers. Examples: amino acids (monomers)
are linked to form a protein (polymer); many nucleotides (monomers) are linked to
form a nucleic acid (polymer).
a. In a dehydration reaction, a hydroxyl (— OH) group is removed from one
monomer and a hydrogen (— H) is removed from the other.
b. This produces water, and, because the water is leaving the monomers, it is a
dehydration reaction.
3.2 Carbohydrates
A. Monosaccharides: Ready Energy
1. Monosaccharides are simple sugars with a backbone of 3 to 7 carbon atoms.
a. Most monosaccharides of organisms have 6 carbons (hexose).
b. Glucose and fructose are hexoses, but are isomers of one another; each has the
formula (C6H12O6) but they differ in arrangement of the atoms.
c. Glucose is found in the blood of animals; it is the source of biochemical energy
(ATP) in nearly all organisms.
2. Ribose and deoxyribose are five-carbon sugars (pentoses); they contribute to the
backbones of RNA and DNA, respectively.
B. Disaccharides: Varied Uses
1. Disaccharides contain two monosaccharides joined by a dehydration reaction.
2. Maltose is composed of two glucose molecules; it forms in the digestive tract of
humans during starch
digestion.
3. Sucrose (table sugar) is composed of glucose and fructose; it is used to sweeten food
for human
consumption.
4. Lactose is composed of galactose and glucose and is found in milk.
C. Polysaccharides: Energy Storage Molecules
1. Polysaccharides are polymers of monosaccharides. They are not soluble in water
and do not pass through the plasma membrane of the cell.
2. Starch, found in many plants, is a straight chain of glucose molecules with relatively
few side branches. Amylose and amylopectin are the two forms of starch found in
plants.
3. Glycogen is a highly branched polymer of glucose with many side branches. It is the
storage form of glucose in animals.
D. Polysaccharides: Structural Molecules
1. Cellulose is a polymer of glucose which forms microfibrils, the primary constituent
of plant cell walls.
a. Cotton is nearly pure cellulose.
b. Cellulose is indigestible by humans due to the unique bond between glucose
molecules.
c. Grazing animals can digest cellulose due to special stomachs and bacteria.
d. Cellulose is the most abundant organic molecule on Earth.
2. Chitin is a polymer of glucose with an amino group attached to each glucose.
22
a. Chitin is the primary constituent of the exoskeleton of crabs and related animals
(lobsters, insects, etc.).
b. Chitin is not digestible by humans.
3. Peptidoglycan is a polymer of glucose derivatives and is found in bacteria.
3.3 Lipids
Lipids are varied in structure.
1. Lipids are hydrocarbons that are insoluble in water because they lack polar groups.
2. Fat provides insulation and energy storage in animals.
3. Phospholipids form plasma membranes and steroids are important cell messengers.
4. Waxes have protective functions in many organisms.
A. Triglycerides: Long-Term Energy Storage
1. Fats and oils contain two molecular units: glycerol and fatty acids.
2. A fatty acid is a long hydrocarbon chain with a carboxyl (acid) group at one end.
a. Most fatty acids in cells contain 16 to 18 carbon atoms per molecule.
b. Saturated fatty acids have no double bonds between their carbon atoms.
c. Unsaturated fatty acids have double bonds in the carbon chain where there are
less than two hydrogens per carbon atom.
3. Glycerol is a water-soluble compound with three hydroxyl groups.
4. Triglycerides are glycerol joined to three fatty acids by dehydration reactions.
5. Fats contain saturated fatty acids and are solid at room temperature (e.g. butter).
6. Oils contain unsaturated fatty acids and are liquid at room temperature.
7. Animals use fat rather than glycogen for long-term energy storage; fat stores more
energy.
B. Phospholipids: Membrane Components
1. Phospholipids are constructed like neutral fats except that the third fatty acid is
replaced by a polar (hydrophilic) phosphate group; the phosphate group usually bonds
to another organic group (designated by R).
2. The hydrocarbon chains of the fatty acids become the nonpolar (hydrophobic) tails.
3. Phospholipids arrange themselves in a double layer in water, so the polar heads face
toward water molecules and nonpolar tails face toward one other, away from water
molecules.
4. This property enables phospholipids to form an interface or separation between two
solutions (e.g., the interior and exterior of a cell); the plasma membrane is a
phospholipid bilayer.
C. Steroids: Four Fused Rings
1. Steroids have skeletons of four fused carbon rings and vary according to attached
functional groups; these functional groups determine the biological functions of the
various steroid molecules.
2. Cholesterol is a component of an animal cell’s plasma membrane, and is the
precursor of the steroid hormone (aldosterone, testosterone, estrogen, calcitriol, etc.).
3. A diet high in saturated fats and cholesterol can lead to circulatory disorders.
D. Waxes
1. Waxes are long-chain fatty acids bonded to long-chain alcohols.
2. Waxes have a high melting point, are waterproof, and resist degradation.
3. Waxes form a protective covering in plants that retards water loss in leaves and fruits.
23
4. In animals, waxes maintain animal skin and fur, trap dust and dirt, and form the
honeycomb.
3.4 Proteins
Protein Functions
1. Metabolic enzymes are proteins that act as organic catalysts to accelerate chemical
reactions within cells.
2. Support proteins include keratin, which makes up hair and nails, and collagen
fibers, which support many of the body’s structures (e.g., ligaments, tendons, skin).
3. Transport functions include channel and carrier proteins in the plasma membrane,
and hemoglobin that transports oxygen in red blood cells.
4. Defense functions include antibodies that prevent infection.
5. Hormones are regulatory proteins that influence the metabolism of cells. For
example, insulin regulates glucose content of blood and within cells.
6. Motion within cells and by muscle contraction is provided by the proteins myosin
and actin.
A. Peptides
1. A peptide bond is a covalent bond between two amino acids.
2. Atoms of a peptide bond share electrons unevenly (oxygen is more electronegative
than nitrogen).
3. The polarity of the peptide bond permits hydrogen bonding between different amino
acids in a polypeptide.
4. A peptide is two or more amino acids bonded together.
5. Polypeptides are chains of many amino acids joined by peptide bonds.
6. A protein may contain more than one polypeptide chain; it can thus have a very large
number of amino acids.
a. The three-dimensional shape of a protein is critical; an abnormal sequence will
have the wrong shape and will not function normally.
b. Frederick Sanger determined the first protein sequence (of the hormone insulin)
in 1953.
B. Amino Acids: Proteins Monomers
1. Amino acids contain an acidic group (— COOH) and an amino group (—NH2).
2. Amino acids differ according to their particular R group, ranging from single
hydrogen to complicated ring compounds.
3. The R group of amino acid cystine ends with a sulfhydryl (— SH) that serves to
connect one chain of amino acids to another by a disulfide bond (— S— S—).
4. There are 20 different amino acids commonly found in cells.
C. Shape of Proteins
1. Protein shape determines the function of the protein in the organism; proteins can
have up to four levels of structure (but not all proteins have four levels).
2. The primary structure is the protein’s own particular sequence of amino acids.
a. Just as the English alphabet contains 26 letters, 20 amino acids can join to form a
huge variety of “words.”
3. The secondary structure results when a polypeptide coils or folds in a particular
way.
a. The  (alpha) helix was the first pattern discovered.
1) In a peptide bond, oxygen is partially negative, hydrogen is partially positive.
24
2) This allows for hydrogen bonding between the C=O of one amino acid and the
N—H of another.
3) Hydrogen bonding between every fourth amino acid holds the spiral shape of
an  helix.
b. The  (beta) sheet was the second pattern discovered.
1) Pleated  sheet polypeptides turn back upon themselves.
2) Hydrogen bonding occurs between extended lengths.
c. Fibrous proteins (e.g. keratin) are structural proteins with helices and/or pleated
sheets that hydrogen bond to one another.
4. Tertiary structure results when proteins are folded, giving rise to the final threedimensional shape of the protein. This is due to interactions among the R groups of
the constituent amino acids.
a. Globular proteins tend to ball up into rounded shapes.
b. Strong disulfide linkages maintain the tertiary shape; hydrogen, ionic, and
covalent bonds also contribute.
5. Quaternary structure results when two or more polypeptides combine.
a. Hemoglobin is globular protein with a quaternary structure of four polypeptides;
each polypeptide has a primary, secondary, and tertiary structure.
D. Protein Folding Diseases
1. As proteins are synthesized, chaperone proteins help them fold into their correct
shapes; chaperone proteins may also correct misfolding of a new protein and prevent
them from making incorrect shapes.
2. Certain diseases (e.g., the transmissible spongiform encephalopathies, or TSEs) are
likely due to misfolded proteins, called prions.
3.5 Nucleic Acids
1. Nucleic acids are polymers of nucleotides with very specific functions in cells.
2. DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) stores the genetic code for its own replication and for
the amino acid sequences in proteins.
3. RNA (ribonucleic acid) allows for translation of the genetic code of DNA into the
amino acid sequence of proteins; other functions for RNA in the cell exist.
4. Some nucleotides have independent metabolic functions in cells.
a. Coenzymes are molecules which facilitate enzymatic reactions.
b. ATP (adenosine triphosphate) is a nucleotide used to supply energy for
synthetic reactions and other energy-requiring metabolic activities in the cell.
A. Structure of DNA and RNA
1. Nucleotides are a molecular complex of three types of molecules: a phosphate
(phosphoric acid), a pentose sugar, and a nitrogen-containing base.
2. DNA and RNA differ in the following ways:
a. Nucleotides of DNA contain deoxyribose sugar; nucleotides of RNA contain
ribose.
b. In RNA, the base uracil occurs instead of the base thymine. Both RNA and DNA
contain adenine, guanine, and cytosine.
c. DNA is double-stranded with complementary base pairing; RNA is
single-stranded.
1) Complementary base pairing occurs where two strands of DNA are held
together by hydrogen bonds between purine and pyrimidine bases.
25
2) The number of purine bases always equals the number of pyrimidine bases.
3) In DNA, thymine is always paired with adenine; cytosine is always paired
with guanine. Thus, in DNA: A + G = C + T.
d. Two strands of DNA twist to form a double helix; RNA does not form helices.
B. ATP (Adenosine Triphosphate)
1. ATP (adenosine triphosphate) is a nucleotide in which adenosine is composed of
ribose and adenine.
2. Triphosphate derives its name from three phosphate groups attached together and to
the ribose.
3. ATP is a high-energy molecule because the last two phosphate bonds release energy
when broken.
4. In cells, the terminal phosphate bond is hydrolyzed, leaving ADP (adenosine
diphosphate); energy is released when this occurs.
5. The energy released from ATP breakdown is used in the energy-requiring processes
of the cell, such as synthetic reactions, muscle contraction, and the transmission of
nerve impulses.
26
Chapter 4
4.1 Cellular Level of Organization
1. Detailed study of the cell began in the 1830s; some of the scientists contributing to
the understanding of cell structure and function were Robert Brown, Matthais
Schleiden, Theodor Schwann, and Rudolph Virchow.
2. The cell theory states that all organisms are composed of cells, that cells are the
structural and functional unit of organisms, and that cells come only from preexisting
cells.
A. Cell Size
1. Cells range in size from one millimeter down to one micrometer.
2. Cells need a surface area of plasma membrane large enough to adequately exchange
materials.
3. The surface-area-to-volume ratio requires that cells be small.
a. As cells get larger in volume, surface area relative to volume decreases.
b. Size limits how large the actively metabolizing cells can become.
c. Cells needing greater surface area utilize membrane modifications such as
folding, microvilli, etc.
B. Microscopy Today (Science Focus Box)
1. Compound light microscopes use light rays focused by glass lenses.
2. Transmission electron microscopes (TEM) use electrons passing through specimen
and focused by electromagnetic lenses.
3. Scanning electron microscopes (SEM) use electrons scanned across metal-coated
specimen; secondary electrons given off by metal are collected by a detector.
4. Magnification is a function of wavelength; the shorter wavelengths of electrons
allow greater magnification than the longer wavelengths of light rays.
5. Resolution is the minimum distance between two objects at which they can still be
seen as separate objects.
6. Contrast is the difference in the shading of an object compared to its background.
7. Phase contrast and differential interface contrast microscopy uses fluorescent
antibodies to reveal proteins in cells.
8. Confocal microscopy uses laser beam to focus on a shallow plane within the cell;
this forms a series of optical sections from which a computer creates a three
dimensional image.
9. Video-enhanced contrast microscopy accentuates the light and dark regions and
may use a computer to contrast regions with false colors.
10. Bright-field, phase contrast, differential interference, and darkfield are different
types of light microscopes.
4.2 Prokaryotic Cells
1. Prokaryotic cells lack a nucleus and are smaller and simpler than eukaryotic cells
(which have a nucleus).
2. Prokaryotic cells are placed in two taxonomic domains: Bacteria and Archaea.
Organisms in these two domains are structurally similar but biochemically different.
A. The Structure of Prokaryotes
1. Prokaryotes are extremely small; average size is 1–1.5 μm wide and 2–6 μm long .
2. Prokaryotes occur in three basic shapes: spherical coccus, rod-shaped bacillus, and
spiral spirillum (if rigid) or spirochete (if flexible).
27
3. Cell Envelope
a. In bacteria, the cell envelope includes the plasma membrane, the cell wall, and
the glycocalyx. The plasma membrane is a lipid bilayer with imbedded and
peripheral proteins; it regulates the movement of substances into and out of the
cell.
b. The plasma membrane can form internal pouches called mesosomes, which
increase the internal surface area of the membrane for enzyme attachment.
c. The cell wall maintains the shape of the cell and is strengthened by
peptidoglycan.
d. The glycocalyx is a layer of polysaccharides on the outside of the cell wall; it is
called a capsule if organized and not easily removed, or a slime layer if it is not
well-organized and is easily removed.
4. Cytoplasm
a. The cytoplasm is a semifluid solution containing water, inorganic and organic
molecules, and enzymes.
b. The nucleoid is a region that contains the single, circular DNA molecule.
c. Plasmids are small accessory (extrachromosomal) rings of DNA; they are not
part of the bacterial genetic material.
d. Ribosomes are particles with two RNA- and protein-containing subunits that
synthesize proteins.
e. Inclusion bodies in the cytoplasm are granules of stored substances.
f. Cyanobacteria (also called blue-green bacteria) are bacteria that
photosynthesize; they lack chloroplasts but have thylakoids containing
chlorophyll and other pigments.
5. Appendages
a. Motile bacteria usually have flagella; the filament, hook, and basal body work to
rotate the flagellum like a propeller to move through fluid medium.
b. Fimbriae are small, bristle like fibers that attach to an appropriate surface.
c. Conjugation pili are tubes used by bacteria to pass DNA from cell to cell.
4.3 Introducing Eukaryotic Cells
A. Origin of the Eukaryotic cell
1. According to the endosymbiotic theory, energy-related organelles, such as
mitochondria and chloroplast, arose when a eukaryotic cell engulfed prokaryotic
cells.
1. Eukaryotic cells are members of the domain Eukarya, which includes the protists,
fungi, plants, and animals.
2. A membrane-bounded nucleus houses DNA; the nucleus may have originated as an
invagination of the plasma membrane.
3. Eukaryotic cells are much larger than prokaryotic cells, and therefore have less
surface area per volume.
B. Structure of Eukaryotic Cells
1. Some eukaryotic cells (e.g., plant cells) have a cell wall containing cellulose;
plasmodesmata are channels in a cell wall that allow cytoplasmic strands to extend
between adjacent cells.
2. Eukaryotic cells are compartmentalized; they contain small structures called
organelles that perform specific functions.
28
3. The nucleus communicates with ribosomes in the cytoplasm.
4. The organelles of the endomembrane system communicate with one another; each
organelle contains
its own set of enzymes and produces its own products, which
move from one organelle to another by
transport vesicles.
5. The energy-related mitochondria (plant and animal cells) and chloroplasts (plant
cells) do not
communicate with other organelles; they contain their own
DNA and are self-sufficient.
6. The cytoskeleton is a lattice of protein fibers that maintains the shape of the cell
and assists in
movement of the organelles.
C. Cell Fractionation and Differential Centrifugation (Science Focus Box)
1. Cell fractionation allows the researcher to isolate and individually study the
organelles of a cell.
2. Differential centrifugation separates the cellular components by size and density.
3. Using these two techniques, researchers can obtain pure preparations of any cell
component.
4.4 The Nucleus and Ribosomes
A. Nucleus
1. The nucleus has a diameter of about 5 μm.
2. Chromatin is a threadlike material that coils into chromosomes just before cell
division occurs; contains DNA, protein, and some RNA.
3. Nucleoplasm is the semifluid medium of the nucleus.
4. Chromosomes are rodlike structures formed during cell division; composed of coiled
or folded chromatin.
5. The nucleolus is a dark region of chromatin inside the nucleus; it is the site where
ribosomal RNA (rRNA) joins with proteins to form ribosomes.
6. The nucleus is separated from the cytoplasm by the nuclear envelope, which
contains nuclear pores to permit passage of substances (e.g., ribosomal subunits,
messenger RNA, proteins, etc.) in and out of the nucleus
B. Ribosomes
1. Ribosomes are the site of protein synthesis in the cell. In eukaryotic cells, ribosomes
may occur freely or in groups called polyribosomes.
2. Ribosomes receive messenger RNA (mRNA) from the nucleus, which instructs the
ribosomes of the correct sequence of amino acids in a protein to be synthesized.
4.5 The Endomembrane System
A. The endomembrane system is a series of intracellular membranes that compartmentalize the
cell.
1. It consists of the nuclear envelope, the membranes of the endoplasmic reticulum, the
Golgi apparatus, and several types of vesicles.
B. Endoplasmic Reticulum
1. The endoplasmic reticulum (ER) is a system of membrane channels and saccules
(flattened vesicles) continuous with the outer membrane of the nuclear envelope.
2. Rough ER is studded with ribosomes on the cytoplasm side; it is the site where
proteins are synthesized and enter the ER interior for processing and modification.
3. Smooth ER is continuous with rough ER but lacks ribosomes; it is a site of various
synthetic processes, detoxification, and storage; smooth ER forms transport vesicles.
C. The Golgi Apparatus
29
1. It is named for Camillo Golgi, who discovered it in 1898.
2. The Golgi apparatus consists of a stack of slightly curved saccules.
3. The Golgi apparatus receives protein-filled vesicles that bud from the rough ER and
lipid-filled vesicles from the smooth ER.
4. Enzymes within the Golgi apparatus modify the carbohydrates that were placed on
proteins in the ER; proteins and lipids are sorted and packaged.
5. Vesicles formed from the membrane of the outer face of the Golgi apparatus move to
different locations in a cell; at the plasma membrane they discharge their contents as
secretions, a process called exocytosis because substances exit the cell.
D. Lysosomes
1. Lysosomes are membrane-bounded vesicles produced by the Golgi apparatus.
2. Lysosomes contain powerful digestive enzymes and are highly acidic.
3. Macromolecules enter a cell by vesicle formation; lysosomes fuse with vesicles and
digest the contents of the vesicle.
4. White blood cells that engulf bacteria use lysosomes to digest the bacteria.
5. Autodigestion occurs when lysosomes digest parts of cells.
6. Lysosomes participate in apoptosis, or programmed cell death, a normal part of
development.
E. Endomembrane System Summary
1. Proteins produced in rough ER and lipids from smooth ER are carried in vesicles to
the Golgi apparatus.
2. The Golgi apparatus modifies these products and then sorts and packages them into
vesicles that go to various cell destinations.
3. Secretory vesicles carry products to the membrane where exocytosis produces
secretions.
4. Lysosomes fuse with incoming vesicles and digest macromolecules.
4.6 Other Vesicles and Vacuoles
A. Peroxisomes are membrane-bounded vesicles that contain specific enzymes.
1. Peroxisome action results in production of hydrogen peroxide.
2. Hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) is broken down to water and oxygen by catalase.
3. Peroxisomes in the liver produce bile salts from cholesterol and also break down fats.
4. Peroxisomes also occur in germinating seeds where they convert oils into sugars used
as nutrients by the growing plant.
B. Vacuoles
1. Vacuoles are membranous sacs and are larger than vesicles.
2. Contractile vacuoles in some protists rid the cell of excess water.
3. Digestive vacuoles digest nutrients.
4. Vacuoles generally store substances, e.g., plant vacuoles contain water, sugars,
salts, pigments, and toxic molecules
5. The central vacuole of a plant cell maintains turgor pressure within the cell,
stores nutrients and wastes, and degrades organelles as the cell ages.
4.7 The Energy-Related Organelles
A. Chloroplasts are membranous organelles (a type of plastid) that serve as the site of
photosynthesis.
1. Photosynthesis is represented by the equation:
solar energy + carbon dioxide + water → carbohydrate + oxygen
30
2. Only plants, algae, and certain bacteria are capable of conducting
photosynthesis.
3. The chloroplast is bound by a double membrane organized into flattened disc-like
sacs called thylakoids formed from a third membrane; a stack of thylakoids is a
granum.
4. Chlorophyll and other pigments capture solar energy, and the enzymes which
synthesize carbohydrates are located in the chloroplasts.
5. Chloroplasts have both their own DNA and ribosomes, supporting the
endosymbiotic hypothesis.
6. Other types of plastids, which differ in color, form, and function from
chloroplasts, include chromoplasts and leucoplasts.
B. Mitochondria are surrounded by a double membrane: the inner membrane surrounds the
matrix and is convoluted to form cristae.
1. Mitochondria are smaller than chloroplasts, and often vary their shape.
2. Mitochondria also can be fixed in one location or form long, moving chains.
3. Mitochondria contain ribosomes and their own DNA.
4. The matrix of the mitochondria is concentrated with enzymes that break down
carbohydrates.
5. ATP production occurs on the cristae.
6. More than forty different diseases involving mitochondria have been described.
4.8 The Cytoskeleton
A. The cytoskeleton is a network of connected filaments and tubules; it extends from the
nucleus to the plasma membrane in eukaryotes.
1. Electron microscopy reveals an organized cytosol.
2. Immunofluorescence microscopy identifies protein fibers.
3. Elements of the cytoskeleton include: actin filaments, intermediate filaments, and
microtubules.
B. Actin Filaments
1. Actin filaments are long, thin fibers (about 7 nm in diameter) that occur in
bundles or meshlike networks.
2. The actin filament consists of two chains of globular actin monomers twisted to
form a helix.
3. Actin filaments play a structural role, forming a dense complex web just under the
plasma membrane; this accounts for the formation of pseudopods in amoeboid
movement.
4. Actin filaments in microvilli of intestinal cells likely shorten or extend cell into
intestine.
5. In plant cells, they form tracks along which chloroplasts circulate.
31
6. Actin filaments move by interacting with myosin; myosin combines with and
splits ATP, binding to actin and changing configuration to pull actin filament
forward.
7. Similar action accounts for pinching off cells during cell division.
C. Intermediate Filaments
1. Intermediate filaments are 8–11 nm in diameter, between actin filaments and
microtubules in size.
2. They are rope-like assemblies of fibrous polypeptides.
3. Some support the nuclear envelope; others support plasma membrane and form
cell-to-cell junctions.
D. Microtubules
1. Microtubules are small hollow cylinders (25 nm in diameter and from 0.2–25 μm
in length).
2. Microtubules are composed of a globular protein tubulin that occurs as α tubulin
and β tubulin.
3. Assembly brings these two together as dimers and the dimers arrange themselves
in rows.
4. Regulation of microtubule assembly is under control of a microtubule organizing
center (MTOC): the main MTOC is called a centrosome.
5. Microtubules radiate from the MTOC, helping maintain the shape of cells and
acting as tracks along which organelles move.
6. Similar to actin-myosin, the motor molecules kinesin and dynein are associated
with microtubules.
7. Different kinds of kinesin proteins specialize to move one kind of vesicle or cell
organelle.
8. Cytoplasmic dynein is similar to the molecule dynein found in flagella.
E. Centrioles
1. Centrioles are short cylinders with a ring pattern (9 + 0) of microtubule triplets.
2. In animal cells and most protists, centrosome contains two centrioles lying at right
angles to each other.
3. Plant and fungal cells have the equivalent of a centrosome, but they do not
contain centrioles.
4. Centrioles serve as basal bodies for cilia and flagella.
F. Cilia and Flagella
1. Cilia are short, usually numerous hairlike projections that can move in an
undulating fashion (e.g., Paramecium; lining of human upper respiratory tract).
2. Flagella are longer, usually fewer, projections that move in whip-like fashion
(e.g., sperm cells).
3. Both have similar construction, but differ from prokaryotic flagella.
a. Membrane-bounded cylinders enclose a matrix containing a cylinder of nine
pairs of microtubules encircling two single microtubules (9 + 2 pattern of
microtubules).
b. Cilia and flagella move when the microtubules slide past one another.
c. Cilia and flagella have a basal body at base with the same arrangement of
microtubule triples as centrioles.
d. Cilia and flagella grow by the addition of tubulin dimers to their tips.
32
Chapter 5
5.1 Plasma Membrane Structure and Function
1. The plasma membrane is a phospholipid bilayer with embedded proteins.
2. Phospholipids have both hydrophilic and hydrophobic regions; nonpolar tails
(hydrophobic) are
directed inward, polar heads (hydrophilic) are
directed outward to face both extracellular and intracellular fluid.
3. The proteins form a mosaic pattern on the membrane.
4. Cholesterol is a lipid found in animal plasma membranes; it stiffens and strengthens
the membrane.
5. The plasma membrane is asymmetrical; glycolipids and proteins occur only on
outside and cytoskeletal filaments attach to peripheral proteins only on the inside
surface.
6. Integral proteins are usually found in the membrane and are held in place by the
cytoskeleton and the extracellular matrix (ECM).
7. ECM are only found in animals and their functions include supporting the plasma
membrane and communicating between cells.
A. Fluid-Mosaic Model
1. The fluid-mosaic model describes the plasma membrane.
2. The fluid component refers to the phospholipids bilayer of the plasma membrane.
3. Fluidity of the plasma membrane allows cells to be pliable.
4. Fluidity is affected by cholesterol molecules in the plasma membrane.
5. The mosaic component refers to the protein content in the plasma membrane.
6. Protins bond to the ECM and/or cytoskeleton to prevent movement in the fluid
phospholipid bilayer
B. Carbohydrate Chains
1. Glycolipids have a structure similar to phospholipids except the hydrophilic head is
a variety of sugar; they are protective and assist in various functions.
2.
Glycoproteins have an attached carbohydrate chain of sugar that projects
externally.
3. In animal cells, the glycocalyx is a “sugar coat” of carbohydrate chains; it has several
functions.
4. Cells are unique in that they have highly varied carbohydrate chains (a “fingerprint”).
5. The immune system recognizes foreign tissues that have inappropriate carbohydrate
chains.
6. Carbohydrate chains are the basis for A, B, and O blood groups in humans.
C. The Functions of the Proteins
1. Channel proteins allow a particular molecule to cross membrane freely (e.g., Cl
channels).
2. Carrier proteins selectively interact with a specific molecule so it can cross the
plasma membrane (e.g., Na+-K+ pump).
3. Cell recognition proteins are glycoproteins that allow the body’s immune system to
distinguish between foreign invaders and body cells.
4. Receptor proteins are shaped so a specific molecule (e.g., hormone) can bind to it.
5. Enzymatic proteins carry out specific metabolic reactions.
6. Junction proteins join animal cells so tissues can function.
D. How Do Cells Talk to One Another? (Science Focus box)
33
1. Cell Signaling
a. molecules, or chemical messengers, “talk” to other cells and may change cells,
tissues, or organs.
b. These cells do not respond to all molecules. They require binding to a receptor
protein.
c. Once the signaling molecule is bound to a receptor, the signal follows through a
transduction pathway.
d. The cell’s response to the transduction pathway can change the shape or
movement of the cell, alter the metabolism or function of the cell, or alter the
gene expression and amount of a cell protein.
E. Permeability of the Plasma Membrane
1. The plasma membrane is differentially (selectively) permeable; only certain
molecules can pass through.
a. Small non-charged lipid molecules (alcohol, oxygen) pass through the membrane
freely.
b. Small polar molecules (carbon dioxide, water) move “down” a concentration
gradient, i.e., from high to low concentration.
c. Ions and charged molecules cannot readily pass through the hydrophobic
component of the bilayer and usually combine with carrier proteins.
2. Both passive and active mechanisms move molecules across membrane.
a. Passive transport moves molecules across membrane without expenditure of
energy; includes diffusion and facilitated transport.
b. Active transport requires a carrier protein and uses energy (ATP) to move
molecules across a plasma membrane; includes active transport, exocytosis,
endocytosis, and pinocytosis.
3. The presence of a membrane channel protein called an aquaporin allows water to
cross membranes quickly.
4. Substances enter or exit a cell through bulk transport.
5.2 Passive Transport Across a Membrane
1. Diffusion is the movement of molecules from higher to lower concentration (i.e.,
“down” the concentration gradient).
a. A solution contains a solute, usually a solid, and a solvent, usually a liquid.
b. In the case of a dye diffusing in water, the dye is a solute and water is the solvent.
c. Once a solute is evenly distributed, random movement continues but with no net
change.
d. Membrane chemical and physical properties allow only a few types of molecules
to cross by diffusion.
e. Gases readily diffuse through the lipid bilayer; e.g., the movement of oxygen
from air sacs (alveoli) to the blood in lung capillaries depends on the
concentration of oxygen in alveoli.
f. Temperature, pressure, electrical currents, and molecular size influence the rate of
diffusion.
A. Osmosis
1. Osmosis is the diffusion of water across a differentially (selectively) permeable
membrane.
a. Osmosis is illustrated by the thistle tube example:
34
1) A differentially permeable membrane separates two solutions.
2) The beaker has more water (lower percentage of solute) and the thistle tube
has less water (higher percentage of solute).
3) The membrane does not permit passage of the solute; water enters but the
solute does not exit.
4) The membrane permits passage of water with a net movement of water from
the beaker to the inside of the thistle tube.
b. Osmotic pressure is the pressure that develops in such a system due to osmosis.
c. Osmotic pressure results in water being absorbed by the kidneys and water being
taken up from tissue fluid.
2. Tonicity is strength of a solution with respect to osmotic pressure.
a. Isotonic solutions occur where the relative solute concentrations of two solutions
are equal; a 0.9% salt solution is used in injections because it is isotonic to red
blood cells (RBCs).
b. A hypotonic solution has a solute concentration that is less than another solution;
when a cell is placed in a hypotonic solution, water enters the cell and it may
undergo cytolysis (“cell bursting”).
c. Swelling of a plant cell in a hypotonic solution creates turgor pressure; this is
how plants maintain an erect position.
d. A hypertonic solution has a solute concentration that is higher than another
solution; when a cell is placed in a hypertonic solution, it shrivels (a condition
called crenation).
e. Plasmolysis is shrinking of the cytoplasm due to osmosis in a hypertonic solution;
as the central vacuole loses water, the plasma membrane pulls away from the cell
wall.
3. Facilitated Transport
a. Facilitated transport is the transport of a specific solute “down” or “with” its
concentration gradient (from high to low), facilitated by a carrier protein; glucose and
amino acids move across the membrane in this way.
5.3 Active Transport Across a Membrane
A. Active transport is transport of a specific solute across plasma membranes “up” or
“against” (from low to high) its concentration gradient through use of cellular energy
(ATP).
1. Iodine is concentrated in cells of thyroid gland, glucose is completely absorbed
into lining of digestive tract, and sodium is mostly reabsorbed by kidney tubule
lining.
2. Active transport requires both carrier proteins and ATP; therefore cells must have
high number of mitochondria near membranes where active transport occurs.
3. Proteins involved in active transport are often called “pumps”; the
sodium-potassium pump is an important carrier system in nerve and muscle cells.
4. Salt (NaCl) crosses a plasma membrane because sodium ions are pumped across,
and the chloride ion is attracted to the sodium ion and simply diffuses across
specific channels in the membrane.
B. Bulk Transport
35
1. In exocytosis, a vesicle formed by the Golgi apparatus fuses with the plasma
membrane as secretion occurs; insulin leaves insulin-secreting cells by this
method.
2. During endocytosis, cells take in substances by vesicle formation as plasma
membrane pinches off by either phagocytosis, pinocytosis, or receptor-mediated
endocytosis.
3. In phagocytosis, cells engulf large particles (e.g., bacteria), forming an endocytic
vesicle.
a. Phagocytosis is commonly performed by ameboid-type cells (e.g., amoebas
and macrophages).
b. When the endocytic vesicle fuses with a lysosome, digestion of the
internalized substance occurs.
4. Pinocytosis occurs when vesicles form around a liquid or very small particles;
this is only visible with electron microscopy.
5. Receptor-mediated endocytosis, a form of pinocytosis, occurs when specific
macromolecules bind to plasma membrane receptors.
a. The receptor proteins are shaped to fit with specific substances (vitamin,
hormone, lipoprotein molecule, etc.), and are found at one location in the
plasma membrane.
b. This location is a coated pit with a layer of fibrous protein on the cytoplasmic
side; when the vesicle is uncoated, it may fuse with a lysosome.
c. Pits are associated with exchange of substances between cells (e.g., maternal
and fetal blood).
d. This system is selective and more efficient than pinocytosis; it is important in
moving substances from maternal to fetal blood.
e. Cholesterol (transported in a molecule called a low-density lipoprotein, LDL)
enters a cell from the bloodstream via receptors in coated pits; in familial
hypocholesterolemia, the LDL receptor cannot bind to the coated pit and the
excess cholesterol accumulates in the circulatory system.
5.4 Modification of Cell Surfaces
A. Cell Surfaces in Animals
1. The extracellular matrix is a meshwork of polysaccharides and proteins
produced by animal cells.
a.
Collagen gives the matrix strength and elastin gives it resilience.
b.
Fibronectins and laminins bind to membrane receptors and permit
communication between matrix and cytoplasm; these proteins also form
“highways” that direct the migration of cells during development.
c.
Proteoglycans are glycoproteins that provide a packing gel that joins the
various proteins in matrix and most likely regulate signaling proteins that bind
to receptors in the plasma protein.
2. Junctions Between Cells are points of contact between cells that allow them to
behave in a coordinated manner.
a. Anchoring junctions mechanically attach adjacent cells.
36
b. In adhesion junctions, internal cytoplasmic plaques, firmly attached to
cytoskeleton within each cell are joined by intercellular filaments; they hold cells
together where tissues stretch (e.g., in heart, stomach, bladder).
c. In desmosomes, a single point of attachment between adjacent cells connects the
cytoskeletons of adjacent cells.
d. In tight junctions, plasma membrane proteins attach in zipper-like fastenings;
they hold cells together so tightly that the tissues are barriers (e.g., epithelial
lining of stomach, kidney tubules, blood-brain barrier).
e. A gap junction allows cells to communicate; formed when two identical plasma
membrane channels join.
1) They provide strength to the cells involved and allow the movement of small
molecules and ions from the cytoplasm of one cell to the cytoplasm of the
other cell.
2) Gap junctions permit flow of ions for heart muscle and smooth muscle cells to
contract.
B. Plant Cell Walls
1. Plant cells are surrounded by a porous cell wall; it varies in thickness, depending on
the function of the cell.
2. Plant cells have a primary cell wall composed of cellulose polymers united into
threadlike microfibrils that form fibrils.
3. Cellulose fibrils form a framework whose spaces are filled by non-cellulose
molecules.
4. Pectins allow the cell wall to stretch and are abundant in the middle lamella that
holds cells together.
5. Non-cellulose polysaccharides harden the wall of mature cells.
6. Lignin adds strength and is a common ingredient of secondary cell walls in woody
plants.
7. Plasmodesmata are narrow membrane-lined channels that pass through cell walls of
neighboring cells and connect their cytoplasms, allowing direct exchange of
molecules and ions between neighboring plant cells.
37
Chapter 6
6.1 Cells and the Flow of Energy
A. Forms of Energy
1. Energy is capacity to do work; cells continually use energy to develop, grow, repair,
reproduce, etc.
2. Kinetic energy is energy of motion; all moving objects have kinetic energy.
3. Potential energy is stored energy.
4. Food is chemical energy; it contains potential energy.
5. Chemical energy can be converted into mechanical energy, e.g., muscle movement.
B. Two Laws of Thermodynamics
1. First law of thermodynamics (also called the law of conservation of energy)
a. Energy cannot be created or destroyed, but it can be changed from one form to
another.
b. In an ecosystem, solar energy is converted to chemical energy by the process of
photosynthesis; some of the chemical energy in the plant is converted to chemical
energy in an animal, which in turn can become mechanical energy or heat loss.
c. Neither the plant nor the animal create energy, they convert it from one form to
another.
d. Likewise, energy is not destroyed; some becomes heat that dissipates into the
environment.
2. Second law of thermodynamics
a. Energy cannot be changed from one form into another without a loss of usable
energy.
b. Heat is a form of energy that dissipates into the environment; heat can never be
converted back to another form of energy.
C. Cells and Entropy
1. Every energy transformation makes the universe less organized and more disordered;
entropy is the term used to indicate the relative amount of disorganization.
2. When ions distribute randomly across a membrane, entropy has increased.
3. Organized/usable forms of energy (as in the glucose molecule) have relatively low
entropy; unorganized/less stable forms have relatively high entropy.
4. Energy conversions result in heat; therefore, the entropy of the universe is always
increasing.
5. Living things depend on a constant supply of energy from the sun, because the
ultimate fate of all solar energy in the biosphere is to become randomized in the
universe as heat; the living cell is a temporary repository of order purchased at the
cost of a constant flow of energy.
6.2 Metabolic Reactions and Energy Transformations
1. Metabolism is the sum of all the biochemical reactions in a cell.
2. In the reaction A + B = C + D, A and B are reactants and C and D are products.
3. Free energy ( G) is the amount of energy that is free to do work after a chemical
reaction.
4.
G
G means that products have less
free energy than reactants; the reaction occurs spontaneously.
5. Exergonic reactions have a negative G and energy is released.
38
6. Endergonic reactions have a positive G; products have more energy than reactants;
such reactions can only occur with an input of energy.
A. ATP: Energy for Cells
1. Adenosine triphosphate (ATP) is the energy currency of cells; when cells need
energy, they “spend” ATP.
2. ATP is an energy carrier for many different types of reactions.
3. When ATP is converted into ADP + P, the energy released is sufficient for biological
reactions with little wasted.
4. ATP breakdown is coupled to endergonic reactions in a way that minimizes energy
loss.
5. ATP is a nucleotide composed of the base adenine and the 5-carbon sugar ribose and
three phosphate groups.
6. When one phosphate group is removed, about 7.3 kcal of energy is released per mole.
B. Coupled Reactions
1. Coupled reactions are reactions that occur in the same place, at the same time, and in
a way that an exergonic reaction is used to drive an endergonic reaction.
2. ATP breakdown is often coupled to cellular reactions that require energy.
3. ATP supply is maintained by breakdown of glucose during cellular respiration.
6.3 Metabolic Pathways and Enzymes
1. Enzymes are catalysts that speed chemical reactions without the enzyme being
affected by the reaction.
2. Every enzyme is specific in its action and catalyzes only one reaction or one type of
reaction.
3. Ribozymes are made of RNA rather than proteins and also serve as catalysts.
4. A metabolic pathway is an orderly sequence of linked reactions; each step is
catalyzed by a specific enzyme.
5. Metabolic pathways begin with a particular reactant, end with a particular end
product(s), and may have many intermediate steps.
6. In many instances, one pathway leads to the next; since pathways often have one or
more molecules in common, one pathway can lead to several others.
7. Metabolic energy is captured more easily if it is released in small increments.
8. A reactant is the substance that is converted into a product by the reaction; often
many intermediate steps occur.
A. Energy of Activation
1. Molecules often do not react with each other unless activated in some way.
2. For metabolic reactions to occur in a cell, an enzyme must usually be present.
3. The energy of activation (Ea) is the energy that must be added to cause molecules to
react; without an enzyme (i.e., in a reaction vessel in the laboratory) this energy may
be provided by heat, which causes an increase in the number of molecular collisions.
B. Enzyme-Substrate Complex
1. A substrate is a reactant for an enzymatic reaction.
2. Enzymes speed chemical reactions by lowering the energy of activation (Ea) by
forming a complex with their substrate(s) at the active site.
a. An active site is a small region on the surface of the enzyme where the
substrate(s) bind.
39
b. When a substrate binds to an enzyme, the active site undergoes a slight change in
shape that facilitates the reaction. This is called the induced fit model of enzyme
catalysis.
3. Only a small amount of enzyme is needed in a cell because enzymes are not
consumed during catalysis.
4. Some enzymes (e.g., trypsin) actually participate in the reaction.
5. A particular reactant(s) may produce more than one type of product(s).
a. Presence or absence of enzyme determines which reaction takes place.
b. If reactants can form more than one product, the enzymes present determine
which product is formed.
C. Factors Affecting Enzymatic Speed
1. Substrate concentration.
a. Because molecules must collide to react, enzyme activity increases as substrate
concentration increases; as more substrate molecules fill active sites, more
product is produced per unit time.
2. Optimal pH
a. Every enzyme has optimal pH at which its rate of reaction is optimal.
b. A change in pH can alter the ionization of the R groups of the amino acids in the
enzyme, thereby disrupting the enzyme’s activity.
3. Temperature
a. As temperature rises, enzyme activity increases because there are more enzymesubstrate collisions.
b. Enzyme activity declines rapidly when enzyme is denatured at a certain
temperature, due to a change in shape of the enzyme.
4. Enzyme cofactors
a. Many enzymes require an inorganic ion or non-protein cofactor to function.
b. Inorganic cofactors are ions of metals.
c. A coenzyme is an organic cofactor, which assists the enzyme (i.e., it may actually
contribute atoms to the reaction).
d. Vitamins are small organic molecules required in trace amounts for synthesis of
coenzymes; they become part of a coenzyme’s molecular structure; vitamin
deficiency causes a lack of a specific coenzyme and therefore a lack of its
enzymatic action.
5. Enzyme inhibition
a. Enzyme inhibition occurs when a substance (called an inhibitor) binds to an
enzyme and decreases its activity; normally, enzyme inhibition is reversible.
b. In noncompetitive inhibition, the inhibitor binds to the enzyme at a location
other than the active site (the allosteric site), changing the shape of the enzyme
and rendering it unable to bind to its substrate.
c. In competitive inhibition, the substrate and the inhibitor are both able to bind to
the enzyme’s active site.
D. Enzyme Inhibitors Can Spell Death (Health Focus box)
1. Cyanide
a. Cyanide was used in human executions.
b. Cyanide binds to the mitochondrial enzyme that is necessary for ATP production.
2. MPTP
40
a. MPTP is an enzyme inhibitor that stops mitochondria from producing ATP.
b. MPTP’s toxic characteristics were discovered in the 1980s, after intravenous drug
users developed syndromes of Parkinson disease.
c. The drug users had injected a synthetic form of heroin contaminated with MPTP.
3. Sarin
a. Sarin inhibits enzymes at neuromuscular junctions.
b. The muscle contraction can’t turn off, muscles do not relax and become paralyzed.
c. In 1995, terrorists in Japan released sarin gas on a subway; 17 people died.
4. Warfarin
a. Warfarin is a chemical produced by the spoiling of the plant sweet clover.
b. Wafarin inhibits an enzyme for blood clotting.
c. Used as a rat poison, pets and small children also can consume the poison.
5. Coumadin
a. Coumadin is a medicine to prevent inappropriate blood clotting.
b. Coumadin contains a nonlethal dose of warfanin.
6.4 Organelles and the Flow of Energy
A. Photosynthesis
1. Photosynthesis uses energy to combine carbon dioxide and water to produce glucose
in the formula:
6 CO2 + 6 H2O + energy = C6H12O6 + 6 O2
2. Oxidation is the loss of electrons.
3. Reduction is the gain of electrons.
4. When hydrogen atoms are transferred to carbon dioxide from water, water has been
oxidized and carbon dioxide has been reduced.
5. Input of energy is needed to produce the high-energy glucose molecule.
6. Chloroplasts capture solar energy and convert it by way of an electron transport
system into the chemical energy of ATP.
7. ATP is used along with hydrogen atoms to reduce glucose; when NADP+
(nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide phosphate) donates hydrogen atoms (H+ + e-)
to a substrate during photosynthesis, the substrate has accepted electrons and is
therefore reduced.
8. The reaction that reduces NADP+ is:
NADP+ + 2e- + H+ = NADPH
B. Cellular Respiration
1. The overall equation for cellular respiration is opposite that of photosynthesis:
C6H12O6 + 6 O2 = 6 CO2 + 6 H2O + energy
2. When NAD removes hydrogen atoms (H+ + e-) during cellular respiration, the
substrate has lost electrons and is therefore oxidized.
3. At the end of cellular respiration, glucose has been oxidized to carbon dioxide and
water and ATP molecules have been produced.
4. In metabolic pathways, most oxidations involve the coenzyme NAD+ (nicotinamide
adenine dinucleotide); the molecule accepts two electrons but only one hydrogen
ion: NAD+ + 2e- + H+ = NADH
C. Electron Transport Chain
1. Both photosynthesis and respiration use an electron transport chain consisting of
membrane-bound carriers that pass electrons from one carrier to another.
41
2. High-energy electrons are delivered to the system and low-energy electrons leave it.
3. The overall effect is a series of redox reactions; every time electrons transfer to a new
carrier, energy is released for the production of ATP.
D. ATP Production
1. ATP synthesis is coupled to the electron transport system.
2. Peter Mitchell received the 1978 Nobel Prize for his chemiosmotic theory of ATP
production.
3. In both mitochondria and chloroplasts, carriers of electron transport systems are
located within a membrane.
4. H+ ions (protons) collect on one side of the membrane because they are pumped there
by specific proteins.
5. The electrochemical gradient thus established across the membrane is used to provide
energy for ATP production.
6. Enzymes and their carrier proteins, called ATP synthase complexes, span the
membrane; each complex contains a channel that allows H+ ions to flow down their
electrochemical gradient.
7. In photosynthesis, energized electrons lead to the pumping of hydrogen ions across
the thylakoid membrane; as hydrogen ions flow through the ATP synthase complex,
ATP is formed.
8. During cellular respiration, glucose breakdown provides energy for a hydrogen ion
gradient on the inner membrane of the mitochondria that also couples hydrogen ion
flow with ATP formation.
42
Chapter 7
7.1 Photosynthetic Organisms
1. Photosynthetic organisms (algae, plants, and cyanobacteria) transform solar energy
into carbohydrates.
2. Photosynthetic organisms (plants, algae, cyanobacteria) are called autotrophs
because they produce their own food.
3. Organisms that must take in preformed organic molecules are called heterotrophs.
4. Both autotrophs and heterotrophs use organic molecules produced by photosynthesis
as chemical building blocks and as a source of energy.
A. Flowering Plants as Photosynthesizers
1. Raw materials for photosynthesis are carbon dioxide and water.
2. Roots absorb water that moves up vascular tissue in the stem until it reaches the leaf
veins.
3. Carbon dioxide enters a leaf through small openings called stomata.
4. Carbon dioxide and water diffuse into the chloroplasts, the organelles that carry on
photosynthesis.
5. In chloroplasts, a double membrane encloses a fluid-filled space called the stroma.
6. An internal membrane system within the stroma forms flattened sacs called
thylakoids, which in some cases are organized into stacks to form grana.
7. Spaces within all thylakoids are connected to form an inner compartment, the
thylakoid space.
8. Chlorophyll and other pigments involved in absorption of solar energy reside within
thylakoid membranes; these pigments absorb solar energy, and energize electrons
prior to reduction of CO2 to a carbohydrate.
7.2 The Process of Photosynthesis
1. The net equation of photosynthesis reads: 6CO2 + 6H2O = C6 H12O6 + 6O2.
2. Photosynthesis involves oxidation-reduction, where the carbon dioxide has been
reduced by hydrogen atoms and energy, and the water has been oxidized.
a. Solar energy is not used directly, but rather converted to ATP molecules.
b. Electrons required to reduce carbon dioxide is carried by coenzyme, NADP+.
3. In 1930, van Niel showed that O2 given off by photosynthesis comes from water and
not from CO2.
A. Two Sets of Reactions
1. In 1905, Blackman proposed two sets of reactions for photosynthesis.
2. Light reactions take place only in the presence of light.
a. Light reactions are the energy-capturing reactions.
b. Chlorophyl within thylakoid membranes absorbs solar energy and energizes
electrons.
c. When energized electrons move down an electron transport chain, energy is
captured and used for ATP production.
d. Energized electrons are also taken up by NADP+, converting it to NADPH.
3. Calvin cycle reactions
a. These reactions take place in the stroma; the reactions can occur in either the
presence or the absence of light.
b. These are synthetic reactions that use NADPH and ATP to reduce CO2.
43
7.3 Plants as Solar Energy Converters
1. Higher energy wavelengths are screened out by the ozone layer in the upper
atmosphere.
2. Lower energy wavelengths are screened out by water vapor and CO2.
3. Both the organic molecules within organisms and certain processes (e.g., vision,
photosynthesis) are adapted to visible light, the radiation that is most prevalent in the
environment.
4. Photosynthetic pigments use primarily the visible light portion of the electromagnetic
spectrum.
5. Pigments found in chlorophyll absorb various portions of visible light; this is called
their absorption spectrum.
6. Two major photosynthetic pigments are chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b.
7. Both chlorophylls absorb violet, blue, and red wavelengths best.
8. Very little green light is absorbed; most is reflected (this is why leaves appear green).
9. Carotenoids are yellow-orange pigments that absorb light in violet, blue, and green
regions.
10. When chlorophyll breaks down in the fall, the yellow-orange pigments in leaves show
through.
11. Absorption and action spectrum
a. A spectrophotometer measures the amount of light that passes through a sample.
1) As light is shone on a sample, some wavelengths are absorbed and others pass
through the sample.
2) A graph of percent of light absorbed at each wavelength is a compound’s
absorption spectrum.
A. Light Reactions
1. This light reaction requires participation of two light-gathering units: photosystem I
(PS I) and photosystem II (PS II).
2. A photosystem is a photosynthetic unit comprised of a pigment complex and an
electron acceptor; solar energy is absorbed and high-energy electrons are generated.
B. Noncyclic Electron Pathway
1. The noncyclic pathway begins with PSII; electrons move from H2O through PS II to
PS I and then on to NADP+.
2. The PS II pigment complex absorbs solar energy; high-energy electrons (e-) leave the
reaction-center chlorophyll a molecule.
3. PS II takes replacement electrons from H2O, which splits, releasing O2 and H+ ions:
+
H2O =
+ 2 e- + ½ O2.
4. Oxygen is released as oxygen gas (O2).
5. The H+ ions temporarily stay within the thylakoid space and contribute to a H+ ion
gradient.
6. As H+ flow down electrochemical gradient through ATP synthase complexes,
chemiosmosis occurs.
7. Low-energy electrons leaving the electron transport system enter PS I.
8. When the PS I pigment complex absorbs solar energy, high-energy electrons leave
reaction-center chlorophyll a and are captured by an electron acceptor.
9. The electron acceptor passes them on to NADP+.
10. NADP+ takes on an H+ to become NADPH: NADP+ + 2 e- + H+ = NADPH.
44
11. NADPH and ATP (produced by noncyclic-flow electrons in the thylakoid membrane)
are used by enzymes in the stroma during the light-independent (dark) reactions.
C. The Organization of the Thylakoid Membrane
1. PS II consists of a pigment complex and electron-acceptor molecules; it oxidizes H2O
and produces O2.
2. The electron transport system consists of cytochrome complexes and transports
electrons and pumps H+ ions into the thylakoid space.
3. PS I has a pigment complex and electron-acceptor molecules; it is associated with an
enzyme that reduces NADP+ to NADPH.
4. ATP synthase complex has an H+ channel and ATP synthase; it produces ATP.
D. ATP Production
1. The thylakoid space acts as a reservoir for H+ ions; each time H2O is split, two H+
remain.
2. Electrons move carrier-to-carrier, giving up energy used to pump H+ from the stroma
into the thylakoid space.
3. Flow of H+ from high to low concentration across thylakoid membrane provides
energy to produce ATP from ADP + P by using an ATP synthase enzyme.
4. This is called chemiosmosis because ATP production is tied to an electrochemical
(H+) gradient.
E. Tropical Rain Forest Destruction and Global Warming (Ecology Focus Box)
1. Global warming is an unexpected rise in the average global temperature during the
21st century due to the introduction of certain gases into the atmosphere.
2. For more than 1000 years before 1850, carbon dioxide levels remained fairly constant
at 0.028%.
3. Following the 1850s (marked by the industrial revolution), the amount of carbon
dioxide in the atmosphere increased to 0.038%.
4. Role of Carbon Dioxide
a. Carbon dioxide, as well as other gases, traps radiant heat from the sun.
b. Factors adding carbon dioxide to the atmosphere include: burning of fossil fuels,
and destructing tropical rain forests.
5. Role of Tropical Rain Forests
a. Ten – 30 million hectares of rain forests are lost every year due to ranching,
logging, and mining.
b. Each year, tropical rain forest deforestation accounts for 20-30% of all carbon
dioxide in the atmosphere.
c. Destruction of tropical rain forests is also troublesome because burning a forest
add carbon dioxide to the atmosphere, and also removes trees that normally would
absorb carbon dioxide.
6. The Argument for Preserving Forests
a. Tropical rain forests contribute to the uptake of carbon dioxide, and the
productivity of photosynthesis.
b. Tropical rain forests exist between the Tropic of Cancer and Tropic of Capricorn,
temperatures about 26 C, and where rainfall is 100-200 cm and regular.
c. Tropical rain forest tree characteristics include: large trees, buttressed trunks,
broad, simple dark-green leaves, and vines (lianas).
45
d. Researchers suggest that as temperatures rise, tropical rain forests may add to
atmospheric carbon dioxide accumulation and accelerate global warming rather
than the reverse.
e. To combat deforestation, some countries, such as Costa Rica, have developed
national park systems and reserves to protect the forests from destruction.
.
7.4 Calvin Cycle Reactions
1. The Calvin cycle is a series of reactions producing carbohydrates; these reactions
follow the light reactions.
2. The cycle is named for Melvin Calvin who used a radioactive isotope of carbon to
trace the reactions.
3. The Calvin cycle includes carbon dioxide fixation, carbon dioxide reduction, and
regeneration of ribulose 1,5-bisphosphate (RuBP).
A. Fixation of Carbon Dioxide
1. CO2 fixation is the attachment of CO2 to an organic compound called RuBP.
2. RuBP (ribulose bisphosphate) is a five-carbon molecule that combines with carbon
dioxide; the resulting 6-carbon molecule then splits into two 3-carbon molecules.
3. The enzyme RuBP carboxylase (rubisco) speeds this reaction; this enzyme
comprises 20–50% of the protein content of chloroplasts--it is an unusually slow
enzyme.
B. Reduction of Carbon Dioxide
1. With the reduction of carbon dioxide, a 3PG (3-phosphoglycerate) molecule forms.
2. Each of two 3PG molecules undergoes reduction to G3P (glyceraldehyde-3phosphate) in two steps.
3. Light-dependent reactions provide NADPH (electrons) and ATP (energy) to reduce
3PG to G3P.
C. Regeneration of RuBP
1. For every three turns of the Calvin cycle, five molecules of G3P are used to re-form
three molecules of RuBP.
2. This reaction also uses ATP produced by the light reactions.
D. The Importance of the Calvin Cycle
1. G3P, the product of the Calvin Cycle can be converted into many other molecules.
2. Glucose phosphate is one result of G3P metabolism; it is a common energy molecule.
3. Glucose phosphate can bond with fructose to form sucrose.
4. Glucose phosphate is the starting point for synthesis of starch and cellulose.
5. The hydrocarbon skeleton of G3P is used to form fatty acids and glycerol; the
addition of nitrogen forms various amino acids.
7.5 Other Types of Photosynthesis
1. In C3 plants, the Calvin cycle fixes CO2 directly; the first molecule following CO2
fixation is 3PG.
2. In hot weather, stomata close to save water; CO2 concentration decreases in leaves;
O2 increases.
3. This is called photorespiration since oxygen is taken up and CO2 is produced; this
produces only one 3PG.
A. C4 Photosynthesis
46
1. In a C3 plant, mesophyll cells contain well-formed chloroplasts, arranged in parallel
layers.
2. In C4 plants, bundle sheath cells as well as the mesophyll cells contain chloroplasts.
3. In C4 leaf, mesophyll cells are arranged concentrically around the bundle sheath cells.
4. C3 plants use RuBP carboxylase to fix CO2 to RuBP in mesophyll; the first detected
molecule is G3P.
5. C4 plants use the enzyme PEP carboxylase (PEPCase) to fix CO2 to PEP
(phosphoenolpyruvate, a C3 molecule); the end product is oxaloacetate (a C4
molecule).
6. In C4 plants, CO2 is taken up in mesophyll cells and malate, a reduced form of
oxaloacetate, is pumped into the bundle-sheath cells; here CO2 enters Calvin cycle.
7. In hot, dry climates, net photosynthetic rate of C4 plants (e.g., corn) is 2–3 times that
of C4 plants.
8. Photorespiration does not occur in C4 leaves because PEPCase does not combine with
O2; even when stomates are closed, CO2 is delivered to the Calvin cycle in bundle
sheath cells.
9. C4 plants have advantage over C3 plants in hot and dry weather because
photorespiration does not occur; e.g., bluegrass (C3) dominates lawns in early
summer, whereas crabgrass (C4) takes over in the hot midsummer.
B. CAM Photosynthesis
1. CAM (crassulacean-acid metabolism) plants form a C4 molecule at night when
stomates can open without loss of water; found in many succulent desert plants
including the family Crassulaceae.
2. At night, CAM plants use PEPCase to fix CO2 by forming C4 molecule stored in large
vacuoles in mesophyll.
3. C4 formed at night is broken down to CO2 during the day and enters the Calvin cycle
within the same cell, which now has NADPH and ATP available to it from the
light-dependent reactions.
4. CAM plants open stomates only at night, allowing CO2 to enter photosynthesizing
tissues; during the day, stomates are closed to conserve water but CO2 cannot enter
photosynthesizing tissues.
5. Photosynthesis in a CAM plant is minimal, due to limited amount of CO2 fixed at
night; but this does allow CAM plants to live under stressful conditions.
C. Photosynthesis and Adaptation to the Environment
1. Each method of photosynthesis has its advantages, depending on the environment.
2. C4 plants are adapted to areas of high light intensities, high temperatures, and limited
rainfall.
3. C3 plants do better in cooler climates.
4. CAM plants do well in an arid environment.
47
Chapter 8
8.1 Cellular Respiration
1. Cellular respiration involves various metabolic pathways that break down
carbohydrates and other metabolites with the concomitant buildup of ATP.
2. Cellular respiration consumes oxygen and produces CO2; because oxygen is
required, cellular respiration is aerobic.
3. Cellular respiration usually involves the complete breakdown of glucose into CO2 and
H2O.
4. The net equation for glucose breakdown is: C6H12O6 + 6 O2 = 6 CO2 + 6 H2O +
energy
5. Glucose is a high-energy molecule; CO2 and H2O are low-energy molecules; cellular
respiration is thus exergonic because it releases energy.
6. Electrons are removed from substrates and received by oxygen, which combines with
H+ to become water.
7. Glucose is oxidized and O2 is reduced.
8. The reactions of cellular respiration allow energy in glucose to be released slowly;
therefore ATP is produced gradually.
9. In contrast, if glucose were broken down rapidly, most of its energy would be lost as
non-usable heat.
10. The breakdown of glucose yields synthesis of 36 or 38 ATP (depending on certain
conditions); this preserves about 39% of the energy available in glucose.
11. This is relatively efficient compared to, for example, the 25% efficiency of a car
burning gasoline.
+
A. NAD and FAD
1. Each metabolic reaction in cellular respiration is catalyzed by a specific enzyme.
2. As a metabolite is oxidized, NAD+ (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide) accepts two
electrons and a hydrogen ion (H+); this results in NADH + H+.
3. Electrons received by NAD+ and FAD are high-energy electrons and are usually
carried to the electron transport chain.
4. NAD+ is a coenzyme of oxidation-reduction since it both accepts and gives up
electrons; thus, NAD+ is sometimes called a redox coenzyme
5. Only a small amount of NAD+ is needed in cells because each NAD+ molecule is
used repeatedly.
6. FAD coenzyme of oxidation-reduction can replace NAD+; FAD accepts two electrons
and two hydrogen ions to become FADH2.
B. Phases of Cellular Respiration
1. Cellular respiration includes four phases:
a. Glycolysis is the breakdown of glucose in the cytoplasm into two molecules of
pyruvate.
1) Enough energy is released for an immediate yield of two ATP.
2) Glycolysis takes place outside the mitochondria and does not utilize oxygen; it
is therefore an anaerobic process.
b. In the preparatory (prep) reaction, pyruvate enters a mitochondrion and is
oxidized to a two-carbon acetyl group and CO2 is removed; this reaction occurs
twice per glucose molecule.
c. The citric acid cycle:
48
1) occurs in the matrix of the mitochondrion and produces NADH and FADH2;
2) is a series of reactions that gives off CO2 and produces one ATP;
3) turns twice because two acetyl-CoA molecules enter the cycle per glucose
molecule;
4) produces two immediate ATP molecules per glucose molecule.
d. The electron transport chain:
1) is a series of carriers in the inner mitochondrial membrane that accept
electrons from glucose--electrons are passed from carrier to carrier until
received by oxygen;
2) passes electrons from higher to lower energy states, allowing energy to be
released and stored for ATP production;
8.2 Outside the Mitochondria: Glycolysis
1. Glycolysis occurs in the cytoplasm outside the mitochondria.
2. Glycolysis is the breakdown of glucose into two pyruvate molecules.
3. Glycolysis is universally found in organisms; therefore, it likely evolved before the
citric acid cycle and electron transport chain.
4. Thycolosis can be divided into the energy-investment steps where ATP is used to
“jump start” glycolosis, and the energy-harvesting steps, where more ATP is made
than used.
A. Energy-Investment Steps
1. Glycolysis begins with the activation of glucose with two ATP; the glucose splits into
two C3 molecules known as G3P, each of which carries a phosphate group.
B. Energy-Harvesting Steps
1. Oxidation of G3P occurs by removal of electrons and hydrogen ions.
2. Two electrons and one hydrogen ion are accepted by NAD+, resulting in two NADH;
later, when the NADH molecules pass two electrons to the electron transport chain,
they become NAD+ again.
3. The oxidation of G3P and subsequent substrates results in four high-energy phosphate
groups, which are used to synthesize four ATP molecules; this process is called
substrate-level phosphorylation.
4. Two of four ATP molecules produced are required to replace two ATP molecules
used in the initial phosphorylation of glucose; therefore there is a net gain of two ATP
from glycolysis.
5. Pyruvate enters a mitochondrion (if oxygen is available) and cellular respiration
ensues.
6. If oxygen is not available, fermentation occurs and pyruvate undergoes reduction.
8.3 Fermentation
1. Fermentation is an anaerobic (i.e., occurs in the absence of oxygen) process which
consists of
glycolysis plus reduction
of pyruvate to either lactate or to alcohol and CO2 (depending on the organism).
2. Animal cell fermentation results in lactate.
3. Bacteria can produce an organic acid like lactate, or an alcohol and CO2.
4. Yeasts produce ethyl alcohol and CO2.
5. NADH passes its electrons to pyruvate instead of to an electron transport chain;
NAD+ is then free to return and pick up more electrons during earlier reactions of
glycolysis.
49
A. Advantages and Disadvantages of Fermentation
1. Despite a low yield of two ATP molecules, fermentation provides a quick burst of
ATP energy for muscular activity.
2. Fermentation products are toxic to cells.
a. When blood cannot remove all lactate from muscles, lactate changes pH and
causes muscles to fatigue.
b. The individual is in oxygen debt because oxygen is needed to restore ATP levels
and rid the body of lactate.
c. Recovery occurs after lactate is sent to the liver where it is converted into
pyruvate; some pyruvate is then respired or converted back into glucose.
B. Efficiency of Fermentation
1. Two ATP produced per glucose molecule during fermentation is equivalent to 14.6
kcal.
2. Complete glucose breakdown to CO2 and H2O during cellular respiration represents a
potential yield of 686 kcal per molecule.
3. Efficiency of fermentation is 14.6/686 or about 2.1%, far less efficient than complete
breakdown of glucose.
C. Fermentation Helps Produce Numerous Food Products (Science Focus box)
1. Yeast Fermentation
a. Baker’s yeast, Saccharomyces cerevisiae, is added to bread for leavening. The dough
rises when yeasts give off CO2.
b. Yeasts ferment the carbohydrates of fruit to produce ethyl alcohol in wine, and
ferment grains to produce ethyl alcohol in beer.
c. The acetic acid bacteria, Acetobacter aceti, spoil wine, and convert the alcohol to
acetic acide to produce vinegar.
2. Bacterial Fermentation
a. Lactic acid bacteria cause milk to sour and produce yogurt, sour cream, and cheese.
b. Brine cucumber pickles, sauerkraut, and kimchi are pickled vegetables produced by
acid producing fermenting bacteria.
3. Soy Sauce Production
a. Yeast and fermenting bacteria are added to soy beans and wheat to produce soy
sauce.
8.4 Inside the Mitochondria
1. The next reactions of cellular respiration involve the preparatory reaction, the citric
acid cycle, and the electron transport chain.
2. These reactions occur in the mitochondria.
3. A mitochondrion has a double membrane with an intermembrane space (between the
outer and inner membrane).
4. Cristae are the inner folds of membrane that jut into the matrix, the innermost
compartment of a mitochondrion that is filled with a gel-like fluid.
5. The prep reaction and citric acid cycle enzymes are in the matrix; the electron
transport chain is in the cristae.
6. Most of the ATP produced in cellular respiration is produced in the mitochondria;
therefore, mitochondria are often called the “powerhouses” of the cell.
A. Preparatory Reaction
1. The preparatory reaction connects glycolysis to the citric acid cycle.
50
2. In this reaction, pyruvate is converted to a two-carbon acetyl group, and is attached to
coenzyme A, resulting in the compound acetyl-CoA.
3. This redox reaction removes electrons from pyruvate by a dehydrogenase enzyme,
using NAD+ as a coenzyme.
4. This reaction occurs twice for each glucose molecule.
5. CoA carry the acetyl group to the citric acid cycle.
6. The two NADH carry to electrons to the electron transport chain.
7. The CO2 diffuses out of animal cells into blood, transported to lungs, and exhaled.
B. Citric Acid Cycle
1. The citric acid cycle occurs in the matrix of mitochondria.
2. The cycle is sometimes called the Krebs cycle, named for Sir Hans Krebs, who
described the fundamentals of the reactions in the 1930s.
3. The cycle begins by the addition of a two-carbon acetyl group to a four-carbon
molecule, forming a six-carbon citrate (citric acid) molecule.
4. In the subsequent reactions, at three different times two electrons and one hydrogen
ion are accepted by NAD+, forming NADH.
5. At one time, two electrons and one hydrogen ion are accepted by FAD, forming
FADH2.
6. NADH and FADH2 carry these electrons to the electron transport chain.
7. Some energy is released and is used to synthesize ATP by substrate-level
phosphorylation.
8. One high-energy metabolite accepts a phosphate group and transfers it to convert
ADP to ATP.
9. The citric acid cycle turns twice for each original glucose molecule.
10. The products of the citric acid cycle (per glucose molecule) are 4 CO2, 2 ATP, 6
NADH and 2 FADH2.
11. Production of CO2
a. The six carbon atoms in the glucose molecule have now become the carbon atoms
of six CO2 molecules, two from the prep reaction and four from the citric acid
cycle.
C. The Electron Transport Chain
1. The electron transport chain is located in the cristae of mitochondria and consists of
carriers that pass electrons successively from one to another.
2. NADH and FADH2 carry the electrons to the electron transport system.
3. Members of the Chain
a. NADH gives up its electrons and becomes NAD+; the next carrier then gains
electrons and is thereby reduced.
b. At each sequential redox reaction, energy is released to form ATP molecules.
c. Some of the protein carriers are cytochrome molecules, complex carbon rings
with a heme (iron) group in the center.
4. Cycling of Carriers
a. By the time electrons are received by O2, three ATP have been made.
b. When FADH2 delivers electrons to the electron transport system, two ATP are
formed by the time the electrons are received by O2.
c. Oxygen serves as the terminal electron acceptor and combines with hydrogen ions
to form water.
51
5. The Cristae of a Mitochondrion and Chemiosmosis
a. The electron transport chain consists of three protein complexes and two protein
mobile carriers that transport electrons.
b. The three protein complexes include NADH-Q reductase complex, the cytochrome
reductase complex, and the cytochrome oxidase complex; the two protein mobile
carriers are coenzyme Q and cytochrome c.
c. Energy released from the flow of electrons down the electron transport chain is
used to pump H+ ions, which are carried by NADH and FADH2, into
intermembrane space.
d. Accumulation of H+ ions in this intermembrane space creates a strong
electrochemical gradient.
e. ATP synthase complexes are channel proteins that serve as enzymes for ATP
synthesis.
f. As H+ ions flow from high to low concentration, ATP synthase synthesizes ATP
by the reaction: ADP + P = ATP.
g. Chemiosmosis is the term used for ATP production tied to an electrochemical
(H+) gradient across a membrane.
h. Once formed, ATP molecules diffuse out of the mitochondrial matrix through
channel proteins.
i. ATP is the energy currency for all living things; all organisms must continuously
produce high levels of ATP to survive.
D. Energy Yield From Glucose Metabolism
1. Substrate-Level Phosphorylation
a. Per glucose molecule, there is a net gain of two ATP from glycolysis in
cytoplasm.
b. The citric acid cycle in the matrix of the mitochondria produces two ATP per
glucose.
c. Thus, a total of four ATP are formed by substrate-level phosphorylation outside
of the electron transport chain.
2. ETC and Chemiosmosis
a. Most of the ATP is produced by the electron transport chain and chemiosmosis.
b. Per glucose, ten NADH and two FADH2 molecules provide electrons and H+ ions
to the electron transport chain.
c. For each NADH formed within the mitochondrion, three ATP are produced.
d. For each FADH2 formed by the citric acid cycle, two ATP are produced.
e. For each NADH formed outside mitochondria by glycolysis, two ATP are
produced as electrons are shuttled across the mitochondrial membrane by an
organic molecule and delivered to FAD.
3. Efficiency of Cellular Respiration
a. The energy difference between total reactants (glucose and O2) and products (CO2
and H2O) is 686 kcal.
b. An ATP phosphate bond has an energy of 7.3 kcal; 36 to 38 ATP are produced
during glucose breakdown for a total of at least 263 kcal.
c. This efficiency is 263/686, or 39% of the available energy in glucose is
transferred to ATP; the rest of the energy is lost as heat.
8.5 Metabolic Pool
52
1. In a metabolic pool, substrates serve as entry points for degeneration or synthesis of
larger molecules.
2. Degradative reactions (catabolism) break down molecules; they tend to be exergonic.
3. Synthetic reactions (anabolism) build molecules; they tend to be endergonic.
A. Catabolism
1. Just as glucose is broken down in cellular respiration, other molecules in the cell
undergo catabolism.
2. Fat breaks down into glycerol and three fatty acids.
a. Glycerol is converted to G3P, a metabolite in glycolysis.
b. An 18-carbon fatty acid is converted to nine acetyl-CoA molecules that enter the
citric acid cycle.
c. Respiration of fat products can produce 108 kcal in ATP molecules; fats are an
efficient form of stored energy.
3. Amino acids break down into carbon chains and amino groups.
a. Hydrolysis of proteins results in amino acids.
b. R-group size determines whether carbon chain is oxidized in glycolysis or the
citric acid cycle.
c. A carbon skeleton is produced in the liver by removal of the amino group, by the
process of deamination.
d. The amino group becomes ammonia (NH3), which enters the urea cycle and
ultimately becomes part of excreted urea.
e. The size of the R-group determines the number of carbons left after deamination.
B. Anabolism
1. ATP produced during catabolism drives anabolism.
2. Substrates making up pathways can be used as starting materials for synthetic
reactions.
3. The molecules used for biosynthesis constitute the cell’s metabolic pool.
4. Carbohydrates can result in fat synthesis: G3P converts to glycerol, acetyl groups join
to form fatty acids.
5. Some metabolites can be converted to amino acids by transamination, the transfer of
an amino acid group to an organic acid.
6. Plants synthesize all the amino acids they need; animals lack some enzymes needed
to make some amino acids.
7. Humans synthesize 11 of 20 amino acids; the remaining 9 essential amino acids
must be provided by the diet.
C. The Energy Organelles Revisited
1. Chloroplasts and mitochondria may be related based on their likeness, yet they carry
out opposite processes.
a. The inner membrane of the chloroplasts form the thylakoids of the grana. The
inner membrane of the mitochondrion forms the convoluted cristae.
b. In chloroplasts the electrons passed down the ETC have been energized by the
sun. In mitochondria the electrons passed down the ETC have been removed from
glucose products.
c. In chloroplasts the stroma contains the enzymes of the Calvin cycle. In the
mitochondria the matrix contains the enzymes of the citric acid cycle.
2. Flow Of Energy
53
a. Energy flows through organisms. For example, the sun is the energy source for
producing carbohydrates in chloroplasts. In the mitochondria, the carbohydrate
energy is converted into ATP molecules during cellular respiration.
b. Chemicals cycle throughout cells. Mitochondria use carbohydrates and oxygen
produced in chloroplasts, and chloroplasts use carbon dioxide and water produced
in the mitochondria.
54
Chapter 9
9.1 The Cell Cycle
1. The cell cycle is an orderly set of stages from the first division to the time the
daughter cells divide.
2. When a cell is preparing for division, it grows larger, the number of organelles
doubles, and the DNA replicates.
A. Interphase
1. Most of a cell’s life is spent in interphase, in which the cell performs its usual
functions.
2. Time spent in interphase varies by cell type: nerve and muscle cells do not
complete the cell cycle and remain in the G0 stage while embryonic cells
complete the cycle every few hours.
3. The G1 stage is just prior to DNA replication; a cell grows in size, organelles
increase in number, and material accumulates for DNA synthesis.
4. The S stage is the DNA synthesis (replication) period; proteins associated
with DNA are also synthesized; at the end of the S stage, each chromosome
has two identical DNA double helix molecules, called sister chromatids.
5. The G2 stage occurs just prior to cell division; the cell synthesizes proteins
needed for cell division, such as proteins in microtubules.
6. Interphase therefore consists of G1, S, and G2.
B. M (Mitotic) Stage
1. M stage (M = mitosis) is the entire cell division stage, including both mitosis
and cytokinesis.
2. Mitosis (also known as karyokinesis) is nuclear division, cytokinesis is
division of the cytoplasm.
3. When division of the cytoplasm is complete, two daughter cells are produced.
C. Control of the Cell Cycle
1. A signal is an agent that influences the activites of a cell.
2. Growth factors are external signals received at the plasma membrane.
3. Cell Cycle Checkpoints
a. There appear to be three checkpoints where the cell cycle either stops or
continues onward, depending on the internal signals it receives.
b. Researchers have identified a family of proteins called cyclins, internal
signals that increase or decrease during the cell cycle.
c. Cyclin must be present for the cell to move from the G1 stage to the S
stage, and from the G2 stage to the M stage.
d. The primary checkpoint of the cell cycle is the G1 checkpoint.
e. DNA damage stops the cycle at the G1 checkpoint by the protein p53; if
the DNA is not repaired, p53 triggers apoptosis.
f. Another protein, RB (retinoblastoma), is responsible for interpreting
growth and nutrient availability signals.
g. The cell cycle stops at the G2 stage if DNA has not finished replicating;
stopping the cell cycle at this stage allows time for repair of possible
damaged DNA.
h. Also, the cycle stops if chromosomes are not properly attached to the
mitotic spindle.
55
D. Apoptosis
1. Apoptosis is programmed cell death and involves a sequence of cellular
events involving:
a. fragmenting of the nucleus,
b. blistering of the plasma membrane, and
c. engulfing of cell fragments by macrophages and/or neighboring cells.
2. Apoptosis is caused by enzymes called caspases.
3. Cells normally hold caspases in check with inhibitors.
4. Caspases are released by internal or external signals.
5. Apoptosis and cell division are balancing processes that maintain the normal
level of somatic (body) cells.
6. Cell death is a normal and necessary part of development: frogs, for example,
must destroy tail tissue they used as tadpoles, and the human embryo must
eliminate webbing found between fingers and toes.
7. Death by apoptosis prevents a tumor from developing.
E. The G1 Checkpoint (Science Focus box)
1. During cell division, only certain cells in an adult body are actively dividing.
2. Once cell division occurs, cells enter G1 stage.
3. Following the G1 stage, cells enter the G1 checkpoint to make sure that the
correct conditions occur to continue cell division.
4. Evaluating Growth Signals
a. Signal molecules are sent to encourage or discourage cells from entering
the cell cycle. Cells may enter a G0 stage, complete G1 and enter S stage.
b. Cell division promoting signals can cause a cyclin-dependent-kinase
(CDK) to add a phosphate group to RB, which is a regulator of the G1
checkpoint.
c. When RB is phosphorylated, the shape of RB changes and it releases the
protein E2F, rather than binding to E2F.
d. E2F then binds to DNA and activates genes to complete the cell cycle.
e. If growth signals are sufficient, a cell will pass through the G1 checkpoint
and cell division will occur.
5. Determining Nutrient Availability
a. Cells require adequate nutrient levels prior to cell division.
b. When nutrients are available, CDKs bring about phosphorylation of RB,
which releases E2F. E2F binds to DNA to produce proteins.
c. When nutrients are not available, the cell enters the G0 stage and does not
progress to the G1 stage.
6. Assessing DNA Integrity
a. DNA must be free of errors and damage in order for cell division to occur.
b. If DNA damage is detected, CDK phosphorylates p53. Rather than being
broken down, p53 levels in the nucleus rise.
c. The phosphorylated p53 binds to DNA to produce DNA repair proteins.
d. If DNA damage cannot be repaired, p53 levels continue to rise to trigger
apoptosis. However, if DNA damage is repaired, p53 levels fall, and cell
completes G1 stage as long as other requirements are met.
9.2 Mitosis and Cytokinesis
56
A. Eukaryotic Chromosomes
1. DNA in chromosomes of eukaryotic cells is associated with proteins; histones
organize chromosomes.
2. When a cell is not undergoing division, DNA in the nucleus is a tangled mass
of threads called chromatin.
3. At cell division, chromatin becomes highly coiled and condensed and is now
visible as individual chromosomes.
4. Each species has a characteristic number of chromosomes.
a. The diploid (2n) number includes two sets of chromosomes of each
type.
1) The diploid number is found in all the non-sex cells of an
organism's body (with a few exceptions).
b. The haploid (n) number contains one of each kind of chromosome.
1) In the life cycle of many animals, only sperm and egg cells
have the haploid number.
B. Preparations for Mitosis
1. Cell division in eukaryotes involves nuclear division and cytokinesis.
a. Somatic cells undergo mitosis for development, growth, and repair.
1) This nuclear division leaves the chromosome number constant.
2) A 2n nucleus replicates and divides to provide daughter nuclei
that are also 2n.
b. A chromosome begins cell division with two sister chromatids.
1) Sister chromatids are two strands of genetically identical
chromosomes.
2) At the beginning of cell division, they are attached at a
centromere, a region of constriction on a chromosome.
2. The centrosome, the main microtubule organizing center of the cell, divides
before mitosis begins.
3. Each centrosome contains a pair of barrel-shaped organelles called
centrioles.
4. The mitotic spindle contains many fibers, each composed of a bundle of
microtubules.
5. Microtubules are made of the protein tubulin.
a. Microtubules assemble when tubulin subunits join, disassemble when
tubulin subunits become free, and form interconnected filaments of
cytoskeleton.
b. Microtubules disassemble as spindle fibers form.
C. Phases of Mitosis
1. Mitosis is divided into five phases: prophase, prometaphase, metaphase,
anaphase, and telophase.
2. Prophase
a. Nuclear division is about to occur: chromatin condenses and chromosomes
become visible.
b. The nucleolus disappears and the nuclear envelope fragments.
57
c. Duplicated chromosomes are composed of two sister chromatids held
together by a centromere; chromosomes have no particular orientation in
the cell at this time.
d. The spindle begins to assemble as pairs of centrosomes migrate away from
each other.
e. An array of microtubules called asters radiates toward the plasma
membrane from the centrosomes.
3.
Prometaphase (Late Prophase)
a. Specialized protein complexes (kinetochores) develop on each side of the
centromere for future chromosome orientation.
b. An important event during prometaphase is attachment of the
chromosomes to the spindle and their movement as they align at the
metaphase plate (equator) of the spindle.
c. The kinetochores of sister chromatids capture kinetochore spindle fibers.
d. Chromosomes move back and forth toward alignment at the metaphase
plate.
4. Metaphase
a. Chromosomes, attached to kinetochore fibers, are now aligned at the
metaphase plate.
b. Non-attached spindle fibers, called polar spindle fibers, can reach beyond
the metaphase plate and overlap.
c. A cell checkpoint called the M checkpoint delays the start of anaphase
until kinetochores are properly attached to the spindle fibers, and
chromosomes are properly aligned along metaphase plate.
5. Anaphase
a. The two sister chromatids of each duplicated chromosome separate at the
centromere.
b. Daughter chromosomes, each with a centromere and single chromatid,
move to opposite poles.
1) Polar spindle fibers lengthen as they slide past each other.
2) Kinetochore spindle fibers disassemble at the kinetochores; this pulls
daughter chromosomes to poles.
3) The motor molecules kinesin and dynein are involved in this sliding
process.
4) Anaphase is the shortest stage of mitosis.
6. Telophase
a. Spindle disappears in this stage.
b. The nuclear envelope reforms around the daughter chromosomes.
c. The daughter chromosomes diffuse, again forming chromatin.
d. The nucleolus reappears in each daughter nucleus.
D. Cytokinesis in Animal and Plant Cells
1. Cytokinesis in Animal Cells
a. A cleavage furrow indents the plasma membrane between the two
daughter nuclei at a midpoint; this deepens to divide the cytoplasm during
cell division.
58
b. Cytoplasmic cleavage begins as anaphase draws to a close and organelles
are distributed.
c. The cleavage furrow deepens as a band of actin filaments, called the
contractile ring, constricts between the two daughter cells.
d. A narrow bridge exists between daughter cells during telophase until
constriction completely separates the cytoplasm.
2. Cytokinesis in Plant Cells
a. The rigid cell wall that surrounds plant cells does not permit cytokinesis
by furrowing.
b. The Golgi apparatus produces vesicles, which move along the
microtubules to a small flattened disc that has formed.
c. Vesicles fuse forming a cell plate; their membranes complete the plasma
membranes of the daughter cells.
d. The new membrane also releases molecules from the new plant cell walls;
the cell walls are strengthened by the addition of cellulose fibrils.
E. The Functions of Mitosis
1. Mitosis permits growth and repair.
2. In flowering plants, the meristematic tissue retains the ability to divide throughout
the life of the plant; this accounts for the continued growth, both in height and
laterally, of a plant.
3. In mammals, mitosis is necessary as a fertilized egg becomes an embryo and as
the embryo becomes a fetus; throughout life, mitosis allows a cut to heal or a
broken bone to mend.
F. Stem Cells
1. Many mammalian organs contain stem cells (or adult stem cells), which retain the
ability to divide.
2. Red bone marrow stem cells repeatedly divide to produce the various types of
blood cells.
3. Therapeutic cloning to produce human tissues can begin with either adult stem
cells or embryonic stem cells.
4. Embryonic stem cells can be used for reproductive cloning, the production of a
new individual.
G. Reproductive and Therapeutic Cloning (Science Focus box)
1. There are two types of cloning: reproductive cloning and therapeutic cloning
2. Reproductive (somatic cell) cloning
a. In reproductive cloning, the donor cells are first starved, then the neculeus is
taken out of cell and transplanted into enucleated egg.
b. The donor cell stopps dividing and goes into G0 stage.
c. Embryonic stem cells are formed and implanted into the embryo of a
surrogate mother.
d. When embryo is fully developed, a clone is born.
3. Therapeutic cloning
a. One way to conduct therapeutic cloning is by the same procedure as
reproductive cloning, embryonic stem cells are separated and subjected to
treatment that causes it to develop into different types of cells: red blood cells,
muscle cells, nerve cells.
59
b. The other way to conduct therapeutic cloning is to use adult stem cells.
c. One drawback to using adult stem cells is they are limited in the number of
cell types they may become. However, researchers are trying to overcome this
obstacle.
9.3 The Cell Cycle and Cancer
1. Cancer is a cellular growth disorder that occurs when cells divide uncontrollably;
i.e., cancer results from the loss of control and a disruption of the cell cycle.
2. Most cancers begin as abnormal cell growth that is benign, or not cancerous
3. When additional mutations occur, the growh becomes malignant, or cancerous
and possesses the ability to spread.
A. Characteristics of Cancer Cells
1. Cancer cells lack differentiation.
a. Unlike normal cells that differentiate into muscle or nerves cells, cancer
cells have an abnormal form and are nonspecialized.
b. Normal cells enter the cell cycle only about 50 times; cancer cells are
immortal in that they can enter the cell cycle repeatedly.
2. Cancer cells have abnormal nuclei.
a. The nuclei may be enlarged and may have an abnormal number of
chromosomes.
b. The chromosomes have mutated; some chromosomes may be duplicated
or deleted.
3. Cancer cells do not undergo apoptosis
a. Whereas ordinary cells with DNA damage undergo apoptosis, cancer cells
do not.
4. Cancer cells form tumors.
a. Normal cells are anchored and stop dividing when in contact with other
cells; i.e., they exhibit contact inhibition.
b. Cancer cells invade and destroy normal tissue and their growth is not
inhibited.
c. Cancer cells pile on top of each other to form a tumor.
5. Cancer cells undergo metastasis and angiogenesis.
a. A benign tumor is encapsulated and does not invade adjacent tissue.
b. Many types of cancer can undergo metastasis, in which new tumors form
which are distant from the primary tumor.
c. Angiogenesis, the formation of new blood vessels, is required to bring
nutrients and oxygen to the tumor.
B.
Origin of Cancer
1. Proto-oncogenes code for proteins that stimulate the cell cycle and prevent
apoptosis.
2. Tumor-suppressor genes code for proteins that inhibit the cell cycle and
promote apoptosis.
3. Mutations of either of these genes can cause cancer.
4. Proto-oncogenes are at the end of a stimulatory pathway from the plasma
membrane to the nucleus; a growth factor binding at the plasma membrane can
result in turning on an oncogene.
60
5. Proto-oncogenes can undergo mutation to become oncogenes (cancer-causing
genes).
6. An oncogene may code for a faulty receptor in the stimulatory pathway.
7. Or an oncogene can specify an abnormal protein product or abnormally high
levels of a normal product that stimulates the cell cycle.
8. Tumor-suppressor genes are at the end of an inhibitory pathway; a growthinhibitory factor can result in turning on a tumor suppressor gene that inhibits the
cell cycle.
9. The balance between stimulatory and inhibitory signals determines whether protooncogenes or tumor-suppressor genes are active, and therefore whether or not cell
division occurs.
10. Researchers have identified about a half dozen tumor-suppressor genes.
11. The RB tumor-suppressor gene prevents retinoblastoma, a cancer of the retina,
and has been found to malfunction in cancers of the breast, prostate, bladder, and
small-cell lung carcinoma.
12. The p53 tumor-suppressor gene is more frequently mutated in human cancers than
any other known gene; it normally functions to trigger cell cycle inhibitors and
stimulate apoptosis.
13. In some cancer cells, mutation of an enzyme that regulates the length of
telomeres causes the telomeres to remain at a constant length, which allos the
cancer cells to continue dividing.
9.4 Prokaryotic Cell Division
1. Unicellular organisms reproduce via asexual reproduction, in which the
offspring are
genetically identical to the parent.
A. The Prokaryotic Chromosome
1. Prokaryotic cells (bacteria and archaea) lack a nucleus and other membranous
organelles.
2. The prokaryotic chromosome is composed of DNA and associated proteins, but
much less protein than eukaryotic chromosomes.
3. The chromosome appears as a nucleoid, an irregular-shaped region that is not
enclosed by a membrane.
4. The chromosome is a circular loop attached to the inside of the plasma
membrane; it is about 1,000 times the length of the cell.
B. Binary Fission
1. Binary fission of prokaryotic cells produces two genetically identical daughter
cells.
2. Before cell division, DNA is replicated--both chromosomes are attached to a
special site inside the plasma membrane.
3. The two chromosomes separate as a cell lengthens and pulls them apart.
4. When the cell is approximately twice its original length, the plasma membrane
grows inward, a septum (consisting of new cell wall and plasma membrane)
forms, dividing the cell into two daughter cells.
5. The generation time of bacteria depends on the species and environmental
conditions; Escherichia coli’s generation time is about 20 minutes.
C. Comparing Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes
61
1. Both binary fission and mitosis ensure that each daughter cell is genetically
identical to the parent.
2. Bacteria and protists use asexual reproduction to produce identical offspring.
3. In multicellular fungi, plants, and animals, cell division is part of the growth
process that produces and repairs the organism.
4. Prokaryotes have a single chromosome with mostly DNA and some associated
protein; there is no spindle apparatus.
5. Eukaryotic cells have chromosomes with DNA and many associated proteins;
histone proteins organize the chromosome.
6. The spindle is involved in distributing the daughter chromosomes to the daughter
nuclei.
62
Chapter 10
10.1 Halving the Chromosome Number
1. Meiosis is nuclear division, reducing the chromosome number from the diploid (2n)
to the haploid (n) number.
2. The haploid (n) number is half of the diploid number of chromosomes.
3. Sexual reproduction requires gamete (reproductive cell, often sperm and egg)
formation and then fusion of gametes to form a zygote.
4. A zygote always has the full or diploid (2n) number of chromosomes.
5. If gametes contained same number of chromosomes as body cells, doubling would
soon fill cells.
A. Homologous Pairs of Chromosomes
1. In diploid body cells, chromosomes occur as pairs.
a. Each set of chromosomes is a homologous pair; each member is a homologous
chromosome or homologue.
b. Homologues look alike, have the same length and centromere position, and have a
similar banding pattern when stained.
c. A location on one homologue contains gene for the same trait that occurs at this
locus on the other homologue, although the genes may code for different
variations of that trait; alternate forms of a gene are called alleles.
2. Chromosomes duplicate immediately prior to nuclear division.
a. Duplication produces two identical parts called sister chromatids; they are held
together at the centromere.
3. One member of each homologous pair is inherited from the male parent, the other
member from the female parent.
4. One member of each homologous pair will be placed in each sperm or egg.
B. Overview of Meiosis
1. Meiosis involves two nuclear divisions and produces four haploid daughter cells.
2. Each daughter cell has half the number of chromosomes found in the diploid parent
nucleus.
3. Meiosis I is the nuclear division at the first meiotic division.
a. Prior to meiosis I, DNA replication occurs, each chromosome thus has two sister
chromatids.
b. During meiosis I, homologous chromosomes pair; this is called synapsis.
c. During synapsis, the two sets of paired chromosomes lay alongside each other as
a bivalent (sometimes called a tetrad).
4. In meiosis II, the centromeres divide and daughter chromosomes (derived as sister
chromatids) separate.
a. No replication of DNA is needed between meiosis I and II because chromosomes
are already doubled (DNA replication occurred prior to meiosis I).
b. Chromosomes in the four daughter cells have only one chromatid.
c. Counting the number of centromeres verifies that parent cells were diploid; each
daughter cell is haploid.
d. In the animal life cycle, daughter cells become gametes that fuse during
fertilization.
e. Fertilization restores the diploid number in cells.
C. Fate of Daughter Cells
63
1. In plant life cycle, daughter cells become haploid spores that germinate to become a
haploid generation.
2. In the animal life cycle, the daughter cells become the gametes, either sperm or egg.
10.2 Genetic Variation
A. Genetic Recombination
1. Due to genetic recombination, offspring have a different combination of genes than
their parents.
2. Without recombination, asexual organisms must rely on mutations to generate
variation among offspring; this is sufficient because they have great numbers of
offspring.
3. Meiosis brings about genetic recombination in two ways: crossing-over and
independent assortment.
4. Crossing-over of non-sister chromatids results in exchange of genetic material
between non-sister chromatids of a bivalent; this introduces variation.
5. At synapsis, homologous chromosomes are held in position by a nucleoprotein lattice
(the synaptonemal complex).
6. As the lattice of the synaptonemal complex breaks down at the beginning of anaphase
I, homologues are temporarily held together by chiasmata, regions where the nonsister chromatids are attached due to crossing-over.
7. The homologues separate and are distributed to daughter cells.
8. Due to this genetic recombination, daughter chromosomes derived from sister
chromatids are no longer identical.
B. Independent Assortment of Homologous Chromosomes
1. During independent assortment, the homologous chromosomes separate
independently or in a random manner.
2. Independent assortment in a cell with only three pairs of chromosomes is 23 or eight
combinations of maternal and paternal chromosomes.
C. Significance of Genetic Variation
1. In humans with 23 pairs of chromosomes, the combinations possible are 223 or
8,388,608, and this does not consider the variation from crossing-over.
2. When gametes fuse at fertilization, chromosomes donated by parents combine.
3. The chromosomally different zygotes from same parents have (223)2 or
70,368,744,000,000 combinations possible without crossing-over.
4. If crossing-over occurs once, then (423)2 or 4,951,760,200,000,000,000,000,000,000
genetically different zygotes are possible for one couple.
5. A successful parent in a particular environment can reproduce asexually and produce
offspring adapted to that environment.
6. If the environment changes, differences among offspring provide the sexual parents
with much improved chances of survival.
10.3 The Phases of Meiosis
1. Both meiosis I and meiosis II have four phases: prophase, metaphase anaphase, and
telophase.
A. Prophase I
1. Nuclear division is about to occur: nucleolus disappears; nuclear envelope fragments;
centrosomes migrate away from each other; and spindle fibers assemble.
2. Homologous chromosomes undergo synapsis to form bivalents; crossing-over may
64
occur at this time in which case sister chromatids are no longer identical.
3. Chromatin condenses and chromosomes become microscopically visible.
B. Metaphase I
1. Bivalents held together by chiasmata have moved toward the metaphase plate at the
equator of the spindle.
2. In metaphase I, there is a fully formed spindle and alignment of the bivalents at the
metaphase plate.
3. Kinetochores, protein complexes just outside the centromeres attach to spindle fibers
called kinetochore spindle fibers.
4. Bivalents independently align themselves at the metaphase plate of the spindle.
5. Maternal and paternal homologues of each bivalent may be oriented toward either
pole.
C. Anaphase I
1. The homologues of each bivalent separate and move toward opposite poles.
2. Each chromosome still has two chromatids.
D. Telophase I
1. In animals, this stage occurs at the end of meiosis I.
2. When it occurs, the nuclear envelope reforms and nucleoli reappear.
3. This phase may or may not be accompanied by cytokinesis.
E. Interkinesis
1. This period between meiosis I and II is similar to the interphase between mitotic
divisions; however, no DNA replication occurs (the chromosomes are already
duplicated).
F. Meiosis II and Gamete Formation
1. During metaphase II, the haploid number of chromosomes align at the metaphase
plate.
2. During anaphase II, the sister chromatids separate at the centromeres; the two
daughter chromosomes move toward the poles.
3. Due to crossing-over, each gamete can contain chromosomes with different types of
genes.
4. At the end of telophase II and cytokinesis, there are four haploid cells.
5. In animals, the haploid cells mature and develop into gametes.
6. In plants, the daughter cells become spores and divide to produce a haploid
generation; these haploid cells fuse to become a zygote that develops into a diploid
generation.
7. The type of life cycle of alternating haploid and diploid generations is called
alternation of generations.
10.4 Meiosis Compared to Mitosis
1. Meiosis requires two nuclear divisions; mitosis requires only one nuclear division.
2. Meiosis produces four daughter nuclei and four daughter cells; mitosis produces only
two.
3. The daughter cells produced by meiosis are haploid; the daughter cells produced by
mitosis are diploid.
4. The daughter cells produced by meiosis are not genetically identical; the daughter
cells produced by mitosis are genetically identical to each other and to the parental
cell.
65
A Occurrence
1. In humans, meiosis occurs only in reproductive organs to produce gametes.
2. Mitosis occurs in all tissues for growth and repair.
B. Meiosis I Compared to Mitosis
1. DNA is replicated only once before both mitosis and meiosis; in mitosis there is only
one nuclear division; in meiosis there are two nuclear divisions.
2. During prophase I of meiosis, homologous chromosomes pair and undergo crossingover; this does not occur during mitosis.
3. During metaphase I of meiosis, bivalents align at the metaphase plate; in mitosis
individual chromosomes align.
4. During anaphase I in meiosis, homologous chromosomes (with centromeres intact)
separate and move to opposite poles; in mitosis at this stage, sister chromatids
separate and move to opposite poles.
C. Meiosis II Compared to Mitosis
1. Events of meiosis II are the same stages as in mitosis.
2. However, in meiosis II, the nuclei contain the haploid number of chromosomes.
10.5 The Human Life Cycle
1. Life cycle refers to all reproductive events between one generation and next.
2. In animals, the adult is always diploid [Instructors note: some bees, etc. have haploid
male adults].
3. In plants, there are two adult stages: one is diploid (called the sporophyte) and one is
haploid (called the gametophyte).
4. Mosses are haploid most of their cycle; the majority of higher plants are diploid most
of their cycle.
5. In fungi and some algae, only the zygote is diploid, and it undergoes meiosis.
6. In human males, meiosis is part of spermatogenesis (the production of sperm), and
occurs in the testes.
7. In human females, meiosis is part of oogenesis (the production of eggs), and occurs in
the ovaries.
8. After birth, mitotic cell division is involved in growth and tissue regeneration of
somatic tissue.
A. Spermatogenesis and Oogenesis in Humans
1. Spermatogenesis
a. In the testes of males, primary spermatocytes with 46 chromosomes undergo
meiosis I to form two secondary spermatocytes, each with 23 duplicated
chromosomes.
b. Secondary spermatocytes divide (meiosis II) to produce four spermatids, also
with 23 daughter chromosomes.
c. Spermatids then differentiate into sperm (spermatozoa).
d. Meiotic cell division in males always results in four cells that become sperm.
2. Oogenesis
a. In the ovaries of human females, primary oocytes with 46 chromosomes undergo
meiosis I to form two cells, each with 23 duplicated chromosomes.
b. One of the cells, a secondary oocyte, receives almost all the cytoplasm; the other
cell, a polar body, disintegrates or divides again.
c. The secondary oocyte begins meiosis II and then stops at metaphase II.
66
d. At ovulation, the secondary oocyte leaves the ovary and enters an oviduct where it
may meet a sperm.
e. If a sperm enters secondary oocyte, the oocyte is activated to continue meiosis II
to completion; the result is a mature egg and another polar body, each with 23
daughter chromosomes.
f. Meiosis produces one egg and three polar bodies; polar bodies serve to discard
unnecessary chromosomes and retain most of the cytoplasm in the egg.
g. The cytoplasm serves as a source of nutrients for the developing embryo.
10.6 Change in Chromosome Number and Structure
A. Aneuploidy
1. Chromosomal mutations are changes in chromosome number or structure.
2. Mutations, along with crossing-over, recombination of chromosomes during meiosis,
and gamete fusion during fertilization, increase the amount of variation among
offspring.
3. The correct number of chromosomes in a species is called euploidy; changes in
chromosome number resulting from nondisjunction during meiosis is called
aneuploidy.
4. Monosomy (2n – 1) occurs when an individual has only one of a particular type of
chromosome.
5. Trisomy (2n + 1)occurs when an individual has three of a particular type of
chromosome.
6. Nondisjunction is the failure of chromosomes to separate at meiosis—both members
of the homologous pair go into the same gamete.
a. Primary nondisjunction occurs during meiosis I when both members of a
homologous pair go into the same daughter cell
b. Secondary nondisjunction occurs during meiosis II when the sister chromatids
fail to separate and both daughter chromosomes go into the same gamete.
7. Monosomy and trisomy occur in plants and animals; in autosomes of animals, it is
generally lethal.
8. Trisomy 21 is the most common autosomal trisomy.
a. Trisomy 21 (also called Down syndrome) occurs when three copies of
chromosome 21 are present.
b. Usually two copies of chromosome 21 are contributed by the egg; in 23% of the
cases, the sperm had the extra chromosome 21.
c. A Down syndrome child has many characteristic signs and symptoms, including a
tendency for leukemia, cataracts, faster aging, mental retardation, and an
increased chance of developing Alzheimer disease later in life.
d. Chances of a woman having a Down syndrome child increase with age.
e. A karyotype, a visual display of the chromosomes arranged by shape, size, and
banding pattern, may be performed to identify babies with Down syndrome and
other aneuploid conditions.
9. Nondisjunction during oogenesis can result in too few or too many X chromosomes;
nondisjunction during spermatogenesis can result in missing or too many Y
chromosomes.
10. Turner syndrome females have only one sex chromosome, an X; thus, they are XO,
with O signifying the absence of a second sex chromosome.
67
a. Turner females are short, have a broad chest and folds of skin on back of neck.
b. Ovaries of Turner females never become functional; therefore, females do not
undergo puberty.
c. They usually have normal intelligence and can lead fairly normal lives with
hormone supplements.
11. Klinefelter syndrome males have one Y chromosome and two or more X
chromosomes (e.g., XXY).
a. Affected individuals are sterile males; the testes and prostate are underdeveloped.
b. Individuals have large hands and feet, long arms and legs, and lack facial hair.
c. Presence of the Y chromosome drives male formation but more than two X
chromosomes may result in mental retardation.
d. A Barr body, usually only seen in the nuclei of a female’s cells, is seen in this
syndrome due to the two X chromosomes.
12. Poly-X females (or superfemale) have three or more X chromosomes and therefore
extra Barr bodies in the nucleus.
a. There is no increased femininity; most lack any physical abnormalities.
b. XXX individuals are not mentally retarded but may have delayed motor and
language development; XXXX females are usually tall and severely mentally
retarded.
c. Some experience menstrual irregularities but many menstruate regularly and are
fertile.
13. Jacobs syndrome (XYY) are males with two Y chromosomes instead of one.
a. This results from nondisjunction during spermatogenesis.
b. Males are usually taller than average, suffer from persistent acne, and tend to
have speech and reading problems.
c. Earlier claims that XYY individuals were likely to be aggressive were not correct.
B. Living with Klinefleter Syndrome (Health Focus box)
1. Stefan Schwartz is a man who has Klinefleter syndrome.
2. As a child, some of his symptoms included being shy, trouble making friends, and
emotional instability.
3. Teacher and doctors thought he had “learning disabilities,” and was lazy.
4. Eventually a doctor tested his blood and discovered he had Klineflter Sydrome, a
genetic disorder having sex chromosomes XXY.
5. Physical treatment can include testosterone injection. Emotional treatment can
include support groups.
C. Changes in Chromosome Structure
1. Environmental factors including radiation, chemicals, and viruses, can cause
chromosomes to break; if the broken ends do not rejoin in the same pattern, this
causes a change in chromosomal structure.
2. Deletion: a type of mutation in which an end of a chromosome breaks off or when
two simultaneous breaks lead to the loss of a segment.
3. Translocation: a chromosomal segment is removed from one chromosome and
inserted into another nonhomologous chromosome; in Down syndrome, 5% of cases
are due to a translocation between chromosome 21 and 14, a situation that runs in the
family of the father or mother.
4. Duplication: the presence of a chromosomal segment more than once on the same
68
chromosome.
a. A broken segment from one chromosome can simply attach to its homologue or
unequal crossing-over may occur.
b. A duplication may also involve an inversion where a segment that has become
separated from the chromosome is reinserted at the same place but in reverse; the
position and sequence of genes are altered.
D. Human Syndromes
1. Deletion Syndromes
a. Williams syndrome occurs when chromosome 7 loses an end piece: children look
like pixies, have poor academic skills but good verbal and musical skills; lack of
elastin causes cardiovascular problems and skin aging.
b. Cri du chat syndrome (“cry of the cat”) is a deletion in which an individual has a
small head, is mentally retarded, has facial abnormalities, and an abnormal glottis
and larynx resulting in a cry resembling that of a cat.
2. Translocation Syndromes
a. If a translocation results in the normal amount of genetic material, the person will
remain healthy; if a person inherits only one of the translocated chromosomes,
that person may have only one allele or three alleles rather than the normal two.
b. In Alagille syndrome, chromosomes 2 and 20 exchange segments, causing a small
deletion on chromosome 20 that may produce some abnormalities.
69
Chapter 11
11.1 Gregor Mendel
A. The Blending Concept of Inheritance
1. This theory stated that offspring would have traits intermediate between those of the
parents.
2. Red and white flowers produce pink flowers; any return to red or white offspring was
considered instability in the genetic material.
3. Charles Darwin wanted to develop a theory of evolution based on hereditary
principles; blending theory was of no help.
a. A blending theory did not account for variation (differences) and could not
explain species diversity.
B. Mendel’s Particulate Theory of Inheritance
1. Mendel was an Austrian monk.
2. Mendel formulated two fundamental laws of heredity in the early 1860s.
3. He had previously studied science and mathematics at the University of Vienna.
4. At time of his research, he was a substitute science teacher at a local technical high
school.
5. Because Mendel had a mathematical background, he used a statistical basis for his
breeding experiments.
6. Mendel’s particulate theory is based on the existence of minute particles—now called
genes.
C. Mendel Worked with the Garden Pea
1. Mendel prepared his experiments carefully and conducted preliminary studies.
a. He chose the garden pea, Pisum sativum, because peas were easy to cultivate, had
a short generation time, and could be cross-pollinated by hand.
b. From many varieties, Mendel chose 22 true-breeding varieties for his
experiments.
c. True-breeding varieties had all offspring like the parents and like each other.
d. Mendel studied simple traits (e.g., seed shape and color, flower color, etc.).
2. He used his understanding of mathematical principles of probability to interpret
results.
11.2 Mendel’s Law
A. Law of Segregation
1. Mendel confirmed that his tall plants always had tall offspring, i.e., were truebreeding, before crossing two different strains that differed in only one trait—this is
called a monohybrid cross.
2. A monohybrid cross is between two parent organisms true-breeding for two distinct
forms of one trait.
3. Mendel tracked each trait through two generations.
a. P generation is the parental generation in a breeding experiment.
b. F1 generation is the first-generation offspring in a breeding experiment.
c. F2 generation is the second-generation offspring in a breeding experiment.
4. He performed reciprocal crosses, i.e. pollen of tall plant to stigma of short plant
and vice versa.
5. His results were contrary to those predicted by a blending theory of inheritance.
6. He found that the F1 plants resembled only one of the parents.
70
7. Characteristics of other parent reappeared in about 1/4 of F2 plants; 3/4 of offspring
resembled the F1 plants.
8. Mendel saw that these 3:1 results were possible if:
a. F1 hybrids contained two factors for each trait, one being dominant and the other
recessive;
b. factors separated when gametes were formed; a gamete carried one copy of each
factor;
c. and random fusion of all possible gametes occurred upon fertilization.
9. Results of his experiments led Mendel to develop his first law of inheritance—the
law of segregation:
a. Each organism contains two factors for each trait.
b. Factors segregate in the formation of gametes.
c. Each gamete contains one factor for each trait.
d. Fertilization gives each new individual two factors for each trait.
B. Mendel’s Cross as Viewed by Classical Genetics
1. The gene locus is the specific location of alleles on homologous chromosomes.
2. Alternate versions of a genes are called alleles.
3. A dominant allele masks or hides expression of a recessive allele; it is represented
by an uppercase letter.
4. A recessive allele is an allele that exerts its effect only in the homozygous state; its
expression is masked by a dominant allele; it is represented by a lowercase letter.
5. The process of meiosis explains Mendel’s law of segregation.
6. In Mendel’s cross, the parents were true-breeding; each parent had two identical
alleles for a trait–they were homozygous, indicating they possess two identical alleles
for a trait.
7. Homozygous dominant genotypes possess two dominant alleles for a trait.
8. Homozygous recessive genotypes possess two recessive alleles for a trait.
9. After cross-pollination, all individuals of the F1 generation had one of each type of
allele.
10. Heterozygous genotypes possess one of each allele for a particular trait.
11. The allele not expressed in a heterozygote is a recessive allele.
C. Genotype Versus Phenotype
1. Two organisms with different allele combinations can have the same outward
appearance (e.g., TT and Tt pea plants are both tall; therefore, it is necessary to
distinguish between alleles present and the appearance of the organism).
2. Genotype refers to the alleles an individual receives at fertilization (dominant,
recessive).
3. Phenotype refers to the physical appearance of the individual (tall, short, etc.).
D. Mendel’s Law of Independent Assortment
1. This two-trait (dihybrid) cross is between two parent organisms that are truebreeding for different forms of two traits; it produces offspring heterozygous for both
traits.
2. Mendel observed that the F1 individuals were dominant in both traits.
3.. He further noted four phenotypes among F2 offspring; he deduced second law of
heredity.
4. Mendel’s law of independent assortment states that members of one pair of factors
71
assort independently of members of another pair, and that all combinations of factors
occur in gametes.
5. The law of independent assortment only applies to alleles on different chromosomes.
6. A phenotypic ratio of 9:3:3:1 is expected when heterozygotes for two traits are
crossed and simple dominance is present for both genes.
7. Independent assortment during meiosis explains these results.
E. Mendel’s Laws and Meiosis (Science Focus box)
1. Scientists now know that Mendel’s laws hold true because of meiosis.
2. For example, a parent cell will have two pairs of homologous chromosomes.
3. During metaphase I, all alignments of homologous chromosomes can occur,
following the lines of Mendel’s law of independent assortment.
4. During metaphase II, there is only one member of each homologous pair, following
the lines of Mendel’s law of segregation.
5. All possible gametes result since one daughter cell has both dominant alleles (AB),
one daughter cell has both recessive alleles (ab), and two daughter cells have one
dominant and one recessive allele (Ab and aB), following Mendel’s two laws.
F. Mendel’s Law of Probability
1. A Punnett square is used for two-trait crosses.
2. Probability is the likely outcome a given event will occur from random chance.
a. For example, with every coin flip there is a 50% chance of heads and 50% chance
of tails.
3. The product rule of probability states that the chance of two or more independent
events occurring together is the product of the probability of the events occurring
separately.
a. The chance of inheriting a specific allele from one parent and a specific allele
from another is ½ x ½ or 1/4.
b. Possible combinations for the alleles Ee of heterozygous parents are the
following:
EE = ½ x ½ = 1/4
eE = ½ x ½ = 1/4
Ee = ½ x ½ = 1/4
ee = ½ x ½ =
¼
4. The sum law of probability calculates the probability of an event that occurs in two or
more independent ways; it is the sum of individual probabilities of each way an event
can occur; in the above example where unattached earlobes are dominant (EE, Ee,
and eE), the chance for unattached earlobes is 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4 = 3/4.
G. Testcrosses
1. A testcross is used to determine if an individual with the dominant phenotype is
homozygous dominant or heterozygous for a particular trait.
2. By Mendel performing a testcross, the law of segregation was supported.
3. A one-trait testcross is used between an individual with dominant phenotype and an
individual with a recessive phenotype to see if the individual with dominant
phenotype is homozygous or heterozygous.
4. A two-trait testcross tests if individuals showing two dominant characteristics are
homozygous for both or for one trait only, or heterozygous for both.
a. If an organism heterozygous for two traits is crossed with another recessive for both
traits, the expected phenotypic ratio is 1:1:1:1.
b. In dihybrid genetics problems, the individual has four alleles, two for each trait.
72
H. Mendel’s Laws and Human Genetic Disorders
1. Genetic disorders are medical conditions caused by alleles inherited from parents.
2. An autosome is any chromosome other than a sex (X or Y) chromosome.
3. In a pedigree chart, males are designated by squares, females by circles; shaded circles
and squares are affected individuals; line between square and circle represents a union;
vertical line leads to offspring.
4. A carrier is a heterozygous individual with no apparent abnormality but able to pass on
an allele for a recessively-inherited genetic disorder.
5. Autosomal dominant and autosomal recessive alleles have different patterns of
inheritance.
a. Characteristics of autosomal dominant disorders
1)
Affected children usually have an affected parent.
2)
Heterozygotes are affected.: two affected parents can produce
unaffected child; two unaffected parents will not have affected children.
b. Characteristics of autosomal recessive disorders
1)
Most affected children have normal parents since heterozygotes
have a normal phenotype.
2)
Two affected parents always produce an affected child.
3)
Close relatives who reproduce together are more likely to have
affected children.
I. Autosomal Recessive Disorders
1. Methemoglobinemia
a. Relatively harmless disorder resulting from an accumulation of methemoglobin in
the blood.
b. Cause and genetic link still remain a mystery.
c. Symptoms include bluish-purple skin due to inability to clear abmornal blue
protein from blood.
d. People with methemoglobinemia lack the enzyme diaphorase, which is coded for
by a gene on chromosome 22.
2. Cystic Fibrosis
a. This is the most common lethal genetic disease in Caucasians in the U.S.
b. About 1 in 20 Caucasians is a carrier, and about 1 in 3,000 newborns has this
disorder.
c. An increased production of a viscous form of mucus in the lungs and pancreatic
ducts is seen.
1) The resultant accumulation of mucus in the respiratory tract interferes with
gas exchange.
2) Digestive enzymes must be mixed with food to supplant the pancreatic juices.
d. New treatments have raised the average life expectancy to up to 35 years.
e. Chloride ions (Cl–) fail to pass plasma membrane proteins.
f. Since water normally follows Cl–, lack of water in the lungs causes thick mucus.
g. The cause is a gene on chromosome 7; attempts to insert the gene into nasal
epithelium has had little success.
h. Genetic testing for adult carriers and fetuses is possible.
3. Niemann-Pick Disease
a. Infant symptoms include jaundice, difficulty feeding, enlarged abdomen, and
73
pronounced mental retardation.
b. Type A and B forms of Niemann-Pick disease are caused by defective versions of
the same gene located on chromosome 11.
c. This disease is marked by the inability to break down lipids. Lipid droplets
accumulate in liver, lymph nodes, and spleen, and in severe cases, the brain.
J. Autosomal Dominant Disorders
1. Osteogenesis Imperfecta
a. This is an autosomal dominant disorder that affects one in 5,000 newborns and is
distributed equally around the world.
b. Affected individuals have weakened, brittle bones. Additional symptoms include
unusual blue tine in the sclerea of the eye, reduced skin elasticity, weakened teeth,
and sometimes heart valve abnormalities.
c. The disease may be treated by long-term medicine.
2. Hereditary Spherocytosis
a. This genetic blood disorder results from a defective copy of a gene found on
chromosome 8.
b. Symptoms include: spherical shape of red blood cells, and enlarged spleen.
c. Hereditary spherocytosis affects 1 in 5,000 people and is one of the most common
hereditary blood disorders.
H. Testing for Genetic Disorders (Science Focus box)
1. Two genetic disorders resulting from faulty genes are Huntington disease and cystic
fibrosis.
2 Researchers are tests that can detect particular DNA base sequencing that may be able to
identify individuals who may either have a genetic disease or if they are carriers to a
particular genetic disease.
a. A carrier is a person who does not exhibit traits of the disease, but who has the
potential of passing the recessive allele of a genetic disorder.
3. In order to develop a test for a particular genetic disorder, scientists must first obtain
family pedigrees.
a. Family pedigrees trace particular genes through many family generations.
b. In the example of Huntington disease, the family pedigree illustrated that the
offspring of an affected individual has a 50% of having the disease.
c. When blood testing can be conducted, DNA base sequencing is determined and
compared to see if there are similarities in base sequencing with people who have the
disease.
d. However, this gene is only linked to the disease and not the disease itself.
e. More than one allele can occure on the same chromosome, meaning the alleles are
linked.
f. Linked alleles are found together on the same gamete. However, even though they
are considered to be linked, crossing over and unlinking can occur.
4. Assocation studies are another method to discover potential base sequencing to identify
if an individual has a genetic disorder.
a. DNA of the general population is tested to identify similar base sequences.
b. The exploration of the human genome project has made it possible to identify genes
that may be linked to particular genetic disorders.
5. Base sequencing identification can be used for prenatal testing and carrier testing.
74
11.3 Extending the Range of Mendelian Genetics
A. Multiple Allelic Traits
1. This occurs when a gene has many allelic forms or alternative expressions.
2. ABO Blood Types
a. The ABO system of human blood types is a multiple allele system.
b. Two dominant alleles (IA and IB) code for presence of A and B glycoproteins on
red blood cells.
c. This also includes a recessive allele (iO) coding for no A or B glycoproteins on red
blood cells.
d. As a result, there are four possible phenotypes (blood types): A, B, AB, and O
e. This is a case of codominance, where both alleles are fully expressed.
3. The Rh factor is inherited independently from the ABO system; the Rh+ allele is
dominant.
B. Incomplete Dominance and Incomplete Penetrance
1. Incomplete dominance: offspring show traits intermediate between two parental
phenotypes.
a. True-breeding red and white-flowered four-o’clocks produce pink-flowered
offspring.
b. Incomplete dominance has a biochemical basis; the level of gene-directed protein
production may be between that of the two homozygotes.
c. One allele of a heterozygous pair only partially dominates expression of its
partner.
d. This does not support a blending theory; parental phenotypes reappear in F2
generation.
2. Human Examples of Incomplete Dominance
a. Curly versus Straight Hair
1) A curly-haired Caucasian and a straight-haired Caucasian will have wavyhaired offspring.
2) Two wavy-haired parents will produce a 1:2:1 ratio of curly-wavy-straight
hair children.
b. Cystic fibrosis is considered an example of incomplete dominance.
3. Incomplete penetrance: offspring does not always show dominant allele.
a. Polydactyly is an example of incomplete penetrance.
C. Pleioptropic Effects
1. Pleiotropy describesva gene that affects more than one characteristic of an
individual.
2. Examples include Marfan syndrome, porphyria, and sickle-cell anemia.
3. Marfan syndrome
a. The gene is on chromosome 15
b. symptoms include disproportionately long arms, legs, hands, and feet; weakened
aorta; poor eyesight.
4. Porphyria
a. This disease is caused by a chemical insufficiency in the production of
hemoglobin.
b. Symptoms include photosensitivity, strong abdominal pain, port-wine-colored
urine, paralysis in arms and legs.
75
5. Sickle-cell anemia
a. This disease is the most common inherited disorder in blacks, affecting about 1 in
500 African Americans.
b. The gene is on chromosome 11.
c. In affected individuals, the red blood cells are shaped like sickles—an abnormal
hemoglobin molecule, Hbs, causes the defect.
1) Normal hemoglobin, HbA, differs from Hbs by one amino acid in the protein
globin.
d. Sickling of the red blood cells occurs when the oxygen content of the person’s
blood is low, thereby slowing down blood flow and clogging small vessels.
e. Signs and symptoms include anemia, weakness, fever, pain, rheumatism, low
resistance to disease, kidney and heart failure.
f. Treatment includes pain management, blood transfusions, and bone marrow
transplants.
g. The disease can be diagnosed prenatally.
h. Individuals with the sickle cell trait (carriers), who normally do not have any
sickle-shaped cells unless they experience dehydration or mild oxygen
deprivation, are resistant to the disease malaria.
D. Polygenic Inheritance
1. Polygenic inheritance occurs when one trait is governed by two or more sets of
alleles.
2. Dominant alleles have a quantitative effect on the phenotype: each adds to the effect.
3. The more genes involved, the more continuous is the variation in phenotypes,
resulting in a bell-shaped curve.
4. Multifactorial traits are controlled by polygenes subject to environmental
influences.
a. The coats of Siamese cats and Himalayan rabbits have darker tipped ears, nose,
paws, etc. due to the enzyme encoded by an allele which is only active at the
extremities at low temperatures.
5. Human Examples of Polygenic Inheritance
a. A hybrid cross for skin color provides a range of intermediates.
b. Parents with intermediate skin color can produce children with the full range of
skin colors.
c. Other examples include cleft lip, clubfoot, congenital dislocations of the hip,
hypertension, diabetes, schizophrenia, allergies and cancers.
d. Behavioral traits including suicide, phobias, alcoholism, and homosexuality may
be associated with particular genes but are not likely completely predetermined.
e. All behavioral traits are partly heritable, and genes work together and are
susceptible to environmental influences.
E. X-Linked Inheritance
1. Sex chromosomes in the human female are XX; those of the male are XY.
2. Males produce X-containing and Y-containing gametes; therefore males determine the
sex of offspring.
3. Besides genes that determine sex, sex chromosomes carry many genes for traits unrelated
to sex.
4. An X-linked gene is any gene located on X chromosome; used to describe genes on X
76
chromosome that are missing on the Y chromosome.
5. Work with fruit flies (Drosophila) by Thomas Hunt Morgan (early 1900s) confirmed
genes were on chromosomes.
a. Fruit flies are easily and inexpensively raised in common laboratory glassware.
b. Females only mate once and lay hundreds of eggs.
c. The fruit fly generation time is short, allowing rapid experiments.
6. Fruit flies have an XY sex chromosome system similar to the human system; experiments
can be correlated to the human situation.
a. Newly discovered mutant male fruit flies had white eyes.
b. Cross of the hybrids from the white-eyed male crossed with a dominant red-eyed
female yielded the expected 3:1 red-to-white ratio; however, all of the white-eyed
flies were males.
c. An allele for eye color on the X but not on the Y chromosome supports the results
of this cross.
d. Behavior of this allele corresponds to the behavior of the chromosome; this
confirmed the chromosomal theory of inheritance.
7. Solving X-Linked Genetic Problems
a. X-linked alleles are designated as superscripts to the X chromosome.
b. Heterozygous females are carriers; they do not show the trait but can transmit it.
c. Males are never carriers but express the one allele on the X chromosome; the
allele could be dominant or recessive.
d. One form of color-blindness is X-linked recessive.
F. Human X-Linked Disorders
1. More males have X-linked traits because recessive alleles on the X chromosome in
males are expressed in males.
2. Color Blindness
a. Color blindness can be an X-linked recessive disorder involving mutations of
genes coding for green or red sensitive cone cells, resulting in the inability to
perceive green or red, respectively; the pigment for blue-sensitive protein is
autosomal.
b. About 8% of Caucasian men have red-green color blindness.
3. Menkes Syndrome (kinky hair syndrome)
a. Caused by a defective allele on the X chromosome.
b. Symptoms include: poor muscle tone, seizures, low body temperature, skeletal
abnormalities, and brittle, steely hair.
c. Treatments include copper injections, but prognosis is poor and many individuals
die within the first few years of life.
4. Muscular Dystrophy
a. Duchenne muscular dystrophy is the most common form and is characterized by
wasting away of muscles, eventually leading to death; it affects one out of every
3,600 male births.
b. This X-linked recessive disease involves a mutant gene that fails to produce the
protein dystrophin.
c. Signs and symptoms (e.g., waddling gait, toe walking, frequent falls, difficulty in
rising) soon appear.
d. Muscles weaken until the individual is confined to a wheelchair; death usually
77
occurs by age 20.
e. Affected males are rarely fathers; the gene passes from carrier mother to carrier
daughter.
f. Lack of dystrophin protein causes calcium ions to leak into muscle cells; this
promotes action of an enzyme that dissolves muscle fibers.
g. As the body attempts to repair tissue, fibrous tissue forms and cuts off blood
supply to the affected muscles.
h. A test now detects carriers of Duchenne muscular dystrophy; treatments are being
attempted.
7. Adrenoleukodystrophy (ADL)
a. This disease is an X-linked recessive disorder.
b. Fatty acids are not broken down and severe nervous system damage occurs.
c. Symptoms include failure to properly develop after the age of five, loss of adrenal
gland function, exhibit poor coordination, show progressive loss of hearing,
speech, vision.
6. Hemophilia
a. About one in 10,000 males is a hemophiliac with impaired ability of blood to clot.
b. The two common types: Hemophilia A, due to the absence of clotting factor IX;
Hemophilia B, due to the absence of clotting factor VIII.
c. Hemophiliacs bleed externally after an injury and also suffer internal bleeding
around joints.
d. Hemorrhages stop with transfusions of blood (or plasma) or concentrates of
clotting protein.
e. Factor VIII is now available as a genetically-engineered product.
f. Of Queen Victoria’s 26 offspring, five grandsons had hemophilia and four
granddaughters were carriers.
78
Chapter 12
12.1 The Genetic Material
1. Early researchers knew that the genetic material must be:
a. able to store information used to control both the development and the metabolic
activities of cells;
b. stable so it can be replicated accurately during cell division and be transmitted for
generations; and,
c. able to undergo mutations providing the genetic variability required for evolution.
A. Transformation of Bacteria
1. Bacteriologist Frederick Griffith (1931) experimented with Streptococcus
pneumoniae (a pneumococcus that causes pneumonia in mammals).
2. Mice were injected with two strains of pneumococcus: an encapsulated (S) strain and
a non-encapsulated (R) strain.
a. The S strain is virulent (the mice died); it has a mucous capsule and forms “shiny”
colonies.
b. The R strain is not virulent (the mice lived); it has no capsule and forms “dull”
colonies.
3. In an effort to determine if the capsule alone was responsible for the virulence of the
S strain, he injected mice with heat-killed S strain bacteria; the mice lived.
4. Finally, he injected mice with a mixture of heat-killed S strain and live R strain
bacteria.
a. The mice died; living S strain pneumococcus were recovered from their bodies.
b. Griffith concluded that some substance necessary for synthesis of the capsule-and therefore for virulence--must pass from dead S strain bacteria to living R
strain bacteria so the R strain were transformed.
c. This change in phenotype of the R strain must be due to a change in the bacterial
genotype, suggesting that the transforming substance passed from S strain to R
strain.
B. DNA: The Transforming Substance
1. Oswald Avery et al. (1944) reported that the transforming substance was DNA.
2.
In the early twentieth century, it was shown that nucleic acids contain four types
of nucleotides.
a. DNA was composed of repeating units, each of which always had just one of each
of four different nucleotides (a nitrogenous base, a phosphate, and a pentose).
b. In this model, DNA could not vary between species and therefore could not be the
genetic material; therefore some other protein component was expected to be the
genetic material.
3. Purified DNA is capable of bringing about the transformation. Evidence:
a. DNA from S strain pneumococcus causes R strain bacteria to be transformed.
b. Digestion of the transforming substance with enzyme that digests DNA prevents
transformation.
c. The molecular weight of the transforming substance is great enough for some
genetic variability.
d. Enzymes that degrade proteins cannot prevent transformation, nor can enzymes
that digest RNA.
4. Avery’s experimental results demonstrated DNA is genetic material and DNA
79
controls biosynthetic properties of a cell.
C. Transformation of Organisms Today
1. Transformation experiments today are important especially in biotechnology labs.
2. Transformation of organisms are being used in commercial products.
3. In order to illustrate that transferring genes was possible from one organism to
another, scientists used a green fluorescent protein from jellyfish and transferred it to
other organisms. The result was that these organisms glowed in the dark.
4. Mammalian genes have the ability to function in other species: bacteria, invertebrates,
plants.
D. The Structure of DNA
1. Erwin Chargaff (1940s) analyzed the base content of DNA.
2. It was known DNA contained four different nucleotides:
a. two with purine bases, adenine (A) and guanine (G); a purine is a type of nitrogencontaining base having a double-ring structure.
b. two with pyrimidine bases, thymine (T) and cytosine (C); a pyrimidine is a type of
nitrogen-containing base having a single-ring structure.
3. Results: DNA does have the variability necessary for the genetic material, and,
4. For a species, DNA has the constancy required of genetic material.
5. This constancy is given in Chargaff’s rules:
a. The amount of A, T, G, and C in DNA varies from species to species.
b. In each species, the amount of A = T and the amount of G = C (A +G = T +C).
6. The tetranucleotide hypothesis (proposing DNA was repeating units of one of four bases)
was disproved: each species has its own constant base composition.
7. The variability is in base sequences is staggering; a human chromosome contains about
140 million base pairs.
8. Since any of the four possible nucleotides can be present at each nucleotide position, the
6
total number of possible nucleotide sequences is 4140 x 10 = 4140,000,000.
9. Rosalind Franklin produced X-ray diffraction photographs.
10. Franklin’s work provided evidence that DNA had the following features:
a. DNA is a helix.
b. Some portion of the helix is repeated.
11. American James Watson joined with Francis H. C. Crick in England to work on the
structure of DNA.
12. Watson and Crick received the Nobel Prize in 1962 for their model of DNA.
13. Using information generated by Chargaff and Franklin, Watson and Crick constructed a
model of DNA as a double helix with sugar-phosphate groups on the outside, and
paired bases on the inside.
14. Their model was consistent with both Chargaff’s rules and Franklin’s X-ray diffraction
studies.
15.
Complementary base pairing is the paired relationship between purines and
pyrimidines in DNA: A is hydrogen-bonded to T and G is hydrogen-bonded to C.
12.2 Replication of DNA
1. DNA replication is the process of copying a DNA molecule. Replication is
semiconservative, with each strand of the original double helix (parental molecule)
serving as a template (mold or model) for a new strand in a daughter molecule. This
80
process consists of:
a. Unwinding: old strands of the parent DNA molecule are unwound as weak hydrogen
bonds between the paired bases are “unzipped” and broken by the enzyme helicase.
b. Complementary base pairing: free nucleotides present in the nucleus bind with
complementary bases on unzipped portions of the two strands of DNA; this process is
catalyzed by DNA polymerase.
c. Joining: complementary nucleotides bond to each other to form new strands; each
daughter DNA molecule contains an old strand and a new strand; this process is also
catalyzed by DNA polymerase.
A. Aspects of DNA Replication (Science Focus box)
1. For complementary base pairing to occur, the DNA strands need to be antiparallel, as
discovered by Watson and Crick
2. One strand of DNA is 5’ at the top and the other strand is 3’ at the top of the strand.
3. During replication the DNA polymerase can ony join to the free 3’ end of the previous
nucleotide.
4. DNA polymerase cannot start the sythesis of a DNA chain, so an RNA polymerase lays
out an RNA primer that is complementary to the replicated strand.
5. Now the DNA polymerase can join the DNA nucleotides to the 3’ end of the new strand.
6. The helicase enzyme unwinds the DNA and one strand (called the leading new strand)
can be copied in the direction of the replication fork.
7. The other strand of DNA is copied in the direction away from the fork, and replication
begins again.
a. This new lagging strand is discontinuous and each segment is called an Okazaki
fragment, after the scientist who discovered them.
8. Replication is only complete when RNA primers are removed.
9. During replication, DNA molecules gets smaller and smaller.
10. The end of eukaryotic DNA molecules have nucleotide sequences called teleromers.
a. Teleromeres on’t code for proteins. They are repeats of short nucleotide sequences
(i.e. TTAGGG).
11. In normal mammalian cells divide approximately 50 times and then stop. However in
cancer cells the telomerase can be turned on and cancer cells then divide without limit.
C. Prokaryotic Versus Eukaryotic Replication
1. Prokaryotic DNA Replication
a. Bacteria have a single loop of DNA that must replicate before the cell divides.
b. Replication in prokaryotes may be bidirectional from one point of origin or in
only one direction.
c. Replication only proceeds in one direction, from 5' to 3'.
d. Replication begins at a special site on a bacterial chromosome, called the origin of
replication.
e. Bacterial cells can complete DNA replication in 40 minutes; eukaryotes take
hours.
2. Eukaryotic DNA Replication
a. Replication in eukaryotes starts at many points of origin and spreads with many
replication bubbles—places where the DNA strands are separating and replication
is occurring.
b. Replication forks are the V-shape ends of the replication bubbles; the sites of
81
DNA replication.
c. Eukaryotes replicate their DNA at a slower rate – 500 to 5,000 base pairs per
minute.
d. Eukaryotes take hours to complete DNA replication.
D. Accuracy of Replication
1. A mismatched nucleotide may occur once per 100,000 base pairs, causing a pause in
replication.
2. Proofreading is the removal of a mismatched nucleotide; DNA repair enzymes
perform this proofreading function and reduce the error rate to one per billion base
pairs.
12.3
The Genetic Code of Life
1. Sir Archibald Garrod (early 1900s) introduced the phrase inborn error of
metabolism.
a. Garrod proposed that inherited defects could be caused by the lack of a particular
enzyme.
b. Knowing that enzymes are proteins, Garrod suggested a link between genes and
proteins.
2. Linus Pauling and Harvey Itano (1949) compared hemoglobin in red blood cells of
persons with sickle-cell disease and normal individuals.
a. They discovered that the chemical properties of a protein chain of sickle-cell
hemoglobin differed from that of normal hemoglobin.
b. Pauling and Itano formulated the one gene–one polypeptide hypothesis: each gene
specifies one polypeptide of a protein, a molecule that may contain one or more
different polypeptides.
A. RNA Carries the Information
1. Like DNA, RNA is a polymer of nucleotides.
2. Unlike DNA, RNA is single-stranded, contains the sugar ribose, and the base uracil
instead of thymine (in addition to cytosine, guanine, and adenine).
3. There are three major classes of RNA.
a. Messenger RNA (mRNA) takes a message from DNA in the nucleus to
ribosomes in the cytoplasm.
b. Ribosomal RNA (rRNA) and proteins make up ribosomes where proteins are
synthesized.
c. Transfer RNA (tRNA) transfers a particular amino acid to a ribosome.
B. The Genetic Code
1. DNA undergoes transcription to mRNA, which is translated to a protein.
2. DNA is a template for RNA formation during transcription.
3. Transcription is the first step in gene expression; it is the process whereby a DNA
strand serves as a template for the formation of mRNA.
4. During translation, an mRNA transcript directs the sequence of amino acids in a
polypeptide.
5. The genetic code is a triplet code, comprised of three-base code words (e.g., AUG).
6. A codon consists of 3 nucleotide bases of DNA.
7. Four nucleotides based on 3-unit codons allows up to 64 different amino acids to the
specified.
8. Finding the Genetic Code
82
a.
Marshall Nirenberg and J. Heinrich Matthei (1961) found that an enzyme that
could be used to construct synthetic RNA in a cell-free system; they showed the
codon UUU coded for phenylalanine.
b. By translating just three nucleotides at a time, they assigned an amino acid to each
of the RNA codons, and discovered important properties of the genetic code.
c. The code is degenerate: there are 64 triplets to code for 20 naturally occurring
amino acids; this protects against potentially harmful mutations.
d. The genetic code is unambiguous; each triplet codon specifies one and only one
amino acid.
e. The code has start and stop signals: there are one start codon and three stop
codons.
9. The Code Is Universal
a. The few exceptions to universality of the genetic code suggests the code dates
back to the very first organisms and that all organisms are related.
b. Once the code was established, changes would be disruptive.
12.4 First Step: Transcription
A. Messenger RNA is Formed
1. A segment of the DNA helix unwinds and unzips.
2. Transcription begins when RNA polymerase attaches to a promoter on DNA. A
promoter is a region of DNA which defines the start of the gene, the direction of
transcription, and the strand to be transcribed.
3. As RNA polymerase (an enzyme that speeds formation of RNA from a DNA
template) moves along the template strand of the DNA, complementary RNA
nucleotides are paired with DNA nucleotides of the coding strand. The strand of
DNA not being transcribed is called the noncoding strand.
4. RNA polymerase adds nucleotides to the 3'-end of the polymer under construction.
Thus, RNA synthesis is in the 5’-to-3’ direction.
5. The RNA/DNA association is not as stable as the DNA double helix; therefore, only
the newest portion of the RNA molecule associated with RNA polymerase is bound
to DNA; the rest dangles off to the side.
6. Elongation of mRNA continues until RNA polymerase comes to a stop sequence.
7. The stop sequence causes RNA polymerase to stop transcribing DNA and to release
the mRNA transcript.
8. Many RNA polymerase molecules work to produce mRNA from the same DNA
region at the same time.
9. Cells produce thousands of copies of the same mRNA molecule and many copies of
the same protein in a shorter period of time than if a single copy of RNA were used to
direct protein synthesis.
B. RNA Molecules Are Processed
1. Newly formed pre-mRNA transcript is processed before leaving the nucleus.
2. Pre-mRNA transcript is the immediate product of transcription; it contains exons
and introns.
3. The ends of the mRNA molecule are altered: a cap is put on the 5' end and a poly-A
tail is put on the 3' end.
a. The “cap” is a modified guanine (G) where a ribosome attaches to begin
translation.
83
b. The “poly-A tail” consists of a 150–200 adenine (A) nucleotide chain that
facilitates transport of mRNA out of the nucleus and inhibits enzymatic
degradation of mRNA.
4. Portions of the primary mRNA transcript, called introns, are removed.
a. An exon is a portion of the DNA code in the primary mRNA transcript eventually
expressed in the final polypeptide product.
b. An intron is a non-coding segment of DNA removed by spliceosomes before the
mRNA leaves the nucleus.
5. Ribozymes are RNAs with an enzymatic function restricted to removing introns
from themselves.
a. RNA could have served as both genetic material and as the first enzymes in early
life forms.
6. Spliceosomes are complexes that contains several kinds of ribonucleoproteins.
a. Spliceosomes cut the primary mRNA transcript and then rejoin adjacent exons.
7. Smaller nucleolar RNA (snoRNA) is present in the nucleolus, to assist in the
processing of rRNA and tRNA molecules.
C. Function of Introns
1. Introns give a cell the ability to decide which exons will go in a particular mRNA
2. mRNA do not have all of the possible exons available from a DNA sequence. In one
mRNA what is an
exon could be an intron in another mRNA. This process is
termed alternative mRNA splicing.
3. Some introns give rise to microRNAs (miRNA). miRNA regulate mRNA translation
by bonding with mRNA through complementary base pairing and preventing
translation from occurring.
4. Exon shuffling occurs when introns encourage crossing over during meiosis.
12.5 Second Step: Translation
1. Translation takes place in the cytoplasm of eukaryotic cells.
2. Translation is the second step by which gene expression leads to protein synthesis.
3. One language (nucleic acids) is translated into another language (protein).
A. The Role of Transfer RNA
1. Transfer RNA (tRNA) molecules transfer amino acids to the ribosomes.
2. The tRNA is a single-stranded ribonucleic acid that doubles back on itself to create
regions where complementary bases are hydrogen-bonded to one another.
3. The amino acid binds to the 3’ end; the opposite end of the molecule contains an
anticodon that binds to the mRNA codon in a complementary fashion.
4. There is at least one tRNA molecule for each of the 20 amino acids found in proteins.
5. There are fewer tRNAs than codons because some tRNAs pair with more than one
codon; if an anticodon contains a U in the third position, it will pair with either an A
or G–this is called the wobble hypothesis.
6. The tRNA synthetases are amino acid-activating enzymes that recognize which
amino acid should join which tRNA molecule, and covalently joins them. This
requires ATP.
7. An amino acid–tRNA complex forms, which then travels to a ribosome to “transfer”
its amino acid during protein synthesis.
B. The Role of Ribosomal RNA
1. Ribosomal RNA (rRNA) is produced from a DNA template in the nucleolus of the
84
nucleus.
2. The rRNA is packaged with a variety of proteins into ribosomal subunits, one larger
than the other.
3. Subunits move separately through nuclear envelope pores into the cytoplasm where
they combine when translation begins.
4. Ribosomes can float free in cytosol or attach to endoplasmic reticulum.
5. Prokaryotic cells contain about 10,000 ribosomes; eukaryotic cells contain many
times more.
6. Ribosomes have a binding site for mRNA and binding sites for two tRNA molecules.
7. They facilitate complementary base pairing between tRNA anticodons and mRNA
codons; rRNA acts as an enzyme (ribozyme) that joins amino acids together by means
of a peptide bond.
8. A ribosome moves down the mRNA molecule, new tRNAs arrive, the amino acids
join, and a polypeptide forms.
9. Translation terminates once the polypeptide is formed; the ribosome then dissociates
into its two subunits.
10.
Polyribosomes are clusters of several ribosomes synthesizing the same protein.
11.
To get from a polypeptide to a function protein requires correct bending and
twisting; chaperone molecules assure that the final protein develops the correct shape.
12.
Some proteins contain more than one polypeptide; they must be joined to achieve
the final three-dimensional shape.
C. Translation Requires Three Steps
1. During translation, mRNA codons base-pair with tRNA anticodons carrying specific
amino acids.
2. Codon order determines the order of tRNA molecules and the sequence of amino
acids in polypeptides.
3. Protein synthesis involves initiation, elongation, and termination.
4. Enzymes are required for all three steps; energy (ATP) is needed for the first two
steps.
5. Chain Initiation
a. A small ribosomal subunit attaches to mRNA in the vicinity of the start codon
(AUG).
b. First or initiator tRNA pairs with this codon; then the large ribosomal subunit
joins to the small subunit.
c. Each ribosome contains three binding sites: the P (for peptide) site, the A (for
amino acid) site, and the E (for exit) site.
d. The initiator tRNA binds to the P site although it carries one amino acid,
methionine.
e. The A site is for the next tRNA carrying the next amino acid.
f. The E site is to discharge tRNAs from the ribosome.
g. Initiation factor proteins are required to bring together the necessary translation
components: the small ribosomal subunit, mRNA, initiator tRNA, and the large
ribosomal subunit.
6. Chain Elongation
a. The tRNA with attached polypeptide is at the P site; a tRNA-amino acid complex
arrives at the A site.
85
b. Proteins called elongation factors facilitate complementary base pairing between
the tRNA anticodon and the mRNA codon.
c. The polypeptide is transferred and attached by a peptide bond to the newly arrived
amino acid in the A site.
d. This reaction is catalyzed by a ribozyme, which is part of the larger subunit.
e. The tRNA molecule in the P site is now empty.
f. Translocation occurs with mRNA, along with peptide-bearing tRNA, moving to
the P site and the spent tRNA moves from the P site to the E site and exits the
ribosome.
g. As the ribosome moves forward three nucleotides, there is a new codon now
located at the empty A site.
h. The complete cycle is rapidly repeated, about 15 times per second in Escherichia
coli.
i. The ribosomes will reach a stop codon, termation will occur, and the peptide will
be released.
7. Chain Termination
a. Termination of polypeptide synthesis occurs at a stop codon that does not code
for amino acid.
b. The polypeptide is enzymatically cleaved from the last tRNA by a release factor.
c. The tRNA and polypeptide leave the ribosome, which dissociates into its two
subunits.
d. Proteomics is a new field ob biology that aims to understand protein structures,
and the functions of metabolic pathways.
D. Protein Synthesis and the Eukaryotic Cell
1. The first few amino acids of a polypeptide act as a signal peptide that indicates where
the polypeptide belongs in the cell or if it is to be secreted by the cell.
2. After the polypeptide enters the lumen of the ER, it is folded and further processed by
addition of sugars, phosphates, or lipids.
3. Transport vesicles carry the proteins between organelles and to the plasma membrane.
12.6
Structure of Eukaryotic Chromosomes and Genes
1. The DNA is wound around a core of eight protein molecules (“beads on a string”);
the proteins are called histones and each “bead” is called a nucleosome.
a. Histones play a structural role in chromosome structure and package the large
DNA into the small nucleus.
b. The nucleosomes also contribute to the shortening of DNA by folding it into a
“zigzag” structure.
2. During interphase, some chromatin is highly compact, darkly stained, and genetically
inactive heterochromatin.
3. The rest is diffuse, lightly colored euchromatin thought to be genetically active.
a. Euchromatin activity is related to the extent nucleosomes are coiled and
condensed.
b. A nucleosome is a bead-like unit made of a segment of DNA wound around a
complex of histone proteins.
86
Chapter 13
13.1 Prokaryotic Regulation
1. Bacteria do not require the same enzymes all the time; they produce just those needed
at the moment.
2. Francois Jacob and Jacques Monod (1961) proposed the operon model to explain
regulation of gene expression in prokaryotes.
a. In the operon model, several genes code for an enzyme in the same metabolic
pathway and are located in a sequence on a chromosome; expression of structural
genes is controlled by the same regulatory genes.
b. An operon is a group of structural and regulatory genes that function as a single
unit; it includes the following:
1) A regulator gene, located outside the operon, codes for a repressor protein
molecule that controls whether the operon is active or not.
2) A promotor is the sequence of DNA where RNA polymerase attaches when a
gene is to be transcribed.
3) An operator is a short sequence of DNA where an active repressor binds,
preventing RNA polymerase from attaching to the promotor--transcription
therefore does not occur.
4) Structural genes are one to several genes coding for enzymes of a metabolic
pathway that are transcribed as a unit.
A. The trp Operon
1. Some operons in E. coli usually exist in the “on” rather than the “off” condition.
2. E. coli produces five enzymes as part of the anabolic pathway to synthesize the amino
acid tryptophan.
3. If tryptophan is already present in medium, these enzymes are not needed and the
operon is turned off .
a. The regulator codes for a repressor that usually is unable to attach to the operator.
b. The repressor has a binding site for tryptophan (if tryptophan is present, it binds
to the repressor).
c. This changes the shape of the repressor that now binds to the operator.
4. The entire unit is called a repressible operon; tryptophan is the corepressor.
5. Repressible operons are involved in anabolic pathways that synthesize substances
needed by cells.
B. The lac Operon
1. If E. coli is denied glucose and given lactose instead, it makes three enzymes to
metabolize the lactose.
2. These three enzymes are encoded by three genes.
a. One gene codes for beta-galactosidase that breaks lactose to glucose and
galactose.
b. A second gene codes for a permease that facilitates entry of lactose into the cell.
c. A third gene codes for enzyme transacetylase, which is an accessory in lactose
metabolism.
3. The three genes are adjacent on a chromosome and under control of one promoter and
one operator.
4. The regulator gene codes for a lac operon repressor protein that binds to the operator
and prevents transcription of the three genes.
87
5. When E. coli is switched to medium containing an allolactose, this lactose binds to
the repressor and the repressor undergoes a change in shape that prevents it from
binding to the operator.
6. Because the repressor is unable to bind to the operator, the promoter is able to bind to
RNA polymerase, which carries out transcription and produces the three enzymes.
7. An inducer is any substance (lactose in the case of the lac operon) that can bind to a
particular repressor protein, preventing the repressor from binding to a particular
operator; consequently, RNA polymerase can bind to the promoter and transcribe the
structural genes.
C. Further Control of the lac Operon
1. Since E. coli prefers to break down glucose, how does E. coli know how to turn on
when glucose is absent?
2. When glucose is absent, cyclic AMP (cAMP) accumulates; cAMP has only one
phosphate group and attaches to ribose at two locations.
a. CAP is a catabolite activator protein (CAP) in the cytoplasm.
b. When cAMP binds to CAP, the complex attaches to a CAP binding site next to
the lac promoter.
c. When CAP binds to DNA, DNA bends, exposing the promoter to RNA
polymerase.
d. Only then does RNA polymerase bind to the promoter; this allows expression of
the lac operon structural genes.
3. When glucose is present, there is little cAMP in the cell.
a. CAP is inactive and the lactose operon does not function maximally.
b. CAP affects other operons when glucose is absent.
c. This encourages metabolism of lactose and provides a backup system for when
glucose is absent.
4. Active repressors shut down the activity of an operon—this is negative control..
5. CAP is an example of positive control; when the molecule is active, it promotes the
activity of the operon.
6. Use of both positive and negative controls allows the cell to fine-tune control of its
metabolism.
7. If both glucose and lactose are present, the cell preferentially metabolizes glucose.
13.2 Eukaryotic Regulation
1. Different cells in the human body turn on different genes that code for different
protein products.
2. Eukaryotes have four levels of regulatory mechanisms to control gene expression;
two in the nucleus and two in the cytoplasm.
3. There are several levels of control that can modify the amount of gene product.
a. Chromatin structure: if genes are not accessible to RNA polymerase, they
cannot be transcribed.
1) Chromatin structure is part of epigenetic inheritance, the transmission of
genetic information outside the coding sequences of a gene.
b. Transcriptional control in the nucleus determines which structural genes are
transcribed and the rate of transcription; it includes transcription factors initiating
transcription and transposons (DNA sequences that move between chromosomes
and shut down genes).
88
c. Posttranscriptional control occurs in the nucleus after DNA is transcribed and
preliminary mRNA forms.
1) This may involve differential processing of mRNA before it leaves the
nucleus.
2) The speed that mature mRNA leaves nucleus affects the ultimate amount of
gene product.
d. Translational control occurs in cytoplasm after mRNA leaves the nucleus but
before there is a protein product.
1) The life expectancy of mRNA molecules can vary, as well as their ability to
bind ribosomes.
2) Some mRNAs may need additional changes before they are translated at all.
e. Posttranslational control occurs in the cytoplasm after protein synthesis.
1) Polypeptide products may undergo additional changes before they are
biologically functional.
2) A functional enzyme is subject to feedback control; binding of an end product
can change the shape of an enzyme so it no longer carries out its reaction.
A. Chromatin Structure
1. Eukaryotic DNA is in the form of chromatin, a stringy material associated with
proteins.
2. During interphase, some chromatin is highly compact, darkly stained, and genetically
inactive heterochromatin.
3. Barr bodies are an example of heterochromatin.
a. Since human males have only one X chromosome, it might be supposed that they
produce half the gene product of a female with two X chromosomes.
b. However, females have in each nucleated cell a darkly staining Barr body, a
condensed, inactive X chromosome.
c. Which X chromosome is condensed in each cell is determined by chance.
d. Thus, the body of heterozygous females is “mosaic”; half her cells express alleles
on one X chromosome and half of her cells express the alleles on the other X
chromosome.
e. Female gonads do not show Barr bodies; both X chromosomes are needed in
development.
f. Only one active X chromosome in the female zygote means that lower X-coded
gene products are normal.
g. Other examples of this mosaic effect include: ocular albinism, Duchenne
muscular dystrophy, and female calico cat coat color.
4.
Euchromatin activity is related to the extent nucleosomes are coiled and
condensed.
c. A nucleosome is a bead-like unit made of a segment of DNA wound around a
complex of histone proteins.
d. When DNA is transcribed, activators called remodeling proteins are able to push
aside the histone proteins so transcription can begin.
5.
Epigenetic inheritance is the term used to describe inheritance patterns that do
not depend on the genes themselves.
a. Histones proteins have different chemical modifications in heterochromatin and
euchromatin.
89
b. Methylation of DNA accounts for a phenomenon called genomic imprinting: gene
expression is dependent on whether the chromosome carrying the gene is
inherited from the mother or the father.
c. Epigenetic inheritance explains unusual inheritance patterns, and may have
implications in growth, aging and cancer.
B. Transcriptional Control
1. Transcriptional control is the most critical level of genetic control.
a. Transcription is controlled by DNA-binding proteins called transcription
factors.
b. Each cell contains many different types of transcription factors.
c. A group of transcription factors binds to a promoter adjacent to a gene; the
complex attracts and binds RNA polymerase, but transcription may still not begin.
d. Transcription activators are often involved in controlling transcription in
eukaryotes.
1) Different combinations may regulate different genes.
2) Transcription activators bind to DNA regions called enhancers.
3) Enhancers can be quite a distance from the promoter, but a hairpin loop in the
DNA brings the activator attached to an enhancer into contact with the
promotor.
4) Mediator proteins act as a bridge between transcription factors and
transcription factors at the promotor.
e. Transcription factors are always present in the cell and most likely they have to be
activated in some way (e.g., regulatory pathways involving kinases or
phosphatases) before they bind to DNA.
C. Posttranscriptional Control
1. Posttranscriptional control includes mRNA processing and the speed at which
mRNA leaves the nucleus.
2. Messenger RNA molecules are processed before they leave the nucleus and enter the
cytoplasm.
3. Differential excision of introns and splicing of mRNA can vary the type of mRNA
that leaves nucleus.
a. The hypothalamus and thyroid glands produce calcitonin but the mRNA that
leaves the nucleus is not the same in both types of cells.
b. Evidence of different patterns of mRNA splicing is found in cells that produce
neurotransmitters, muscle regulatory proteins, and antibodies.
4. Speed of transport of mRNA from nucleus into cytoplasm affects the amount of gene
product realized per unit time following transcription; there is a difference in the
length of time it takes various mRNA molecules to pass through nuclear pores.
D. Translational Control
1. Translational control begins when the processed mRNA molecule reaches the
cytoplasm and before there is a protein product.
a. The longer an active mRNA molecule remains in the cytoplasm, the more product
is produced.
b. Mature red blood cells eject their nucleus but synthesize hemoglobin for several
months; the mRNAs must persist during this time.
c. Ribonucleases are enzymes associated with ribosomes that degrade mRNA.
90
d. Mature mRNA has non-coding segments at 3' cap and 5' poly-A tail ends;
differences in these segments influence how long the mRNA avoids being
degraded.
e. MicroRNAs are small, processed pieces of intron; after microRNAs are
degraded, they combine with protein and the complex binds to mRNAs,
destroying them.
E. Posttranslational Control
1. Posttranslational control begins once a protein has been synthesized and has
become active.
a. Some proteins are not active after synthesis; the polypeptide product has to
undergo additional changes before it is biologically functional.
b. Bovine proinsulin, for example, is inactive when first produced; a single long
polypeptide folds into a three-dimensional structure, a sequence of 30 amino acids
is removed from the middle, and the two polypeptide chains are bonded together
by disulfide bonds resulting in an active protein.
c. Many proteins are short-lived in cells and degraded or destroyed so they are no
longer active.
d. Giant protein complexes called proteasomes carry out this task.
e. One example is the cyclins that control the cell cycle; they are only temporarily
present.
F. Alternative mRNA Splicing in Disease (Science Focus box)
1. Gorlin syndrome is an autosomal dominant disease that causes an aggressive type of
skin cancer.
a. It is linked to the tumor suppressor genet, patched, which is found on chromosome 9.
b. It was previously thought that patched mutations occurred within the gene’s exons,
but current research demonstrated, these mutations occur within the gene’s
introns.
c. The mutations caused mRNA to be incorrectly spliced and then making the proteins
nonfunctional.
2. Spinal muscular dystrophy (SMD) is also caused by defective pre-mRNA splicing.
a. Exon 7 of the SMN2 gene is omitted from the mature mRNA in SMA patients,
making the protein nonfunctional.
b. SMA results in loss of spinal cord motor neurons, paralysis and skeletal muscle
atrophy.
c. Scientists are working with a new technique, antisense oligonucleotide technology, to
reverse the effects of the disorder.
d. The results support that tarketing pre-mRNA splicing may be a tangeable treatment
for many of these disorders.
3. Scientist are using pre-mRNA splicing to design more powerful mecidine with less side
effects, as well as new therapy that may be more effective in battling many disorders.
13.3 Regulation Through Gene Mutations
1. A gene mutation is a permanent change in the sequence of bases in DNA; mutations
range from having no effect to total inactivity.
A. Causes of Mutations
1. Spontaneous mutations result in abnormalities in normal biological processes.
a. Mutations due to replication errors are very rare.
91
b. DNA polymerase constantly proofreads new DNA against the old, and repairs any
irregularities, thereby reducing mistakes to one out of every one billion nucleotide
pairs replicated.
2. Induced mutations are changes in the DNA base sequencing from exposure to toxic
chemicals or radtation.
a. Carcinogens are mutagens that increase the chances of cancer.
1) The Ames test is commonly-used to determine if a chemical is carcinogenic.
2) A histidine-requiring strain of bacteria is exposed to a chemical.
3) If the chemical is mutagenic, the bacteria regain the ability to grow without
histidine.
c. Tobacco smoke contains a number of known carcinogenic chemicals.
d. X rays and gamma rays are ionizing radiation that creates free radicals, ionized
atoms with unpaired electrons.
e. Ultraviolet (UV) radiation is easily absorbed by pyrimidines in DNA.
1) Where two thymine molecules are near each other, UV may bond them
together as thymine dimers.
2) Usually dimers are removed from damaged DNA by special enzymes called
DNA repair enzymes.
B. Effect of Mutations on Protein Activity
1. Point mutations change a single nucleotide and therefore change a single specific
codon.
a. The effect of the point mutation depends on the specific base change in the codon.
b. Changes to codons that code for the same amino acid have no effect; e.g., UAU to
UAC both code for tyrosine.
c. A change from UAC to UAG (a stop codon) results in a shorter protein, and a
change from UAC to CAC incorporates histidine instead of tyrosine.
d. Sickle cell disease results from a single base change in DNA where the beta-chain
of hemoglobin contains valine instead of glutamate at one location and the
resulting distorted hemoglobin causes red blood cells to clog vessels and die off
sooner.
2. Frameshift Mutations
a. The reading frame depends on the sequence of codons from the starting point:
THE CAT ATE THE RAT.
b. If, for example, C is deleted, the reading frame is shifted: THE ATA TET HER
AT.
c. Frameshift mutations occur when one or more nucleotides are inserted or deleted
from DNA.
d. The result of a frameshift mutation is a new sequence of codons and
nonfunctional proteins.
C. Nonfunctional Proteins
1. A single nonfunctioning protein can cause dramatic effects.
2. The human transposon Alu is responsible for hemophilia when it places a premature
stop codon in the gene for clotting factor IX.
3. PKU results when a person cannot convert phenylalanine to tyrosine; phenylalanine
builds up in the system, leading to mental retardation.
4. A faulty code for an enzyme in the same pathway results in an albino individual.
92
5. Cystic fibrosis is due to inheriting a faulty code for a chloride transport protein in the
plasma membrane.
6. Androgen insensitivity is due to a faulty receptor for male sex hormones; body cells
cannot respond to testosterone and the individual develops as a female (even though
all of the body cells are XY).
D. Mutations Can Cause Cancer
1. The development of cancer involves a series of various types of mutations.
2. Tumor-suppressor genes normally act as brakes on cell division when it begins to
occur abnormally.
3. When proto-oncogenes mutate, they become oncogenes.
4. Tumor-suppressor genes and proto-oncogenes often code for transcription factors or
proteins that control transcription factors.
5. P53, a major tumor-suppressor gene, is more frequently mutated in human cancers
than any other known gene.
a. The p53 protein acts as a transcription factor to turn on the expression of genes
whose products are cell cycle inhibitors.
b. The p53 can also stimulate apoptosis (programmed cell death).
6. Other proto-oncogenes code for Ras proteins, which are needed for normal cell
growth and DNA synthesis.
93
Chapter 14
14.1 DNA Cloning
1. Cloning is the production of identical copies of DNA through some asexual means.
a. An underground stem or root sends up new shoots that are clones of the parent
plant.
b. Members of a bacterial colony on a petri dish are clones because they all came
from division of the same cell.
c. Human identical twins are clones; the original single embryo separate to become
two individuals.
2. Gene cloning is production of many identical copies of the same gene.
a. If the inserted gene is replicated and expressed, we can recover the cloned gene or
protein product.
b. Cloned genes have many research purposes: determining the base sequence
between normal and mutated genes, altering the phenotype, obtaining the protein
coded by a specific gene, etc.
c. Humans can be treated with gene therapy: alteration of the phenotype in a
beneficial way.
d. Otherwise transgenetic organisms are used to produce products desired by
humans.
e. To clone DNA, scientists use recombinant DNA (rDNA) and polymerase chain
reaction (PCR).
A. Recombinant DNA Technology
1. Recombinant DNA (rDNA) contains DNA from two or more different sources.
2. To make rDNA, technician selects a vector.
3. A vector is a plasmid or a virus used to transfer foreign genetic material into a cell.
4. A plasmid is a small accessory ring of DNA in the cytoplasm of some bacteria.
5. Plasmids were discovered in research on reproduction of intestinal bacteria
Escherichia coli.
6. Introduction of foreign DNA into vector DNA to produce rDNA requires two
enzymes.
a. Restriction enzyme is a bacterial enzyme that stops viral reproduction by
cleaving viral DNA.
1) The restriction enzyme is used to cut DNA at specific points during
production of rDNA.
2) It is called a restriction enzyme because it restricts growth of viruses but it
acts as a molecular scissors to cleave any piece of DNA at a specific site.
3) Restriction enzymes cleave vector (plasmid) and foreign (human) DNA.
4) Cleaving DNA makes DNA fragments ending in short single-stranded
segments with “sticky ends.”
5) The “sticky ends” allow insertion of foreign DNA into vector DNA.
b. DNA ligase seals the foreign gene into the vector DNA
1) Treated cells take up plasmids, and then bacteria and plasmids reproduce.
2) Eventually, there are many copies of the plasmid and many copies of the
foreign gene.
3) When DNA splicing is complete, an rDNA (recombinant DNA) molecule is
formed.
94
7. If the human gene is to express itself in a bacterium, the gene must be accompanied
by the regulatory regions unique to bacteria and meet other requirements.
a. The gene cannot contain introns because bacteria do not have introns.
b. An enzyme called reverse transcriptase can be used to make a DNA copy of
mRNA.
c. This DNA molecule is called complementary DNA (cDNA) and does not
contain introns.
d. A laboratory DNA synthesizer can produce small pieces of DNA without introns.
B. The Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR)
1. PCR can create millions of copies of a single gene or a specific piece of DNA in a test
tube.
2. PCR is very specific—the targeted DNA sequence can be less than one part in a
million of the total dxcDNA sample; therefore a single gene can be amplified using
PCR.
3. PCR uses the enzyme DNA polymerase to carry out multiple replications (a chain
reaction) of target DNA.
4. PCR automation is possible because heat-resistant DNA polymerase from Thermus
aquaticus, which grows in hot springs, is an enzyme that withstands the temperature
necessary to separate double-stranded DNA.
5.
Analyzing DNA
a. Mitochondria DNA sequences in modern living populations can decipher the
evolutionary history of human populations.
b. Short tandem repeat (STR) profiling is a technique used to analyze DNA.
1) Advantages include not being limited to using restriction enzymes.
2) Since the chromosomal location of STRs are known, these are the only
locations that are subjected to PCR and gel electrophoresis.
3) The band patterns are different in each person because each individual has
their own number of STR repeats at different locations.
c. DNA fingerprinting is a technique of using DNA fragment lengths, resulting
from restriction enzyme cleavage and amplified by PCR, to identify particular
individuals.
d. DNA is treated with restriction enzymes to cut it into different sized fragments.
e. During gel electrophoresis, fragments separate according to length, resulting in a
pattern of bands.
f. DNA fingerprinting can identify deceased individuals from skeletal remains,
perpetrators of crimes from blood or semen samples, and genetic makeup of longdead individuals or extinct organisms.
6. PCR amplification and DNA analysis is used to:
a. detect viral infections, genetic disorders, and cancer;
b. determine the nucleotide sequence of human genes, and, because it is inherited,
c. associate samples with DNA of parents.
14.2 Biotechnology Products
1. Genetically engineered organisms can produce biotechnology products.
2. Organisms that have had a foreign gene inserted into them are transgenic.
A. Genetically Modified Bacteria
1. Bacteria are grown in large vats called bioreactors.
95
a. Foreign genes are inserted and the product is harvested.
b. Products on the market include insulin, hepatitis B vaccine, t-PA, and human
growth hormone.
2. Transgenic bacteria have been produced to protect and improve the health of plants.
a. Frost-minus bacteria protect the vegetative parts of plants from frost damage.
b. Root-colonizing bacteria receive genes from bacteria for insect toxin, protecting
the roots.
c. Bacteria that colonize corn roots can be endowed with genes for insect toxin.
3. Transgenic bacteria can degrade substances.
a. Bacteria selected for ability to degrade oil can be improved by bioengineering.
b. Bacteria can be bio-filters to prevent airborne chemical pollutants from being
vented into the air.
c. Bacteria can also remove sulfur from coal before it is burned and help clean up
toxic dumps.
d. Bacteria can also be given”suicide genes” that caused them to die after they have
done their job.
4. Transgenic bacteria can produce chemical products.
a. Genes coding for enzymes can be manipulated to catalyze synthesis of valuable
chemicals.
b. Phenylalanine used in artificial sweetener can be grown by engineered bacteria.
5. Transgenic bacteria process minerals.
a. Many major mining companies already use bacteria to obtain various metals.
b. Genetically engineered “bio-leaching” bacteria extract copper, uranium, and gold
from low-grade ore.
B. Genetically Modified Plants
1. Plant cells that have had the cell wall removed are called protoplasts.
2. Electric current makes tiny holes in the plasma membrane through which genetic
material enters.
3. The protoplasts then develop into mature plants.
4. Foreign genes now give cotton, corn, and potato strains the ability to produce an
insect toxin and soybeans are now resistant to a common herbicide.
5. Plants are being engineered to produce human proteins including hormones, clotting
factors, and antibodies in their seeds; antibodies made by corn, deliver radioisotopes
to tumor cells and a soybean engineered antibody can treat genital herpes.
C. Genetically Modified Animals
1. Animal use requires methods to insert genes into eggs of animals.
a. It is possible to microinject foreign genes into eggs by hand.
b. Vortex mixing places eggs in an agitator with DNA and silicon-carbide needles
that make tiny holes through which the DNA can enter.
c. Using this technique, many types of animal eggs have been injected with bovine
growth hormone (bGH) to produce larger fishes, cows, pigs, rabbits, and sheep.
2. Gene pharming is the use of transgenic farm animals to produce pharmaceuticals;
the product is obtainable from the milk of females.
a. Genes for therapeutic proteins are inserted into animal’s DNA; animal’s milk
produces proteins.
b. Drugs obtained through gene pharming are planned for the treatment of cystic
96
fibrosis, cancer, blood diseases, and other disorders.
D. Cloning Transgenic Animals
1. For many years, it was believed that adult vertebrate animals could not be cloned; the
cloning of Dolly in 1997 demonstrated this can be done.
2. Cloning of an adult vertebrate would require that all genes of an adult cell be turned
on again.
3. Cloning of mammals involves injecting a 2n nucleus adult cell into an enucleated egg.
4. The cloned eggs begin development in vitro and are then returned to host mothers
until the clones are born.
E. Applications of Transgenic Animals
1. Scientists are using transgenic animals to illustrate that maleness is due to a section of
DNA called SRY (the sex determining region of the Y chromosome).
2. Transgenic animals are also being used to investigate various treatments for diseases
by eliminating genes from these animals.
3. Organ transplants from transgenic animal donors to human recipients is called
xenltransplantation.
14.3 Gene Therapy
1. Gene therapy involves procedures to give patients healthy genes to make up for a
faulty gene.
2. Gene therapy also includes the use of genes to treat genetic disorders and various
human illnesses.
3. There are ex vivo (outside body) and in vivo (inside body) methods of gene therapy.
A. Ex Vivo Gene Therapy
1. Children with severe combined immunodeficiency (SCID) underwent ex vivo gene
therapy.
a. Lacking the enzyme ADA involved in maturation of T and B cells, they faced
life-threatening infections.
b. Bone marrow stem cells are removed, infected with a retrovirus that carries a
normal gene for the enzyme ADA, and returned.
c. Use of bone marrow stem cells allows them to divide and produce more cells with
the same genes.
d. Patients who undergo this procedure show significant improvement.
2. Gene therapy include treatment of familial hypercholesterolemia where liver cells
lack a receptor for removing cholesterol from blood.
a. High levels of blood cholesterol make the patient subject to fatal heart attacks
when young.
b. A small portion of the liver is surgically removed and infected with retrovirus
with normal gene for receptor.
c. This has lowered cholesterol levels following the procedure.
B. In Vivo Gene Therapy
1. Cystic fibrosis patients lack a gene for trans-membrane chloride ion carriers; patients
die from respiratory tract infections.
a. Liposomes, microscopic vesicles that form when lipoproteins are in solution, are
coated with healthy cystic fibrosis genes and sprayed into a patient’s nostrils.
b. Various methods of delivery are being tested for effectiveness.
2. A gene for vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF) can be injected alone or within
97
a virus into the heart to stimulate branching of coronary blood vessels.
3. Another strategy is to make cancer cells more vulnerable, and normal cells more
resistant, to chemotherapy.
4. Injecting a retrovirus containing a normal p53 gene–that promotes apoptosis–into
tumors may stop the growth of tumors.
14.4 Genomics
1. Genetics in the 21st century concerns genomics: the study of genomes of humans and
other organisms.
A. Sequencing the Genome
1. The Human Genome Project has produced a record of all the base pairs in all our
chromosomes.
2. The task took 13 years to learn the sequence of the three billion base pairs along the
length of our chromosomes.
3. Most of the DNA regions that differed among individuals are called single nucleotide
polymorphisms (SNPs)
a. Many SNPs have no effect and others could contribute to enzymatic differences
affecting the phenotype.
4. Following functional genomics, structural genomics investigates base sequences and
the number of genes in humans.
B. Genome Comparisons
1. There is little difference between the sequence of our bases and other organisms
whose DNA sequences are known.
2. We share a large number of genes with simpler organisms (e.g., bacteria, yeast,
mice); perhaps our uniqueness is due to regulation of these genes.
3. Researchers found that certain genes on chromosome 22 differed in humans and
chimpanzees: those for speech development, hearing, and smell.
4. Many genes found were responsible for human diseases.
C. Eukaryotic Gene Structure
1. Eukaryotic chromosome structure is much more complex than prokaryotic
chromosome structure.
2. Generally speaking, more complex organisms have more complex genes with more
and larger introns.
3. Introns are currently regarded as gene expression regulators and determine which
genes are expressed and how they are spliced.
D. Intergenic Sequences
1. Intergenic sequences are DNA sequences that occur between genes.
2. Generally speaking, as the complexity of an organism increases, so does the
proportion of its non-protein-coding DNA sequences.
3. Most of the human chromosomes are comprised of intergeneic sequences, genes
represent 1.5% of human’s total DNA, and the remainder represents “junk DNA,”
which scientists believe serve many important functions.
4. Three types of intergenic sequences found in the human genome are: repetitive
elements, tranposons, and unknown sequences.
E. Repetative Elements
1. Repetative DNA elements occur when the same sequence of two or more
nucleotides are repeated many times along the length of one or more chromosomes.
98
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2. They make up nearly half of the human genome and scientists believe that their true
significance have yet to be discovered.
3. Repetative DNA elements occur as tandem repeats – meaning the repeated
sequences are next to each other on the chromosome.
4. One type of tandem repeat sequence, short tandem repeats (STRs), are a standard
method in forensic science for identifying one individual from another and also
determining family relationships.
5. Another type of repetitive DNA element is called an interspersed repeat – meaning
the repetitions may be placed intermittently along a single chromosome, or across
multiple chromosomes.
6. Interspersed repeat are common and thought to play a role in the evolution of new
genes.
Transposons
2. Transposons are specific DNA sequences that move with and between
chromosomes.
a. Their movement may increase or decrease the expression of neighboring genes.
b. They are among the 40% of the human genome consisting of the same short
sequence of DNA continuously repeated.
c. They are noncoding sequences that play regulatory functions, and could thus be
cansidered part of epigenetic inheritance.
Unknown Sequences
1. Unknown DNA sequences were once dismissed as junk DNA since scientists could
not identify any function they have.
2. Recently scientists believe observed that many of the unknown sequences is
transcribed into RNA.
3. This RNA may carry out regulatory functions more easily than proteins at times.
What Is a Gene?
1. A modern definition of a gene, suggested by Mark Gerstein and associates, “…is a
genomic sequence (either DNA or RNA) directly encoding functional products, either
RNA or protein.”
2. This definition recognizes that the genetic material involved does not have to be
DNA, and that coding does not only mean DNA sequencing, but the gene product
could be RNA or protein as well.
Functional and Comparative Genomics
1. The emphasis on genome structure is both on functional and comparative genomics.
2. Functional genomics aims to understand the exact role of the genome in cells or
organisms.
a. To meet the aim of functional genomics, DNA microarrays can be used (see
Science Focus box).
b. DNA microarrays rapidly identify a person’s complete genotype; this is called the
genetic profile.
3. Comparative genomics aims to compare the human genome to the genome of other
organisms.
a. This type of genomics has revealed little difference between DNA sequence of
our bases and those of many other organisms.
Proteomics
99
1. Proteomics is the study of the structure, function, and interaction of cellular proteins.
2. The information obtained from proteomic studies can be used in designing better
drugs, and to correlate drug treatment to the particular genome of the individual.
K. Bioinformatics
1. Bioinformatics is the application of computer technologics to the study of the
genome.
2. Information obtained from computer analysis of the genome can show relationships
between genetic profiles and genetic disorders.
H. DNA Microarray Technology (Science Focus box)
1. DNA microarray technology is being used to identify genes associated with gene tissues,
and identify links between disease and chromosomal variation.
2. DNA microarray technology techniques begin with labeling the test mRNA with a
fluorescent dye and added to the chip.
3. The tagged mRNA can then be followed by identifying the genes that exhibit the
fluorescent dye.
I. Copy Number Variations (Science Focus box)
1. Scientists have recently discovered small duplications and deletions in chromosomes,
referred to as copy number variations (CNVs)
2. The change in genes may arise from fork stalling and template switching.
3. Some CNVs may be linked to diseases such as HIV, Lupus, and autism.
4. Evolutionarily speaking, it may be advantageous for species to have multiple copies of
genes because if one copy of an allele does not function properly, the duplicate allele
may be able to restore normal function.
5. In addition, having two normal alleles may free the extra gene copy to accumulate
mutations, which could ultimately lead to the formation of a new gene.
100
Chapter 15
15.1 History of Evolutionary Thought
1. In 1831, Charles Darwin, a 22-year-old naturalist, accepted a position aboard the ship
HMS Beagle that began a voyage around the world; it provided Darwin with many
observations.
2. The pre-Darwinian world-view was different from the post-Darwinian.
a. Pre-Darwinian world-view was determined by intractable theological beliefs.
1) The earth is young.
2) Each species was specially created and did not change over time.
3) Variations are imperfections varying from a perfectly-adapted creation.
4) Observations are to substantiate the prevailing worldview.
b. Darwin, however, lived during a time of great change in scientific and social
realms.
c. Darwin’s ideas were part of a larger change in thought already underway among
biologists; this concept would eventually be known as evolution.
A. Mid-Eighteenth-Century Contributions
1. Carolus Linnaeus and Taxonomy
a. Taxonomy is the science of classifying organisms; taxonomy had been a main
concern of biology.
b. Carolus Linnaeus (1707–1778) was a Swedish taxonomist.
1) Linnaeus developed a binomial system of nomenclature (two-part names for
each species [e.g., Homo sapiens]).
2) He developed a system of classification for all known plants.
3) Like other taxonomists of his time, Linnaeus believed in the ideas of
a) special creation—each species had an “ideal” structure and function; and
b) fixity of species—each species had a place in the scala naturae, a
sequential ladder of life.
c. Linnaeus thought that classification should describe the fixed features of species
and reveal God’s divine plan.
d. His ideas reflected the ideas of Plato and Aristotle: the ideal form can be deduced,
and organisms can be arranged in order of increasing complexity.
e. His later work with hybridization suggested species might change with time.
2. Georges Louis Leclerc
a. Georges Louis Leclerc, known by his title, Count Buffon (1707–1788), was a
French naturalist.
b. He wrote a 44-volume natural history of all known plants and animals.
c. He also provided evidence of descent with modification.
d. His writings speculated on influences of the environment, migration, geographical
isolation, and the struggle for existence.
e. Buffon vacillated on whether he believed in evolutionary descent and he
professed to believe in special creation and the fixity of species.
3. Erasmus Darwin
a. Erasmus Darwin (1731–1802) was Charles Darwin’s grandfather.
b. He was a physician and a naturalist whose writings on both botany and zoology
contained many comments that suggested the possibility of common descent.
c. He based his conclusions on
101
1) changes undergone by animals during development,
2) artificial selection by humans, and
3) the presence of vestigial structures (structures or organs that are believed to
have been functional in an ancestor but are reduced and nonfunctional in a
descendant).
d. Erasmus Darwin offered no mechanism by which evolutionary descent might
occur.
B. Late Eighteenth-/Early-Nineteenth Century Contributions
1. Cuvier and Catastrophism
a. George Cuvier (1769–1832), a French vertebrate zoologist, was the first to use
comparative anatomy to develop a system of classifying animals.
b. He founded the science of paleontology—the study of fossils—and suggested
that a single fossil bone was all he needed to deduce the entire anatomy of an
animal.
c. To explain the fossil record, Cuvier proposed that a whole series of catastrophes
(extinctions) and re-populations from other regions had occurred.
d. Cuvier was also a staunch advocate of special creation and fixity of species; this
presented him with a problem when geological evidence of a particular region
showed a succession of life forms in the earth’s strata.
e. Catastrophism is the term applied to Cuvier’s explanation of fossil history: the
belief that catastrophic extinctions occurred, after which repopulation of surviving
species occurred, giving an appearance of change through time.
2. Lamarck and Acquired Characteristics
a. Lamarck (1744–1829) was the first to state that descent with modification occurs
and that organisms become adapted to their environments.
b. Lamarck, an invertebrate zoologist, held ideas at odds with Cuvier’s.
c. Lamarck mistakenly saw “a desire for perfection” as inherent in all living things.
d. Inheritance of acquired characteristics was Lamarck’s belief that organisms
become adapted to their environment during their lifetime and pass these
adaptations to their offspring.
e. Experiments fail to uphold Lamarck’s inheritance of acquired characteristics; the
molecular mechanism of inheritance shows phenotypic changes do not result in
genetic changes that can be passed on to the next generation.
15.2 Darwin’s Theory of Evolution
A. Darwin’s Background
1. His nature was too sensitive to pursue medicine; he attended divinity school at
Cambridge.
2. He attended biology and geology lectures and was tutored by the Reverend John
Henslow.
3. Henslow arranged his five-year trip on the HMS Beagle; Darwin was an observant
student of nature.
B. Geology and Fossils
1. His study of geology and fossils caused him to concur with Lyell that the observed
massive geological changes were caused by slow, continuous processes.
a. Darwin took Lyell’s book on the voyage of the HMS Beagle.
b. In his book Principles of Geology, Charles Lyell presented arguments to support a
102
theory of geological change proposed by James Hutton.
c. In contrast to catastrophists, Hutton proposed that the earth was subject to slow
but continuous geological processes (e.g., erosion and uplifting) that occur at a
uniform rate, a theory called uniformitarianism.
d. The Argentina coast had raised beaches; he witnessed earthquakes raising the
earth several feet.
e. Marine shells occurred far inland and at great heights in the Andes.
f. Fossils of huge sloths and armadillo-like animals suggested modern forms were
descended from extinct forms with change over time; therefore species were not
fixed.
C. Biogeography
1. Biogeography is the study of the geographic distribution of life forms on earth.
2. Patagonian hares replaced rabbits in the South American grasslands.
3. The greater rhea found in the north was replaced by the lesser rhea in the south.
4. Comparison of the animals of South America and the Galápagos Islands caused
Darwin to conclude that adaptation to the environment can cause diversification,
including origin of new species.
5. The Galápagos Islands
a. These volcanic islands off the South American coast had fewer types of
organisms.
b. Island species varied from the mainland species, and from island-to-island.
c. Each island had a variation of tortoise; long and short necked tortoises correlated
with different vegetation.
d. Darwin’s Finches
1) Finches on the Galápagos Islands resembled a mainland finch but there were
more types.
2) Galápagos finch species varied by nesting site, beak size, and eating habits.
3) One unusual finch used a twig or thorn to pry out insects, a job normally done
by (missing) woodpeckers (Darwin never witnessed this finch behavior).
4) The variation in finches posed questions to Darwin: did they descend from
one mainland ancestor or did islands allow isolated populations to evolve
independently, and could present-day species have resulted from changes
occurring in each isolated population?
D. Natural Selection and Adaptation
1. Darwin decided that adaptations develop over time; he sought a mechanism by which
adaptations might arise.
2. Natural selection was proposed by both Alfred Russel Wallace and Darwin as a
driving mechanism of evolution caused by environmental selection of organisms most
fit to reproduce, resulting in adaptation.
3. Because the environment is always changing, there is no perfectly-adapted organism.
4. Natural selection is a process consisting of these conditions:
a. The members of a population have random but heritable variations.
b. In a population, many more individuals are produced each generation than the
environment can support.
c. Some individuals have adaptive characteristics that enable them to survive and
reproduce better. Darwin called the ability to have more offspring, differential
103
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
reproductive success.
d. The result of natural selection is a population adapted to its local environment.
5. Natural selection can only utilize variations that are randomly provided; therefore
there is no directedness or anticipation of future needs.
6. Extinction occurs when previous adaptations are no longer suitable to a changed
environment.
Organisms Have Inheritable Variations
1. In contrast to the previous worldview where imperfections were to be ignored,
variations were essential in natural selection.
2. Darwin suspected, but did not have today’s evidence, that the occurrence of variation
is completely random.
3. New variations are as likely to be harmful as helpful.
4. Variations that make adaptation possible are those that are passed on from generation
to generation.
5. Darwin could not state the cause of variations because genetics was not yet
established.
6. Natural selection only operates on variations that are already available in a
population’s gene pool.
Organisms Compete for Resources
1. Darwin and Wallace both read an essay by Thomas Malthus, a socioeconomist.
2. Malthus proposed that human populations outgrow food supply and death and famine
were inevitable.
3. Darwin applied this to all organisms; resources were not sufficient for all members to
survive.
Organisms Differ in Reproductive Success
1. Organisms whose traits enable them to reproduce to a greater degree have a greater
fitness.
a. Fitness is a measure of an organism’s reproductive success.
b. Black western diamondback rattlesnakes are more likely to survive on lava flows;
lighter-colored rattlesnakes are more likely to survive on desert soil.
2. Darwin noted that humans carry out artificial selection.
a. Early humans likely selected wolf variants; consequently, desirable traits increase
in frequency in subsequent generations and produced the varieties of domestic
dogs.
b. Russian scientists have produced silver foxes that allow themselves to be petted
rather than running away from humans.
c. Many crop plant varieties can be traced to a single ancestor.
Organisms Become Adapted
1. An adaptation is a trait that helps an organism be more suited to its environment.
2. Unrelated organisms living in the same environment often display similar
characteristics.
3. Because of differential reproduction, adaptive traits increase in each succeeding
generation.
On the Origin of Species by Darwin
1. After the HMS Beagle returned to England in 1836, Darwin waited over 20 years to
publish.
104
2. He used the time to test his hypothesis that life forms arose by descent from a
common ancestor and that natural selection is a mechanism by which species can
change and new species arise.
3. Darwin was forced to publish Origin of Species after reading a similar hypothesis by
Alfred Russel Wallace.
J. Alfred Russel Wallace (Science Focus box)
1. Alfred Russel Wallace (1823-1913) was an English naturalist who independently and
simultaneously proposed natural selection as a mechanism for evolution.
2. He and the entomologist Henry Walter Bates took a collecting trip to the Amazon,
and then to the Malay Archipelago from 1854-1864)
3. After studying the animals from his trips, he divided the lislands into a western and
eastn group. This sharp line dividing the two islands group is now known as
Wallace’s Line.
4. Wallace’s Line is located near a deep channel between the Oriental and Australian
regions. This area serves as an impassable barrier to animal dispersal.
5. In 1855 Wallace wrote an essay entitled, “On the Law Which Has Regulated the
Introduction of New Species.” At this point he saw that species share a common
ancestry and that species also change over time.
6. In 1858 Wallace concluded changes in species are due to changes in the environment
through natural selection.
7. Wallace wrote a manuscript of these findings and sent it to Charles Darwin for
review. Darwin was shocked that Wallace had the same theories that he had. Darwin
told Wallace to publish his manuscript at once.
8. Darwin published Origin of the Species one year later while Wallace was in the field.
9. Although Darwin overshadows Wallace, Wallace is still refered to as “England’s
Greatest Living Naturalist.”
K. Natural Selection Can Be Witnessed
1. Darwin formed his natural selection hypothesis by observing the distribution of
tortoises and finches on the Galapagos Islands.
2. Scientists are currently witnessing natural selection on the Galapagos Islands. Peter
and Rosemary Grant have been observing finch beak size change with rainfall.
During wet seasons, the offspring have smaller beaks to eat the small seeds, however,
in drier seasons, offspring have larger beaks capable of breaking harder seeds that
survive the dry weather.
3. Other examples of natural selection can be seen in marine snails, and the scarlet
honeycreeper, plants and bacteria.
4. A common example of natural selection is industrial melanism. Prior to the industrial
revolution in Great Britian, light-colored peppered moths were more common (90%)
than the dark-colored peppered moths (10%).
a. Following the industrial revolution and increase in pollution, dark-colored
peppered moths reached 80% of the peppered moth population.
b. Once legislation regulated pollution reduction, dark-colored peppered moths
reduced to 16% in one of th collecting sites.
15.3 Evidence for Evolution
A. Common Descent
1. The hypothesis of common descent is supported by many lines of evidence.
105
2. The more varied the evidence, the more certain it becomes.
B. Fossils Evidence
1. Fossils are the remains and traces of past life or any other direct evidence of past life.
2. Fossils include skeletons, shells, seeds, insects trapped in amber, and imprints of
leaves.
3. Transitional fossils reveal links between groups.
a. Archeopteryx is an intermediate between reptiles and birds.
b. Ambulocetus natans is a whale with legs.
C. Biogeographical Evidence
1. Biogeography studies the distribution of plants and animals worldwide.
2. Distribution of organisms is explained by related forms evolving in one locale and
spreading to other accessible areas.
a. Darwin observed South America had no rabbits; he concluded rabbits originated
elsewhere.
b. Biogeography explains the abundance of finch species on the Galápagos Islands
lacking on the mainland.
3. Physical factors, such as the location of continents, determine where a population can
spread.
a. Cacti are restricted to North American deserts and euphorbia grow in African
deserts.
b. Marsupials arose when South America, Antarctica, and Australia were joined;
Australia separated before placental mammals arose, so only marsupials
diversified in Australia.
D. Anatomical Evidence
1. Organisms have anatomical similarities when they are closely related because of
common descent.
a. Homologous structures in different organisms are inherited from a common
ancestor.
b. Analogous structures are inherited from unique ancestors and have come to
resemble each other because they serve a similar function.
c. Vertebrate forelimbs contain the same sets of bones organized in similar ways,
despite their dissimilar functions.
2. Vestigial structures are remains of a structure that was functional in some ancestors
but is no longer functional in the organism in question.
a. Most birds have well-developed wings; some bird species have reduced wings
and do not fly.
b. Humans have a tailbone but no tail.
c. Presence of vestigial structures is explained by the common descent hypothesis;
these are traces of an organism’s evolutionary history.
3. Embryological development reveals a unity of plan.
a. During development, all vertebrates have a post-anal tail and paired pharyngeal
pouches.
1) In fishes and amphibian larvae, the pouches become gills.
2) In humans, first pair of pouches becomes a cavity of middle ear and auditory
tube; second pair becomes tonsils, while third and fourth pairs become thymus
and parathyroid glands.
106
3) The above features are explained if fishes are ancestral to other vertebrate
groups.
E. Biochemical Evidence
1. All living organisms use the same basic biochemical molecules, e.g., DNA, ATP, and
many identical or nearly identical enzymes.
2. Organisms utilize the same DNA triplet code and the same 20 amino acids in their
proteins.
3. Many organisms share the same introns and types of repeats, which is remarkable
since there is no obvious functional reason why these components need to be so
similar.
4. This is substantiated by the analysis of the degree of similarity in amino acids for
cytochrome c among organisms.
5. These similarities can be explained by descent from a common ancestor.
6. Life’s vast diversity has come about by only a slight difference in the same genes.
F. Because it is supported by so many lines of evidence, evolution is no longer considered a
hypothesis.
1. Evolution is one of the great unifying theories of biology, similar in status to the germ
theory of disease in medicine.
2. In science, theory is reserved for those conceptual schemes that are supported by a
large number of observations or a large amount of experimental evidence and have
not been found lacking.
107
Chapter 16
16.1
Population Genetics
1. A population is all of the members of a single species occupying a certain area at
the same time.
2. Population genetics studies the variation in alleles in a gene pool.
A. Genetic Variation
1. Populations can have many phenotypic, and therefore genotypic, differences.
2. Investigators study DNA sequencing to discover the amount of genetic variation in a
population.
3. DNA sequencing has allowed scientists to discover various loci that exhibit single
nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs)
a. SNPs are DNA sequences in an organism’s genome that differ by a single
nucleotide.
b. SNPs can cause changes in amino acid sequences or other regulatory differences,
and are therefore thought to be an important source of genetic variations in
populations of all organisms.
4. New research discovered that humans inherit patterns of base-pair differences called
haplotypes (from the terms haploid and genotype.
a. The HapMap Project catalogs sequence differences, called haplotypes, in humans.
b. Researchers want to link haplotypes to the risk of specific illnesses, in the hope it
will lead to new methods of preventing, diagnosing, and treating disease.
B. Microevolution
1. It was not until the 1930s that population geneticists were able to apply the principles
of genetics to populations and thus to recognize when evolution had occurred.
2. Evolution that occurs within a population is called microevolution.
3. The gene pool is the total of all the alleles in a population; it is described in terms of
gene frequencies.
4. Neither dominance nor sexual reproduction changes allele frequencies.
5. The Hardy-Weinberg principle
a. This principle states an equilibrium of allele frequencies in a gene pool (using a
formula p2 + 2pq + q2) remains in effect in each succeeding generation of a
sexually reproducing population if five conditions are met.
1) No mutation: no allelic changes occur, or changes in one direction are
balanced by changes in the other direction.
2) No gene flow: migration of alleles into or out of the population does not
occur.
3) Random mating: individuals pair by chance and not according to their
genotypes or phenotypes.
4) No genetic drift: the population is large so changes in allele frequencies due to
chance are insignificant.
5) No selection: no selective force favors one genotype over another.
b. In real life, conditions of the Hardy-Weinberg law are rarely if ever met, and
allele frequencies in the gene pool of a population do change from one generation
to the next, resulting in evolution.
c. Any change of allele frequencies in a gene pool of a population signifies that
108
evolution has occurred.
d. The Hardy-Weinberg law tells us what factors cause evolution—those that violate
the conditions listed.
e. A Hardy-Weinberg equilibrium provides a baseline by which to judge whether
evolution has occurred.
f. Hardy-Weinberg equilibrium is a constancy of gene pool frequencies that remains
across generations.
6. Industrial Melanism
a. The case of the peppered moths provides a case study in a shift in phenotype
frequencies under selection.
b. Before trees became coated with soot from air pollution, the percentage of darkcolored moths was 10%.
c. With birds acting as a selective agent, the light colored moths were reduced while
dark-colored moths were better adapted to survive on the darkened trees.
d. The last generation observed has 80% dark-colored moths.
C. Causes of Microevolution
1. Mutations
a. Mutations are permanent genetic changes.
b. Without mutations, there could be no inheritable phenotypic variations among
members of a population.
c. Mutations are the primary source of genetic differences among prokaryotes that
produce asexually.
d. In sexual reproducing organisms, both mutations and sexual recombination are
important in generating phenotypic differences.
2. Nonrandom Mating and Gene Flow
a. Random mating involves individuals pairing by chance, not according to
genotype or phenotype.
b. Nonrandom mating occurs when certain genotypes or phenotypes mate with one
another.
c. Assortive mating is a type of nonrandom mating that occurs when individuals
tend to mate with those having the same phenotype with respect to a certain
characteristic.
d. Assortative mating divides a population into two phenotypic classes with reduced
gene exchange.
e. Homozygotes for gene loci that control a trait increase, and heterozygotes for
these loci decrease.
f. Gene flow (gene migration) is the movement of alleles among populations by
migration of breeding individuals.
g. Gene flow can increase variation within a population by introducing novel alleles
produced by mutation in another population.
h. Continued gene flow decreases diversity among populations, causing gene pools
to become similar.
i. Gene flow among populations can prevent speciation from occurring.
3. Genetic Drift
a. Genetic drift refers to changes in allele frequencies of a gene pool due to chance
rather than selection by the environment.
109
b. Genetic drift occurs in both large and small populations; small populations are
more likely to show the effects of drift.
c. Genetic drift occurs when founders start a new population, or after a genetic
bottleneck with interbreeding.
d. The bottleneck effect prevents most genotypes from participating in production
of the next generation.
1) The bottleneck effect is caused by a severe reduction in population size due to
a natural disaster, predation, or habitat reduction.
2) The bottleneck effect causes a severe reduction in the total genetic diversity of
the original gene pool.
3) The cheetah bottleneck causes relative infertility because alleles were lost due
to intense inbreeding when populations were reduced in earlier times.
e. The founder effect is an example of genetic drift where rare alleles or
combinations occur in higher frequency in a population isolated from the general
population.
1) This is due to founding individuals containing a fraction of total genetic
diversity of the original population.
2) Which particular alleles are carried by the founders is dictated by chance
alone.
3) As an example, dwarfism is much higher in a Pennsylvania Amish community
due to a few German founders.
16.2 Natural Selection
1. Natural selection favors the phenotype that is the most adaptive under the present
environmental Circumstances. In this context, there are three types of natural selection:
stabilizing, directional, or disruptive.
2. Stabilizing selection occurs when extreme phenotypes are eliminated and the
intermediate phenotype is favored.
a. The average number of eggs laid by Swiss starlings is four or five.
b. If the female lays more or less than this number, fewer survive.
c. Genes determining the physiology of yolk production and behavior are involved in
clutch size.
3. Directional selection occurs when an extreme phenotype is favored; the distribution
curve shifts that direction.
a. A shift to more colorful, later maturing male guppies with exposure to no predators
compared to drab colored, early maturing male guppies.
4. Disruptive selection occurs when extreme phenotypes are favored and can lead to more
than one distinct form.
a. British snails (Cepaea nemoralis) vary because a wide range causes natural selection
to vary.
b. In forest areas, thrushes feed on snails with light bands.
c. In low-vegetation areas, thrushes feed on snails with dark shells that lack light bands.
5. Sexual Selection
a. Sexual selection refers to adaptive changes in males and females that lead to an
increased ability to secure a mate.
1) In males, this may result in an increased ability to compete with other males for a
mate.
110
2) Females may select a mate with the best fitness (ability to produce surviving
offspring), thereby increasing her own fitness.
6. Female Choice
a. Two hypothesis regarding a female’s choice of a mate are:
1) The good genes hypothesis contends that females choose mates based on traits for
improving the survival of offspring.
2) The runaway hypothesis states that females chose mates on the basis of traits that
attract them to females; the trait can then become exaggerated until it is a
handicap.
b. The Raggiana Bird of Paradise is dimorphic (males and females differ in size and
other traits)
1) The ornateness of the male is a factor in selection by a female.
2) More feathery Raggiana are parasite-free, and their selection by females would
increase the chance for survival.
7. Male Competition
a. A cost-benefit analysis can be applied to determine if the benefit of access to mating
is worth the cost of competition among males.
b. Baboons have a dominance hierarchy.
1) A dominance hierarchy is a ranking within a group where the higher ranking
individuals acquire more resources.
2) Dominance is determined by confrontation where one animal gives way to the
other.
3) Baboons are dimorphic: males are larger and have large canine teeth; they decide
when the troop moves, and they defend it.
4) Females mate with dominant males when ovulation is near; the dominant males
then protect all young.
5) The drawbacks to being large and in danger are outweighed by the chance of
fathering young.
6) The subordinate males have less chance to mate but they do have avenues to have
some offspring.
c. Red deer stake out a territory, an area that is defended against competitors.
1) Territoriality involves the type of behavior needed to defend a particular
territory.
2) A stag competes for females that form a harem that mates only with him.
3) A stag remains at peak fighting ability for only a short time; one stag can only
father about two dozen offspring.
8. Sexual Selection in Humans (Science Focus box)
a. Human Males Compete
b. Humans, like many other mammals, are dimorphic.
c. Males are larger and more aggressive, perhaps due to past sexual selection by
females.
1. Females Choose
a.
Male mating success correlates best with income—wealthy males attracted
mates better than nonwealthy males.
b.
Apparently, females prefer to mate with a male who is wealthy and has a
successful career—this will ensure that the children will live to reproduce.
111
2. Men Also Have a Choice
a.
Men prefer women who will present them with children: health, age,
“figure,” faithfulness are all factors in a male’s choice of a mate.
16.3
Maintenance of Variations
1. Populations always show some genotypic variation; populations that lack variation
may not be able to adapt to new conditions.
A. Natural Selection
1. Imperfections are common because compromises have had to be made. For example,
the success of humans is attributable to their dexterous hands, but the spine is subject
to injury because the vertebrate spine was not originally designed to stand erect.
2. If a feature has successfully evolved, then the benefit outweighs the cost.
3. The environment also plays a role in maintaining variations. For example, disruptive
selection promostes polymorphisms in a population.
4. The environment also includes specific selecting agents that help maintain variations.
B. Heterozygote Advantage
1. Heterozygote advantage occurs when the heterozygote is favored over the two
homozygotes.
2. Sickle-Cell Disease
a. In sickle-cell disease, heterozygotes are more fit in malaria areas because the
sickle-cell trait does not express unless the oxygen content of the environment is
low; but the malaria agent causes red blood cells to die when it infects them (loss
of potassium).
b. Some homozygous dominants are maintained in the population but they die at an
early age from sickle-cell disease.
c. Some homozygotes are maintained in the population for normal red blood cells,
but they are vulnerable to malaria.
c. Cystic Fibrosis
a.
In cystic fibrosis the recessive allele causes the person to have a defective
plasma membrane protein.
b.
The agent that causes typhoid fever can use the normal version of this protein,
but not the defective one, to enter cells.
c.
Heterozygote superiority caused the recessive allele to be maintained in the
population.
112
Chapter 17
17.1 Separation of the Species
A. What is a Species?
1. The evolutionary species concept states that members of a species share the same
distinct evolutionary pathway and that species can be recognized by morphological
trait differences.
a. An advantage of defining species according to this concept is ath it applies to both
sexually and asexually reproducing organisms.
b. However, a disadvantage to this species concept is using morphological traits to
distinguish species. The precense of variation between individuals may categorize
them as two different species rather than one species.
2. The biological species concept says that the members of one species interbreed and
have a shared gene pool, and each species is reproductively isolated from every other
species.
a. An advantage to this species concept is that it can designate species even when
trait differences may be difficult to find.
b. A disadvantage is that this concept cannot be applied to asexually reproducing
organisms, organisms only known by the fossil record, or species that could
possibly interbreed if the lived near one another.
3. DNA base sequence data and protein differences can now be used to investigate how
closely species are related to one another.
B. Reproductive Isolating Mechanisms
1. For two species to be separate, gene flow must not occur between them.
2. A reproductive isolating mechanism is any structural, functional, or behavioral
characteristic that prevents successful reproduction from occurring.
3. Prezygotic (“before formation of a zygote”) isolating mechanisms are anatomical or
behavioral differences between the members of two species that prevent mating or
make it unlikely fertilization will take place if mating occurs.
a. Habitat isolation occurs when two species occupy different habitats, even within
the same geographic range, so that they are less likely to meet and to attempt to
reproduce.
b. Temporal isolation occurs when two species live in the same location, but each
reproduces at a different time of year, and so they do not attempt to mate.
c. Behavioral isolation results from differences in mating behavior between two
species.
d. Mechanical isolation is the result of differences between two species in
reproductive structures or other body parts, so that mating is prevented.
e. Gamete isolation includes incompatibility of gametes of two different species so
they cannot fuse to form a zygote; an egg may have receptors only for the sperm
of its own species or a plant stigma prevents completion of pollination.
4. Postzygotic (“after formation of a zygote”) isolating mechanisms prevent
development of a hybrid after mating has taken place.
a. Zygote mortality is when hybrids (offspring of parents of two different species)
do not live to reproduce.
b. Hybrid sterility occurs when the hybrid offspring are sterile (e.g., mules).
c. In F2 fitness, the offspring are fertile but the F2 generation is sterile.
113
17.2
Modes of Speciation
1. Speciation is the splitting of one species into two more more species or the
transformation of one species into a new species over time.
a. Researchers recognize two modes of speciation: geographic isolation and
reproductive isolation.
A. Allopatric speciation
1. Allopatric speciation occurs when new species result from populations being
separated by a geographical barrier that prevents their members from reproducing
with each other.
2. First proposed by Ernst Mayr of Harvard University.
3. While geographically isolated, variations accumulate until the populations are
reproductively isolated.
4. Examples of Allopatric Speciation
a. An ancestral population of Ensatina salamanders migrated from northern
California to southern California. The Central Valley prevented gene flow
between the eastern and western populations of these salamanders. Genetic
differences increased resulting in two distinct forms of Ensatina salamanders.
b. Green iguana of South America is believed to be the common ancestor for the
marine iguanta on the Galapgagos Islands (to the west) and the rhinoceros iguana
on Hispaniola (to the north). A few of these iguanas may have swam to the islands
and over time formed populations separate from each other and from the parent
population of South America.
c. Many sockeye salmon in Washington State were introduced into Lake
Washington when some colonized an area of the lake near Pleasure Point Beach
and others migrated into the Cedar River. Because of the difference in water
current, over time, the salmon differed in shape and size due to the demands of
reproducing in the different water currents.
5. Reinforcement of Reproductive Isolation
a. A side effect to adaptive changes involving mating is reproductive isolation.
b. As populations become reproductively isolated, postzygotic isolating mechanisms
may arise before prezygotic isolating mechanisms.
c. An example is a horse reproducting with a mule, a sterile donkey is produced.
d. Natural selection would favor any variation in populations that prevents the
occurrence of hybrids when they do not have offspring.
e. Reinforcement refers to the process of natural selection favoring variations that
lead to reproductive isolation.
B. Adaptive Radiation
1. Adaptive radiation is a type of allopatric speciation and occurs when a single
ancestral species gives rise to a variety of species, each adapted to a specific
environment.
2. An ecological niche is where a species lives and how it interacts with other species.
3. The case of Darwin’s finches illustrates the adaptive radiation of 13 species from one
founder mainland finch.
4. On the Hawaiian Islands, a wide variety of honeycreepers descended from one
goldfinchlike ancestor; Hawaii is also the home of the silversword plants that radiated
from ancestral tarweeds.
114
C. Sympatric Speciation
1. Sympatric speciation would occur when members of a single population develop a
genetic difference (e.g., chromosome number) that prevents them from reproducing
with the parent type.
2. A polyploid is a eukaryote with three or more complete sets of chromosomes.
a. Polyploidy is predominantly seen in plants and makes a significant contribution to
the evolution of new plants.
b. A polyploid plant can reproduce with itself, but cannot reproduce with the 2n
population.
c. The two types of polyploidy are: aneuploidy and alloploidy.
3. Aneuploidy is the condition in which an organism gains or loses one or more
chromosomes.
9.
Monosomy (2n – 1) occurs when an individual has only one of a particular
type of chromosome.
10. Trisomy (2n + 1)occurs when an individual has three of a particular type of
chromosome.
11. Farmers may use produce sterile plants because their fruits do not have seeds and
tend to be more favorable for the consumer.
4. Alloploidy requires two different but related species of plants to hybridize.
a. When hybridization occurs, it is followed by chromosome doubling.
b. However the offspring that has parents with different numbered pairs of
chromosomes will be sterile.
c. An exaple of alloploidy can be seen in the wheat plant used to produce bread. The
parents of the present day bread wheat had 28 and 14 chromosomes. The hybrid
with 21 chromosomes is sterile, but bread wheat with 43 chromosomes is fertile
since the chromosomes can pair during meiosis.
D. The Burgess Shale Hosts a Diversity of Life (Science Focus box)
1. The Burgess Shale is a rock outcropping in Yoho National Park, British Columbia
discovered by Charles Doolittle Walcott in 1909.
2. In this area there is a large quantity of fossils.
3. At the beginning of the excavation, it was difficult to extract the fossils from their
matix, but now new methods that involve UV light and diluted acetic acid make it
easy to free the fossils.
4. These marine fossils are thought to have lived around 540 million years ago (MYA),
during the Precambrian period.
5. Many fossils found in the Burgess Shale are soft-bodied invertebrates, which is
unusual since soft-bodied animals rarely fossilized.
6. When these organisms were alive, they all lived in the sea, and this area was
subjected to mudslides. The mud entered the sea, buried the animals. Later the mud
turned into shale and over time the shale was raised. Mud particles filled the spaces
around the organisms, so the soft tissue was preserved and fossils became somewhat
three-dimensional.
7. Organisms that have been preserved at the Burgess Shale are vertebrates,
invertebrates, and unicellular organisms.
8. There is much dispute regarding the evolution of these species. Some scientist believe
that evolution of these species happened slowly, while others believed it happened
115
quickly and suddenly.
17.3 Principles of Macroevolution
A. Macroevolution is evolution of new species and higher levels of classification.
B. Some evolutionists support a gradualistic model of macroevolution, meaning that
speciation occurs after populations become isolated, with each group continuing slowly
on its own evolutionary pathway.
1. According to this model, ancelstral species gradually gives rise to two separate
species.
2. This model suggests that it is difficult to indicate when speciation occurred because
there would be so many transitional links.
C. Other evolutionists support a punctuated equilibrium model to explain the pace of
evolution.
a. According to this model, periods of equilibrium (no change) are punctuated (or
interrupted) by speciation.
b. This model suggests that transitional links are less likely to become fossils and
less likely to be found.
c. Speciation is more likely to involve only an isolated population at one locate,
because a favorable genotype could spread more rapidly within such a population.
D. These two models could both assist in interpretation of the fossil record. For example,
some species may fit into one model, and other species fit into the other model.
1. Developmental Genes and Macroevolution
a. Genes can bring about radical changes in body shapes and organs.
b. The Pax6 gene is involved in eye formation in all organisms.
c. Homeotic (Hox) genes determine the location of repeated structures in all
vertebrates.
2. Gene Expression Can Influence Development
a. Gene expression influences organisms’ developmental processes.
a. These genes can bring about changes in body shapes and organs.
b. Despite millions of years of divergent evolution, all animals share the same
control switches for development
3. Development of the Eye
a. Although eyes of species vary in size, compound or simple, etc.
b. Despite these differences, there is one gene, Pax6, required for eye formation.
c. The gene Pax6 was dicvoered by Walter Gehrig and collegues in 1994.
d. Interestingly, the mouse Pax6 gene can cause an eye to develop in the leg of a
fruit fly.
4. Development of Limbs
a. The Tbx5 gene helps in the development of limbs in humans and wings in birds.
b. Tbx5 triggers different genes in birds and humans, which may explain why the
same protein is used in developing limbs in humans and wings in birds.
5. Development of Overall Shape
a. Hox genes control the number and appearances of repeated structures along the
main body axes of vertebrates.
b. Shifts when the Hox gene is expressed can explain why some vertebrates, like the
snake, have hundreds of vertebrae, and others, like the chick only have seven.
6. Pelvic-Fin Genes
116
E.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a. An altered expression of a particular gene can reduce the pelvic-fin bud in the
embryo.
b. Natural selection can lead to major skeletal changes in a relatively short
period of time.
7. Human Evolution
a. Human DNA base sequencing is similar to that of chimpanzees, mice, and all
vertebrates.
b. Scientist predict that differential gene expression and/or new functions for
“old” genes will explain how humans evolved.
Macroevolution Is Not Goal-Oriented
The evolution of the horse, Equus, represents a gradual, straight-line evolution until
its goal, the modern horse, has been achieved.
a.
The trends seen in the evolution of the horse are: overall size, toe reduction, and
change in tooth size and shape.
However, based on fossils, it is easier to see that the horse lineage is not a straightline evolution, but rather forming a thick bush of many equine species.
One may have deducted that since the only genus that remains is Equus and the other
genera have become extinct, that evolution was directed towards producing Equus.
However, each of the ancesteral species was adapted to its environment.
Adaptation occurs because the members of a population with an advantage are able to
have more offspring than other members.
Natural selection is not goal-oriented, but rather opportunistic.
117
Chapter 18
18.1 Origin of Life
1. Chemical evolution is the increase in complexity of chemicals that led to the first cells.
a. Today, we say that “life only comes from life.”
b. However, the first cells had to arise from an increased complexity of chemicals.
A. The Early Earth
1. The Earth came into being about 4.6 BYA (BYA).
2. Heat from gravitation and radioactivity formed the Earth in several layers with iron
and nickel in a liquid core, silicate minerals in a semi-liquid mantle, and upwellings
of volcanic lava forming the first crust.
3. The Earth’s mass provides a gravitational field strong enough to hold an atmosphere.
4. Early Earth’s atmosphere differed from the current atmosphere, consisting of:
a. water vapor,
b. nitrogen,
c. carbon dioxide,
d. small amounts of hydrogen, methane, ammonia, hydrogen sulfide, and carbon
monoxide.
5. The early atmosphere was formed by volcanic out-gassing characteristic of the young
Earth.
6. The early atmosphere contained little free oxygen (O2) and was probably a reducing
atmosphere with little free oxygen; a reducing atmosphere lacks free O2 and allows
formation of complex organic molecules.
7. The early Earth was so hot that H2O only existed as a vapor in dense, thick clouds.
8. As the Earth cooled, H2O vapor condensed to form liquid H2O, and rain collected in
oceans.
9. The Earth’s distance from the sun allows H2O to exist in all phases: solid, liquid, and
gas.
10. NASA photos seem to confirm that Earth is bombarded by comets adding substantial
water vapor.
B. Monomers Evolve
1. There are three hypotheses that explain how organic monomers could have evolved.
2. Hypothesis one: Monomers came from outer space
a. Comets and meteorites, perhaps carrying organic chemicals, have pelted the Earth
throughout history.
b. A meteorite from Mars (ALH84001) that landed on Earth 13,000 years ago, may
have fossilized bacteria.
3. Hypothesis two: monomers came from reactions in the atmosphere
a. Oparin/Haldane independently suggested organic molecules could be formed in
the presence of outside energy sources using atmospheric gases.
b. Experiments performed by Miller and Urey (1953) showed experimentally that
these gases (methane, ammonia, hydrogen, water) reacted with one another to
produce small organic molecules (amino acids, organic acids).
c. Lack of oxidation and decay allowed organic molecules to form a thick, warm
organic soup.
4. Hypothesis three: monomers came from reactions at hydrothermal vents
a. Ammonia may have been scarce in the early atmosphere; undersea thermal vents,
118
which line ocean ridges, might have been responsible for converting nitrogen to
ammonia.
C. Polymers Evolve
1. Newly formed organic molecules polymerized to produce larger molecules.
a. Wachtershauser and Huber formed peptides using iron-nickel sulfides under
ventlike conditions.
b. Such minerals have a charged surface that attracts amino acids and provides
electrons so they bond together.
2. Protein-first Hypothesis
a. Sidney Fox demonstrated amino acids polymerize abiotically if exposed to dry
heat.
b. Amino acids collected in shallow puddles along the rocky shore; heat of the sun
caused them to form proteinoids (i.e., small polypeptides that have some catalytic
properties).
c. When proteinoids are returned to water, they form cell-like microspheres
composed of protein.
d. This assumes DNA genes came after protein enzymes; DNA replication needs
protein enzymes.
3. The Clay Hypothesis
a. Graham Cairns-Smith suggests that amino acids polymerize in clay, with
radioactivity providing energy.
b. Clay attracts small organic molecules and contains iron and zinc atoms serving as
inorganic catalysts for polypeptide formation.
c. Clay collects energy from radioactive decay and discharges it if temperature or
humidity changes.
d. If RNA nucleotides and amino acids became associated so polypeptides were
ordered by and helped synthesize RNA, then polypeptides and RNA arose at the
same time.
4. RNA-first Hypothesis
a. Only the macromolecule RNA was needed at the beginning to lead to the first
cell.
b. Thomas Cech and Sidney Altman discovered that RNA can be both a substrate
and an enzyme.
c. RNA would carry out processes of life associated with DNA (in genes) and
protein enzymes.
d. Supporters of this hypothesis label this an “RNA world” 4 BYA.
D. A Protocell Evolves
1. Before the first true cell arose, there would have been a protocell or protobiont.
2. A protocell would have a lipid-protein membrane and carry on energy metabolism.
3. Sidney Fox showed that if lipids are made available to microspheres, lipids become
associated with microspheres producing a lipid-protein membrane.
4. Oparin demonstrated a protocell could have developed from coacervate droplets.
a. Coacervate droplets are complex spherical units that spontaneously form when
concentrated mixtures of macromolecules are held in the right temperature, ionic
composition, and pH.
b. Coacervate droplets absorb and incorporate various substances from the
119
surrounding solution.
c. In a liquid environment, phospholipid molecules spontaneously form liposomes,
spheres surrounded by a layer of phospholipids; this is called the “membranefirst” hypothesis.
d. A protocell could have contained only RNA to function as both genetic material
and enzymes.
5. If a protocell was a heterotrophic fermenter living on the organic molecules in the
organic soup that was its environment, this would indicate heterotrophs preceded
autotrophs.
a. A heterotroph is an organism that cannot synthesize organic compounds from
inorganic substances and therefore must take in preformed organic compounds.
b. An autotroph is an organism that makes organic molecules from inorganic
nutrients.
6. If the protocell evolved at hydrothermal vents, it would be chemosynthetic and
autotrophs would have preceded heterotrophs.
7. The first protocells may have used preformed ATP, but as supplies dwindled, natural
selection would favor cells that could extract energy from carbohydrates to transform
ADP to ATP.
8. Since glycolysis is a common metabolic pathway in living things, it evolved early in
the history of life.
9. As there was no free O2, it is assumed that protocells carried on a form of
fermentation.
10. The first protocells had a limited ability to break down organic molecules; it took
millions of years for glycolysis to evolve completely.
11. Fox has shown that a microsphere has some catalytic ability; Oparin found that
coacervates incorporate enzymes if they are available in the medium.
E. A Self-Replication System Evolves
1. In living systems, information flows from DNA → RNA → protein; it is possible that
this sequence developed in stages.
2. The RNA-first hypothesis suggests that the first genes and enzymes were RNA
molecules.
a. These genes would have directed and carried out protein synthesis.
b. Ribozymes are RNA that acts as enzymes.
c. Some viruses contain RNA genes with a protein enzyme called reverse
transcriptase that uses RNA as a template to form DNA; this could have given rise
to the first DNA.
3. The protein-first hypothesis contends that proteins or at least polypeptides were the
first to arise.
a. Only after the protocell develops complex enzymes could it form nucleic acids
from small molecules.
b. Because a nucleic acid is complicated, the chance that it arose on its own is
minimal.
c. Therefore, enzymes are needed to guide the synthesis of nucleotides and then
nucleic acids.
4. Cairns-Smith suggests that polypeptides and RNA evolved simultaneously.
a. The first true cell would contain RNA genes that replicated because of the
120
presence of proteins; they become associated in clay in such a way that the
polypeptides catalyzed RNA formation.
b. This eliminates the chicken-and-egg paradox; both events happen at the same
time.
5. Once the protocell was capable of reproduction, it became a true cell and biological
evolution began.
a. After DNA formed, the genetic code still had to evolve to store information.
b. Because the current code is subject to fewer errors than other possible codes, and
because it minimizes mutations, it likely underwent a natural selection process.
F. A Recap of the Steps
1. Most biologists suspect life evolved in basic steps.
a. Abiotic synthesis of organic molecules such as amino acids occurred in the
atmosphere or at hydrothermal vents.
b. Monomers joined together to form polymers at seaside rocks or clay, or at vents;
the first polymers could have been proteins or RNA or both.
c. Polymers aggregated inside a plasma membrane to make a protocell that had
limited ability to grow; if it developed in the ocean it was a heterotroph, if at a
hydrothermal vent, a chemoautotroph.
d. Once the protocell contained DNA genes or RNA molecules, it was a true cell.
18.2 History of Life
A. Fossils Tell a Story
1. A fossil is the remains or traces of past life, usually preserved in sedimentary rock.
2. Most dead organisms are consumed by scavengers or decompose.
3. Paleontology is the study of fossils and the history of life, ancient climates, and
environments.
4. Sedimentation has been going on since the Earth was formed; it is an accumulation
of particles forming a stratum, a recognizable layer in a stratigraphic sequence laid
down on land or in water.
5. The sequence indicates the age of fossils; a stratum is older than the one above it and
younger than the one below it.
B. Relative Dating of Fossils
1. Strata of the same age in England and Russia may have different sediments.
2. However, geologists discovered that strata of the same age contain the same fossils,
termed index fossils.
3. Therefore, fossils can be used for the relative dating of strata.
4. A particular species of fossil ammonite is found over a wide range and for a limited
time period; therefore, all strata in the world that contain this ammonite are of the
same age.
5. However, relative dating does not establish the absolute age of fossils in years.
C. Absolute Dating of Fossils
1. Absolute dating relies on radioactive dating to determine the actual age of fossils.
2. Radioactive isotopes have a half-life, the time it takes for half of a radioactive isotope
to change into a stable element.
3. Carbon 14 (14C) is a radioactive isotope contained within organic matter.
a. Half of the carbon 14 (14C) will change to nitrogen 14 (14N) every 5,730 years.
121
b. Comparing 14C radioactivity of a fossil to modern organic matter calculates the
age of the fossil.
c. After 50,000 years, the 14C radioactivity is so low it cannot be used to measure
age accurately.
4. It is possible to determine the ratio of potassium 40 (40K) and argon 40 to date rocks
and infer the age of a fossil.
D. The Precambrian Time
1. Geologists have devised the geological timescale, which divides the history of Earth
into eras, and then periods and epochs.
2. Life arose in the Precambrian Era.
a. The Precambrian encompasses 87% of the geologic time scale.
b. Early bacteria probably resembled the archaea that live in hot springs today.
c. 3.8 BYA, the first chemical fingerprints of complex cells occur; at 3.46 BYA,
photosynthetic prokaryotic cells appear.
d. Boulders called stromatolites from this early time resemble living stromatolites
with cyanobacteria in the outer surface.
e. Oxygen-releasing photosynthesis by cyanobacteria in stromatolites caused the
atmosphere to become oxidizing rather than reducing.
f. By 2 BYA, oxygen levels were high enough that anaerobic prokaryotes were
declining.
g. Accumulation of O2 caused extinction of anaerobic organisms and the rise of
aerobic organisms.
h. O2 forms ozone or O3 in the upper atmosphere, contributing to the ozone shield
and blocking ultraviolet radiation from reaching the Earth’s surface; this allowed
organisms to live on land.
3. Eukaryotic Cells Arise
a. The eukaryotic cell, which arose 2.1 BYA, is always aerobic and contains a
nucleus and organelles.
b. The Endosymbiotic Hypothesis states that a nucleated cell englulfed prokaryotes,
which then became organelles. Evidence includes:
1) Present-day mitochondria and chloroplasts have a size that lies within the
range of that for bacteria.
2) Mitochondria and chloroplasts have their own DNA and make some of their
own proteins.
3) Mitochondria and chloroplasts divide by binary fission similar to bacteria.
4) The outer membrane of mitochondria and chloroplasts differ.
4. Multicellularity Arises
a. It is not known exactly when multicellular organisms appeared; they would have
been microscopic.
b. Separating germ cells from somatic cells may have contributed to the diversity of
organisms.
c. Fossils of the Ediacara Hills of South Australia, from about 600-545 MYA, were
soft-bodied early invertebrates.
1) These bizarre animals lived on mudflats in shallow marine waters.
2) They lacked internal organs and could have absorbed nutrients from the sea.
E. The Paleozoic Era
122
1. The Paleozoic Era lasted over 300 million years and was a very active period with
three major mass extinctions.
a. An extinction is the total disappearance of a species or higher taxonomic group.
b. Mass extinction is the disappearance of a large numbers of species or higher
groups in a short geological time, just a few million years.
2. Cambrian Animals
a. The Cambrian Period saw invertebrates flourish; invertebrates lack a vertebral
column.
b. Today’s invertebrates all trace their ancestry to the Cambrian Period, and possibly
earlier.
c. A molecular clock, based on a fixed rate of changes in base pair sequences,
allows us to trace backward how long current species have evolved separately.
d. Why fossils are easy to find in the Cambrian but not before is a complex question;
most likely the animals evolved earlier but without outer skeletons.
e. Cambrian seafloors were dominated by trilobites, now extinct, that had armored
exoskeletons.
f. Perhaps the evolution of exoskeletons was due to the presence of plentiful O2 in
the atmosphere.
g. A skeleton may have been due to the increased pressures of predation.
3. Invasion of Land
a. Early in the Ordovician Period, marine algae expanded to freshwater.
b. In the Silurian Period, vascular plants invaded land and later flourished in warm
swamps in the Carboniferous Period.
c. Spiders, centipedes, mites and millipedes all preceded the appearance of insects
on land.
d. The appearance of wings on insects in the Carboniferous Period allowed insects to
radiate into a diverse group.
e. The vertebrate line of descent began in the early Ordovician Period.
f. The Devonian Period is called the Age of Fishes and saw jawless and then jawed
fishes, including both cartilaginous and ray-finned fishes.
g. The Carboniferous Period was an age of coal-forming forests with an abundance
of club mosses, horsetails, and ferns.
1) It is called the “Age of the Amphibians” because amphibians diversified at
this time.
2) Early vascular plants and amphibians were larger and more abundant during
the Carboniferous Period; a climate change to colder and drier began the
process that produced coal.
F. The Mesozoic Era
1. Although there was a mass extinction at the end of the Paleozoic, evolution of some
plants and animals continued into the Triassic, the first period of the Mesozoic Era.
2. The Triassic period
a. Gymnosperms flourished, especially cycads; the Triassic and Jurassic are called
the “Age of Cycads.”
b. One group of reptiles, the therapsids, had the first mammal features.
c. Reptiles, originating in the Permian, underwent adaptive radiation.
3. The Jurassic Period
123
a. Many dinosaurs flourished in the sea, on land and in air.
b. Controversy surrounds dinosaurs being ectothermic or endothermic.
4. The Cretaceous Period
a. A new Chinese fossil, Jeholodens, reveals an early mammal with a long snout but
sprawling reptile-like hind limbs.
b. The era of dinosaurs ended in a mass extinction in which dinosaurs, most reptiles,
and many marine organisms perished.
G. The Cenozoic Era
1. The Cenozoic Era is divided into the Tertiary and the Quaternary Periods.
2. During the Cenozoic Era, mammals with hair and mammary glands diversified and
human evolution began.
3. Mammalian Diversification
a. During the Paleocene Epoch, mammals were small and resembled rats.
b. In the Eocene Epoch, all of the modern orders of mammals had developed.
c. Many of the types of herbivores and carnivores of the Oligocene Epoch are
extinct today.
4. Evolution of Primates
a. Flowering plants were diverse and plentiful by the Cenozoic Era; primates were
adapted to living in flowering trees.
b. The first primates were small squirrel-like animals; from them evolved the first
monkeys and apes.
c. Apes diversified during the Miocene and Pliocene Epochs; this includes the first
hominids, the group that includes humans.
d. During the Tertiary Period, the world’s climate cooled with the last two epochs
known as the Ice Age.
e. The Pleistocene Epoch saw many large sloths, beavers, wolves, bison, woolly
rhinoceroses, mastodons, and mammoths; modern humans arose and may have
contributed to extinction.
18.3 Factors That Influence Evolution
A. Continental Drift
1. Earth’s crust is dynamic, not immobile as was once thought.
2. In 1920, German meteorologist Alfred Wegener presented data from across
disciplines supporting continental drift.
3. Continental drift was confirmed in the 1960s; the continents moved with respect to
one another.
4. During the Permean Period, the continents were joined to form one supercontinent
called Pangaea which later divided into Gondwana and Laurasia and then split to
form today’s configuration.
5. Continental drift explains why the coastlines of several continents (e.g., the outline of
the west coast of Africa and that of the east coast of South America) are mirror
images of each other.
6. The same geological structures (e.g., mountain ranges) are found in many areas where
continents once touched.
7. Continental drift explains unique distribution patterns of several fossils (e.g., species
of the seed fern Glossopteris).
124
8. Continental drift also explains why some fossils (e.g., reptiles Cynognathus and
Lystrosaurus) are found on different continents.
9. Continental drift explains why Australia, South America, and Africa have distinctive
mammals; current mammalian biological diversity is the result of isolated evolution
on separate continents.
B. Plate Tectonics
1. Plate tectonics is the study of the behavior of the Earth’s crust in terms of moving
plates that are formed at ocean ridges and destroyed at subduction zones.
2. Ocean ridges are ridges on ocean floors where oceanic crust forms; regions in oceanic
crust where molten rock rises and material is added to the ocean floor result in
seafloor spreading.
3. Seafloor spreading is the lateral movement of oceanic crust away from ocean ridges
due to material added to the ocean floor.
4. Subduction zones are regions where oceanic crust collides with the continental crust,
causing the oceanic crust to descend into the mantle where it is melted.
5. Where the ocean floor is at the leading edge of a plate, a deep trench forms bordered
by volcanoes or volcanic island chains.
6. Two continents colliding form a mountain range (e.g., the Himalayas are the result of
the collision of India and Eurasia).
7. Transform boundaries are regions where two crustal plates meet and scrape past one
another resulting in relatively frequent earthquakes.
C. Mass Extinctions
1. Five mass extinctions occurred at the ends of the Ordovician, Devonian, Permian,
Triassic, and Cretaceous periods.
2. Mass extinctions have been attributed to tectonic, oceanic, and climatic changes.
3. Walter and Louis Alvarez proposed that the Cretaceous extinction was due to a bolide
(an asteroid that explodes producing meteorites) striking the Earth.
a. A layer of iridium soot has been identified in the Cretaceous clay, the correct
strata.
b. A huge crater near the Yucatan is the impact site.
c. The effect would have resembled a worldwide atomic explosion.
4. Continental drift contributed to Ordovician extinction; Gondwanaland arrived at the
south pole and glaciers chilled oceans and land until Gondwanaland drifted away
from the pole.
5. The Devonian extinction may have been a bolide event; this saw an end to 70% of the
marine invertebrates; other possibilities include drifting back toward the south pole.
6. The Permian extinction was very severe; 90% of ocean species and 70% of land
species disappeared perhaps due to an excess of carbon dioxide due to a change in
ocean circulation due to a lack of polar ice caps.
7. The Triassic extinction has been attributed to meteorite collision with Earth; a crater
in Central Quebec may have been the impact site.
125
Chapter 19
19.1 Systematics
1. Systematics is a field of biology dedicated to understanding the evolutionary history of
life on Earth
2. Taxonomy is the branch of biology concerned with identifying, naming, and classifying
organisms.
A. Linnean Systematics
1. A natural system of classification reflects the evolutionary history of organisms.
2. Naming and identifying organisms began with the Greeks and Romans.
3. In the Middle Ages, organisms were described using long Latin descriptions.
4. John Ray (1627-1705), a British naturalist, argued that each organism should have a
set name.
B. The Binomial System
1. The number of known organisms expanded greatly in mid-eighteenth century due to
European travel.
2. Carolus Linnaeus (1707-1778) developed the binomial system to name species.
3. The binomial system of nomenclature names organisms using a two-part Latin name.
a. First part is the genus; closely related species are assigned to the same genus.
b. Second part is the specific epithet; it usually provides something descriptive about
an organism.
c. A scientific name consists of both genus and specific epithet (e.g., Lilium
buibiferum and Lilium canadense).
d. Both names are italicized or underlined; the first letter of the genus name is
capitalized.
e. The genus can be abbreviated when used with a specific epithet if the full name
was given before.
4. Common names vary with different languages, lump many species under one name or
have various names for the same species, and the same name may refer to different
organisms in different regions.
5. The job of naming all species is far from finished.
a. There are estimated to be between 3 and 30 million species living on earth.
b. Currently, one million species of animals and a half million plant and
microorganismic species have been named.
c. Some groups, such as birds, are nearly all known; some insect groups are mostly
unknown.
C. Linnean Classification Categories
1. Aristotle classified life into 14 groups (e.g., mammals, birds, etc.), and subdivided
them by size.
2. Ray grouped animals and plants according to how he thought they were related.
3. Linnaeus grouped plants by flower parts; his categories were published in Systema
Naturae in 1735
4. Today, taxonomists use seven categories of classification: species, genus, family,
order, class, phylum, and kingdom.
a. A higher category, the domain, has recently been added to these seven categories.
b. The higher the category, the more inclusive it is.
c. Members of a kingdom share general characters; members of a species share quite
126
specific characters.
d. Since one taxonomic group exists inside another group, these categories are also
termed nested.
A character is any structural, chromosomal, or molecular feature that distinguishes
one group from another.
e. Additional levels of classification can be added by adding super-, sub-, or infra(e.g., suborder); thus, there are more than 30 categories of classification.
19.2 Phylogenetic Trees
1. Classification reflects phylogeny; one goal of systematics is to create phylogenetic
trees.
2. Phylogeny is the evolutionary history of a group of organisms.
3. A phylogenetic tree indicates common ancestors and lines of descent or lineages.
4. A primitive character is a trait that is present in a common ancestor and all
members of a group.
5. A derived character is present only in a specific line of descent.
6. Different lineages diverging from a common ancestor have ancestral
characteristics—traits shared by the ancestor and the species in its lines of descent.
7. Because classification is hierarchical, it is possible to use classification categories to
contrusct a phylogenetic tree.
8. When we say that two species are related, we mean that they share a common
ancestor.
A. Cladistic Phylogenetic Trees
1. Cladistic systematics is based on the work of Willi Hennig.
2. Cladistics analyze primitive and derived characters and constructs cladograms on
the basis of shared derived characters.
3. A cladogram is a diagram showing relationships among species based on shared,
derived characters; a cladogram thus traces the evolutionary history of the group
being studied.
4. Constructing a Cladogram
a. First step: construct a table of characters of the taxa being compared.
b. Any character found in the outgroup as well as the ingroup is a shared primitive
character.
c. Homologies shared by certain lineages are shared derived characters, or
synapomorphies.
d. A clade is an evolutionary branch that includes a common ancestor and all its
descendent species.
5. How to Judge a Cladogram
a. Cladists are guided by the principle of parsimony—the minimum number of
assumptions is most logical.
b. The best cladogram is one in which the fewest number of shared derived
characters are left unexplained or that minimizes the number of assumed
evolutionary changes..
c. This approach is vulnerable if convergent evolution produces what appears to be
common ancestry.
d. Statistical phylogenetic is a new branch of systematics that use statistical tools
and not parisomy to help construct phylogenetic trees.
127
e. Reliability of cladograms is dependent on the knowledge and skill of a particular
investigator gathering data.
6. How to Judge a Clade
a. A Monophyletic group is a grouping of species that includes a common ancestor
and all the decendents of that ancestor.
b. A paraphyletic group contains a common ancestor and does not include all the
decendents.
c. A polyphyletic group contains some of the descendants of more than one common
ancestor and not all the common ancestors.
B. Tracing Phylogeny
1. Fossil Record Data
a. Because fossils can be dated, fossils can establish the age of a species.
b. It can be difficult to associate fossils with currently living groups; e.g., a new
view of turtle fossils could place them closer to crocodiles.
c. The fossil record is often incomplete because soft-bodied organisms do not
fossilize well.
d. Most organisms decay and the chances of becoming a fossil are low.
2. Morphological Data
a. Homology is character similarity that stems from having a common ancestor;
homology helps indicate when species belong to a related group.
b. Homologous structures are related to each other through common descent but
may differ in structure and function (e.g., the forelimbs of a horse and the wings
of a bat).
c. Convergent evolution is acquisition of similar traits in distantly related lines of
descent as a result of adaptation to similar environmental conditions; convergent
evolution may make it difficult to distinguish homologous from analogous
structures.
d. Analogous structures have the same function but are not derived from the same
organ in a common ancestor (e.g., the wings of an insect and the wings of a bat).
C. Behavioral Data
1. Since many different species may display some common behaviors, this may
substantiate the morphological data that some species are related through evolution.
D. Molecular Data
1. Speciation occurs when mutations bring about changes in base pair sequences of
DNA.
2. Each distinct lineage accumulates changes in DNA base pair sequences and amino
acid sequences in proteins over time.
3. Advances in analyzing nucleotide and amino acid sequences make abundant data
available to researchers.
4. Protein Comparisons
a. Earlier studies used immunological reactions to antibodies, made by injecting a
rabbit with cells of one species, to determine the relatedness of two species.
b. Amino acid sequences are now used to determine the differences in proteins
between two species.
1) Cytochrome c is a protein found in all aerobic organisms; the amino acid
differences in cytochrome c between chickens and humans is 13 but between
128
chickens and ducks is only 3.
c. Since the number of universal proteins is limited, most new studies use RNA and
DNA.
5. DNA and RNA Comparisons
a. DNA differences can substantiate data, help trace the course of macroevolution,
and fill in the gaps of the fossil record.
e. Mitochondria DNA (mtDNA) mutates ten times faster than nuclear DNA;
mtDNA is often used for closely related species; North American songbirds were
found to have diverged well before retreating glaciation 250,000–100,000 years
ago.
6. Molecular Clocks
a. Nucleic acid changes are not tied to adaptation; the fairly constant changes
provide a molecular clock.
b. Comparison of mtDNA sequences equated a 5.1% nucleic acid difference among
songbird species to 2.5 million years.
c. The fossil record can then be used to calibrate the clock and confirm the
hypothesis drawn from molecular data.
E. DNA Bar Coding of Life (Science Focus box)
1. The Consortium for the Barcode of Life (CBOL) believes that any scientist will be
able to identify a species using a handheld scanner.
2. According to this Consortium, there will be a database of DNA sequences, and this
scanner would tap into the database and identify an organism.
3. Paul Hebert and colleagues at the University of Guelph in Canada believe that it is
possible to use the base sequence in DNA to develop a bar code for each living thing.
4. According to Herbert, the gene:
a. Should contain no more than 650 nucleotides so sequencing is easy and with no
mistakes
b. Should be easy to extract from an organism’s complete genome.
c. Should have mutated to the degree that each species has its own sequence of
bases.
5. Herbert’s team uses a mitochondrial gene, cytochrome c oxidase subunit I (COI), for
a target gene in animals.
6. John Kress from the Smithsonian Institute in Washington, D.C. developed a potential
method for bar coding plant species.
19.3
The Three-Domain System
1. Recent research suggests one group of prokaryotes is so distantly related it should be
in a separate domain.
2. Sequencing of rRNA suggests all organisms evolved along three distinct lineages:
domains Bacteria, Archaea, and Eukarya.
3. Domain Bacteria
a. The bacteria are prokaryotic unicellular organisms that reproduce asexually.
b. Cyanobacteria are large photosynthetic prokaryotes.
c. Most bacteria are heterotrophic.
d. Bacteria are important in ecosystems because they break down organic remains,
thereby keeping chemical cycling going.
e. Some bacteria are parasitic and cause disease.
129
4. Domain Archaea
a. Like bacteria, archaea are prokaryotic unicellular organisms that reproduce
asexually.
b. The archaea live in extreme environments: methanogens in anaerobic swamps,
halophiles in salt lakes, and thermoacidophiles in hot acidic environments.
c. The archaea cell wall is diverse but not the same as the bacterial cell wall.
5. Domain Eukarya
a. Eukarytes are unicellular to multicellular organisms, always with a membranebound nucleus.
b. Sexual reproduction is common; various types of life cycles are seen.
c. Protists and fungi are eukarytes, as are plants and animals (these kingdoms will be
studied in detail in later chapters in the text and in this instructor’s manual).
130
Chapter 20
20.1 Viruses, Viroids, and Prions
A. Viruses
1. are associated with a number of plant, animal, and human diseases;
2. can only reproduce by using the metabolic machinery of the host cell;
3. are noncellular;
4. may have a DNA or RNA genome.
5. In 1884, Pasteur suspected something smaller than bacteria caused rabies; he chose a
Latin term for “poison.”
6. In 1892, Russian biologist Dimitri Ivanowsky, working with the tobacco mosaic virus,
confirmed Pasteur’s hypothesis that an infectious agent smaller than a bacterium existed.
7. With the invention of the electron microscope, these infectious agents could be seen for
the first time.
B. Viral Structure
1. A virus is similar in size to a large protein, generally smaller than 200 nm in diameter.
2. Many viruses can be purified and crystallized, and the crystals stored for long periods of
time.
3. Viral crystals become infectious when the viral particles they contain invade host cells.
4. The classification of viruses is based on
a.
their type of nucleic acid, including whether they are single-stranded or
double-stranded;
b.
their size and shape; and
c. the presence or absence of an outer envelope.
5. All viruses have at least two parts:
a. An outer capsid is composed of protein subunits.
b. An inner core contains either DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) or RNA (ribonucleic
acid), but not both.
1) The viral genome at most has several hundred genes; a human cell, in
comparison, contains thousands of genes.
2) The viral envelope is usually partly host plasma membrane with viral
glycoprotein spikes.
3) Viral particles have proteins, especially enzymes (e.g., polymerases), to
produce viral DNA or RNA.
4) Not all viruses have an envelope; such viruses are called naked viruses.
C. Parasitic Nature
1. Viruses are obligate intracellular parasites that cannot multiply outside a living cell;
they must infect a living cell in order to reproduce.
a.
Animal viruses in laboratories are raised in live chick embryos or in cell
tissue culture.
b.
Viruses infect all sorts of cells, from bacteria to human cells, but they are
host specific.
1) The tobacco mosaic virus only infects certain plants.
2) The rabies virus infects only mammals.
3) The AIDS virus, HIV, infects only certain human blood cells.
4) The Hepatitis virus invades only liver tissues.
131
2.
3.
D.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
1.
2.
3.
F.
1.
5) The Polio virus only reproduces in spinal nerve cells.
Virus Evolution
a.
Some believe that viruses originated from the very cells that they infect.
b.
For example, viral nucleic acids originated from the host cell genome.
c. Therefore, viruses evolved after cells came into existence; new viruses are
probably evolving now.
d. Others suggest that viruses arose before the three domains.
Viruses often mutate; therefore, it is correct to say that they evolve.
a.
Those that mutate are troublesome; a vaccine effective today may not be
effective tomorrow.
b.
Influenza (flu) viruses mutate regularly.
Viral Reproduction
Viruses gain entry into and are specific to a particular host cell because portions of
the capsid (or spikes of the envelope) adhere to specific receptor sites on the host cell
surface.
Viral nucleic acid then enters a cell, where viral genome codes for production of
protein units in the capsid.
A virus may have genes for a few special enzymes needed for the virus to reproduce
and exit from a host cell.
A virus relies on host cell enzymes, ribosomes, transfer RNA (tRNA), and ATP for
its own replication.
Reproduction of Bacteriophages
Bacteriophages (phages) are viruses that parasitize bacteria.
The lytic cycle is a bacteriophage’s “life” cycle consisting of five stages:
a. During attachment, portions of the capsid bind with receptors on the bacterial
cell wall.
b. During penetration, a viral enzyme digests part of cell wall; the viral DNA is
injected into a bacterial cell.
c. Biosynthesis involves synthesis of viral components and begins after the virus
brings about inactivation of host genes not necessary to viral replication.
d. During maturation, viral DNA and capsids are assembled to produce several
hundred viral particles and lysozyme, coded by the virus, is produced.
e. When lysozyme disrupts the cell wall, release of the viral particles occurs and the
bacterial cell dies.
With the lysogenic cycle, the virus incorporates its DNA into the bacterium but only
later is phage produced.
a. Following attachment and penetration, viral DNA becomes integrated into
bacterial DNA with no destruction of the host DNA.
b. At this point, the phage is latent and the viral DNA is called a prophage.
c. The prophage is replicated along with host DNA; all subsequent cells (lysogenic
cells) carry a copy.
d. Certain environmental factors (e.g., ultraviolet radiation) induce prophage to enter
the biosynthesis stage of the lytic cycle, followed by maturation and release.
Reproduction of Animal Viruses
Animal viruses replicate similarly to bacteriophages, but there are modifications.
a. If the virus has an envelope, glycoprotein spikes allow it to adhere to plasma
132
membrane receptors.
b.
The virus genome covered by the capsid penetrates the host cell.
c.
Once inside, the virus is uncoated as the envelope and capsid are removed.
d.
Free of its covering, the viral genome (DNA or RNA) proceeds with
biosynthesis.
e.
Newly assembled viral particles are released by budding.
f.
Components of viral envelopes (i.e., lipids, proteins, and carbohydrates)
are obtained from the plasma or nuclear membrane of the host cell as the viruses
leave.
2. Retroviruses are RNA animal viruses that have a DNA stage.
a.
Retroviruses contain the enzyme reverse transcriptase that uses RNA as
a template to produce cDNA; cDNA is is a copy of the viral genome.
b.
Viral cDNA is integrated into host DNA and is replicated as host DNA
replicates.
c.
Viral DNA is transcribed; new viruses are produced by biosynthesis and
maturation; release is by budding.
G. Viral Infections of Special Concern
1. Viruses cause infectious diseases in plants and animals, including humans.
2. Some animal viruses are specific to human cells: papillomavirus, herpes virus,
hepatitis virus, and adenoviruses, which can cause specific cancers.
3. Retroviruses include the AIDS viruses (e.g., HIV) and also cause certain forms of
cancer.
4. Emerging Viruses
5. HIV is an example of an emerging virus: the causative agent of a disease that has
only recently arisen and infected people.
6. In some cases of emerging diseases, the virus is simply transported from one location
to another; e.g., West Nile virus and severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS).
7. The high mutation rate of viruses also cause infectious viruses to emerge; e.g., AIDS
and Ebola fever.
8. A change in the mode of transmission is yet another way infectious viruses could
emerge.
H. Viroids and Prions
1. Viroids are naked strands of RNA, a dozen of which cause crop diseases.
2. Like viruses, viroids direct the cell to produce more viroids.
3. Prions (proteinaceous infectious particles) are newly discovered disease agents that
differ from viruses and bacteria.
I.
Flu Pandemic (Health Focus box)
1. Flu Viruses
a.
A flu virus has an H (hemagglutinin) spike, which allows the virus to bind to
its receptor. There are 16 known types of H spikes.
b. The N (neuraminidase) spike attachs host plasma membranes so the mature
viruses can exit the cell. There are nine known types of N spikes.
c. These viral spikes can occur in different varieties called subtypes.
d. Many flu viruses are assigned specific codes based on the type of spike.
1) H5N1 (bird flu) virus gets its name from its variety of H5 spikes and its
variety of N1 spikes.
133
e.
Our immune system only recognizes a particular variety of H and N spikes it
has been exposed to.
f. When a new flu virus arises and there is little or no immunity in the human
population, a flu pandemic may occur.
2. Possible Bird Flu Pandemic of the Future
a. The H5N1 subtype of the bird flu virus is of concern because it has the
potential to reach pandemic proportions.
b. H5N1 first infected waterfowl, then chickens, and now humans.
c. This virus can attach to both a bird flu receptor and a human flu receptor.
d. The virus can transfer from poultry to human, but has rarely been transmitted
from human to human.
e. However, with additional mutations, human to human transmission could be
more common, and spread around the world.
3. How to Be Prepared
a. One of the easiest practices to prevent the spread of a flu virus is cleaning
hands thoroughly and often using soap and water or alcohol-based sanitizer.
b. Keeping your hands away from your eyes, nose, mouth can help prevent the
virus from entering your body.
c. Education will help prepare for a pandemic.
d. For more information, visit www.pandemicflu.gov
20.2 The Prokaryotes
A. Prokaryotes include the bacteria and archaea.
1. Bacteria were discovered in the seventeenth century when Antonie van Leeuwenhoek
examined scrapings from his teeth.
2. The “little animals” Leeuwenhoek observed were thought by him and others to arise
spontaneously from inanimate matter.
3. Around 1850, Pasteur devised an experiment showing that the bacteria present in air
contaminated the media.
4. A single spoonful of soil contains 1010 prokaryotes; these are the most numerous life
forms.
B. Structure of Prokaryotes
1. Prokaryotes range in size from 1–10 µm in length and from 0.7–1.5 µm in width.
2. “Prokaryote” means “before a nucleus”—their cells lack a eukaryotic nucleus.
3. Prokaryotic fossils date back as far as 3.5—3.8 billion years ago.
4. Fossils indicate prokaryotes were alone on earth for 2 billion years; they evolved very
diverse metabolic capabilities.
5. Prokaryotes adapted to most environments because they differ in the many ways they
acquire and utilize energy.
6. Outside the plasma membrane of most cells is a rigid cell wall that keeps the cell
from bursting or collapsing due to osmotic changes by peptidoglycan, a complex
molecule containing a unique amino disaccharide and peptide fragments.
a. The cell wall may be surrounded by an organized capsule called a glycocalyx
and/or by a loose gelatinous sheath called a slime layer.
b. In parasitic forms, these outer coverings protect the cell from host defenses.
7. Some prokaryotes move by means of flagella.
a. The flagellum has a filament composed of three strands of the protein flagellin
134
wound in a helix and inserted into a hook that is anchored by a basal body.
b. The flagellum is capable of 360o rotation which causes the cell to spin and move
forward.
8. Many prokaryotes adhere to surfaces by means of fimbriae.
a. Fimbriae are short hairlike filaments extending from the surface.
b. The fimbriae of Neisseria gonorrhoeae allow it to attach to host cells and cause
gonorrhea.
9. Prokaryotic cells lack the membranous organelles of eukaryotic cells.
10. Various metabolic pathways are located on the plasma membrane.
11. A nucleoid is a dense area in prokaryotes where the chromosome is located; it is a
single circular strand of DNA.
12. Plasmids are accessory rings of DNA found in some prokaryotes; they can be
extracted and used as vectors to carry foreign DNA into bacteria during genetic
engineering procedures.
13. Protein synthesis in prokaryotic cells is carried out by thousands of ribosomes, which
are smaller than eukaryotic ribosomes.
C. Reproduction in Prokaryotes
1. Binary fission is the splitting of a parent cell into two daughter cells; it is asexual
reproduction in prokaryotes.
a. A single circular chromosome replicates; the two copies separate as the cell
enlarges.
b. Newly formed plasma membrane and the cell wall separate the cell into two cells.
c. Mitosis, which involves formation of a spindle apparatus, does not occur in
prokaryotes.
d. Because prokaryotes have a short generation time, mutations are generated and
distributed through a population more rapidly.
e. Prokaryotes are haploid; mutations are therefore immediately subjected to natural
selection.
2. In bacteria, genetic recombination can occur in three ways.
a. Conjugation occurs when a bacterium passes DNA to a second bacterium
through a tube (sex pilus) that temporarily joins two cells; this occurs only
between bacteria in the same or closely related species.
b. Transformation involves bacteria taking up free pieces of DNA secreted by live
bacteria or released by dead bacteria.
c. In transduction, bacteriophages transfer portions of bacterial DNA from one cell
to another.
d. Plasmids can carry genes for resistance to antibiotics and transfer them between
bacteria by any of these processes.
20.3 The Bacteria
A. Characteristics of Bacterial Cells
1. Bacteria are the more common type of prokaryote
2. Bacterial cell walls are protected by peptidoglycan, a complex of polysaccharides
linked by amino acids.
3. The Gram stain procedure (developed in the late 1880s by Hans Christian Gram)
differentiates bacteria.
a. Gram-positive bacteria stain purple, whereas Gram-negative bacteria stain pink.
135
b. This difference is dependent on the thick or thin (respectively) peptidoglycan cell
wall.
4. Bacteria and archaea have three basic shapes.
a. A spirillum is spiral-shaped.
b. A bacillus is an elongated or rod-shaped bacteria.
c. Coccus bacteria are spherical.
d. Cocci and bacilli tend to form clusters and chains of a length typical of the
particular species.
B. Bacterial Metabolism
1. Bacteria differ in their need for, and tolerance of, oxygen (O2).
a. Obligate anaerobes are unable to grow in the presence of O2; this includes
anaerobic bacteria that cause botulism, gas gangrene, and tetanus.
b. Facultative anaerobes are able to grow in either the presence or absence of
gaseous O2.
c. Aerobic organisms (including animals and most prokaryotes) require a constant
supply of O2 to carry out cellular respiration.
2. Autotrophic Bacteria
a. Photoautotrophs are photosynthetic and use light energy to assemble the organic
molecules they require.
1) Primitive photosynthesizing bacteria (e.g., green sulfur bacteria and purple
sulfur bacteria) use only photosystem I that contains bacteriochlorophyll;
they do not give off O2 because hydrogen sulfide (H2S) is used as an electron
and H+ donor instead of H2O.
2) Advanced photosynthesizing bacteria (e.g., cyanobacteria) use both
photosystem I and II that contain the same types of chlorophylls found in
plants; they do give off O2 because H2O is used as an electron and H+ donor.
b. Chemoautotrophs make organic molecules by using energy derived from the
oxidation of inorganic compounds in the environment.
1) Deep ocean hydrothermal vents provide H2S to form chemosynthetic bacteria.
2) The methanogens are chemosynthetic bacteria that produce methane (CH4)
from hydrogen gas and CO2; ATP synthesis and CO2 reduction are linked to
this reaction and methanogens can decompose animal wastes to produce
electricity as an ecological friendly energy source.
3) Nitrifying bacteria oxidize ammonia (NH3) to nitrites (NO2) and nitrites to
nitrates (NO3).
3. Heterotrophic Bacteria
a. Most free-living bacteria are chemoheterotrophs that take in pre-formed organic
nutrients.
b. As aerobic saprotrophs, there is probably no natural organic molecule that
cannot be broken down by some prokaryotic species.
c. Bacteria produce chemicals including ethyl alcohol, acetic acid, butyl alcohol, and
acetones.
d. Bacteria action produces butter, cheese, sauerkraut, rubber, cotton, silk, coffee
and cocoa.
e. Antibiotics are produced by some bacteria.
C. Symbiotic Relationships
136
1.
Bacteria and archaea form symbiotic relationshipa, forming relationships with
members of other species; forms of symbiosis include mutualistic, commensalistic,
and parasitic relationships.
Commensalism occurs when one population modifies the environment in such a way
that a second population benefits. Commensalistic bacteria live in or on organisms
of other species and cause them no harm.
Mutualistic bacteria that live in the intestines of humans benefit from undigested
material and release vitamins K and B12, which we use to produce blood
components.
Parasitic bacteria are responsible for a wide variety of infectious plant, animal and
human diseases.
Parasitic bacteria that cause disease are called pathogens.
Some bacteria form resistant endospores in response to unfavorable environmental
conditions.
1) Some cytoplasm and the chromosome dehydrate and are encased by three
heavy, protective spore coats.
2) The rest of the bacterial cell deteriorates and the endospore is released.
3) Endospores survive in the harshest of environments: desert heat and
dehydration, boiling temperatures, polar ice, and extreme ultraviolet radiation.
4) Endospores also survive very long periods of time; anthrax spores 1,300 years
old can cause disease.
5) When environmental conditions are again suitable, the endospore absorbs
water and grows out of its spore coat.
6) In a few hours, newly emerged cells become typical bacteria capable of
reproducing by binary fission.
7) Endospore formation is not reproduction--it is a means of survival and
dispersal to new locations.
f. Pathogens may be able to produce a toxin, and or adhere to surfaces and
sometimes invade organs or cells.
1) Toxins are small organic molecules, or small pieces of protein or parts of the
bacterial cell wall, that are released when bacteria die.
2) In almost all cases, the growth of the bacteria does not cause disease but
instead the toxins they release cause the disease. Example: Clostridium
tetani, the causative agent of tetanus.
3) Adhesion factors allow a pathogen to bind to certain cells, which determines
which tissue in the body will be the host. Example: Shigella dysentariae
releases a toxin and also sticks to the intestinal wall, making it a lifethreatening form of dysentary.
4) Antibacterial compounds either inhibit cell wall synthesis or protein
biosynthesis; increasingly, many pathogenic bacteria are becoming resistant to
bacteria.
D. Cyanobacteria
1. Cyanobacteria are Gram-negative bacteria with a number of unusual traits.
2. They photosynthesize in the same manner as plants, and thus are responsible for
introducing O2 into the primitive atmosphere.
3. They were formerly mistaken for eukaryotes and classified with algae.
137
4. Cyanobacteria have pigments that mask chlorophyll; they are not only blue-green but
also red, yellow, brown, or black.
5. They are relatively large (1–50 µm in width).
6. They can be unicellular, colonial, or filamentous.
7. Some move by gliding or oscillating.
8. Some possess heterocysts, thick-walled cells without a nucleoid, where nitrogen
fixation occurs.
9. Cyanobacteria are common in fresh water, soil, on moist surfaces, and in harsh
habitats (e.g., hot springs).
10. Some species are symbiotic with other organisms (e.g., liverworts, ferns, and corals).
11. Lichens are a symbiotic relationship where the cyanobacteria provide organic
nutrients to the fungus and the fungus protects and supplies inorganic nutrients.
12. Cyanobacteria were probably the first colonizers of land during evolution.
13. Cyanobacteria “bloom” when nitrates and phosphates are released as wastes into
water; when they die off, decomposing bacteria use up the oxygen and cause fish
kills.
20.4 The Archaea
1. Archaea are prokaryotes with molecular characteristics that distinguish them from bacteria
and eukaryotes; their rRNA base sequence is different from that in bacteria.
2. Because archaea and some bacteria are both found in extreme environments (hot springs,
thermal vents, salt basins), they may have diverged from a common ancestor.
3. Later, the eukarya split from the archaea; archaea and eukarya share some ribosomal proteins
not found in bacteria; initiate transcription in the same manner, and have similar types of
tRNAs.
A.
Structure of Archaea
1. Archaea have unusual lipids in their plasma membranes that allow them to function at
high temperatures: glycerol linked to hydrocarbons rather than fatty acids.
2. Cell walls of archaea do not contain the peptidoglycan found in bacterial cell walls.
B. Types of Archaea
1. Methanogens live under anaerobic environments (e.g., marshes) where they produce
methane.
a. Methane is produced from hydrogen gas and carbon dioxide and is coupled to
formation of ATP.
b. Methane released to the atmosphere contributes to the greenhouse effect.
c. About 65% of the methane found in our atmosphere is produced by methanogenic
archaea.
2. Halophiles require high salt concentrations (e.g., Great Salt Lake).
a. Their proteins have unique chloride pumps that use halorhodopsin to synthesize
ATP in the presence of light.
b. They usually require 12–15% salt concentrations; the ocean is only 3.5% salt.
3. Thermoacidophiles live under hot, acidic environments (e.g., geysers).
a. They survive best at temperatures above 80oC; some survive above boiling
temperatures.
b. Metabolism of sulfides forms acidic sulfates; these bacteria grow best at pH of 1
to 2.
138
Chapter 21
21.1 General Biology of Protists
A. Protists are classified in the domain Eukarya (they have eukaryotic cells) and the kingdom
Protista.
1. The endosymbiotic hypothesis suggests how the eukaryotic cells arose.
a. It proposes that aerobic bacteria became mitochondria.
b. Cyanobacteria became chloroplasts after being taken up by eukaryotic cells.
c. Giardia lamblia has two nuclei but no mitochondria, suggesting that a nucleated
cell preceded the acquisition of mitochondria.
2. Although many protists are unicellular, they are highly complex.
a. Amoeboids and ciliates possess unique organelles, such as contractile vacuoles.
3. Most protists are free-living; some are parasitic, some (e.g., slime molds) are saprophytic
(feed on decaying plant material), and some are mixotrophic (combining autotrophic and
heterotrophic nutrition modes).
4. Some protists are photoautotrophic; some are heterotrophic.
5. Most protists use asexual reproduction, but sexual reproduction occurs in some
species.
a. Formation of spores allows free-living and parasitic protists to survive hostile
environments.
b. A cyst is a dormant cell with a resistant outer covering; the cyst allows a freeliving species to overwinter and helps certain parasitic species survive the host’s
digestive juices.
6. Some protists are of great medical importance because they cause disease; others are
ecologically important.
7. Aquatic plankton serve as food for heterotrophic protists and animals.
8. Photosynthetic plankton produce much of the oxygen in the atmosphere.
9. Many protists enter symbiotic relationships; coral reefs rely on symbiotic photosynthetic
protists.
B. Evolution and Diversity of Protists
1. Classification of protests has been based on modes of nutrition.
a. Algae are autotrophic, similar to land plants
b. Protozoans and slime molds are heterotrophic by ingestion, similar to animals
c. Water molds are heterotrophic by absorption, similar to fungi
2. Protozoans include photosynthetic, heterotrophic, and mixotrophic organisms and
have some form of locomotion (flagella, pseudopods, cilia).
3. Currently, the most widely accepted method of categorizing protests is by assigning
them to supergroups, which is a major eukarotic group. There are six protist
supergroups.
22.2 Diversity of Protists
A. Supergroup Archaeplastids
1. Archaeoplasts include land plants, green and red algae.
2. Green Algae
a. Green algae contain both chlorophyll a and b.
b. They live in the ocean, in fresh water habitats, snowbanks and on moist land.
c. The majority of green algae are unicellular, but filamentous (Spirogyra), colonial
139
(Volvox), and multicellular forms exist (Ulva).
d. Green algae are not always green; some have pigments that give them an orange,
red, or rust color.
e. Plants are considered to be most closely related to the green algae.
f. Green algae are divided into chlorophytes and charophytes.
B. Chlorophytes
1. Chlamydomonas is a minute, unicellular green alga less than 25 m long.
2. It has a cell wall and a single, large, cup-shaped chloroplast with a pyrenoid for starch
synthesis.
3. The chloroplast contains a light-sensitive eyespot (stigma) that directs the cell to light
for photosynthesis.
4. Two long whiplike flagella project from the anterior end to propel the cell toward
light.
5. When growth conditions are favorable, Chlamydomonas reproduces asexually with
flagellated spores called zoospores.
6. When growth conditions are unfavorable, Chlamydomonas reproduces sexually.
a. Gametes from two different mating types join to form a zygote.
b. A heavy wall forms around the zygote; a resistant zygospore survives until
conditions are favorable.
7. Volvox
a. Volvox is a Colonial Green Algae. A colony is a loose association of independent
cells.
b. Volvox is a hollow sphere with thousands of cells arranged in a single layer.
c. Volvox cells resemble Chlamydomonas cells; a colony arises if the daughter cells
fail to separate.
d. Volvox cells cooperate when flagella beat in a coordinated fashion.
e. Some cells are specialized forming a new daughter colony within the parental
colony.
f. Daughter colonies are inside a parent colony until an enzyme dissolves part of a
wall so they can escape.
8. Ulva, a Multicellulr Chlorophyte
a. The multicellular Ulva is called sea lettuce because of its leafy appearance.
b. The thallus (body) is two cells thick but can be a meter long.
c. Ulva has an alternation of generations life cycle, as do plants, but the generations
look alike.
d. The gametes look alike (isogametes) and the spores are flagellated.
9. Charophytes
a. Cell division in one plane produces end-to-end chains of cells or filaments.
b. Spirogyra is a filamentous algae found on surfaces of ponds and streams.
1)
It has ribbonlike spiral chloroplasts.
2) Two strands may unite in conjugation and exchange genetic material,
forming a diploid zygote.
3)
The zygotes withstand winter; in spring they undergo meiosis to produce
haploid filaments.
c. Chara (stoneworts) are green algae that live in freshwater lakes and ponds.
d. The stonewort Chara forms a cell plate during cell division and has multicellular
140
sex organs making plants most closely related to this group.
e. Chara also has a stemlike body with nodes and internodes; the cells of the body
originate from apical meristem features that are homologous with plants.
10. The Red Algae
a. Red algae are chiefly marine multicellular algae that live in warmer seawater.
b. Red algae posses a red and a blue pigment in addition to chlorophyll.
c. They are generally much smaller and more delicate than brown algae.
d. Some are filamentous, but most are branched, having a feathery, flat, or
ribbonlike appearance.
e. Coralline algae are red algae with cell walls with calcium carbonate; they
contribute to coral reefs.
f. Red algae are economically important.
1) Mucilaginous material in cell walls of Gelidium and Gracilaria is the source
of agar used in drug capsules, dental impressions, and cosmetics.
2) In the laboratory, agar is a major microbiological media, and when purified, is
a gel for electrophoresis.
3) Agar is used in food preparation to keep baked goods from drying and to set
jellies and desserts.
4) Carrageen, an emulsifying agent extracted from Chondrus crispus, is used in
production of chocolate and cosmetics.
C. Life Cycles Among the Algae (Science Focus box)
1. Depending on the species and environmental conditions, asexual and sexual
reproduction occur in algae.
2. Asexual Reproduction
a. Asexual reproduction occurs frequently when the environment is favorable to
growth.
b. Asexual reproduction only requires one parent.
c. The offspring are genetically identical to parent.
3. Sexual Reproduction
a. Sexual reproduction occurs when the environment is changing and unfavorable to
growth.
b. Genetic recombinations may produce individuals that are more likely to survive
environmental extremes such as high or low temperature, acidic or basic pH.
D. Supergroup Chromaleolates
1. This supergroup includes the brown algae, diatoms, golden brown algae, and watermolds
a. The Brown Algae
1) Brown algae are stramenopiles (having either a flagella or descended from an
ancestor that had flagella)
2) Brown algae have chlorophylls a and c and fucoxanthin that give them their color.
3) Their reserve food is a carbohydrate called laminarin.
4) Seaweed refers to any large, complex alga.
5) Their cell walls contain a mucilaginous water-retaining material that inhibits
desiccation.
6) Laminaria is an intertidal kelp that is unique among protists; this genus shows
tissue differentiation.
141
7) Nereocystis and Macrocystis are giant kelps found in deeper water anchored to the
bottom by their holdfasts.
8) Individuals of the genus Sargassum sometimes break off from their holdfasts and
form floating masses.
9) Brown algae provide food and habitat for marine organisms, and they are also
important to humans.
a. Brown algae are harvested for human food and for fertilizer in several parts of
the world.
b.
Macrocystis is a source of algin, a pectinlike substance added to give
foods a stable, smooth consistency.
10) Most have an alternation of generations life cycle.
11)
Fucus is an intertidal rockweed; meiotic cell division produces gametes
and the adult is always diploid.
2. Diatoms
a. Diatoms are stramenopiles that have cell walls consisting of two silica-impregnated
halves or valves.
b.
When diatoms reproduce asexually, each received one old valve.
c.
The new valve fits inside the old one; therefore, the new diatom is smaller than
the original one.
d.
This continues until they are about 30% of their original size.
e.
Then they reproduce sexually; a zygote grows and divides mitotically to form
diatoms of normal size.
f. They are yellow-orange in color because they contain a carotenoid pigment in
addition to chlorophyll.
g. Diatoms are an important part of the phytoplankton, photosynthetic organisms that
are a source of food and oxygen for heterotrophs.
h. The cell wall has an outer layer of silica (glass) with a variety of markings formed by
pores.
i. Diatom remains accumulate on the ocean floor and are mined as diatomaceous earth
for use as filters, abrasives, etc.
3. Golden Brown Algae
a. Golden brown algae derive their color from yellow-brown carotenoid pigments
b. They are unicellular or colonial protists, with two flagella.
c. The cells of golden brown algae may be naked, covered with organic or silica scales,
or enclosed in a secreted cagelike structure called a lorica.
d. Ochromonas is capable of photosynthesis as well as phagocytosis.
e. Golden brown algae contribute to freshwater and marine phytoplankton.
4. The Water Molds
a. Water molds usually live in water, form furry growths, and parasitize fish or insects
and decompose remains.
b. Terrestrial water molds parasitize insects and plants; a water mold caused the 1840s
Irish potato famine.
c. Most water molds are saprotrophic, living off dead organic matter.
d. Water molds have a filamentous body but cell walls are composed largely of
cellulose.
e. During asexual reproduction, they produce diploid motile spores (2n zoospores) with
142
flagella.
f. Unlike fungi, the adult is diploid; gametes are produced by meiosis.
g. Eggs are produced in enlarged tips called oogonia.
E. Alveolates
 The alveolates have alveoli (small sacs) just beneath the plasma membrane.
 The function of the alveoli may be to support the cell surfaces.
 Alveolates are unicellular protists.
1. The Dinoflagellates
a. The unicellular dinoflagellates are usually bounded by protective cellulose plates.
b. Most have two flagella.
1)
One lies in a longitudinal groove and acts as a rudder.
2)
The other is located within a transverse groove; beating causes the cell to
spin as it moves forward.
c. Some species of dinoflagellates are heterotrophic; some are parasitic.
d. They are extremely numerous (30,000 per ml) and an important source of food in the
ecosystem.
e. Under certain conditions, Gymnodinium and Gonyaulax increase in number
enormously and cause a “red tide”; they produce a powerful neurotoxin killing fish
and causing paralytic shellfish poisoning.
f. They usually reproduce asexually by using mitosis and longitudinal cell division.
2. The Ciliates
a. Ciliates are unicellular protists that move by coordinated strokes of hundreds of cilia
projecting through holes in a semirigid pellicle.
b. They discharge long, barbed trichocysts for defense and for capturing prey; toxicysts
release a poison.
c. Most are holozoic and ingest food through a gullet and eliminate wastes through an
anal pore.
d. During asexual reproduction, ciliates divide by transverse binary fission.
e. Ciliates possess two types of nuclei—a large macronucleus and one or more small
micronuclei.
f.
The macronucleus controls the normal metabolism of the cell.
g.
The micronucleus is involved in sexual reproduction.
1) The macronucleus disintegrates and the micronucleus undergoes meiosis.
2) Two ciliates then exchange a haploid micronucleus.
3) The micronuclei give rise to a new macronucleus containing only
housekeeping genes.
h. Ciliates are diverse with over 8,000 known species.
1) Members of the genus Paramecium are complex.
2) The barrel-shaped didiniums expand to consume paramecia much larger than
themselves.
3) Suctoria rest on a stalk and paralyze victims, sucking them dry.
4) Stentor resembles a giant blue vase with stripes.
3. Apicomplexans
a. Apicomplexans are also known as sporozoans.
b. All apilcomplexans are parasites
c. Plasmodium vivax causes one type of malaria; it is the most widespread human
143
F.
1.
2.
3.
parasite.
1) After the bite of an infected female Anopheles mosquito, the parasite eventually
invades red blood cells.
2) Chills and fever appear as red blood cells burst and release toxin into the blood.
d. Malaria remains a major world disease due to insecticide-resistant strains of
mosquitoes and drug-resistant strains of Plasmodium.
e. Pneumocystis carinii causes the pneumonia seen primarily in AIDS patients.
1) During sexual reproduction, thick-walled cysts form in the lining of pulmonary air
sacs.
2) Cysts contain spores that successively divide until the cyst bursts and the spores
are released.
3) Each spore becomes a new organism, reproduces asexually and can enter an
encysted sexual stage.
Supergroup Excavates
 The excavates include zooflagellates.
 Zooflagellates have atypical or absent mitochondria, and distinctive flagella and/or deep
oral groves.
Euglenids
a. Euglenids are small (10–500 µm) freshwater unicellular organisms.
b. One-third of all genera have chloroplasts; those that lack chloroplasts ingest or absorb their
food.
c. Their chloroplasts are surrounded by three, rather than two, membranes.
1) Their chloroplasts resemble those of green algae.
2) They are probably derived from a green algae through endosymbiosis.
d. The pyrenoid outside the chloroplast produces an unusual type of carbohydrate
polymer (paramylon) not seen in green algae.
e. They possess two flagella, one of which typically is much longer than the other and
projects out of a vase-shaped invagination; it is called a tinsel flagellum because it has
hairs on it.
f. Near the base of the longer flagellum is a red eyespot that shades a photoreceptor for
detecting light.
g. They lack cell walls, but instead are bounded by a flexible pellicle composed of protein
bands side-by-side.
h. A contractile vacuole, similar to certain protozoa, eliminates excess water.
i. Euglenoids reproduce by longitudinal cell division; sexual reproduction is not known
to occur.
Parabasalids and Diplomonads
 Both parabasalids and diplomonads are single-celled, flagellated protozoans that can
surive in low oxygen environments.
a. Parabasalids have a fibrous connection between the Golgi apparatus and flagella.
1) Trichonomas vaginalis is a sexually transmitted organism that infects the vagina
and urethra of women and prostate, seminal vesicles and urethra of men.
b. A diplomonad cell has two nuclei and two sets of flagella.
1) Giardia lamblia cysts are transmitted through contaminated water; they cause
severe diarrhea.
Kinetoplastids
144
a. The kinetoplastids are single-celled, flagellated protozoans named for their
kinetoplasts, which are large masses of DNA found in their mitochondria.
1) Trypanosoma bruce, are parasitic kinetoplastids transmitted by the bite of a tsetse
fly, is the cause of African sleeping sickness.
G. Supergroup Amoebozoans
 The amoebozoans are comprised of protozoans that move by pseudopods.
 Amoebozoans live in aquatic environments, oceans and freshwater lakes and ponds,
and often times part of the plankton.
1. Amoeboids
a. Amoeboids engulf prey with pseudopods, cytoplasmic extensions formed as
cytoplasm streams in one direction.
b. Amoeba proteus is a commonly studied member.
c. Amoeboids phagocytize their food; pseudopods surround and engulf prey.
d. Food is digested inside food vacuoles.
e. Freshwater amoeboids have contractile vacuoles to eliminate excess water.
f. Entamoeba histolytica is an amoebic parasite that invades the human intestinal lining.
2. Slime Molds
a. These organisms resemble fungi but all have flagellated cells that fungi never have.
b. The plasmodial slime molds exist as a plasmodium.
1)
This diploid multinucleated cytoplasmic mass creeps along, phagocytizing
decaying plant material.
2) Fan-shaped plasmodium contains tubules of concentrated cytoplasm in which
liquefied cytoplasm streams.
3) Under unfavorable environmental conditions (e.g., drought), the plasmodium
develops many sporangia, called a fruiting body, that produce spores by meiosis.
4) Mature spores are released and survive until more favorable environmental
conditions return; then each releases a haploid flagellated cell or an amoeboid
cell.
5) Two flagellated or amoeboid cells fuse to form a diploid zygote that produces a
multinucleated plasmodium again.
c. The cellular slime molds exist as individual amoeboid cells.
1) They live in soil and feed on bacteria and yeast.
2) As food runs out, amoeboid cells release a chemical that causes them to aggregate
into a pseudoplasmodium.
3) The pseudoplasmodium stage is temporary; it gives rise to sporangia that produce
spores.
4) Spores survive until more favorable environmental conditions return, at which
time they germinate.
5) Spores germinate to release haploid amoeboid cells, which is again the beginning
of the asexual cycle.
H. Supergroup Rhizarians
1. The rhizarians is comprised of the foraminiferans and the radiolarians, organized
with a fine, thread-like pseudopods.
2. They were previously classified with Amoebozoans, but are now assigned to a
different subgroup due molecular data indicating the two groups are not closely
related.
145
3. Foraminiferans and radiolarians have a skeleton called a test.
a. Foraminiferans have a multi-chambered CaCO3 shell; thin pseudopods extend
through holes.
b. Radiolaria have a test composed of silica or strontium sulfate.
1)
Most have a radial arrangement of spines.
2)
Pseudopods (actinopods) project from an external layer of cytoplasm and
are supported by rows of microtubules.
. c. Tests of dead foraminiferans and radiolarians form deep layers of ocean floor
sediment.
d. Dating back to the Precambrian, each layer has distinctive foraminiferans which
helps date rocks.
e. Over hundreds of millions of years, the CaCO3 shells have contributed to the
formation of chalk deposits (i.e., White Cliffs of Dover, limestone of the great
Egyptian pyramids).
I. Supergroup Opisthokonts
1. Animals and fungi are included in the supergroup opisthokonts in addition to several
unicellular and multicellular protists.
2. The choanoflagellates are animal-like protozoans that are near relatives to sponges.
a. They include unicellular and colonial forms, and are filter feeders.
3. Nucleariids are opisthokonts with a rounded or slightly flattened cell body and
threadlike speduopods called filopodia.
a. Most feed on algae or cyanobacteria.
b. They appear to be close fungal relatives due to molecular similarities.
146
Chapter 22
22.1 Evoluation and Characteristics of Fungi
1. The 80,000 species of the Kingdom Fungi are mostly multicellular eukaryotes that
share a common mode of nutrition.
2. Like animals, fungi are heterotrophic and consume preformed organic matter.
3. Animals, however, are heterotrophic by ingestion while fungi are heterotrophic by
absorption.
4. Fungal cells secrete digestive enzymes; following breakdown of molecules, the
nutrients are absorbed.
5. Most fungi are saprotrophic decomposers, breaking down wastes or remains of
plants and animals.
A. Evolution of Fungi
1. Fungi include club fungi, sac fungi, AM fungi, zygospore fungi, and chytrids.
2. Chytrids are unlike all the other fungi because they are aquatic and and they have
flagellated spores and gamets.
3. The AM fungi only exist as mycchorizae in association with plant roots.
4. Molecular data shows that animals and fungi share a common ancestor after plants
evolved.
5. The earliest fossil of fungi is dated 450 MYA.
B. Structure of Fungi
1. Fungi can be unicellular (e.g., yeasts).
2. Most fungi are multicellular in structure.
a. The thallus (body) of most fungi is called a mycelium.
b. A mycelium is a network of hyphae comprising the vegetative body of a fungus.
c. Hyphae are filaments that provide a large surface area and aid absorption of
nutrients.
d. When a fungus reproduces, a portion of the mycelium becomes a reproductive
structure.
3. Fungal cells lack chloroplasts and have a cell wall made of chitin, not cellulose.
a. Chitin, like cellulose, is a polymer of glucose molecules organized into
microfibrils.
b. In chitin, unlike cellulose, each glucose has an attached nitrogen containing amino
group.
4. The energy reserve of fungi is not starch, but glycogen, as in animals.
5. Except for aquatic chytrids, fungi are nonmotile; their cells lack basal bodies and do not
have flagella at any stage in their life.
6. Fungi move to a food source by growing toward it; hyphae can grow up to a kilometer a
day.
7. Nonseptate fungi lack septa, or cross walls, in their hyphae; nonseptate hyphae are
multinucleated.
8. Septate fungi have cross walls in their hyphae; pores allow cytoplasm and organelles to
pass freely.
9. The septa that separate reproductive cells, however, are complete in all fungal groups.
C. Reproduction of Fungi
1. In general, fungal sexual reproduction involves the following:
haploid hyphae → dikaryotic stage → diploid zygote
147
↑--------------------- meiosis---------------↓
2. During sexual reproduction, haploid hyphae from two different mating types fuse.
3. If nuclei do not fuse immediately, the resulting hypha is dikaryotic (contains paired
haploid nuclei,
n + n).
a. In some species, nuclei pair but do not fuse for days, months, or even years.
b. The nuclei continue to divide in such a way that every cell has at least one of each
type of nucleus.
4. When the nuclei fuse, the resulting zygote undergoes meiotic cell division leading to
spore formation.
5. Fungal spores germinate directly into haploid hyphae without embryological
development.
6. Fungal Spore Formation
a. Spores are an adaptation to life on land and ensure that the species will be
dispersed to new locations.
b. A spore is a reproductive cell that can grow directly into a new organism.
c. Fungi produce spores both during sexual and asexual reproduction.
d. Although nonmotile, the spores are readily dispersed by wind.
7. Asexual reproduction can occur by three mechanisms:
a. Production of spores by a single mycelium is the most common mechanism.
b. Fragmentation is when a portion of a mycelium becomes separated and begins a
life of its own.
c. Budding is typical of yeasts; a small cell forms and gets pinched off as it grows to
full size.
22.2 Diversity of Fungi
1. In 1969, R. H. Whittaker argued for their own kingdom based on their multicellular
nature and mode of nutrition.
6. Not knowing phylogeny, fungal groups are classified according to differences in life
cycles and the types of structure that produces spores.
A. Chytrids
1. The chytrids (chytridiomycota) include 790 species of the simplest fungi that may
resemble the first fungi to have evolved.
2. Some chytrids are single cells while others formed branched nonseptate hyphae.
3. They are the only fungi who have flagellated sperm, eggs, and spores.
4. The zoospores liinks fungi to choanoflagellates and other animals and helps place
fungi in the supergroup Opisthokonta.
5. Asexual reproduction is common throught the production of zoospores within a single
cell that grow into new chytrids.
6. Some chytrids reproduce sexually and undergo alternation of generations, like green
plants and certain algae.
7. Chytrids play a role in the decay and digestion of dead aquatic organisms, some
chytrids are parasitic on plants, animals, and protists.
a. The parasitic chytrid, Batrachochytrium dendrobatidis has recently decimated
populations of harlequin frogs in central and South America.
b. The parasitic chytrid grows inside the frog’s skin cells and disrupt the ability of
frogs to aquire oxygen though their skin.
148
B. Zygospore Fungi
1. Phylum Zygomycota contains about 1,050 species of zygospore fungi.
2. Most are saprotrophs living off plant and animal remains in the soil or bakery goods
in a pantry.
3. Some are parasites of small soil protists, worms, or insects.
4. The black bread mold, Rhizopus stolonifer, is a common example.
a. With little cellular differentiation among fungi, hyphae specialize for various
functions.
b. Stolons are horizontal hyphae that exist on the surface of the bread.
c. Rhizoids are hyphae that grow into the bread, anchor the mycelium, and carry out
digestion.
d. Sporangiophores are stalks that bear sporangia.
e. A sporangium is a capsule that produces spores called sporangiospores.
f. During asexual reproduction, all structures are haploid.
5. The phylum name refers to the zygospore seen during sexual reproduction.
a. Hyphae of different mating types (+ and –) are chemically attracted and grow
toward each other.
b. Ends of hyphae swell as nuclei enter; cross walls develop behind each end,
forming gametangia.
c. Gametangia merge into a large multinucleate cell in which nuclei of two mating
types pair and fuse.
d. A thick wall develops around the cell, forming a zygospore.
e. The zygospore undergoes a period of dormancy before meiosis and germination
takes place.
f. Germination involves the development of one or more sporangiophores, with
sporangia at their tips.
g. The spores are dispersed by air currents and give rise to new haploid mycelia.
C. AM Fungi
1. The AM fungi (arbuscular mycorrhizal) in Phylum glomeromycota consists of
160 species.
2. Arbuscules are branching invaginations that the fungus makes when it invades
plant roots.
3. Mycchorizae are a mutualistic association that benefits both the fungus and the
plant.
4. AM fungi was classified as zoogospore fungi, but are now classified as a separate
group based on molecular data.
D. Sac Fungi
1. Phylum Ascomycota contains about 60,000 species of sac fungi.
2. Two main groups are recognized: the sexual ascomycetes (sexual reproduction) and
asexual ascomycetes (sexual reproduction not yet observed).
3. Sexual ascomycetes include the yeasts, the unicellular fungi, red bread molds,
morels, and truffles.
a. Many sexual ascomycetes are plant parasites and include the powdery mildews
that grow on leaves, leaf curl fungi, chestnut blight, and Dutch elm disease.
b. Ergot is a parasitic fungus on rye; it produces a toxin that can cause hysteria and
death.
149
4. Asexual ascomycetes used to be in the phylum Deuteromycota (imperfect fungi), but
are now recognized as sac fungi.
a. The molds Aspergillus and Penicillium (renamed Talaromyces) and yeast
Candida are in this group.
5. Biology of the Sac Fungi
a. The body of the ascomycetes can be a single cell (e.g., yeasts), but more often it is
a mycelium composed of septate hyphae.
b. They are distinguished by the structures they form when they reproduce asexually
and sexually.
6. Asexual Reproduction
a. Asexual reproduction is the norm among ascomycetes.
1) There are no sporangia in ascomycetes.
2) Conidiospores (conidia) develop directly on tips of conidiophores, modified
aerial hyphae, and are windblown when released.
3) Yeasts reproduce asexually by budding.
7. Sexual Reproduction
a. The ascus, contained within saclike ascocarp,is a fingerlike sac that develops
during sexual reproduction; the asci are protected by sterile hyphae within a
fruiting body called the ascocarp.
1) Each ascus contains eight haploid nuclei and produces eight ascospores.
2) In most ascomycetes, the asci become swollen and burst, expelling the
ascospores.
3) If released into the air, the spores are windblown.
8. The Benefits and Drawbacks of Sac Fungi
a. Sac fungi digest resistant materials containing cellulose, lignin, or collagen.
b. Some species can consume jet fuel and wall paint.
c. Others form symbiotic relationships with algae, forming lichens, and plant roots,
forming mycorrhizae.
d. Sac fungi accounts for most of the known fungal pathogens causing plant
diseases: powdery mildew, leaf curl fungus, chestnut blight, Dutch elm disease,
and Ergot.
e. Many sac fungi produce substances including penicillin, cyclosporin, steroids.
f. Some cause diseases (mycoses), e.g., ringworm.
9. Yeasts
a. Saccharomyces cerevisiae is brewer’s yeast; because it produces CO2, yeast
fermentation is important in the production of bread.
b. Yeasts are also used in genetic engineering experiments requiring a eukaryote.
c. Candida albicans is the yeast which causes the widest variety of fungal
infections, e.g., vaginal infections, oral thrush, or, in immunocompromised
individuals, systemic infections.
10. Molds
a. Aspergillus is a group of green molds that is sometimes pathogenic to humans.
b. It is used to produce soy sauce by fermentation of soybeans; it is used in the
production of many other food and cosmetic additives.
c. Aspergillus flavus secretes a potent carcinogen, and it also causes disease of the
respiratory tract.
150
Other molds grow in building materials, causing the “sick-building” syndrome.
Penicillium produces the important antibiotic penicillin.
Moldlike fungi in the genus Tinea cause diseases of the skin called tineas;
examples are athlete’s foot and ringworm.
g. Histoplasma capsulatum, which grows in both mold form and yeast form, causes
the mild “fungal flu”; the fungus grows within cells of the immune system and
causes systemic disease.
11. Control of Fungal Infections
a. Because fungal cells are similar to human cells, antifungal medications are
difficult to design.
b. Some fungicides are directed against steroid biosynthesis in the fungus; some are
based on heavy metals.
E. Deadly Fungi (Health Focus box)
1. Red and yello Amanita
a. Poisinous red and yellow mushroom also known as fly agaric.
b. Toxins include muscarin and muscaridine, which produce symptoms similar to
those of acute alcoholic intoxication.
c. Symptoms bein at one to six hours and include staggering, losing consciousness,
becoming delierious, suffering from hallucinations, manic conditions, and stupor.
d. Another symptom, vomiting, is beneficial since the poisoning may be ridden from
the system.
e. Deal occurs in less than 1% of cases.
2. Amanita phalloiddes
a. Also known as death angel muschroom, death occurs in 90% of victoms.
b. Symptoms begin 10-12 hours after consumption and include abdominal pain,
vomiting, delirium, and hallucinations.
c. The poison also interferes with RNA transcription by inhibiting RNA polymerase,
and victom dies from kidney and liver damage.
3. Psilocybe mexicana
a. This mushroom is a hallucinogenic mushroom used in religious ceremonies,
particularly among Mexican Indians.
b. This species of mushroom contains a chemical called psilocybin that is a
structural analogue of LSD with mescaline
4. Claviceps purpurea
a. This species of sac fungus is called the ergot fungus that infects rye and repaces
the grain with ergot.
b. Ergots are hard, purple-black bodies consisting of tightly cemented hyphae.
c. After the ergot is ground with the rye to make bread, the fungus releases toxic
alkaloids that cause the disease ergotism.
d. Symptoms of ergotism include vomiting, feelings of intense heat or cold, muscle
pain, a yellow face, and lesions on hands and feet, and accompanied by hysteria
and hallucinations.
e. Ergotism was commin in Europe during the Middle Ages. Ergotism may have
been the the cause of the individuals who were accused of witchcraft in Salem
Massachusetts in the 17th century. A recent episode occurred in 1951 in PontSaint-Espirit, France. Over 150 people became hysterical and four died.
d.
e.
f.
151
f. Since the alkaloids that cause ergotism stimulate smooth muscle and selectively
block the sympathetic nervous system, they can be used in medicine to cause
uterine contractions and to treat certain circulatory disorders.
F. Club Fungi
1. Club fungi are in the phylum basidiomycota and include over 22,000 species.
2. They have septate hyphae and include mushrooms, bracket fungi, puffballs, bird’s
nest fungi, and stinkhorns.
3. Biology of Club Fungi
a. Sexual reproduction involves production of basidiospores within fruiting bodies
in the basidium.
1) Sexual reproduction begins when monokaryotic hyphae of two different
mating types meet and fuse to form a dikaryotic (n + n) mycelium.
2) The dikaryotic mycelium continues its existence for years (perhaps even
hundreds of years).
3) A basidium contains four projections; cytoplasm and a haploid nucleus enters
to form four basidiospores.
4) Released basidiospores are windblown; when they germinate, a new haploid
mycelium forms.
5) In a puffball, spores inside parchmentlike membranes are released through a
pore or when the parchment breaks down.
6) In bird’s nest fungi, raindrops splatter basidiospore-containing “eggs” through
the air.
7) Stinkhorns have a slimy cap and attract flies by their bad odor to pick up and
distribute spores.
4. Smuts and Rusts
a. Smuts and rusts are club fungi that parasitize cereal crops (e.g., corn, wheat, oats,
and rye) and cause great economic crop losses every year.
b. Rusts and smuts do not form basidiocarps; their spores are small and numerous,
resembling soot.
c. Some smuts enter seeds and exist inside the plant, becoming visible only at
maturity.
d. Corn smut mycelia grow between the corn kernels and secrete substances to cause
tumors on ears.
e. Rusts have a complex life cycle that may involve more than one host; thus,
control measures may center on eradicating the alternate hosts.
22.3 Symbiotic Relationships of Fungi
A. Lichens
1. Lichens are a symbiotic association between a fungus and a cyanobacterium or a
green alga.
2. The body of a lichen is composed of three layers:
a. a thin, tough upper layer and a loosely packed lower layer that shield the
photosynthetic cells in the middle layer.
3. Special fungal hyphae penetrate or envelope the photosynthetic cells and transfer
nutrients directly to the rest of the fungus.
4. Lichens can reproduce asexually by releasing fragments that contain hyphae and an
algal cell.
152
5. This association was considered mutualistic, but experimentation suggests a
controlled parasitism by the fungus of the alga.
a. The algae grow faster when they are alone rather than when they are part of a
lichen.
b. On the other hand, it is difficult to cultivate the fungus, which does not grow
naturally alone.
c. Different lichen species are identified based on the fungal partner.
6. Three types of lichens are recognized.
a. Compact crustose lichens are often seen on bare rocks or tree bark.
b. Foliose lichens are leaflike.
c. Fruticose lichens are shrublike.
7. Lichens are efficient at acquiring nutrients; they survive with low moisture,
temperature, or poor soil.
8. Lichens may live in extreme environments and on bare rocks; they help form soil.
9. Lichens also take up pollutants and cannot survive where the air is polluted.
B. Mycorrhizae
1. Mycorrhizae are mutualistic relationships between soil fungi and roots of most
plants.
2. The fungus enters the cortex of roots but does not enter the cytoplasm of plant cells.
3. Ectomycorrhizae, such as AM fungi, form a mantle that is exterior to the root,
growing between cell walls.
4. It helps the roots absorb more minerals; in turn, the plant passes on carbohydrates to
the fungus.
5. The truffle lives in association with oak and beech tree roots; it can be inoculated
with the fungus.
6. The fossil record indicates that the earliest plants had mycorrhizae associated with
them; mycorrhizae helped plants adapt to and flourish on land.
153
Chapter 23
23.1 The Green Algal Ancestor of Plants
1. Plants are multicellular photosynthetic eukaryotes, whose evolution is marked by
adaptations to a land existence.
2. Living on land requires adaptations, primarily dealing with the threat of desiccation.
3. The most successful land plants are those that protect all phases of reproduction from
drying out and have an efficient means of dispersing offspring on land.
4. To conserve water, the land plant body is covered by a waxy cuticle that is
impervious to water while still allowing carbon dioxide to enter so photosynthesis can
continue.
5. In many plants, roots absorb water from the soil, and vascular system transports water
in the body of the land plant.
6. Flowering plants have evolved in a way that employs animals to assist with
reproduction and seed dispersal.
A. The Ancestry of Plants
1. Plants are believed to have evolved from a freshwater green algal ancestor over 450
million years ago.
a. Both utilize chlorophylls a and b and various accessory pigments.
b. In both, the food reserve is starch.
c. The cell walls of both contains cellulose.
d. DNA base codes for rRNA suggest plants are most closely related to green algae
known as charophytes.
2. The two group of charophytes (Carales and Coleochate) have several features that
would have promoted the evolution of multicellular land plants:
a. Cellulose cell walls of charophytes and land plant lineage are laid down by the
same unique type of cellulose synthesizing compexes. The cell walls of both types
of organisms are similar.
b. In charophytes, apical cells produce cells that allow their filaments to increase in
length. At the notes other cells can divide asymmetrically to produce reproductive
structures. Land plants have apical tissue that produces specialized tissues that
add to or develop into new organs.
c. Plasmodesmata between cells provide a means of communication between
neighboring cells and may have played a role in the evolution of specialized
tissues in land plants.
d. A placenta (designed cells) transfers nutrients from haploid cells of the previous
generation to the diploid zygote. Both charophytes and land plants retain and care
for the zygote.
B. Alternation of Generations Life Cycle
1. Land plants have a two-generation life cycle called alternation of generations.
a.
Embryophyta is an alternate name for the land plant clade since the 2n
embryo are retained and protect the embryo from drying out.
b.
The sporophyte is a diploid (2n) generation producing haploid spores by
meiotic cell division. Spores have a wall that contains sporopollenin, a molecules
that prevents drying out.
c.
The gametophyte is a haploid (n) generation producing haploid gametes
by mitotic division. A male gametangium is called an antheridium, and a female
154
gametangium is called an archegonium.
d.
In the plant life cycle, a spore undergoes mitosis and becomes a
gametophyte.
d.
Note that meiosis produces haploid spores.
e.
Mitosis occurs as a spore becomes a gametophyte, and also as a zygote
becomes a sporophyte.
f.
The charophytes have a haploid life cycle. The zygote undergoes meiosis,
and only four zoospores are produced per zygote.
2. Plants differ in which generation–gametophyte or sporophyte–is dominant.
a.
In nonvascular plants, the gametophyte is dominant.
b.
In the vascular groups, the sporophyte is dominant.
c.
The shift to sporophyte dominance is an adaptation to life on land.
d.
As the sporophyte gains dominance, the gametophyte becomes
microscopic and dependent on the sporophyte.
C. Other Derived Traits of Land Plants
1. Leaves and stems are covered by a waxy cuticle that holds in water but limits gas
exchange; the thickness of the cuticle varies among different species of plants.
2. Leaves and some other tissues have openings (stomata) that regulate gas and water
exchange.
3. Apical tissue has the ability to produce complex tissues and organs.
23.2 Evolution of Bryophytes: Colonization of Land
1. The bryophytes (liverworts, hornworts, mosses) are the first plants to colonize land.
2. Bryophytes are nonvascular plants because they lack true roots, stems, and leaves,
although they have rootlike, stemlike, or leaflike structures.
3. The bryophytes evolved during the Ordovician period.
4. Molecular data suggests that these plants have individual lines of descent and they do
not form a nonophyletic group.
5. Mosses may be more closely related to vascular plants than hornworts and liverworts.
6. Bryophytes and vascular plants share traits including:
a. Alternation of generation life cycle
b. Apical tissue that produces complex tissues
c. Bodies are covered by a cuticle
d. Hornwarts and mosses have stomata
7. The gametophyte is the dominant generation we recognize in bryophytes.
a.
Flagellated sperm swim to the vicinity of the egg in a continuous film of
water.
b.
The gametophyte produces eggs in the archegonia, flagellated sperm in the
antheridia.
c.
The sperm swim to the egg in a continuous film of water.
d.
The sporophyte is attached to and derives nourishment from the
photosynthetic gametophyte.
8. Nonvascular plants are quite small because of lack of vascular tissue and the need for
sperm to swim to the archegonia in water.
a.
Because sexual reproduction involves flagellated sperm, they are usually
found in moist habitats.
b.
Bryophytes compete well in harsh environments because the gametophyte
155
can reproduce asexually.
A. Liverworts
1. There are two groups: the thallose liverworts with flattened bodies known as a thallus,
and the leafy liverworts, which superficially resemble mosses.
2. Marchantia is a example of a liverwort.
a. It has a flat, lobed thallus about a centimeter in length.
b. The upper surface of thallus is smooth; the lower surface bears numerous rhizoids
projecting into the soil.
c. It reproduces asexually and sexually.
3. Rhizoids are the hairlike extensions that anchor it and absorb water and minerals
from the soil.
4. Asexual reproduction involves gemmae in gemmae cups on the upper surface of the
thallus; gemmae can start a new plant.
5. Sexual reproduction depends on antheridia and archegonia.
a. Antheridia are on disk-headed stalks and produce flagellated sperm.
b. Archegonia are on umbrella-headed stalks and produce eggs.
c. The zygote develops into a tiny sporophyte composed of a foot, short stalk, and
capsule.
d. Spores produced within the capsule of the gametophyte are disseminated by wind.
B. Hornworts
1. Hornworts are photosynthetic, but also have a symbiotic relationship with
cyanobacteria, which can fix atmospheric nitrogen.
2. The small sporophytes of a hornwort look like tiny green broom handles and are
attached to a filmy gametophyte that is less than two cm in diameter.
C. Mosses
1. Mosses are the largest phyla of nonvascular plants with over 15,000 species are
known.
a. Three distinct classes exist: peat mosses, true mosses, and rock mosses.
2. They prefer damp, shaded localities but some survive in deserts; others in bogs and
streams.
3. Mosses store much water; when they dry out, they become dormant; when it rains,
they become green.
4. The moss life cycle begins with algalike protonema developing from the germination
of a haploid spore.
a. Three days of favorable growing conditions produce upright shoots covered with
leafy structures.
1) Rhizoids (rootlike filaments) anchor the protonema, to which the shoots are
attached.
2) The shoots bear antheridia and archegonia at their tips.
3) The antheridia produce flagellated sperm which need external water to reach
eggs in the archegonia.
4) The archegonium looks like a vase with a long neck; it has an outer layer of
sterile cells with a single egg at the base.
5) Fertilization results in a diploid zygote that undergoes mitotic division to
develop a sporophyte.
b. The sporophyte consists of a foot (which grows down into the gametophyte tissue
156
starting at the former archegonium), a stalk, and an upper capsule (sporangium)
where spores are produced.
1) At first the sporophyte is green and photosynthetic.
2) At maturity it is brown and nonphotosynthetic.
5. The Uses of Bryophytes
a. Sphagnum (bog or peat moss) has tremendous ability to absorb water and is
important in gardening.
b. Sphagnum does not decay in some acidic bogs; the accumulated dried peat can be
used as fuel.
23.3 Evolution of Lycophytes: Vascular Tissue
 Vascular Tissue
1. Xylem is vascular tissue that conducts water and minerals upward from the roots.
2. Phloem is vascular tissue that transports sucrose and hormones throughout the plant.
3. Lignin strengthens the walls of conducting cells in xylem.
 Evolutionary History
1. Rhyniophytes (phylum Rhyniophyta) were dominant from mid-Silurian Period of the
Paleozoic Era to the mid-Devonian.
2. Cooksonia may have been the first vascular plant and colonizer of land.
3. The photosynthetic stems, not true leaves or roots, have sporangia at their tips; they
are attached to a rhizome.
4. Similar to bryophytes, these plants were homosporous, producing one type of spore.
5. Since they were not a seed plant, they were called a seedless vascular plant, like the
lycophytes.
A. Lycophytes
1. The first lycophytes had the stem of early vascular plants, roots, and leaves called
microphylls, so called because they had only one strand of vascular tissue.
2. Microphylls evolved as simple side extensions of the stem; roots evolved as lower
extensions of the stem; the vascular tissue is centrally placed, as it is with today’s
lycophytes.
3. Today’s lycophytes are also called club mosses and include the ground pines
(Lycopodium), spike mosses (Selaginella), and quillworts (Isoetes).
4. There are approximately 1,150 species of lycophytes.
5. Roots come off a branching, underground stem called a rhizome.
6. Sporophylls are microphylls that bear sporangia.
7. Sporophylls are grouped into club-shaped stoboli.
8. Similar to all vascular plants, the sporophyte generation is the dominant generation in
lycophytes.
9. Ground pines are homosporous – the spores germinate into inconspicuous and
independent gametopytes, like in ferns.
10. The sperm are flagellated in bryophytes, lycophytes, ferns.
23.4 Evolution of Pteridophytes: Megaphylls
1. Pteridophytes (ferns and their allies, horsetails, whiskferns) are seedless vascular
plants.
2. Pteridophytes and seed plants both have megaphylls, which are brad leaves with
several strands of vascular tissue.
3. Megaphylls evolved about 370 MYA.
157
4. Their function is to allow plants to efficiently collect solar energy, which leads to the
production of more food and the possibility of producing more offspring than plants
without megaphylls.
5. The pteridophytes were cominant from the late Devonian period through the
Carboniferous period.
6. Club mosses (35 m), horsetails (18 m), and ferns (8 m) were larger than today’s
specimens and formed great swamps.
A. Horsetails
1. Horsetails consist of one genus, Equisetum, and 25 species.
2. A rhizome produces aerial stems that stand about 1.3 meters tall.
3. Whorls of slender side branches encircle nodes of a stem, resembling a horse’s tail.
4. Small scalelike leaves also form whorls at each node.
5. Many horsetails have strobili at the tip of all stems; others send up special
buff-colored stems that bear stroboli.
6. The spores germinate into inconspicuous and independent gametophytes.
7. The tough, rigid stems have silica in the cell walls; early Americans used them as
“scouring rushes.”
B.
Whisk Ferns
1. Whisk ferns are represented by two genera: Psilotum and Tmesipteris.
2. Whisk ferns occur in the southern United States and in the tropics as epiphytes or on
the ground.
3. Whisk ferns have no leaves or roots.
4. A branched rhizome with rhizoids and a mycorrhizal fungus helps gather nutrients.
5. Two or three species of the genus Tmesipteris have appendages that some maintain
and reduced megaphylls
C. Ferns
1. Ferns consist of about 11,000 species.
2. Ferns are widespread, and especially abundant in warm, moist tropical regions.
3. Ferns range in size from low-growing mosslike forms to tall trees.
4. Fronds are megaphylls that are variable in size and shape.
5. The life cycle of ferns applies to the life cycle of other types of vascular seedless
plants.
a. The dominant sporophyte produces windblown spores by meiosis within
sporangia.
b. In ferns, the sporangia can be located within sori on the underside of the leaflets.
c. Windblown spores disperse the gametophyte.
d. Flagellated sperm are released by antheridia and swim to the archegonia in a film
of water.
e. Many ferns can reproduce asexually by fragmentation of the fern rhizome.
6. The Uses of Ferns
a. Ostrich fern is the only edible fern to be traded as a food – eaten as fiddleheads.
b. The fern Azolla harbors the nitrogen fixing cyanobacteria Anabaena.
c. Azolla converts more atmospheric nitrogen into a form available for plant growth
than all the legumes.
d. Ferns and their allies can also be used as medicines to treat boils and ulcers,
whooping cough, and dysentery.
158
e. Ferns are used heavily as ornamental plants by florists and as home decorations.
23.5 Evolution of Seed Plants: Full Adaptation to Land
1. Seed plants are vascular plants that use seeds as the dispersal stage.
2. Seeds are mature ovules containing embryonic sporophyte and stored food enclosed
in a protective seed coat.
3.
Seeds are resistant to adverse conditions such as dryness and temperature
extremes.
4.
A food reserve supports the emerging seedling until it can exist on its own.
5. The survival value of seeds contributes greatly to the success of seed plants and to
their present dominance.
6. Seed plants are heterosporous, meaning they have microspores and megaspores.
7. Microspores become male gametophytes, called pollen grains.
8. Pollination is the transfer of pollen to the vicinity of the female gametophyte.
9. Sperm is delivered to an egg through a pollen tube; no external water is required for
fertilization.
10. A megaspore develops into a female gametophyte within an ovule, which becomes a
seed following fertilization.
11. In gymnosperms, the ovules are not completely enclosed by sporophyte tissue at
pollination.
12. In angiosperms, the ovules are completely enclosed within diploid sporophyte tissues
which become a fruit.
A. Gymnosperms
1. Gymnosperms include the conifers, cycads, ginkgo, and gnetophytes; they are classified
into 780 species.
a All have ovules exposed on the surface of sporophylls or similar structures.
b Ancient gymnosperms were present in swamp forests of the Carboniferous Period.
2. Conifers
a. There are about 575 species of conifers.
b. Conifers are cone-bearing trees and shrubs such as pines, hemlocks, and spruces.
c. Conifers usually have evergreen needlelike leaves well adapted to withstand extremes
in climate.
d. The oldest and largest trees in existence are conifers:
1)
The coastal redwood (Sequoia semperivirens) is the tallest living vascular
plant and grows to nearly 100 meters high.
2)
Bristlecone pines grow in the White Mountains of California and Nevada
mountains; one is 4,900 years old.
e. Conifer forests cover vast areas of northern temperate regions.
f. Pine needles have thick cuticle and recessed stomata.
g.
Conifers are monoecious since they produce both pollen and seed cones.
h.
The Uses of Pines
1)
Pines provide wood for construction.
2)
Pines make attractive additions to parks and gardens.
3)
Pine needles are rich in vitamins A and C and can be boiled to make tea to
ease cold symptoms.
4)
Inner bark of white pines can be used in wound dressing or provide
159
medicine for colds and coughs.
5)
Pine oil is used to scent roomsprays and masculine perfumes.
6)
Resin is harvested commercially for a derived product called turpentine.
3. Cycads
a. Cycads include 10 genera and about 140 species.
b. The trunk is stout and unbranched; the large leaves are compound giving a palmlike
appearance.
c. Cycads have pollen and seed cones on separate plants.
d. The cycad life cycle is similar to that of pine trees except they are pollinated by
insects.
e. The pollen tube bursts in the vicinity of the archegonium and multiflagellated sperm
swim to reach an egg.
f. Cycads flourished during the Mesozoic Era and probably were food for herbivorous
dinosaurs.
g. Today, cycads are endangered because of their very slow growth.
4. Ginkgoes
a. Only one species of ginkgo (Ginkgo biloba) survives today.
b. It is called the maidenhair trees because its forked-veined, fan-shaped leaves resemble
the maidenhair fern.
c. Ginkgoes are dioecious—some trees produce seeds.
d. Ginkgo ovules are at the end of short, paired stalks; female trees produce seeds with a
fleshy covering and foul odor.
e. Similar to cycads, the pollen tube of Gingkoes bursts to release multiflagellated
sperm that swim to the egg produced by the female gametophyte in an ovule.
5. Gnetophytes
a. Gnetophytes are represented by three living genera and 70 species.
b. Gnetum consists of trees and climbing vines with broad leaves; they live mainly in the
tropics.
c. Ephedra is found in U.S. desert regions, and is a many-branched shrub with small,
scalelike leaves.
d. Welwitschia is found in deserts in southwest Africa; most of it exists underground and
it has two enormous leaves.
e. The xylem and stroboli are uniform across all three genera, and all lack archegonia.
f. Angiosperms also lack archegonia, suggesting that gnetophytes are the gymnosperms
most closely related to angiosperms.
g. Some gnetophytes produce nectar in their reproductive structures, recruiting insects in
pollination.
B. Carboniferous Forests (Ecology Focus box)
1. Coal is a fossil fuel that our industrial society runs on.
2. Fossil fuel refers to the remains of organic materials from ancient times.
3. During the Carboniferous period, more than 300 million years ago, a great swamp
forest encompassed northern Europe, Ukraine, Appalacian Mountains.
4. The forest consisted of giant lycophytes, horsetails and ferns.
5. Over time, water rose and trees fell. Sediment covered the decayed remains of the
plants and sometimes changed to sedimentary rock.
6. Since sedimentary rock applied pressure, the organic material then became coal.
160
C.
D.
E.
F.
7. The change in climate brought upon the extinction of these trees, and only their
herbaceous relatives survived time.
Angiosperms
1. There are 240,000 known species of angiosperms (flowering plants).
2. This group contains six times the number of species of all other plant groups
combined.
3. Angiosperms live in all habitats from freshwater to desert and from tropics to
subpolar regions.
4. Flowering plant size ranges from microscopic duckweed to Eucalyptus exceeding 100
m tall.
5. They are important in everyday human life: clothing, food, medicine, and commercial
products.
6. Unlike gymnosperms, angiosperms enclose their ovules within diploid tissues.
Origin and Radiation of Angiosperms
1. Flowering plants became the dominant plants in the late Cretaceous and early Tertiary
Periods..
2. Although the first fossils are no older than 135 million years, angiosperms probably
arose much earlier, perhaps 200 million years ago.
3. Gene sequencing data indicates Amborella trichopoda, a small shrub from New
Caledonia in the South Pacific may be the most primitive survivor.
Monocots and Eudicots
1. Most flowering plants belong to one of two classes: Monocotyledones (65,000
species), called monocots, or the Eudicotyledones (175,000 species), called
eudicots.
2. The term eudicots is preferred to the earlier dicots; some former dicots are now
known to have split off before the rise of these two major classes.
3. Monocot produce one cotyledon (seed leaf) at germination and have flower parts
mostly in threes or multiples of threes.
4. Dicots produce two cotyledons (seed leaves) at germination and have flower parts
mostly in fours or fives, or multiples of these numbers.
The Flower
1. The peduncle, a flower stalk, expands slightly at the tip into a receptacle.
2. The receptacle is a modified stem tip to which flower parts are attached.
3. Sepals are outer ring of modified leaves of flowers; usually green, they enclose the
flower before it opens.
4. Petals (collectively a corolla) are a ring of modified leaves inside of sepals; large and
colorful, they help attract pollinators.
5. Stamens consist of two parts: each slender filament has an anther at its tip.
6. The anther produces pollen.
7. At the center of the flower is the carpel; it consists of a stigma, style, and ovary.
a. Carpels are modified sporophylls that contain ovules in which megasporangia are
located.
b. A stigma is a landing platform for pollen and the site where the pollen tube enters
the style.
c. The style is a slender column that holds up the stigma to receive pollen.
d. Pollen grains develop a pollen tube that takes sperm to the female gametophyte in
161
the ovule.
e. Glands located in the region of the ovary produce nectar, a nutrient gathered by
pollinators as they go flower to flower.
G. Flowering Plant Life Cycle
1. A megaspore located in an ovule within an ovary of a carpal develops into an eggbearing female gametophyte called the embryo sac.
2. Usually, the embryo sac has seven cells; one is an egg and one contains two polar
nuclei.
3. Microspores produced in anthers become pollen grains which mature into spermbearing male gametophytes.
4. The mature male gametophyte consists of three cells; the tube cell and two sperm
cells.
5. Pollination brings the male gametophyte to the stigma where it germinates.
6. During germination, the tube cell produces a pollen tube that carries the two sperm to
the micropyle opening of an ovule.
7. In double fertilization, one sperm fertilizes an egg and one sperm unites with polar
nuclei to form the triploid endosperm.
8. The ovule becomes the seed and contains the embryo (the sporophyte of the next
generation) and stored food enclosed within a seed coat.
9. A fruit is derived from an ovary and possibly accessory parts of the flower; some
fruits are fleshy and some are dry.
H. Flowers and Diversification
1. Flower variety is related to the numerous means by which flowers are pollinated and
fruits are dispersed.
2. Inconspicuous flowers disperse pollen by wind; colorful flowers attract specific
pollinators (e.g., bees, wasps, flies, butterflies, moths, and even bats) which carry
only a particular pollen.
3. Flowers promote efficient cross pollination; they also aid in dispersal through
production of fruits.
4. There are fruits that utilize wind, gravity, water, and animals for dispersal.
5. Since animals live in certain habitats or have particular migration patterns, they can
deliver a fruit-enclosed seed to a suitable location for germination and development.
I. Plants: Could We Do Without Them? (Ecology Focus box)
1. Plants are the producers in most ecosystems.
2. Humans derive most of their sustenance from three flowering plants: wheat, corn, and
rice.
3. Wheat
a. Wheat was first cultivated in the Near East at about 8000 B.C.
b. Wheat was brought to North America in 1520 by early settlers.
c. The United States is one of the world’s largest producers of wheat.
4. Corn (Maize)
a. Maize was first cultivated in Central America about 7,000 years ago.
b. Mainze developed from a plant called teosinte, native to central Mexico.
c. We grow six major varieties of corn: sweet, pop, flour, dent, pod, and fint.
5. Rice
162
a. Rice originated in southeastern Asica several thousand years ago, and now is
grown throughout the tropics and subtropics, where water is abundant.
b. We are familiar with white and brown rice.
c. Brown rice results when the seeds are threshed to remove the hulls.
d. White rice results when the seed coat and embryo are also removed.
e. The seed coat and embryo are rich in vitamin B and fat-soluble vitamins.
6. Sugarcane and sugar beets provide almost 100% of the world’s sugar.
7. Spices were the result of many explorations in search for better and cheaper routes for
spice importation.
8. Coffee, tea, and cola also come from flowering plants.
a. Coffee originated in Ethiopia and it was first used with animal fat on long
journeys.
b. Coffee as a drink was not developed until the 13th century in Arabia and Turkey.
c. Tea is thought to have been developed in central Asia.
d. Tea was exclusively used for medicinal purposes.
e. Cola is a common ingredient in tropical drinks and was used in the orinigal CocaCola.
9. Household products
a. Lumber is used as a major structural portion in buildings.
b. In certain parts of the world palm leaves are used as roof materials.
c. In the Near East, houses are made of reeds.
10. Rubber
a. Rubber had its origin in Brazil from the latex of the rubber tree.
b. Stronger rubber, such as the rubber in tires, was made by adding sulfur and
heating in a process called vulcanization.
c. Today much of the rubber is produced synthetically.
11. Cotton and natural fibers
a. Cotton fibers comes from filaments that grow on the cotton seed.
b. Over 30 species of native cotton now grow around the world.
12. Medicinal plants
a. Currently about 50% of all pharmaceutical drugs have their origins from plants.
b. The cinchona tree contains the chemical quinine, which is used to treat malaria.
13. Hallucinogenic effects.
a. Coca is used for cocaine and crack.
b. Opium poppy is used for morphine.
c. Yarn is used for steroids.
14. Other uses.
a. Plants are used in landscaping, providing shade or wind break.
b. Plants also produce oxygen, which is necessary for all plants and animals.
163
Chapter 24
24.1 Organs of Flowering Plants
1. Structures of flowering plants are well-adapted to varied environments, including
water.
2. Flowering plants usually have a root system (the roots) and a shoot system (the
stems and leaves).
3. Roots, stems, and leaves are the vegetative organs of plants; flowers, seeds, and
fruits are reproductive structures.
A. Roots
1. A plant’s root system is underground.
2. The root system is the primary root plus the branch roots.
3. It is generally equal in size to the shoot system, the part above ground.
4. Root systems have the following functions:
a. Roots anchor a plant in soil and give support.
b. Roots absorb water and minerals from soil; root hairs are central to this process.
1) Root hair cells are in a zone near the root tip.
2) Root hairs are numerous to increase the absorptive surface of a root.
3) Transplanting plants damages a plant when the root hairs are torn off.
4) Water and nutrients absorbed are distributed to the rest of the plant.
5) Roots produce hormones that must be distributed to the plant
c. Perennials “die back” to regrow the next season; roots of herbaceous perennials
store food (e.g., carrots, sweet potatoes).
B. Stems
1. The shoot system of a plant consists of the stem, the branches, and the leaves.
2. The stem forms the main axis of the plant, along with lateral branches.
3. Upright stems produce leaves and array them to be exposed to as much sun as
possible.
4. A node occurs where a leaf attaches to the stem and an internode is the region
between nodes; nodes and internodes identify a stem even if it is underground.
5. Axillary buds are located at a node in the upper angle between the leaf and the stem
and can produce new branches of the stem or flower.
6. The stem has vascular tissue to transport water and minerals from roots and sugar
from leaves.
7. Nonliving cells form a continuous pipeline through vascular tissue.
8. A cylindrical stem expands in girth and length; trees use woody tissue to strengthen
stems.
9. Stems may function in storage: cactus stems store water and tubers are horizontal
stems that store nutrients.
C. Leaves
1. A leaf is the major organ of photosynthesis in most plants.
2. Leaves receive water from roots by way of the stem.
3. Broad, thin leaves have a maximum surface area to absorb CO2 and collect solar
energy.
4. A blade is the wide portion of a leaf with most photosynthetic tissue.
5. The petiole is a stalk that attaches a leaf blade to the stem.
6. The leaf axil is the upper acute angle between petiole and stem where an axillary
164
(lateral) bud originates.
7. Some leaves protect buds, attach to objects (tendrils), store food (bulbs), or capture
insects.
D. Monocot Versus Eudicot Plants
 Criteria for Monocots and Eudicots
1. Cotyledons are embryonic seed leaves providing nutrition from the endosperm before
the mature leaves begin photosynthesis.
2. Flowering plants are divided into monocots and eudicots based on these traits.
Monocots
Eudicots
a. Number of cotyledons in seed
one
two
b. Distribution of root xylem and
root xylem and phloem in
root
phloem between phloem
a ring of xylem
c. Distribution of vascular bundles
scattered in stem
arranged in a distinct
ring
d. Pattern of leaf veins form a parallel pattern form a net pattern
e. Number of flower parts
in threes and multiples of
in fours and fives and
three multiples of four or five
f. Number of apertures in pollen
usually one usually three
grains
3. Representative members:
grasses, lilies, orchids,
dandelions to oak
rice, wheat, corn
trees and palm trees
4. The distinction between monocots and eudicots represents an important evolutionary
division that relates to many structures.
24.2 Tissues of Flowering Plants
1. Flowering plants continually grow due to meristematic (embryonic) tissue in the
stem and root tips (apexes).
2. Apical meristems are located near the tips of stems and roots, where they increase the
size of these structures; this is called primary growth.
3. Monocots also have intercalary meristem, which allows them to regrow lost parts.
4. Apical meristem produces three types of meristem, which develop into the three types
of specialized primary tissues in the body of the plant.
a. Protoderm is the outermost primary meristem giving rise to epidermis.
b. Ground meristem is the inner meristem producing ground tissue.
c. Procambium produces vascular tissue.
5. Three specialized tissues are include:
a. Epidermal tissue forms the outer protective covering.
b. Ground tissue fills the interior of the plant.
c. Vascular tissue transports water and nutrients and provides support.
A. Epidermal Tissue
1. Epidermis is an outer protective covering tissue of plant roots, leaves, and stems of
nonwoody plants.
2. It contains closely packed epidermal cells.
3. Waxy cuticle covers the walls of epidermal cells, minimizing water loss and
protecting against bacteria.
4. In roots, certain epidermal cells are modified into root hairs that increase the surface
area of the root for absorption of water and minerals and help to anchor plants in the
165
soil.
5. Protective hairs called trichomes are produced by epidermal cells of stems, leaves,
and reproductive organs.
6. Trichomes may help protect a plant from herbivores by producing a toxic substance.
7. On the lower epidermis of eudicot leaves, and both surfaces of monocot leaves,
special guard cells form microscopic pores (stomata) and regulate gas exchange and
water loss.
8. In older woody plants, the epidermis of the stem is replaced by periderm, the
majority component of which is cork cells.
a. At maturity, dead cork cells may be sloughed off.
b. Cork cambium is meristem that produces new cork cells.
c. As cork cells mature, they encrust with the lipid suberin that renders them
waterproof and inert.
d. Cork protects a plant and makes it resistant to attack by fungi, bacteria, and
animals.
e. When the cork cambium overproduces cork in certain areas of the stem surface,
ridges and cracks, called lenticels, appear; lenticels are important in gas exchange
between the interior of the stem and the air.
B. Ground Tissue
1. Ground tissue forms the bulk of the plant; it contains parenchyma, collenchyma and
sclerenchyma cells.
2. Parenchyma are the least specialized of all plant cell types.
a. Cells of this type contain plastids (e.g., chloroplasts or colorless storage plastids).
b. They are found in all organs of a plant.
c. They divide to form more specialized cells (e.g., roots develop from stem cuttings
in water).
3. Collenchyma resemble parenchyma but has thicker primary cell walls.
a. Collenchyma cells are uneven in the corners.
b. They usually occur as bundles of cells just beneath the epidermis.
c. They give flexible support to immature regions of plants (e.g., a celery stalk is
mostly collenchyma).
4. Sclerenchyma cells have thick secondary cell walls.
a. They are impregnated with lignin that makes the walls tough and hard.
b. They provide strong support to mature regions of plants.
c. Most cells of this type are nonliving.
d. Sclerenchyma cells form fibers (used in linen and rope) and shorter sclereids
(found in seed coats, nut shells, and gritty pears).
C. Vascular Tissue
1. Xylem conducts water and mineral solutes upward through a plant from roots to
leaves.
a. Xylem contains tracheids and vessel elements.
b. Tracheids
1) Tracheids are smaller, hollow, thin, long nonliving cells with tapered
overlapping ends.
2) Water moves across end and sidewalls because of pits or depressions in the
secondary cell wall.
166
c. Vessel Elements
1) Vessel elements are hollow non-living cells lacking tapered ends.
2) They are larger than tracheids.
3) They lack transverse end walls.
4) They form a continuous pipeline for water and mineral transport.
d. Xylem also contains sclerenchyma cells to add support.
e. Vascular rays are flat ribbons of parenchyma cells between rows of tracheids;
they conduct water and minerals across the width of the plant.
2. Phloem is vascular tissue that conducts the organic solutes in plants, from the leaves
to the roots; it contains sieve-tube members and companion cells.
a. Sieve-tube Members
1) Sieve-tube cells contain cytoplasm but no nucleus.
2) They are arranged end to end.
3) They have channels in their end walls (thus, the name “sieve-tube”), through
which plasmodesmata extend from one cell to another.
b. Companion Cells
1) Companion cells are closely connected to sieve-tube cells by numerous
plasmodesmata.
2) They are smaller and more generalized than sieve-tube cells.
3) They have a nucleus which may control and maintain the function of both
cells.
4) They are also thought to be involved in the transport function of phloem.
3. Vascular tissue extends from root to leaves as vascular cylinder (roots), vascular
bundles (stem) and leaf veins.
24.3 Organization and Diversity of Roots
1. The eudicot root has various zones where cells are in various stages of differentiation
and where primary growth occurs.
2. The root apical meristem is the region protected by the root cap, a protective cover;
its cells are replaced constantly because they are soon ground off.
3. The primary meristems are in the zone of cell division, which continuously provides
cells to the zone of elongation by mitosis.
4. The zone of elongation is above the zone of cell division where cells become longer
and more specialized.
5. The zone of cell division contains meristematic tissue and adds cells to the root tip
and the zone of elongation.
6. The zone of maturation is above the zone of elongation; cells are mature and
differentiated and it has root hairs.
A. Tissues of a Eudicot Root
1. Epidermis is a single layer of thin-walled, rectangular cells.
a. The epidermis forms the protective outer layer of the root.
b. In the region of maturation, there are many root hairs.
c. Root hairs project as far as 5–8 mm into the soil.
2. Cortex is a layer of large, thin-walled, irregularly shaped parenchyma cells.
a. These cells contain starch granules; the cortex functions in food storage.
b. The cells are loosely packed; water and minerals can diffuse through the cortex
without entering cells.
167
3. Endodermis is single layer of rectangular cells that forms the boundary between the
cortex and inner vascular cylinder.
a. Its cells fit closely together and are bordered on four sides by the Casparian
strip.
b. It regulates the entrance of minerals into the vascular cylinder.
c. The Casparian strip is an impermeable lignin and suberin layer that excludes
water and mineral ions.
d. The only access to the vascular bundle is through endodermal cells.
4. Vascular tissue
a. The pericycle is the first layer of cells within the vascular cylinder
1) Its cells have retained the capacity to divide.
2) It can start the development of branch or secondary roots.
b. The main portion of the vascular cylinder is composed of
1) xylem, whose cells are arranged in a star-shaped pattern; and
2) phloem, whose cells are located in regions between arms of xylem.
B. Organization of Monocot Roots
1. Monocot roots have the same zones as a eudicot root but do not undergo secondary
growth.
2. The monocot root has a ring of vascular tissue where alternating bundles of xylem
and phloem surround pith.
3. Monocot roots also have pericycle, endodermis, cortex, and epidermis.
C. Root Diversity
1. Roots have adaptations to help anchor plants, absorb water and minerals, and store
carbohydrates.
2. There are three general root types.
a. A taproot is common in eudicots; this first or primary root grows straight down
and remains the dominant root of a plant; it is often fleshy and adapted to store
food (e.g., carrots, beets).
b. The fibrous root system of monocots is a mass of slender roots and lateral
branches that hold the plant secure in the soil.
3. Adventitious roots develop from underground stems or from the base of
above-ground stems.
4. A prop root’s main function is to anchor a plant (e.g., corn and mangrove plants).
5. Pneumatophores of mangrove plants project above the water from roots to acquire
oxygen.
6. Ivy has holdfast roots to anchor aerial shoots.
7. Haustoria are rootlike projections from stems on parasitic plants (e.g., dodders and
broomrapes).
a. Haustoria grow into the host plant.
b. They contact vascular tissue from which they extract water and nutrients.
8. Mycorrhizae are an association between fungus and roots.
a. In this mutualism, the fungus receives sugars and amino acids from the plant.
b. The plant receives water and minerals from the fungus.
9. Legumes (e.g., peas and beans) have root nodules containing nitrogen-fixing
bacteria.
168
a.
Bacteria extract nitrogen from air and reduce it to a form that can be used by plant
tissues.
b. Legumes are often planted to bolster the nitrogen supply in the soil.
D. Paper Comes from Plants (Ecology Focus box)
1. Egyptians made the first form of paper
2. The paper making process involves grinding plant material to form a pulp that
contains “fibers,” or vascular tissue.
3. The fibers form a sheet when they are screened from the pulp.
4. Pulp must be chemically treated to remove lignin.
5. If a small amount of lignin is removed, then the paper is brown, like paper bags.
6. If more lignin is removed, the paper is white, but not very durable.
7. More durable paper is made from cotton or linin because the fibers are lignin-free.
8. Eucalyptus trees are being used to make paper, especially in Brazil.
9. Temperate hardwood trees are cultivated in Canada and tropical hardwoods are
cultivated in Southeast Asia.
10. Softwood trees in the U.S. have been genetically improved to have a higher wood
density and to be harvestable five years earlier than ordinary pines.
11. Bamboo harvesting does not destroy the roots, and the growing cycle is favorable
so it is expected to be a significant source of paper pulp despite high processing costs to
remove impurities.
12. Flax and cotton rags are used to make legal documents, high-grade bond paper, and
high-grade stationary.
13. Each person in the U.S. uses about 318 kg of paper products per year, compared to
2.3 kg per person in India.
14. If Sunday newspapers were recycled, it would save approximately 500,000 trees
per week.
24.4 Organization and Diversity of Stems
1. The terminal bud contains the shoot tip protected by bud scales, which are modified
leaves.
2. Dormant auxillary buds that can give rise to branches or flowers are here also.
3. Bud scales are scalelike coverings protecting terminal buds during winters when bud
growth stops.
4. The stem tip is the site of primary growth where cell division extends the length of
stems or roots.
5. The apical meristem produces new cells that elongate and increase the height of the
stem.
6. The shoot apical meristem is protected within a terminal bud of leaf primordia
(immature leaves).
7. Three specialized types of primary meristem develop from shoot apical meristem.
a. Protoderm is the outermost primary meristem that gives rise to epidermis.
b. Ground meristem produces two tissues composed of parenchyma cells: the pith
and the cortex.
c. Procambium is the inner meristem that produces primary xylem and primary
phloem.
8. Differentiation continues; cells become the first tracheids or vessel elements within
the vascular bundle.
169
9. First sieve-tube cells are short-lived and do not have companion cells.
10. Mature phloem develops later after all surrounding cells have stopped expanding and
a lateral meristem, called vascular cambium, has developed.
A. Herbaceous Stems
1. Herbaceous stems are mature nonwoody stems that exhibit only primary growth.
2. The outermost tissue of herbaceous stems is epidermis covered by a waxy cuticle to
prevent water loss.
3. Xylem and phloem are in distinctive vascular bundles.
a. In each bundle, xylem is found to the inside of the stem; phloem is found to the
outside.
b. In the eudicot herbaceous stem, vascular bundles are arranged in a ring towards
the outside of the stem and separating the cortex from the central pith.
c. In a monocot stem, vascular bundles are scattered throughout the stem; there is no
well-defined cortex or pith.
4. The cortex sometimes carries on photosynthesis; pith may function as a storage site.
B. Woody Stems
1. Woody plants have both primary and secondary tissues.
2. Primary tissues are new and form each year from primary meristem right behind the
apical meristem.
3. Secondary tissues develop from second year onward from growth of lateral meristem.
4. Primary growth increases the length of a plant; secondary growth increases its girth.
5. As secondary growth continues, it is not possible to distinguish individual vascular
bundles.
6. The woody eudicot stem has a different organization with three distinct areas: bark,
wood, and pith.
7. Bark
a. The bark of a tree contains cork, cork cambium, and phloem.
b. Secondary phloem is produced each year by vascular cambium but does not build
up.
c. This phloem tissue is soft; therefore it is easy to remove the bark of a tree.
d. Cork cambium is meristem beneath the epidermis that produces new cork cells
when needed.
e. Cork cambium begins to divide, producing cork that disrupts epidermis replacing
it with cork cells.
f. Cork cells become impregnated with suberin, causing them to die but making
them waterproof.
g. Consequently, cork forms an impervious barrier, even to gas exchange, except at
lenticels.
8. Wood
a. Wood is a secondary xylem which builds up each year; the vascular cambium is
dormant during the winter.
b. Spring wood is composed of wide xylem vessel elements with thin walls,
necessary to conduct sufficient water and nutrients to supply abundant growth that
occurs during spring.
c. Summer wood forms when moisture is scarce; composed of a lower proportion of
vessels, it contains thick-walled tracheids and numerous fibers.
170
d. An annual ring is one ring of spring wood followed by a ring of summer wood;
this equals one year’s growth.
e. Sapwood is the outer annual rings where transport occurs.
f. Heartwood is the inner annual rings of older trees.
1) Vessels no longer function in transport; they become plugged with resins and
gums that inhibit growth of bacteria and fungi.
2) Heartwood may help to support a tree.
9. Woody Plants
a. It is advantageous to be woody when there is adequate rainfall; woody plants can
grow taller and have adequate tissue to support and service leaves.
b. It takes energy to support secondary growth and prepare the plant for winter in
temperate zones.
c. Long-lasting plants need more defense mechanisms against attack by herbivores
and parasites.
d. Trees need years to mature before reproducing; they are more vulnerable to
accident or disease.
C. Stem Diversity
1. Stolons are stems that grow along the ground; new plants grow where the nodes
contact the soil.
2. The succulent stems of cacti are modified for water storage.
3. Tendrils of grapes and morning glories are stems adapted for wrapping around
support structures.
4. Rhizomes are underground horizontal stems.
a. Rhizomes are long and thin in grasses and thick and fleshy in irises.
b. Rhizomes survive winter and contribute to asexual reproduction because each
node bears a bud.
c. Some rhizomes have tubers that function in food storage (e.g., potatoes).
5. Corms are bulbous underground stems that lie dormant during winter, like rhizomes.
6. Humans use stems: sugarcane is primary source of table sugar, cinnamon and quinine
are from bark, wood is from paper, etc.
D. Defence Strategies of Trees (Science Focus box)
1. Defence strategy one
a. When a tree is injured, the tracheids and vessel elements of the xylem plub up
with chemicals that block them off above and below the site of injury.
b. If the tree cannot close off the vessel elements, then long columns of rot run up
and down the trunk and into branches, which eventually become hollow.
2. Defence strategy two
a. The construction of annual rings makes it difficult for disease organisms to move
towards the pith of the tree.
3. Defence strategy three
a. The presence of rays, which divide the trunk of the tree, also make it difficult for
disease organisms to move completely around the trunk.
4. Defence strategy four
a. The reaction zone develops in the region of tree injury along the inner portion of
the cambium next to the youngest annual ring.
b. The reaction zone walls off any annual rings that were present before the injury
171
occurred.
c. A disadvantage to this strategy is that radial cracks can occur to and through the
bark, which weaken a tree and make it more susceptible to breaking.
24.5 Organization and Diversity of Leaves
1. Leaves are organs of photosynthesis in plants; they are made of a flattened blade and
a petiole.
2. The leaf veins reveal the presence of vascular tissue within the leaves.
3. The vascular tissues of leaves transport water and nutrients.
4. Leaf veins have a net pattern in eudicot leaves and a parallel pattern in monocot
leaves.
5. A petiole is a stalk that attaches a leaf blade to the plant stem.
6. Epidermis is the layer of cells that covers the top and bottom sides of a leaf.
a. The epidermis often bears protective hairs or glands; epidermal glands produce
irritating substances.
b. The epidermis is covered by a waxy cuticle that keeps the leaf from drying out.
c. The epidermis, particularly lower epidermis, contains stomata that allow gases to
move into and out of the leaf.
7. Mesophyll is the body of a leaf and the site of most photosynthesis.
a. Palisade mesophyll is the layer of mesophyll containing elongated parenchyma
cells with many chloroplasts.
b. Spongy mesophyll contains loosely packed parenchyma cells that increase the
surface area for gas exchange.
A. Leaf Diversity
1. Simple leaves have margins not deeply lobed or divided into smaller leaflets.
2 Compound leaves are divided into smaller leaflets, and each leaflet may have its own
stalk.
3. Leaves are variously modified.
a. Pinnately compound leaves have the leaflets occurring in pairs.
b. Palmately compound leaves have all of the leaflets attached to a single point.
c. Leaves can be arranged in one of three ways: alternate, opposite, or whorled.
d. Cactus spines are modified leaves and are attached to a succulent stem.
e. Onion bulbs have leaves surrounding a short stem.
f. The tendrils of peas and cucumbers are leaves.
g. The Venus’s-flytrap has leaves to trap and digest insects.
172
Chapter 25
25.1 Plant Nutrition and Soil
1. The ancient Greeks considered plants “soil-eaters” that converted soil into plant
tissue.
2. The 17th Century Dutchman Jean-Baptiste Van Helmont conducted an experiment.
a. He planted a five pound young willow tree in a pot with 200 pounds of soil.
b. After five years of watering, the tree weighed 170 pounds but only a few ounces
of soil was missing.
c. He concluded the increase in tree weight came from water; he was unaware of
substances in air.
A. Essential Inorganic Nutrients
1. Approximately 95% of a plant’s dry weight is carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen.
a.
Carbon dioxide is the source of carbon for a plant.
b.
Water is the source of hydrogen.
c. Oxygen can come from either atmospheric oxygen, carbon dioxide, or water.
2. A mineral is an organic substance usually containing two or more elements.
3. To be classified as an essential nutrient, the following criteria must be fulfilled.
a. It must have an identifiable nutritional role.
b. No other element can substitute and fulfill the same role.
c. A deficiency of the element causes the plant to die.
4. These elements are divided into macronutrients and micronutrients, according to
their relative concentrations in plant tissue.
5. Beneficial nutrients are elements required for or to improve growth of a particular
plant.
a. Horsetails require silicon as a mineral nutrient.
b. Sugar beets show better growth in the presence of sodium.
c. Soybeans use nickel when root nodules are present.
B. Determination of Essential Nutrients
1. When a plant is burned, most mineral elements (except for nitrogen) remain in the
ash.
2. Hydroponics (water culture) is the preferred method for determining plant mineral
requirements.
a. Hydroponics is cultivation of plants in water.
b. Nutrient requirements of plants are determined by omitting a mineral and
observing the effects.
c. If plant growth suffers, it can be concluded that the omitted mineral is a required
nutrient.
d. This works for macronutrients but impurities make micronutrient measurement
difficult.
C. Hydroponics
1.
Some of the benefits of hydroponics is the elimation of plant pests, diseases, and
weeds.
2. Since water is used through a pipline system, there is little water lost through runoff,
compared with traditional irrigation methods.
D. Soil
1. Soil Formation
173
a.
Soil formation begins with weathering of rock by freezing, glacier flow, stream
flow, and chemicals.
b. Lichens and mosses grow on barren rock and trap particles and leave decaying
tissues.
c. Decayed organic matter (humus) takes time to accumulate; its acidity leaches
minerals from rocks.
d. Depending on parent material and weathering, a centimeter of soil may develop
within 15 years.
2. The Nutritional Function of Soil
a. Soil consists of mineral particles, decaying organic matter, living organisms, air
and water.
b. The best soil includes particles of different sizes; this provides critical air spaces.
c. Mineral Particles
1) Mineral particles vary in size.
a) Sand particles are largest: 0.05–2.0 mm in diameter.
b) Sand particles are medium sized: 0.002–0.05 mm in diameter.
c) Clay particles are smallest: below 0.002 mm in diameter.
2) Sandy soils lose water too readily; clay packs tightly to hold water.
3) Clay particles are negatively charged and attract positively charged ions (e.g.,
calcium [Ca2+] and potassium [K+]).
4) In acidic soils, hydrogen ions replace positively charged nutrients and the
nutrient ions float free and are leached; this is why acid rain kills trees.
5) Clay cannot retain negatively charged NO3 , and the nitrogen content of clay
soil is low.
6) Loam (a mixture of the three mineral particles) retains water and nutrients;
roots take up oxygen in the air spaces.
d. Humus
1) A mixture of 10–20% humus mixed with a top layer of soil particles is best
for plants.
2) Humus keeps soil loose and crumbly, decreases runoff and aerates soil.
3) Humus is acidic and retains positively charged minerals for plants to use later.
4) Bacteria and fungi break down organic matter in humus and return inorganic
nutrients to plants.
e. Living Organisms
1) Small plants play a major role in the formation of soil from rock and in
succession.
2) Roots of larger plants penetrate the soil and weather rocks.
3) Larger moles and badgers and smaller earthworms help turn over the soil.
4) Soil animals, from mites to millipedes, help break down leaves and other plant
remains.
5) Fungi, protozoa, algae and bacteria complete decomposition.
6) Soil bacteria make nitrate available to plants.
7) Some soil organisms (i.e. some roundworms) are crop pests that feed on roots.
3. Soil Profiles
a. A soil profile is a vertical section from the ground surface to the unaltered rock
below; usually, a soil profile has parallel layers called horizons.
174
1) The A horizon is the uppermost topsoil layer that contains litter and humus.
2) The B horizon lacks organic matter but contains inorganic nutrients leached
from the A horizon.
3) The C horizon is weathered and shattered bedrock.
4) Soil profiles vary by parent material, climate and ecosystem.
5) Grassland soils have deep A horizons from turnover of decaying grasses and
lack of leaching.
6) Forest soils have thinner A horizons but enough inorganic nutrients for tree
root growth.
7) Tropical rain forest A horizons are shallow due to rapid decomposition; the B
horizon is deeper due to extensive leaching.
4. Soil Erosion
a. Soil erosion is caused by water or wind carrying away soil.
b. Erosion removes 25 billion tons of topsoil worldwide annually.
c. Deforestation and desertification contribute to erosion.
d. U.S. farmlands lose soil faster than it is formed on one-third of cropland.
e. The coastal wetlands are also losing soil at a high rate.
25.2 Water and Mineral Uptake
1. Minerals follow the path of water uptake.
a. Some mineral ions diffuse in between the cells; this is called apoplastic transport.
b. Because of the impermeable Casparian strip (a band of suberin and lignin
bordering four sides of root endodermal cells), water must eventually enter the
cytoplasm of endodermal cells.
c. Water can enter epidermal cells at their root hairs, and progress across the cortex
and endodermis of a root.
A. Mineral Uptake
1.
In contrast to water, minerals are actively taken up by plant cells.
a. Mineral nutrient concentration in roots may be 10,000 times more than in
surrounding soil.
b. During transport throughout a plant, minerals can exit xylem and enter cells that
require them.
2. Mineral ions cross plasma membranes by a chemiosmotic mechanism.
a. Plants absorb minerals in ionic form: nitrate (NO3 ), phosphate (HPO4= ), and
potassium ions (K+); all have difficulty crossing a charged plasma membrane.
b. It has long been known plants expend energy to actively take up and concentrate
mineral ions.
c. A plasma membrane pump, called a proton pump, hydrolyzes ATP to transport H+
ions out of the cell; this sets up an electrochemical gradient that causes positive
ions to flow into cells.
d. Negative ions are carried across the plasma membrane in conjunction with H+
ions as H+ ions diffuse down their concentration gradient.
B. Adaptations of Roots for Mineral Uptake
1. Two symbiotic relationships are known to assist roots in acquiring nutrients.
2. Legumes have roots colonized by the bacterium Rhizobium.
a. Plants cannot use atmospheric nitrogen because they lack enzymes to break the N
175
b. Rhizobium makes nitrogen compounds available to plants in exchange for
carbohydrates.
c. Bacteria live in root nodules—structures on plant roots that contain
nitrogen-fixing bacteria.
d. Rhizobial bacteria reduce atmospheric nitrogen (N2) to ammonium (NH4+)
(nitrogen-fixation).
e. Other plants have a relationship with free-living, nitrogen-fixing microorganisms
in soil.
3. Most plants have mycorrhizae; those lacking mycorrhizae are limited in where they
can grow.
a. Mycorrhizae are a mutualistic symbiotic relationship between soil fungi and plant
roots.
b. The fungal hyphae may enter the cortex of roots but do not enter plant cells.
c. Ectomycorrhizae form a mantle exterior to the root, and they grow between cell
walls.
d. Fungus increases the surface area for mineral and water uptake and breaks down
organic matter.
e. In return the root furnishes the fungus with sugars and amino acids.
f. Orchid seeds are small with limited nutrients; they germinate only when invaded
by mycorrhizae.
g. Nonphotosynthetic plants (e.g., Indian pipe) use mycorrhizae to extract nutrients
from nearby trees.
4. Some plants have poorly developed roots or no roots; other mechanisms supply
minerals and water.
a. Parasitic plants (e.g., dodders, broomrapes, pinedrops) send out haustoria (rootlike
projections) that grow into the host and tap into the xylem and phloem of the host.
b. Venus’s-flytrap and sundew obtain nitrogen and minerals as leaves capture and
digest insects.
25.3 Transport Mechanisms in Plants
1. Flowering plants have transport tissues as an adaptation to living on land: xylem and
phloem.
A. Reviewing Xylem and Phloem Structure
2. Xylem transport tissue conducts water and mineral solutes from roots to leaves; it
contains two types of conducting cells: tracheids and vessel elements.
a. Tracheids:
1) are hollow, nonliving cells with tapered overlapping ends;
2) are thinner and longer than vessel elements; and
3) water crosses the end and sidewalls because of pits in secondary cell wall.
b. Vessel elements:
1) are hollow, nonliving cells that lack tapered ends;
2) are wider and shorter than tracheids;
3) lack transverse end walls; and
4) form a continuous pipeline for water and mineral transport.
3. Phloem is vascular tissue that conducts organic nutrients to all parts of the plant; it
contains sieve-tube members and companion cells.
176
a. Sieve-tube members lack a nucleus, are arranged end to end and have channels in
end walls (thus, the name “sieve-tube”) through which plasmodesmata extend
from one cell to another.
b. Companion cells connect to sieve-tube cells by numerous plasmodesmata, and are
smaller and more generalized than sieve-tube cells; they have a nucleus.
B. Determining Xylem and Phloem Function
1. The transport systems of xylem and phloem rely on the mechanical properties of
water.
a. Diffusion moves molecules from higher to lower concentrations.
b. Water potential considers both water pressure and osmotic pressure.
2. They also rely on the chemical properties of water: polarity of water and hydrogen
bonding.
C. The Concept of Water Potential (Science Focus box)
1. Water potential is the potential energy of water.
a. For example, water at the top of a waterfall has a higher water potential than
water at the bottom of the waterfall.
2. In cells, two things determine water potential:
a. Water pressure across a membrane
1) Within water pressure, pressure potential is the effect that pressure has on
water potential.
2) Water moves from an area of higher pressure to an area of lower pressure.
3) The higher the water pressure, the higher the water potential.
4) Pressure potential is the concept that best explains the movement of sap in
xylem and phloem
b. Solute concentration across a membrane
1) Osmotic potential takes into account the effects of solutes on the movement of
water.
2) Water tends to move across a membrane from the area of lower solute
concentration to the area of higher solute concentration.
3) The lower the concentration of solutes (osmotic potential), the higher the
water potential.
3. Turgor pressure is the pressure potential that increases due to the process of osmosis.
a. Water stops entering a cell when the pressure potential inside the cell increases
and balances the osmotic potential outside the cell.
b. Plants depend on turgor pressure to maintain the turgidity of their bodies.
c. When plants do not have sufficient turgor pressure, the plant droops as a result.
D. Water Transport
1. Movement of water and minerals in a plant involves entry into roots, xylem, and
leaves.
2. Water and minerals enter root cells before they reach xylem by the two routes already
described.
3. Water entering root cells creates a positive pressure called root pressure.
a. Root pressure (which occurs primarily at night) tends to push xylem sap upward
in a plant.
b. Guttation is the appearance of drops of water along the edges of leaves, as a
result of water being forced out of leaf vein endings; it is the result of root
177
pressure.
c. Root pressure is not a sufficient mechanism for water to rise to the tops of trees.
4. Cohesion-Tension Model of Xylem Transport
a. Water and dissolved minerals must be transported upward from roots to xylem,
perhaps as high as 90 meters.
b. The cohesion-tension model states that transpiration creates a tension (i.e., a
negative pressure) that pulls water upward in xylem without expending any
energy of the plant.
c. Water molecules are cohesive with one another, adhesive with xylem walls.
d. Water molecules interact with one another and form a continuous water column
in the xylem, from the leaves to the roots that is difficult to break.
e. Transpiration is a plant’s loss of water to the atmosphere through evaporation at
leaf stomata.
f. Cohesion is the tendency of water molecules to cling together due to their
forming hydrogen bonds.
g. Adhesion is the ability of water (a polar molecule) to interact with molecules
comprising the walls of xylem vessels; adhesion gives a water column extra
strength and prevents it from slipping back down.
h. In daytime, the negative water potential created by transpiration extends from
leaves to roots; the water column must be continuous.
i. If a water column within xylem is broken by cutting a stem, the water column will
drop back down the xylem vessel away from the site of breakage, making it more
difficult for conduction to occur.
j. At least 90% of the water taken up by roots is lost through stomata by
transpiration.
k. With plenty of water, stomata will remain open, allowing CO2 to enter the leaf
and photosynthesis to occur.
l. Transpiration exerts a pulling force or tension that draws the water column up in
vessels.
m. Under water stress, more water is lost through a leaf than can be brought up and
the stomata close; the leaves are then protected from water loss by the waxy
cuticle of the upper and lower epidermis.
n. Photosynthesis requires CO2 to enter the leaf; there must be sufficient water so
stomata can remain open and allow CO2 to enter.
o. In the root, water enters the xylem passively by osmosis.
p. The water column in the xylem extends from leaves to the root.
q. Water is pulled upward from the roots due to the tension in the xylem created by
the evaporation of water at the leaves.
E. Opening and Closing of Stomata
1. Each stoma, a small pore in the leaf epidermis, has two guard cells.
2. Stomata open from turgor pressure when guard cells take up water; when they lose
water, turgor pressure decreases and stomata close.
3. Guard cells are attached to each other at their ends; the inner walls are thicker than
outer walls.
4. Radial expansion is prevented by cellulose microfibrils in the walls but outer walls
can expand lengthwise.
178
5. As they take up water, they buckle out, thereby creating an opening between cells.
6. Since 1968, it has been known that when stomata open, there is accumulation of K+
ions in guard cells.
7. A proton pump run by breakdown of ATP to ADP and P transports H+ outside the
cell; this establishes an electrochemical gradient allowing K+ to enter by way of a
channel protein.
8. The blue-light component of sunlight is a signal that can cause stomata to open.
a. There is evidence that flavin pigments absorb blue light.
b. This pigment sets in motion a cytoplasmic response activating the proton pump
that causes K+ ions to accumulate in guard cells.
9. Evidence suggests a receptor in the plasma membrane of guard cells brings about
inactivation of the proton pump when CO2 concentration rises, as happens when
photosynthesis ceases.
10. Abscisic acid (ABA) produced by cells in wilting leaves, also causes stomata to close;
photosynthesis cannot occur, but water is conserved.
11. In plants kept in the dark, stomata open and close on a 24-hour basis as if responding
to sunlight in the daytime and the absence of sunlight at night; some sort of internal
biological clock must keep time.
F. Plant Can Clean Up Toxic Messes (Ecology Focus box)
1. Phytoremediation uses plants to absorb, store, degrade, or transform pollutants that
would otherwise harm the environment.
2. Plants can clean up contaniminated sites in one of two ways:
a. If the substance is an organic contaminant (i.e. spilled oil), the plants break down
the substances and the remainders can either be absorbed by the plant or left in the
soil or water.
b. If the substance is an inorganic contaminant (i.e. cadmium, zinc), the plants
absorb the substances, trap the contaminants and the plants are harvested and
disposed of.
3. Poplars Take Up Excessive Nitrates
a. A farmer in Amana, Iowa planted a mile long section of poplars to absorbe nitrate
runoff from a fertilized cornfield.
b. Before the trees were planted, nitrate levels were as much as ten times the amount
considered safe.
c. Following the tree planting, the brook’s nitrate levels dropped more than 90%,
and the trees have thrived.
4. Canola Plants Take Up Selenium
a. Canola plants were planted in farms in California’s San Joaquin Valley to absorb
excess selenium in the soil.
b. Irrigation can cause naturally occurring selenium to rise to the soil surface and the
selenium would flow off into drainage ditches and eventually in wildlife areas.
Selenium can deform and kill waterfowl.
c. By adding selenium-accumulating canola plants to farmers’ crop rotations,
selenium levels in runoff are being managed in the area.
5. Mustard Plants Take Up Uranium
a. In a Superfund site in Aberdenn, Maryland, mustard plants were used to remove
uranium from the Army’s firing range, for as little as 10% of the cost of
179
traditional clean up methods.
6. Limitations of Phytoremediation
a. One limitation of phytoremediation is the slow pace at which trees grow and
therefore, how much pollutants the trees can absorb each growing season.
b. A second limitation is that phytoremediation is only effective at depths that plant
roots can reach, making it useless against deep-lying contamination unless the
contaminated soils are excavated.
c. Another limitation is that phytoremediation is not successful at cleaning up lead
or other metal contaminatated areas without adding chemicals to the soil.
d. In addition, there is the risk that animals may ingest the pollutants by eating the
leaves of plants that are being used in phytoremediation.
G. Organic Nutrient Transport
1. Marcello Malpighi (1679) suggested bark transferred sugars from leaves to roots.
a. He observed the results of removing a strip of bark from a tree (girdling).
b. Bark swells just above the cut and sugar accumulates in the swollen tissue.
c. Today, we know phloem was removed but xylem remained; therefore, phloem
does transport sugars.
2. Radioactive tracer studies using 14C confirmed phloem transports organic nutrients.
a. When 14C-labeled carbon is supplied to mature leaves, radioactively labeled sugar
moves to roots.
b. Similar studies confirm phloem transports amino acids, hormones, and mineral
ions.
3. Aphids Used in Study
a. It is difficult to take samples of sap from just the phloem cells without injuring the
phloem.
b. Aphids (small insects) drive their mouth stylets into a sieve-tube cell; then
samples are easily taken.
c. The aphid body is cut off; the stylet becomes a small needle from which phloem
is collected.
d. Such research indicates that sap can move through phloem from 60–100 cm per
hour or more.
4. Pressure-Flow Model of Phloem Transport
a. The pressure-flow model explains the transport of sap through sieve tubes by a
positive pressure potential.
b. The buildup of water creates a positive pressure potential within the sieve tubes
that moves water and sucrose to a sink (e.g., at the roots).
c. Pressure exists from the leaves to the roots; at the roots, sucrose is transported out
and water also flows through due to the pressure.
d. Consequently, this pressure gradient causes a flow of water from leaves to roots.
e. The conducting cells of phloem are sieve tubes lined end to end.
f. Cytoplasm extends through the sieve plates of adjoining cells to form a
continuous tube system.
g. During the growing season, leaves produce sugar.
h. Sucrose is actively transported into phloem by an electrochemical gradient
established by a H+ pump.
i. Water flows passively into sieve tubes by osmosis.
180
j.
k.
A sink can be at the roots or any other part of the plant that requires nutrients.
Because phloem sap flows from source to sink, sap can move any direction along
phloem.
181
Chapter 26
26.1 Plant Hormones
1. One defining characteristic of life is an ability to respond to stimuli.
2. Adaptive organisms respond to environmental stimuli because it leads to longevity
and survival of the species.
3. Plant cells utilize signal transduction when they respond to stimuli.
4. Signal transduction involves:
a. Receptors
1)
Plant cells have proteins that are activated by a specific signal.
b. Transduction pathway
1) There are a series of relay proteins or enzymes that transform the signal to a
signal that is understood by the cell’s machinery.
2) The stimulated receptor can either communicate immediately with the
transduction pathway, or uses a second messenger to initate a response.
c. Cellular response
1)
The response is the result of the transduction pathway.
2)
The response brings about the observed microscopic response, i.e. closing
stomata.
5. For plants to respond to stimuli, activities of plant cells and structures have to be
coordinated.
6. Almost all plant communication is done by hormones.
7. Hormones are chemical messengers, produced in very low concentrations, that are
active in another part of the organism.
8. Hormones are synthesized in one part of a plant; they travel in the phloem after a
plant receives an appropriate stimulus.
A. Auxins
1. Apically produced auxin prevents the growth of axillary buds, a phenomenon called
apical dominance.
a. When a terminal bud is removed, the nearest buds begin to grow and the plant
branches.
b. Application of a weak solution of auxin causes roots to develop from the ends of
cuttings.
c. Auxin production by seeds promotes growth of fruit.
d. As long as auxin is concentrated in leaves and fruits rather than stem, they do not
fall off.
2. Auxin-controlled cell elongation is involved in gravitropism and phototropism.
a. When gravity is perceived, auxin moves to the lower surface of roots and stems.
b. The Darwins discovered with oat seedlings, phototropism would not occur if the
tip of a seedling is cut off or covered by a cap; they concluded the cause of
curvature moved from the coleoptile (the protective sheath for the leaves of a
seedling) tip to the rest of the shoot.
3. Frits W. Went (1926) experimented with coleoptiles.
a. He cut off tips and placed them on agar.
b. When an agar block was placed to one side, the coleoptile would curve away from
that side regardless of the light.
c. He deduced a chemical caused the curved growth, and he named it auxin after the
182
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Greek word for “promoting growth.”
How Auxins Cause Stems to Curve
1. In a plant exposed to unidirectional light, auxin moves from the bright side to the
shady side of a stem.
2. Auxin binds to receptors and activates the ATP-driven proton (H+) pump.
3. As hydrogen ions are pumped out of the cell, the cell wall becomes acidic, breaking
hydrogen bonds.
4. Cellulose fibrils are weakened and activated enzymes further degrade the cell wall.
5. The electrochemical gradient established causes of uptake of solutes and water
follows by osmosis.
6. The result is elongation of the stem on the shady side so that it bends toward the light.
Gibberellins
1. Gibberellins are a group of some 70 plant hormones that chemically differ only
slightly.
2. GA3 is the most common of the natural gibberellins.
3. Gibberellins are growth promoters that elongate cells.
4. Gibberellins were discovered in 1926 by Ewiti Kurosawa, a Japanese scientist
investigating a fungal disease of rice plants called “foolish seedling disease.”
a. His fungus-infected plants produced an excess chemical gibberellin, named after
the fungus.
b. By 1956, gibberellic acid was finally isolated from a flowering plant rather than
fungus.
5. The dormancy of seeds and buds can be broken by applying gibberellins.
6. After the embryo produces gibberellins, amylase appears. So it seems that
gibberellins lead to activation of the gene that codes for amylase.
Cytokinins
1. Cytokinins are a class of plant hormones that promote cell division.
2. Cytokinins are derivatives of the purine base adenine.
3. A natural cytokinin zeatin is found in corn kernels; kinetin is a synthetic cytokinin.
4. Researchers discovered cytokinins in work on growing plant tissues in culture.
5. Oligosaccharins, chemical fragments released from the cell wall, also direct
differentiation.
6. Researchers hypothesize that auxin and cytokinins are part of a
reception-transduction-response pathway that activates enzymes that release these
fragments from the cell wall.
Senescence
1. Aging processes are senescence; large molecules break down and are transported
elsewhere in the plant.
2. Cytokinins prevent senescence of leaves; they also initiate development of leaf
growth.
3. Cytokinins initiate growth of lateral buds despite apical dominance.
Abscisic Acid
1. Abscisic acid (ABA) is produced by any tissue that contains chloroplasts, monocot
stems and roots.
2. ABA is sometimes called the “stress hormone”; it maintains seed and bud dormancy
and causes closure of stomata.
183
3. It was once thought that ABA functioned in abscission, but now the hormone is no
longer believed to function naturally in this process.
4. Dormancy occurs when a plant organ readies itself for adverse conditions by stopping
growth.
a. ABA moves from leaves to vegetative buds in the fall; thereafter these buds are
converted to winter buds which are covered by thick, hardened scales.
b. Reduction in ABA and increase in gibberellins break seed and bud dormancy;
seeds germinate and buds send forth leaves.
5. Abscisic acid brings about the closing of stomata when a plant is under water stress.
a. By some unknown mechanism, ABA causes K+ ions to leave guard cells.
b. As a result, guard cells lose water and the stomata close.
G. Ethylene
1. Ethylene is a gas involved in abscission and ripening of fruits.
2. Auxin and perhaps gibberellin initiates abscission, but once abscission has begun,
ethylene stimulates production of enzymes such as cellulase that cause leaf, fruit, or
flower drop.
3. It was an early practice to prepare citrus fruit for market by storage in a room with a
kerosene stove.
4. Later work revealed incomplete combustion of kerosene produced ethylene which
ripens fruit.
5. Ethylene stimulates production of cellulase, an enzyme that hydrolyzes cellulose in
plant cell walls.
6. A barrel of ripening apples can induce ripening of a bunch of bananas some distance
away.
7. Ethylene releases from the site of a physical wound; therefore one rotten apple spoils
the whole bunch.
8. The presence of ethylene in air inhibits the growth of plants in general.
H. Arabidopsis Is a Model Organism (Science Focus box)
1. To study the actions of genes, including those that control growth and development,
scientists have chosen the week Arabidopsis thaliana as a study plant because:
a. The plant is small so many hundreds of plants can grow in a small amount of
space.
b. The plant has a short generation time (5-6 weeks), and can product about 10,000
seeds.
c. The plant typically self pollinates, but can cross pollinate, which is helpful for
gene mapping and production of strains with multiple mutations.
d. The number of DNA base pairs is relatively small.
2. Since the Arabidopsis genome has been sequenced, genes can be clones and used as
probes for the isolation of the homologous genes from plants of economic value.
3. Mutant plants are created to discover what each of its genes do.
a. For example, one of the mutant genes that alters the development of flowers has
been cloned and reintroduced into tobacco plants, where it caused sepals and stamens
to appear where petals would ordinarily be.
4. Knowledge about the development of the flowers in Arabidopsis can have far-ranging
applications, including leading to more productive crops.
184
5. In addition, the study of the Arabidopsis genome may promote plant molecular
genetics, in general.
26.2 Plant Responses
A. Tropisms
1. A tropism is plant growth toward or away from a unidirectional stimulus.
a. The stimulus comes from only one direction instead of many.
b. Growth toward a stimulus is a positive tropism; growth away from a stimulus is a
negative tropism.
c. By differential growth, one side elongates faster; the result is a curving toward or
away from a stimulus.
2. Three well-known tropisms are named for the stimulus that causes the response.
a. Gravitropism is response to Earth’s gravity; roots demonstrate positive
gravitropism
and stems demonstrate negative gravitropism.
b. Phototropism is growth of plants in response to light; stems show positive
phototropism.
c. Thigmotropism is unequal growth due to touch (e.g., coiling of tendrils around a
pole).
3. Response to a stimulus first involves reception of the stimulus.
4. The next step is transduction of the stimulus into a form meaningful to the organism.
5. Finally, there is a response by the organism.
B. Gravitropism
1. An upright plant placed on its side displays negative gravitropism; it grows upward
opposite gravity.
2. Charles Darwin and his son were the first to show that roots display positive
gravitropism.
a. If the root cap is removed, roots no longer respond to gravity.
b. Later researchers showed root cap cells contain statoliths, starch grains within
amyloplasts.
c. Due to gravity, amyloplasts settle to the lowest part of the cell.
3.
The connection between amyloplasts is uncertain.
a.
Amyloplasts could cause stems and roots to respond differently than
auxin.
b.
The upper surface of a root elongates so that the root curves downward
and the lower surface of a stem elongates, so that the stem curves upwards.
C. Phototropism
1. Phototropism occurs because cells on shady side of stems elongate due to the
presence of auxin.
2. Negative tropism occurs when a plant curves away from light.
3. It is now known that phototropism occurs because plants respond to blue light.
a. When the blue light is formed, the photopropin undergoes a conformation change.
b. The change occurs from a transfer of a phosphate group from ATP, to a protein
portion of the photoreceptor.
c. The photoreceptor then triggers a transduction pathway that leads to the entry of
auxin into the cell.
D. Thigmotropism
185
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unequal growth due to contact with solid objects is thigmotropism.
The coiling of morning glory or pea tendrils around posts, etc., is a common example.
Cells in contact with an object grow less while those on the opposite side elongate.
This process is quite rapid; tendrils have been observed to encircle an object in ten
minutes.
5. A couple of minutes of touching can bring about a response that lasts for several days.
6. The response can be delayed; tendrils touched in the dark will respond when
illuminated.
a. ATP rather than light can cause the response; the need for light is simply a need
for ATP.
b. The hormones auxin and ethylene are involved; they induce curvature of tendrils
in the absence of touch.
7. Thigmomorphogenesis is a touch response involving the whole plant.
a. An entire plant responds to the presence of wind or rain.
b. A plant growing in a windy location has a shorter, thicker trunk.
c. Simple rubbing of a plant inhibits cellular elongation and produces a shorter,
sturdier plant.
E. Nastic Movements
1. Turgor movements are dependent on turgor pressure c hanges in plant cells.
2. In contrast to tropisms, turgor movements do not involve growth and are not related
to the source of the stimulous.
3. Turgor movements result from touch, shaking, or thermal stimulation.
4. When a Mimosa pudica leaf is touched, the leaflets fold because the petiole droops.
a. This response takes only a second or two and is due to a loss of turgor pressure
within cells.
b. A pulvinus is a thickening at the base of such leaflets where turgor pressure can
rapidly drop.
c. Potassium ions move out of the cell and water follows by osmosis.
d. A single stimulus, such as a hot needle, can cause all of the leaves to respond; this
requires a nerve impulse-like stimulus for communication.
5. Venus-flytrap
a. This plant has three sensitive hairs at the base of the trap.
b. When touched by an insect, an impulse-type stimulus triggers the trap to close.
c. Two ideas as to what causes the electrical charge are:
1) The cells located near the outer region of the lobes rapidly secrete hydrogen
ions (H+) into their cell walls, loosening them, and allowing the walls to swell
rapidly by osmosis; or
2) The cells in the inner portion of the lobes and the midrib rapidly lose ions,
leading to a loss of water by osmosis and collapse of these cells.
3) Whatever the mechanism, turgor movements are involved.
F. Sleep Movements
1. Circadian rhythms are sleep movements that occur regularly in a 24-hours cycle.
2. A common example of circadian rhythms is in the prayer plant (Maranta
leuconeura).
a. At night, the leaves of the prayer plant fold upward into a shape resembling hands
of prayer.
186
b. This movement is also due to changes in the turgor pressure of motor cells in the
pulvinus located at the base of each leaf.
3. Other example of circadium rhythms are:
a. Morning glories (Ipomoea leptophylla) open its flowers during the early part of
the day and close them at night.
b. In most plants the stomata open in the morning and close at night.
c. In some plants necture is secreted at the same time of the day or night.
4. To qualify as a circadium rhythm, the activity must:
a. Occur every 24-hours.
b. Take place in the absence of external stimuli .
c. Be able to be reset if external cues are provided.
5. A biological clock is an internal mechanism maintaining biological rhythms in the
absence of stimuli.
6. Biological clocks are synchronized by external stimuli to twenty-four-hour rhythms.
7. Photoperiod is more reliable an indicator of seasonal changes than temperature
change.
8. The biological clock may involve the transcription of a number of “clock genes.”
a. One model proposes that the information-transfer system from DNA to RNA to
enzyme to metabolite, with all its feedback controls, is intrinsically cyclical and
could be the basis for biological clocks.
b. These genes control sleep movements, opening and closing of stomata, the
discharge of floral fragrances, and metabolic activities associated with
photosynthesis.
9. The biological clock also influences seasonal cycles that depend on day-night length.
G. Photoperiodism
1. Many physiological changes in plants (e.g., seed germination, the breaking of bud
dormancy, and the onset of senescence) are related to a seasonal change in day length.
2. Photoperiodism is a physiological response prompted by changes in the length of a
day or night in a 24-hour daily cycle..
H. Phytochrome
1. Phytochrome is a blue-green leaf pigment that is present in the cytoplasm of plant
cells.
2. Pr (phytochrome red) absorbs red light (wavelength of 660 nm); it is converted to Pfr.
3. Pfr is phytochrome far-red and absorbs far-red light (wavelength of 730 nm); it is
converted to Pr.
4. During a 24-hour period, there is a shift in ratio of these two pigments.
a. Direct sunlight contains more red than far-red light; Pfr is present in plant leaves
during the day.
b. Shade and sunsets have more far-red than red light; Pfr is converted to Pr as night
approaches.
c. There is a slow metabolic replacement of Pfr by Pr during night.
I. Functions of Phytochrome
1. The Pr
fr conversion cycle controls other growth functions in plants.
2. In addition to being involved in flowering, Pfr promotes seed germination and inhibits
stem elongation.
3. Following germination, the presence of Pr dominates; the stem elongates and grows
187
toward sunlight while the leaves remain small.
4. Once a plant is exposed to sunlight and Pr is converted to Pfr, the plant begins to grow
normally—leaves expand and the stem branches.
5. Flowering plants can be divided into three groups, based their flowering status:
a. Short-day Plants
1)
These plants flower when day length is shorter than a critical length.
2)
Examples include cocklebur, poinsettia, and chrysanthemum.
3)
In effect, they require a period of darkness that is longer than a critical
length to flower.
b. Long-day Plants
1)
These plants flower when the day length is longer than a critical length.
2)
Examples include wheat, barley, clover, and spinach.
3)
In effect, they require a period of darkness that is shorter than a critical
length to flower.
c. Day-neutral Plants
1)
These are plants for which flowering is not dependent on day length.
2)
Examples include tomato and cucumber.
6.
A long-day and a short-day plant can have the same critical length.
a. These plants differ in specific sequence of day lengths as a season progresses.
b. Spinach is a long-day plant that flowers in summer when day length increases to
14 hours.
c. Ragweed is a short-day plant that flowers in fall when day length shortens to 14
hours or less.
7. Scientists experimented with artificial lengths of dark and light periods.
a. Cocklebur, a short-day plant, flowers as long as the dark period lasts over 8.5
hours.
b. If the dark period is interrupted by a flash, it does not flower; but darkness amidst
a day cycle has no effect.
c. Long-day plants require a dark period shorter than a critical length regardless of
the length of the light period.
d. Therefore, length of the dark period controls flowering, not length of the light
period.
J. Flowering Plants Respond to the Biotic Environment
1.
Plant have many defence mechanisms to protect themselves from herbivore and
parasite attacks.
2.
Plants have physical defenses such as cuticle-covered epidermis and bark.
3. Despite the physical defenses, herbivores can still attack the plant, so plants need
several other types of defences.
4. Plants produce secondary metabolites are defence mechanisms.
a.
Tannins, in or on the leaf epidermis, are defensive compounds that
interfere with the outer proteins of bacteria and fungi.
b.
Tannins also deter predators because of the astringent effect on the mouth
and interference with digestion.
c.
Alkaloids (e.g. morphine, nicotine, caffeine) are also secondary
metabolites.
1) Coffee plant seedlings have a high concentration of caffeine, which can
188
5.
6.
7.
8.
kill insects and fungi by blocking DNA and RNA synthesis.
d. Cyanogenic glycosides break down to cyanide and inhibit cellular respiration.
1) Foxglove (Digitalis purpurea) produces deadly cardiac and steroid
glycosides, which cause nausea, hallucinations, and death in animals that
ingest them.
Plants also respond when they have been wounded or attacked.
a.
After a leaf has been chewed or injured, the plant produces proteinase
inhibitors, systemin, which is a chemical that destroy the digestive enzymes of a
predator feeding on them.
Sometimes plants produce a specific gene product that binds to either a viral,
bacterial, or fungal gene product made within the cell, so the plant can “recognize” a
particular pathogen.
a. Following gene production, a transduction pathway ensues, and the final
result is a hypersensitive response (HR) that seals off the infected area and will
also initiate a wound response.
Some plant defence mechanisms are indirect defence mechanisms.
a.
Since female butterflies are less likely to lay their eggs on plants that
already have butterfly eggs, the leaves of some passion flowers (genus Passiflora)
display physical structures resembling the eggs, so the butterflies do not lay eggs
on those plants.
b.
Lima beans produce volatiles that attrat carnivore mites only when they
are being damaged by a spider mite.
c.
Corn and cotton plants release volatiles that attract wasps, which then
inject their eggs into caterpillars eating their leaves.
Some plants have mutualistic relationships with other animals to protect them
from herbivores.
a.
A species of acacia, Pseudomyrmex ferruginea, has swollen thorns with a
hollow interior and ants will live and feed (without harming) off the acacia. In
turn, the ants protect the plant by attacking and stinging herbivores
189
Chapter 27
27.1 Sexual Reproductive Strategies
A. Life Cycle Overview
1. In contrast to animals with only one multicellular stage in their life cycle, all plants
have two: a diploid and a haploid generation.
2. In flowering plants, the diploid sporophyte is dominant, and is the generation that
bears flowers.
3. A flower, the reproductive structure of an angiosperm, produces two types of spores,
microspores and megaspores.
a. A microspore is a plant spore that develops into a male gametophyte, which is a
pollen grain.
b. A megaspore is a plant spore that develops into a female gametophyte, the
embryo sac which remains within a sporophyte plant.
4. At maturity, a pollen grain (which is either windblown or carried by an animal to the
vacinity of the female gametophyte) travels via a pollen tube to the embryo sac and
fertilizes the egg.
5. The zygote becomes an embryo, which develops into a seed.
6. A seed contains the embryo and stored food surrounded by a seed coat.
7. The ovary becomes a fruit.
8. The sporophyte is the generation that contains vascular tissue and has other
adaptations suitable to living on land, including production of flowers.
B. Flowers
1. Flowers are unique to angiosperms; aside from producing the spores and protecting
gametophytes, flowers attract pollinators and produce fruits to enclose the seeds.
2. The shoot apical meristem stops forming leaves to form flowers; axillary buds can
become flowers directly.
3. Monocot flower parts are in threes or their multiples; eudicot flower parts are in fours
or fives or their multiples.
4. Sepals are leaflike, usually green; this outermost whorl protects the bud as a flower
develops within. Collectively, sepals are called the calyx.
5. Petals are interior to sepals; coloration accounts for attractiveness of many flowers.
Collectively, the petals are called the corolla.
a. The size, shape, and color of a flower are attractive to a specific pollinator.
b. Wind-pollinated flowers often have no petals at all.
6. Grouped about a pistil are stamens, stalked structures that have two parts.
a. The anther is a saclike container within which pollen grains develop.
b. A filament is a slender stalk that supports the anther.
7. The carpel is the vaselike structure located at the center of a flower; carpels usually
have three parts.
a. The stigma is an enlarged sticky knob on the end of a style; stigma serves to
receive pollen grains.
b. The style is a slender stalk that connects stigma with the ovary.
c. The ovary is an enlarged base of a carpel that contains a number of ovules.
8. Not all flowers have sepals, petals, stamens, and a pistil.
a. Complete flowers have sepals, petals, stamens, and a pistil; incomplete flowers do
not.
190
b. Perfect (bisexual) flowers have both stamens and a pistil.
c. Imperfect (unisexual) flowers have only stamens or carpels.
d. Carpellate flowers have only carpels.
9. If staminate and carpellate flowers are on the same plant, the plant is monoecious.
10. If staminate and carpellate flowers are on different plants, the plant is dioecious.
C. Life Cycle in Detail
1. In all land plants, the sporophyte produces haploid spores by meiosis; in animals,
meiosis produces gametes.
2. Flowering plants are heterosporous, producing microspores and megaspores that
become sperm-bearing pollen grains and egg-bearing embryo sacs, respectively.
3. Development of Male Gametophyte
a. Microspores are produced in the anthers of flowers.
b. An anther has four pollen sacs; each contains many microsporocytes (microspore
mother cells).
c. Microsporocytes undergo meiotic cell division to produce four haploid
microspores.
d. The haploid nucleus then divides mitotically forming two cells enclosed in a
finely sculptured wall; this is a pollen grain, which is at first an immature male
gametophyte, containing a tube cell and a generative cell.
e. The larger tube cell will eventually form the pollen tube.
f. Eventually each generative cell will divide mitotically to form two sperm.
g. Once both events have occurred, the pollen grain is the mature male gametophyte.
4. Development of Female Gametophyte
a. The ovary contains one or more ovules.
b. An ovule is covered by parenchymal cells except for one small opening, the
micropyle.
c. One parenchyma cell enlarges to become a megasporocyte that undergoes meiotic
cell division to produce four haploid megaspores.
d. Three megaspores are nonfunctional; one megaspore nucleus divides mitotically
into eight nuclei in a female gametophyte.
e. When cell walls form around the nuclei later, there are seven cells, one of which
is binucleate.
f. The female gametophyte (or embryo sac) consists of seven cells:
1) one egg cell,
2) two synergid cells,
3) one central cell with two polar nuclei, and
4) three antipodal cells.
5. Development of New Sporophyte
a. Walls separating the pollen sacs in the anther break down when the pollen grains
are to be released.
b. Pollination is the transfer of pollen from an anther to the stigma of a carpel.
c. Self-pollination is transfer of pollen from anther to stigma of the same plant.
d. Cross pollination is transfer of pollen from anther of one plant to stigma of
another plant; plants often have mechanisms that promote cross pollination such
as the carpel only maturing after anthers have released their pollen.
e. When a pollen grain lands on a stigma, it germinates, forming a pollen tube.
191
f.
A germinated pollen grain, containing a tube cell and two sperm, is the mature
male gametophyte.
g. As a pollen tube grows, it passes between the cells of the stigma and the style to
reach the micropyle of an ovule.
h. Double fertilization occurs after the release of both sperm cells into the ovule.
i. One sperm nucleus unites with the egg nucleus, forming a 2n zygote.
j. The other sperm nucleus migrates and unites with the polar nuclei of the central
cell, forming a 3n endosperm cell.
k. The zygote divides mitotically to become the embryo; the endosperm nucleus
divides mitotically to become the endosperm.
l. The endosperm is tissue that will nourish the embryo and seedling as they
undergo development.
m. A mature seed contains:
1) the embryo
2) stored food
3) the seed coat
n. Some species rely on wind pollination (grasses, grains).
o. Much of the plant’s energy goes into making pollen to ensure that some pollen
grains actually
reach a stigma.
p. The use of animal pollinators is unique to flowering plants and it helps account
for why these plants are so successful on land.
q. Coevolution means that as one species changes, the other changes too, so that in
the end, the two species are suited to one another.
6. Plants and Their Pollinators (Science Focus box)
a. Plants and their pollinators have a mutualistic relationship in which each benefits.
1)
Plants use pollinators to ensure that cross-pollination takes place.
2)
The pollinator uses the plant as a source of food.
b. This relationship came about through coevolution – codependency of the plant
and the pollinator is the result of suitable changes in the structure and function of
each.
c. Bee-Pollinated Flowers
1)
Bees do not see red wavelengths but do see ultraviolet wavelengths.
2) Bee-pollinated flowers are usually brightly colored and predominatly blue or
yellow. They may also have ultraviolet shadings called nector guides.
3) In addition, the bees’ mouthparts are adapted to sucking the plant’s nectar.
4) When bees travel to one flower, the pollen attaches to their body and when the
travel to the next flower, and deposits the pollen participating in cross
pollination.
5) Bee pollinated flowers are also sturdy, often with a landing pad, able to
support the weight of the bee.
d. Moth- and Butterfly-Pollinated Flowers
1)
Moths feed a night and have a well-developed sense of smell.
2) Moth pollinated flowers are usually light colored and have a strong, sweet
perfume to attract the moths.
3) Moth pollinated flowers have deep tubes with open margins to allow the
192
moths to reach the nectar with their long proboscis.
4) In contrast, butterflies feed during the day, have good vision, but weak sense
of smell.
5) Butterfly pollinated flowers have bright colors and are odorless.
e. Bird- and Bat-Pollinated Flowers
1)
Hummingbirds have good eyesight but have a weak sense of smell, and
hover when they feed.
2) Hummingbird pollinated flowers are red, with a slender floral tube and
margins that are curved back and out of the way, and have little odor.
3) Bats are nocturnal and have an acute sense of smell.
4) Bat pollinated flowers open only at night and are light-colored or white. They
also have a similar odor as bats produce to attract each other.
f. Coevolution
1) The use of animal motility to achieve cross-fertilization resulted in the
evolution of flowers, which have features to attract pollinators.
2) As cross-fertilization continued, more and more flower variations likely
developed, and pollinators became increasingly adapted to specific
angiosperm species.
3) The success of angiosperms has probably contributed to the success of
insects, and visa versa.
27.2 Seed Development
1. Development of the seed is the next event in the life cycle of the angiosperm.
2. Plant growth and development involves cell division, cell elongation, and
differentiation of cells into tissues and then organs.
A. Stages of Eudicot Development
1. Immediately after double fertilization, the endosperm nucleus divides to produce a
mass of endosperm surrounding the embryo.
2. The single-celled zygote also divides, but asymmetrically, forming two parts: embryo
and suspensor, which anchors the embryo and transfers nutrients to it from the
sporophyte plant.
3. Globular Stage
a. During this stage, the proembryo is a ball of cells.
b. The root-shoot axis is established; cells near the suspensor will become a root,
those at the opposite end will become a shoot.
c. The outermost cells become dermal tissue; by dividing with the cell plate
perpendicular to the surface, they produce one outer cell layer.
d. Dermal tissue prevents dessication and also has stomata that regulate gas
exchange.
4. The Heart Stage and Torpedo Stage Embryos
a. The embryo has a heart-shape when the cotyledons appear; it then grows to a
torpedo shape.
b. With elongation, the root and shoot apical meristems are distinguishable.
c. Ground meristem responsible for most of the interior of the embryo is also present
now.
5. The Mature Embryo
a. After differentiation into embryo and suspensor, one or two cotyledons develop.
193
b. The embryo continues to differentiate into three parts.
c. The epicotyl is between the cotyledons and first leaves; it contributes to shoot
development.
d. The hypocotyl is below the cotyledon and contributes to stem development.
e. The radicle is below the hypocotyl and contributes to root development.
f. The cotyledons are quite noticeable in a eudicot embryo, and may fold over.
B. Monocots Versus Eudicot Seeds
1. Monocots have only one cotyledon.
a.
In monocots, the cotyledon rarely stores food.
b.
It absorbs food molecules from the endosperm and passes them to the
embryo.
2. Eudicots have two cotyledons
a.
During development of a eudicot embryo, cotyledons usually store the
nutrients the embryo uses.
b. The endosperm seemingly disappears as the nutrients are consumed.
27.3 Fruit Types and Seed Dispersal
1. A fruit is a mature ovary that encloses seeds; sometimes they retain other flower
parts.
2. Fruits serve to protect and disperse offspring.
3. The fruit protects the peach seed well but makes germination difficult; the peas
escape easily but are lightly protected.
A. Kinds of Fruits
1. Fruits can be simple or compound.
a. Simple fruit develops from a single carpel or several fused carpels of a compound
ovary.
b. A compound fruit develops from several individual ovaries.
c. An aggregate fruit develops from ovaries from a single flower (e.g., blackberry).
d.
A multiple fruit develops from ovaries from separate flowers fused
together (e.g., pineapple).
2. As fruit develops, the ovary wall thickens to become the pericarp, which can have as
many las three layers:
a. The exocarp forms the outermost skin of a fruit.
b. The mesocarop is often the fleshy tissue between the exocarp and endocarp of the
fruit.
c. The endocarp serves as the boundary between the seed(s). It may be hard (peach
pits), or papery (apples).
3. Legumes and cereal grains are examples of dry fruits; such fruits are mistaken for
seeds because a dry pericarp adheres to the seed within.
a. Legumes are dehiscent because they split open when ripe.
b. Grains are indehiscents because they do not split open when ripe.
B. Dispersal of Fruits
1. Many dry fruits are wind dispersed.
a. Woolly hairs, plumes, and wings are adaptations for wind dispersal.
2. Other fruits are animal dispersed.
a. Hooks and spines of clover, bur, and cocklebur attach to the fur of animals.
b. Fleshy fruit attract animals and provide them with food, and defecate the seeds at
194
a distance.
c. Squirrels and other animals gather seeds and fruits and bury them some distance
away.
C. Seed Germination
1. Seed germination occurs when growth and metabolic activity resume.
2. Some seeds do not germinate until they have been dormant for a period of time.
a. Seed dormancy is a time during which no growth occurs even though conditions
are favorable.
b. In temperate zones, seeds may have to be exposed to cold weather before
dormancy is broken.
c. Fleshy fruits contain inhibitors so that germination does not occur while the fruit
is still on the plant.
d. For some seeds to take up water, bacterial action and even fire (e.g. Pinus
banksiana).
e. Once water enters, the seed coat bursts and the seed germinates.
3.
Prior to germination, a eudicot embryo consists of the following:
1) two cotyledons that supply nutrients to the embryo and seedling, but soon
shrivel and disappear;
2) a plumule—a rudimentary plant that consists of an epicotyl bearing young
leaves;
3) the hypocotyl, which becomes the stem; and
4)
the radicle, which develops into roots.
4.
In monocots, the endosperm is the food-storage tissue and the cotyledon does not
have a storage role.
a. A monocot “seed” such as a corn kernel is actually the fruit and the outer
covering is the pericarp.
b. The plumule and radicle are enclosed in protective sheaths, the coleoptile and the
coleorhiza, respectively.
c. The plumule and radicle burst through these coverings when germination occurs.
27.4 Asexual Reproduction Strategies
1. In asexual reproduction, offspring arise from a single parent and inherit genes of that
parent only.
a. Asexual reproduction is often advantageous when the parent is already adapted to
a particular environment and the production of genetic variations is not a necessity.
2. Types of asexual reproduction include:
a. Plant reproduction via stolons – aboveground horizontal stems.
1)
The asexual offspring grows from the stolons off of the parent plant.
2)
The characteristics of the offspring is identical to those of the parent plant.
b. Plant reproduction via rhizomes – underground stems.
1) Irises have no aboveground stem because their main stem is a rhizome that
grows horizontally underground.
2)
New plants grow at the nodes of a rhizome.
3)
Each eye of a potato plant tuber is a bud that produces a new plant.
c.
Many trees can be started from small “suckers.”
1) Stem cuttings have long been used to propagate a wide array of plants (e.g.,
sugarcane, pineapple).
195
2) In these plants, a cut stem will automatically produce roots.
3) The discovery that auxin will cause roots to develop has expanded our ability
to use stem cuttings.
A. Tissue Culture of Plants
1. Tissue culture is the process of growing tissue artificially in a liquid or solid culture
medium.
2. Many plant cells are totipotent; each cell has full genetic potential of the organism.
3. Three methods of cloning plants due to the ability of plants to grow from single cells
are:
a. Somatic embryogenesis
1) In this method, hormones are added to the medium and they cause leaf or
other tissue cells to generate small masses of cells, which can be genetically
engineer before being allowed to become many new identical plants.
2) Tomato, rice, celery, asparagus, lilies, begonias, and African violets have been
produced using somatic embryogenesis.
3) Not all plants are genetically identical clones because mutations, called
somaclonal variations, can airse spontaneously during the production process.
b. Meristem tissue culture
1) Meristem culture micropropagates many new shoots from a single shoot apex
culture in a medium with correct proportions of hormones.
2) When the shoots are removed, more shoots form.
3) Meristem culture generates meristem that is virus-free; the plants produced are
also virus-free.
c. Anther tissue culture.
1)
Haploid cells within pollen grains are cultured in order to produce haploid
plantlets.
2)
A diploid (2n) plantlet can be produced if chemical agents are added to the
culture.
3) Similarly to meristem tissue cultures, the offspring are genetically identical to
the parent plant.
4. Cell suspension culture allows scientists to extract chemicals from plant cells in high
concentrations without having to overcollect wild-type plants growing in their natural
environment.
a. Single cells or small clumps form a suspension of cells; all produce the same
chemicals as the entire plant.
196
Chapter 28
28.1 Evolution of Animals
1. Members of the kingdom Animalia are multicellular heterotrophs that ingest their
food.
2. Animals have the diploid life cycle, and usually reproduce sexually.
3. Muscle and nerve tissues characterize animals.
a. The evolution of these tissues enabled many types of animals search actively for
their food and prey on other organisms.
4. Animals are monophyletic – meaning both invertebrates and vertebrates can trace
their ancestry to the same ancestor.
5. Adult vertebrates have a spinal cord (or backbone), while invertebrates do not have
a backbone.
A. Ancestry of Animals
1. The colonial flagellate hypothesis states that animals are descended from an ancestor
that resembled a hollow spherical colony of flagellated cells.
2. The colonial flagellate hypothesis implies that radial symmetry preceded bilateral
symmetry in the history of animals.
a. In a radially symmetrical animal, any longitudinal cut produces two identical
halves.
b. In a bilaterally symmetrical animal, only one longitudinal cut yields two identical
halves.
3. The choanoflagellates (collared flagellates) most likely resemble the last unicellular
ancestor of living animals, and molecular data illustrates that they are the closest
living relatives of animals.
4. A choanoflagellate is a single cell, 3-10 μm in diameter, with a flagellum surrounded
by a collar of 30-40 microvilli.
5. As the water moves through the microvilli, they engulf bacteria and debris from the
water.
B. Evolution of Body Plans
1. As an animal develops, there are many possibilities regarding the number, position,
size, and patterns of its body parts.
2. Slight shifts in genes called Hox (homeotic) genes are responsible for the major
differences between animals that airse during development.
a. Maybe the changes in the expression of Hox developmental genes explans why all
the animals groups of today had representations of the Cambrian seas
C. The Phylogenetic Tree of Animals
1. The phylogenetic tree of animals is based on molecular and morphological data.
2. It is assumed that the more closely related two organisms, the more rRNA nucleotide
sequences they will have in common.
3. Molecular data have resulted in a phylogenetic tree that is quite different from the one
based only on morphological characteristics.
D. Morphological Data
1. Types of Symmetry
a. Asymmetry means there is no particular body shape (e.g., sponge).
b. Radial symmetry describes body parts arranged around an axis, like spokes of a
wheel (e.g., starfish).
197
1) Radially symmetrical animals may be sessile (i.e., attached to a substrate or
less motile).
2) This symmetry enables an animal to reach out in all directions from one
center.
c. Bilateral symmetry describes a body having a right and left, or complementary
halves.
1) Only one longitudinal cut down the center produces mirror halves.
2) Bilaterally symmetrical animals tend to be active and to move forward at an
anterior end.
3) The development of a head to localize the brain and sensory organs at the
anterior end is called cephalization.
2. Embryonic Development
a. The first three tissue layers are called germ layers because they give rise to the
organs and organ systems of complex animals.
b. Animals (e.g. cnidarians) that have two tissues layers (ectoderm and endoderm) as
embryos are diploblastic with the tissue level of organization.
c. Animals that develop further and have all three tissue layers (ectoderm,
mesoderm, and endoderm) as embryos are triploblastic and have the organ level
of organization.
1)
Animals that have three tissue layers are either protostomes or
deuterostomes.
d. Protostomes exhibit the following events during embryological development.
1)
Spiral cleavage, in which the cells divide without an increase in
size.
2)
The fate of the cells is fixed – each contributes to development in
only one particular way.
3) The blastopore is associated with the mouth.
4) A coelom forms by splitting of the mesoderm, which has arisen from cells
near the blastopore.
e. Deuterostomes exhibit the following events during embryological development.
1) Radial cleavage, where the new daughter cells sit atop the previous cells; the
fate of these cells is indeterminate.
2) The blastopore is associated with the anus; the mouth appears later.
3) A coelom forms by the fusion of mesodermal pouches from the primitive gut.
f.
Protostomes are divided into two groups:
1)
Ecdysozoans include roundworms and arthropods.
a.
Both of these animals molt; they shed their outer covering
as they grow.
2)
Lophotrochozoa contains two groups
a.
Lophophores have the same type of feeding apparatus.
b.
Trochophores either have presently or their ancestors had
a trochophore larva.
28.2 Introducing the Invertebrates
A. Sponges (phylum Porifera)
1. Sponges have no symmetry and no tissues and remain at a cellular level of evolution.
2. Their saclike bodies are perforated by many pores.
198
3. Sponges are aquatic, largely marine animals, that vary greatly in size, shape, and
color.
4. They have a canal system that allows water to move through their bodies.
5. Beating collar cells produce currents through pores in the wall into a central cavity
and out through osculum.
6. Simple sponges 10 cm tall can filter as much as 100 liters of water a day.
7. Sponges are sessile filter feeders; they stay in one place and filter food from the
water.
a. Collar cells engulf and digest food particles in food vacuoles.
8. Sponge skeleton prevents the body from collapsing.
a. All sponges have fibers of spongin, a modified form of collagen, which gives a
sponge its flexibility.
b. The endoskeleton of sponges also contain spicules, which are tiny needle-shaped
structures with one to six rays, depending on chemical structure.
c. Sponges have few predators, due to spicules, and the production of foul smelling
and toxic substances that discourage predators.
9. Sponges reproduce asexually by budding, which can produce quite large colonies.
10. Fragmentation occurs when sponges are chopped up; each piece can start a complete
sponge.
11. Sponges reproduce sexually when eggs and sperm are released into a central cavity;
the zygote develops into a ciliated larva.
B. Comb Jellies and Cnidarians
1. Comb jellies (phylum Ctenophora) represent the largest animals propelled by beating
cilia and range in size from a few centimeters to 1.5 m in length.
a. Most of their body is a jellylike packing material called mesoglea.
b. Long tentacles covered with sticky filaments—or an entire body covered by
sticky mucus—captures prey.
2. Cnidarians (phylum Cnidaria) are tubular or bell-shaped.
a. They mostly live in coastal waters but there are oceanic, freshwater, and brackish
forms.
b. Cnidaria have cnidocytes, a specialized cell that contains a nematocyst.
1)
The nematocyst is a fluid-filled capsule, which contains a long, spirally
coiled hollow thread.
2)
When the trigger of the cnidocyte is touched, the nematocyst is
discharged.
3) Some threads merely trap prey or predators; others have spines that penetrate
and inject paralyzing toxins.
c. A cnidarian body is a two-layered sac with the epidermis derived from ectoderm.
d. The inner tissue layer derived from the endoderm secretes digestive juices into the
gastrovascular cavity.
e. The gastrovascular cavity digests food, circulates nutrients, and aserves as a
supportive hydroskatic skeleton.
f. Cnidaria have two basic body plans.
1)
A polyp is vase-shaped and the mouth is directed upward.
2)
A medusa is bell-shaped and the mouth is directed downward.
3) A medusa has more mesoglea than a polyp; tentacles are concentrated on the
199
margin of the bell.
4)
Both body forms may have been a part of life cycle of early cnidaria.
5) When both stages are present, the animal is dimorphic and the polyp stage is
sessile and produces the medusae.
6)
The medusa stage is motile and produces the egg and sperm, dispersing
the species.
3. Cnidarian Diversity
a. Sea anemones are solitary polyps 0.5–20 cm in length and 0.5–10 cm in diameter
or larger.
1) Their upward turned oral disk that contains the mouth is surrounded by a large
number of hollow tentacles containing nematocytes.
b. Corals resemble sea anemones encased in a calcium carbonate house.
1)
Some may be solitary; most are colonial.
2) Corals are responsible for building coral reefs by the slow accumulation of
limestone resulting in massive reefs.
c. The hydrozoans have a dominant polyp.
1)
Two examples of hydrozoans are Hydra and Portuguese man-of-war.
2) The Portuguese man-of-war is a colony of polyps; the original polyp becomes
a gas-filled float.
3)
Other polyps bud to specialize for feeding or reproduction.
4) It can cause serious injury to swimmers with a tentacle having numerous
nematocysts; each tentacle arises from the base of each feeding polyp.
d. In the true jellyfishes (e.g., Aurelia) the the medusa stage is dominant in jellyfish;
the polyp remains small.
1)
Jellyfishes are an important part of the zooplankton, the food for larger
marine animals.
e. Hydra are solitary, freshwater hydrozoan polyps.
1)
The hydra body is a small tube about one-quarter inch in length.
2)
Four to six tentacles containing nematocysts surround the mouth, the only
opening at one end.
3)
In the epidermis are nematocyst-containing cnidocytes and sensory cells
that make contact
with the nerve cells within a nerve net, which allow
transmission of impulses in several directions at once
4)
Hydra reproduces asexually by budding.
5) They can also reproduce sexually: sperm from a testis swim to an egg within
an ovary; after early development within an ovary, a protective shell allows
the egg to survive until conditions are optimum for it to emerge.
6)
Hydras can grow an entire organisms from a small piece (like sponges).
28.3 Variety Among the Lophotrochozoans
1. Lophotrochozoans are bilaterally symmetrical at least in some stage of development.
2. As embryos, they have three germ layers; as adults they have the organ level of
organization.
3. The two groups of lophotrochozoans are:
a. The lophophores
1)
Examples include bryozoans and brachiopods
2)
They are not closely related but share a similar feeding apparatus called
200
the lophophore.
b. The trochophores
1)
Examples include flatworms, rotifers, molluscs, annelids
2)
They either have a trochophore larva today, or their ancestor had
trochophore larva.
A. Flatworms
1. Flatworms (phylum Platyhelminthes) are trochozoans.
2. Flatworms have a sac body plan and thus an incomplete digestive tract.
3. When an animal has two openings, they have a complete digestive tract.
4. Flatworms have no body cavity.
5. In addition to endoderm and ectoderm, a mesoderm layer fills the space between
their organs.
B. Free-living Flatworms
1. The planaria Dugesia lives in lakes, ponds, and streams and feed on small living or
dead organisms.
2. Digestion
a. Planaria capture food by wrapping itself around prey, entangling it in slime, and
pinning it down.
b. The pharynx is a muscular tube that extends through the mouth and through
which food is ingested.
c. In a three-branched gastrovascular cavity, digestion is both extracellular and
intracellular.
d. Digestive system delivers nutrients and oxygen to the cells and there is not
circulatory or respiratory system.
e. Waste exits through the mouth.
3. Excretion
a. The flame-cell system consists of a series of interconnecting canals that run the
length of the body on either side of the longitudinal axis and side branches of the
canals.
b. A flame cell is a bulb-shaped cell containing a tuft of cilia inside the hollow
interior of the bulb; cilia move back and forth, bringing water into canals that
empty through pores at the surface.
c. It functions in both water excretion and osmotic regulation.
4. Planaria can reproduce both sexually and asexually.
a. They constrict beneath the pharynx; each half will grow into a whole animal—
regeneration.
b. Planaria are hermaphroditic, possessing both male and female sex organs.
c. Planaria cross-fertilize each other.
d. Fertilized eggs are enclosed in a cocoon and hatch in two to three weeks into tiny
worms.
5.
Nervous system
a.
Planarias have a ladder-type nervous system.
b.
Paired ganglia function as a brain in the head region.
c.
The head is bluntly arrow-shaped; side extensions (auricles) are sensory
organs to detect food and enemies.
d. The two light-sensitive eyespots have pigmentation that makes them look
201
cross-eyed.
6. Three muscle layers—an outer circular, an inner longitudinal, and a diagonal—allow
for varied movement.
7. In larger forms, locomotion is accomplished by movement of cilia on ventral and
lateral surfaces.
8. Numerous gland cells secrete a mucous material upon which the animal moves.
C. Parasitic Flatworms
1. As parasites, flukes and tapeworms have characteristic modifications.
a. Loss of predation allows a lack of cephalization; the head carries hooks and
suckers to attach to a host.
b. There is extensive development of the reproductive system with loss of other
systems.
c. Well-developed nervous and gastrovascular systems are not needed; it does not
seek out or digest prey.
d. Flukes and tapeworms are covered by a tegument that protects them from host
digestive juices.
2. Two hosts
a. Flukes and tapeworms use a secondary (intermediate) host to travel from primary
host to primary host.
b. A primary host is infected with sexually mature adults; the secondary host
contains the larval stage(s).
3. Flukes
a. Blood, liver, and lung flukes inhabit those organs.
b. Fluke bodies are generally oval and elongate.
c. At the “head,” an oral sucker is surrounded by sensory papillae; another sucker
also helps attach.
d. Flukes have reduced digestive, nervous, and excretory systems.
e. The reproductive system is well developed and they are usually hermaphroditic.
f. The blood fluke causes schistosomiasis.
1) Schistosomiasis disease is found predominantly in the Middle East, Africa,
and Asia where about 200,000 infected persons die each year.
2) Blood flukes are male or female; the female fluke deposits eggs in blood
vessels around the intestines.
3) The eggs migrate to the intestine and are passed out with feces.
4) Tiny larvae hatch in water and swim until they detect and enter a particular
species of snail.
5) The larvae reproduce asexually inside the snail and eventually leave the snail.
6) If the larvae penetrate the skin of the human body, they begin to mature in the
liver and implant in the small intestine blood vessels.
7) A weakened person is more likely to die from secondary diseases.
g. The Chinese liver fluke (Clonorchis sinensis) requires two intermediate hosts (a
snail and a fish).
1) Humans become infected when they eat uncooked fish.
2) Adults live in the liver and deposit eggs in the bile duct, which carries eggs to
the intestine.
3) Larval flukes must then pass through two intermediate hosts, a snail and a
202
fish.
4.
Tapeworms
a. A tapeworm head or scolex contains hooks and suckers for attachment to the
intestinal wall of the host.
b. Behind this head is a short neck and then a long string of proglottids.
c. Each proglottid segment contains a full set of both male and female sex organs
and little else.
d. There are excretory canals but no digestive system and only rudiments of nerves.
e. After fertilization, proglottids become a bag of eggs; mature proglottids break off
and pass out with feces.
f. If eggs of tapeworms are ingested by pigs or cattle, larvae become encysted in the
muscle of hosts.
g. The covering of ingested eggs is digested away and larvae burrow through the
intestinal wall and travel by bloodstream to lodge and encyst in muscle.
h. A cyst is a hard-walled structure sheltering a larval worm.
i. If humans eat the meat of infected pigs or cattle and fail to cook the meat
properly, they too become infected.
D. Rotifers
About 2,000 species of rotifers belong to phylum Rotifera.
Rotifers are abundant in freshwater.
A crown of cilia (corona) causes a rotating motion; this organ of locomotion also directs
food to the mouth.
They can dessicate for lengthy periods of time and thus are called “resurrection
animacules.”
E. Molluscs
1. Molluscs (phylum Mollusca) live in marine, freshwater and terrestrial environments.
2. Phylum Mollusca includes chitons, limpets, slugs, snails, abalones, conchs,
nudibranchs, clams, scallops, squid, and octopuses.
3. Molluscs have a three-part body plan: a visceral mass, a mantle, and a foot.
4. The visceral mass contains internal organs: digestive tract, paired kidneys, and
reproductive organs.
5. A mantle covering partly surrounds the visceral mass; it may secrete a shell and help
develop the gills or lungs.
6. The foot is muscular and adapted for locomotion, attachment, food capture, or a
combination of functions.
7. The radula in the mouth bears many rows of teeth and is used for feeding; a radula is
not present in all molluscs.
8. In molluscs, the true coelom is reduced and limited to the region around the heart.
9. Nutrients and oxygen diffuse into the tissues from tehse sinuses instead of being
carried into the tissues by capillaries.
10. Most molluscs have an open circulatory system: a heart pumps hemolymph through
vessels into a hemocoel.
11. Blue hemocyanin, not red hemoglobin, is the respiratory pigment found in molluscs.
12. Some are slow moving with no head; others are active predators with a head and
sense organs.
13. The nervous system consists of several ganglia connected by nerve cords.
203
14. Chitons are in the class Polyplacophora.
a. Chiton shells consists of a row of eight overlapping plates.
b. The flat chiton foot is muscular and creeps along or clings to rocks.
c. They scrape algae and other plant food from rocks with a well-developed radula.
F. Bivalves
1. Class Bivalvia contains the bivalves (clams, oysters, mussels, scallops).
2. Bivalves are two-part shells that are hinged and closed by powerful muscles.
3. They have no head, no radula, and little cephalization.
4. Clams burrow with a hatchet-shaped foot; mussels use it to produce threads to attach
to objects.
5. Scallops both burrow and swim; rapid clapping of their valves releases water in
spurts.
6. The shell is secreted by the mantle.
a. The shell is composed of protein and calcium carbonate with an inner layer of
pearl.
b. The shell deposits around a foreign particle inserted between the mantle and the
shell to form a pearl.
7. A compressed muscular foot projects down from the shell; by expanding the tip, it
pulls in the body.
8. The beating cilia of the gills causes water to enter the mantle cavity by way of an
incurrent siphon and exit by way of an excurrent siphon.
9. The cilia of gills move water through the mantle cavity.
10. Gills capture particles and move them toward the mouth; the mouth leads to the
stomach, which leads to the intestine, which passes through a heart and ends at the
anus.
11. The circulatory system is open; the heart pumps hemolymph into vessels that open
into the hemocoel.
12. The nervous system consists of three pairs of ganglia that connect the front, back, and
foot.
13. Two excretory kidneys below the heart remove ammonia waste from the pericardial
cavity.
14. The sexes are separate; the gonad is located around coils of intestine.
15. Some clams and annelids have the same type of larva, indicating an evolutionary
relationship between molluscs and annelids.
G. Gastropods
1. Gastropods are the largest class of molluscs and includes snails, land slugs, whelks,
conchs, periwinkles, sea hares, and sea slugs.
2. Most are marine but some are freshwater or terrestrial.
3. They have an elongated, flattened foot and most have a one-piece coiled shell that
protects the visceral mass.
4. The anterior end of gastropods has a well-developed head region with a cerebral
ganglion and eyes on the end of tentacles.
5. Land snails are hermaphroditic.
a. In pre-mating behavior, they meet and shoot calcareous darts into each other’s
body wall.
b. Each inserts a penis into the other’s vagina; this provides sperm for future
204
fertilization of eggs.
c. Eggs are deposited in soil and development proceeds without the formation of a
larvae.
H. Cephalopods
1. Cephalopods includes squids, cuttlefish, octopuses, and nautiluses.
2. Squids and octopuses squeeze water out of the mantle cavity; the water forced out
through a funnel propels them by jet propulsion.
3. Around the head are tentacles with suckers or adhesive secretions adapted for
grasping prey.
4. A head equipped with a powerful beak can tear prey apart.
5. Well-developed sense organs include focusing camera-type eyes.
6. Cephalopods, particularly octopuses, have well-developed brains with a capacity for
learning.
I. Annelids
1. Annelids are the only trochozoan with segmentation and a well-developed coelom.
2. Segmentation is the repetition of body parts along the length of the body.
3. A well-developed, fluid-filled coelom and tough integument act as a hydrostatic
skeleton.
4. Using a hydrostatic skeleton, partitioning the coelom allows for independent
movement of the segments so it can not only burrow but crawl on the surface.
5. Setae are bristles that protrude from the body wall, can anchor the worm, and help it
move: oligochaetes have few setae, polychaetes have many setae.
6. The common earthworm, Lumbricus terrestris is an oligochaete.
a. Locomotion requires coordinated movement of body muscles and the help of
setae.
1)
As longitudinal muscles contract, segments bulge and setae protrude to
anchor into soil.
2) When circular muscles contract, a worm lengthens, setae are withdrawn and
the segment can be pulled forward.
b. Earthworms live in moist soil; a moist body wall allows for gas exchange.
c. Earthworms are scavengers that extract organic remains from soil they eat.
d. A muscular pharynx draws food into the mouth.
e. Food is stored in a crop and ground up in a thick, muscular gizzard.
f. The dorsal surface of the intestine is expanded into a typhlosole for more surface
area for digestion.
g. Each external segment corresponds to an internal septum; a wall that separates
each body segment.
h. A long ventral nerve cord leads from the brain to ganglionic swellings and lateral
nerves in each segment.
i. The ventral nerve cord leading from the brain has ganglionic swellings and lateral
nerves in each segment.
j. The coiled nephridia tubules in most segments have two openings: one is a
ciliated funnel that collects coelomic fluid, and the other is an exit through the
body wall.
k. Between the two openings, a coiled nephridia tubule removes waste from blood
vessels.
205
l.
The dorsal blood vessel moves red blood anteriorly; five pairs of hearts pump
blood to a ventral vessel.
m. The extensive closed circulatory system has blood vessels running the length of
the body and to every segment; muscular aortic arches (“hearts”) propel blood
through the vessels.
n. Earthworms are hermaphroditic; the male organs are the testes, sperm ducts, and
seminal vesicles; the female organs are the ovaries, oviducts, and seminal
receptacles.
o. Mating involves aligning parallel to each other facing opposite directions to
exchange sperm.
p. Each possesses a clitellum that secretes mucus that slides off, forming a slime
tube that protects the sperm and eggs from drying out.
q. The slime tube forms a cocoon around the fertilized eggs as they develop.
r. Embryonic development lacks a larval stage.
7. Approximately two-thirds of all annelids are marine polychaetes.
a. Polychaetes possess parapodia and setae.
1)
Parapodia are paddle-like appendages used in swimming and for
respiration.
2)
Setae are bristles, attached to parapodia, that help anchor polychaetes or
help them move.
b. Clam worms such as Nereis are active predators.
c. Many have well-developed cephalization; the head has well-developed jaws, eyes,
and other sense organs.
d. Other sedentary filter feeders possess tentacles with cilia to create water currents
and sort out food particles.
e. Only during breeding seasons do polychaetes have reproductive organs.
f. In Nereis, many worms coordinate the shedding of a portion of their bodies that
contain either eggs or sperm; these segments float to the surface where
fertilization takes place.
g. Marine worm zygotes develop larva similar to those of marine clams; again this
shows a relatedness between annelids and molluscs.
8. Leeches are annelids that mostly live in freshwater habitats.
a. They lack setae and each body ring has several transverse grooves.
b. Leeches possess a small anterior sucker around the mouth and a larger posterior
sucker.
c. Although some are free-living predators, most feed on body fluids.
d. Leeches keep blood from coagulating by hirudin, an anticoagulant in their saliva.
28.4 Quantity Among the Ecdysozoans
A. Roundworms
1. Roundworms (phylum Nematoda) are nonsegmented worms that are prevalent in
almost any environment.
2. The internal organs lie within a pseudocoelom – a body cavity that is incompletely
lined with mesoderm.
3. Parasitic roundworms
a. In Ascaris lumbricoides, males are smaller than females and their posterior end
curves to a point.
206
b. These worms move by whiplike motions because only longitudinal muscles lie
next to the body wall.
c. Mating produces eggs that mature in the soil; therefore, most are limited to
warmer climates.
d. When eggs are swallowed, larvae burrow through the intestinal wall to the liver,
heart and/or lungs.
e. In the lungs, the larvae molt; after 10 days they migrate up the windpipe to the
throat and are swallowed.
f. Back in the intestine, mature worms mate and the female deposits eggs that are
lost with feces.
g. Feces must reach the mouth of the next host to complete a life cycle; therefore
proper sanitation easily prevents infection.
4. Trichinosis is a serious infection caused by Trichinella spirallis.
a. Humans contract Trichinella spirallis by eating raw pork with encysted larvae.
b. After maturation, the adult female burrows into the wall of the small intestine and
produces living offspring that are carried by the bloodstream to skeletal muscles
where they encyst.
5. Filarial worms cause various diseases.
a. In the U.S., a filarial worm is a parasite of dogs.
b. It lives in the heart and the arteries that serve the lungs and thus is called
heartworm disease.
6. Elephantiasis occurs in tropical Africa.
a. It is caused by a filarial worm (Wuchereria bancroftji) that utilizes the mosquito
as a secondary host.
b. Adult worms reside in and block the lymphatic vessels; ultimately this results in
the limbs of an infected individual swelling to monstrous size.
c. It is treatable only in the early stages but not after scar tissue has blocked the
lymphatic vessels.
7. Pinworms are the most common nematode in the United States.
a. Adult parasites live in the cecum and large intestines.
b. Females migrate to anal region at night to lay their eggs.
c. Scratching infected area can contaminate area with eggs. The eggs are swallowed
and the life cycle begins again.
B. Arthropods
1. Arthropods (phylum Arthropoda) are considered highly successful because:
a. Arthropods have a rigid exoskeleton with freely movable jointed appendages.
1)
The exoskeleton is a strong but flexible outer covering composed mainly
of chitin.
2)
Chitin is a strong, flexible, nitrogenous polysaccharide.
3) The exoskeleton serves for protection, attachment for muscles, locomotion,
and prevention of desiccation.
4) Because the exoskeleton is hard and nonexpandable, arthropods must molt
(shed) the exoskeleton to grow larger.
a) Before molting, the body secretes a larger soft and wrinkled exoskeleton
underneath.
b) Enzymes partially dissolve and weaken the old exoskeleton.
207
c) The arthropod breaks the old exoskeleton open and wriggles out.
d) The new exoskeleton then quickly expands and hardens.
b. Segmentation can be observed because each segment has a pair of jointed
appendages; some segments of arthropods have fused into regions (e.g., a head, a
thorax, and an abdomen).
1)
Jointed appendages of arthropods are hollow tubes moved by muscle.
2)
The appendages are modified for food gathering, reproduction,
locomotion.
c. Arthropods have a well-developed nervous system.
1)
A brain is connected to a ventral solid nerve cord.
2)
The head bears various sensory organs.
3)
Compound eyes have many complete visual units; each collects light
independently.
4) The lens of each visual unit focuses the image on the light-sensitive
membranes of a few photoreceptors.
5) In simple eyes, a single lens brings the image to focus into many receptors,
each of which receives only a portion of the image.
6) Many arthropods have well-developed touch, smell, taste, balance, and
hearing, and display complex behaviors and methods of communication
d. Arthropods use a variety of respiratory organs.
a)
Marine forms use gills with vascularized, thin-walled tissue specialized for
gas exchange.
b)
Terrestrial forms have book lungs (e.g., spiders) or air tubes called
tracheae (e.g., insects).
e. Metamorphosis is a drastic change in form and physiology that occurs as a larva
becomes an adult.
a)
Metamorphosis contributes to the success of arthropods.
b)
A larva eats foods and lives in environments different from the adult.
c)
Competition between the immatures and adults of a species is reduced.
d)
This reduction in competition allows more members of the species to exist
at one time.
C. Crustaceans
1. Crustaceans have a hard, crusty exoskeleton, which contains calcium carbonate in
addition to chitin.
2. The head of crustaceans usually bears compound eyes and five pairs of appendages.
a. The first two appendages are antennae and antennules; in front of the mouth, they
have sensory functions.
b. The next three pairs (mandibles, first and second maxillae) lie behind the mouth
and are used in feeding.
3. Biramous appendages have two branches; one branch is a gill and the other is the leg
branch.
4. Copepods and krill feed on algae; numerous, they are an important link in marine
food chains.
5. Barnacles have a thick, heavy shell and are sessile.
a. Stalked barnacles attach by their stalk; stalkless barnacles attach directly to the
shell.
208
b. Barnacles begin as free-swimming larvae and become sessile on wharf pilings,
rocks, etc.
c. They extend feathery structures (cirri) to filter feed.
6. The head and thorax of a crayfish are fused into a cephalothorax, which is covered on
the top and sides by a nonsegmented carapace.
a. Abdominal segments have a pair of swimmerets, small paddlelike structures.
b. The first two pairs of swimmerets in the male (claspers) stronger to pass sperm to
the female.
c. The last tail segments are the uropod and the telson, which together make a
fan-shaped tail.
d. A crayfish awaits prey and uses its claws to carry it to the mouth.
e. Crayfish have gills that lie above the walking legs and are protected by the
carapace.
f. The crayfish stomach has two main regions.
1) The anterior gastric mill with chitinous teeth grinds food.
2) A posterior region filters coarse particles before absorption in the digestive
glands.
g. Green glands in the head area excrete metabolic wastes through a duct at the base
of the antennae.
h. The coelom is reduced in arthropods and forms the space about the reproductive
system.
i. The heart pumps hemolymph containing bluish hemocyanin into a hemocoel
where it washes around the organs.
k. A brain is connected to a ventral nerve cord; periodic ganglia give off lateral
nerves.
l. The sexes are separate in crayfish.
1) The male has a coiled sperm duct that opens to the outside at the base of its
fifth walking leg.
2) The female’s ovaries open at the base of the third walking legs.
3) The fold between the bases of the fourth and fifth pair of legs serves as a
seminal receptacle.
4) Following fertilization, the eggs are attached to the swimmerets of the female.
D.
Centipedes and Millipedes
1. There are about 3,000 species of centipedes (“hundred-leggers”).
a. The body is composed of a head and trunk with many segments; each segment has
one pair of legs.
b. Centipedes are carnivorous; the head bears antennae and mouthparts with poison
fangs.
2. The millipedes (“thousand-leggers”) have a cylindrical segmented body.
a. Some body segments are fused with two pair of legs on each resulting segment.
b. They possess more legs than centipedes, although not one thousand as the name
states.
c. Millipedes dwell in the soil, feeding on dead organic matter.
E. Insects
1. Most insects live on land; some are secondarily aquatic.
2. The insect body is divided into a head, thorax, and abdomen.
209
3. The head bears sense organs and mouthparts.
4. The thorax bears three pairs of legs and one or two pairs of wings; the wings provide
advantages in escaping enemies, finding food, and mating.
5. In grasshoppers, the third pair of legs is suited to jumping.
6. The front wings are protective and leathery; the thin hind pair of wings fold up.
7. Each side of the first abdominal segment has a tympanum for sound wave reception.
8. Two paired projections form an ovipositor in females used to dig a hole for laying
eggs.
9. The grasshopper digestive system is complex.
10. The mouth mechanically breaks apart food, and salivary secretions begin digestion.
11. The crop temporarily stores food.
12. A gizzard finely grinds the food.
13. Digestion is completed in the stomach; gastric ceca cavities assist absorption of
nutrients.
a. The excretory system consists of Malpighian tubules.
1) The tubules extend into the hemocoel.
2) Nitrogenous wastes are collected and excreted into the digestive system.
3) Formation of solid nitrogenous wastes (uric acid) conserves water.
b. The respiratory system begins with openings in the exoskeleton called spiracles.
1) Air enters into small tubules called tracheae.
2) The tracheae branch many times until they reach moist areas of gas
absorption.
3) Air movement through this tracheal system is assisted by air sacs.
4) Air enters the anterior four spiracles and exits by the posterior six.
5) Breathing by tracheae is a factor that limits the size of insects.
c. The circulatory system contains a slender, tubular heart.
1) This heart lies against the dorsal wall of the abdominal exoskeleton.
2) The heart pumps hemolymph into a hemocoel where it circulates before
returning to the heart.
3) Insect hemolymph is colorless—it lacks any respiratory pigment since the
tracheal system transports gases.
d. Grasshoppers undergo incomplete metamorphosis; the immature nymph
resembles the adult.
e. Other insects undergo complete metamorphosis; the wormlike larvae reorganize
into different adults.
f. Some species (e.g., bees and ants) exhibit colonial social behavior.
F. Chelicerates
1. Chelicerates in the subphylum Chelicerata include spiders, scorpions, and horseshoe
crabs.
2. The first pair of appendages are chelicerae, the second pair are pedipalps, and the next
four pairs are walking legs.
a. Chelicerae are appendages that function as feeding organs.
b. Pedipalps are feeding or sensory structures.
3. All of the appendages attach to a cephalothorax, a fusion of head and thoracic
regions.
4. The marine horseshoe crab (genus Limulus) is common along the east coast of North
210
America.
a. Their body is covered by exoskeletal shields.
b. The anterior shield is a horseshoe-shaped carapace with two compound eyes.
5. Arachnids include ticks, mites, scorpions, spiders, and harvestment.
a. Over 25,000 species of mites and ticks have been classified.
b. Ticks are ectoparasites of various vertebrates and are carriers for Rocky Mountain
spotted fever and Lyme Disease.
c. When not on a host, ticks hide on plants and in the soil
6. Scorpions
a. They are nocturnal and spend the day hidden under a log or rock.
b Pedipalps are large pincerlike appendages; the abdomen ends in a stinger
containing venom.
7. Spiders (over 35,000 species) have a narrow waist separating the cephalothorax from
the abdomen.
a. Spiders have numerous simple eyes rather than compound eyes.
b. Spider chelicera are modified as fangs with ducts leading from poison glands.
c. The abdomen has silk glands; they may spin a web to trap prey.
28.5 Deuterostomes
A. Echinoderms
1.
Echinoderms are primarily bottom-dwelling marine animals.
2. Echinoderms have 5-pointed radial symmetry as adults; as larvae, the are freeswimming filter feeders with bilateral symmetry.
3. They have an endoskeleton of spiny calcium-rich plates (ossicles).
4. Echinoderms have a water vascular system that consists of canals and appendages
that function in locomotion, feeding, gas exchange, and sensory reception.
5. Asteroidea contains sea stars.
6. Holothurians include sea cucumbers.
a. Sea cucumbers have long leathery bodies and resemble a cucumber.
7. Echinoidea includes the sea urchin and sand dollar.
a. Both these animals use their spines for locomotion, defense, and burrowing.
8. Ophiuroidea includes brittle stars.
a. They have a dentral disk surrounded by radially flexible arms.
9. Crinoidea is the oldest group of echinoderms and includes stalked feather stars and
motile feather stars.
B. Sea Stars
1. There are 1,600 species of sea stars.
2. They are found along rocky coasts, where they feed on clams, oysters, and other
bivalves.
3. Out of their body wall, they have:
a. spines from the endoskeletal plates that serve as protection.
b. pincerlike structures around the bases of spines to keep the surface free of small
particles.
c. Skin gills that are used for respiration.
d. Each arm has a groove lined by tube feet
4. Digestion
a. Sea stars pull mollusk shells open using their tube feet.
211
c.
Once open, the sea star inverts its cardiac stomach and pushes through the
crack and secretes enzymes.
d.
Digestion begins externally; digestion continues in the pyloric stomach
using enzymes from the digestive glands found in each arm.
e. The short insteine opens at the anus on the aboral side.
5. Each arm contains a well-developed coelom that has a pair of digestive glands and
gonads.
6. The nervous system is a central nerve ring that gives off radial nerves in each arm.
7. A light-sensitive eyespot is at the tip of each arm.
8. Locomotion consists of expansion and contraction of the tube feet.
9. Echinoderms do not have a respiratory, excretory, or circulatory system; the water
vascular system carries out these functions.
10. Sea stars reproduce asexually by fragmentation; each fragment can regenerate a
whole animal as long as a portion of the central disk is present.
11. Spawning is the sexual reproduction method in echinoderms.
212
Chapter 29
29.1 The Chordates
1. Chordates (phylum Chordata) are deuterostomes, and have an internal skeleton, with
mucles attached to the outer surface.
2. At some time during their life, all chordates have four basic characteristics.
a. Notochord
1) This supporting rod is located dorsally just below the nerve cord.
2) It provides support and is replaced by the vertebral column in vertebrates.
b. Dorsal Tubular Nerve Cord
1) This cord contains a fluid-filled canal.
2) In vertebrates, this is the spinal cord and it is protected by vertebrae.
c. Pharyngeal Pouches
1) These openings function in feeding, gas exchange, or both.
2) They are seen only during embryonic development in most vertebrates.
3) In invertebrate chordates, fish, and amphibian larvae, they become functioning
gills.
4) In terrestrial vertebrates, the pouches are modified for various purposes.
5) In humans, the first pair of pouches become the auditory tubes, the second
become tonsils, and the third and fourth pairs become the thymus and
parathyroid glands.
d. A postanal tail extends beyond the anus; in some, this only appear in embryos.
A. Nonvertebrate Chordates
1. Lancelets
a. Lancelets are in the group cephalochords.
b. Lancelets are named are named for their resemblance to a lancet - a two-edged
surgical knife.
c. They inhabit shallow coastal waters; they filter feed partly buried in sandy
substrates.
d. They feed on microscopic particles filtered from a constant stream of water that
enters the mouth and exits through gill slits into an atrium that opens at the
atriopore.
e. Lancelets retain the four chordate characteristics as adults.
f. The notochord extends from head to tail, accounting for their group name
cephalochordates.
g. They possess segmented muscles and the dorsal hollow nerve cord has periodic
branches.
2. Sea Squirts
a. Sea squirts belong in thr group urochordates.
b. Adults have a body composed of an outer tunic; an excurrent siphon squirts out
water when it is disturbed.
c. The larvae are bilaterally symmetrical and have the four chordate characteristics.
d. The larvae undergo metamorphosis to develop into sessile adults.
e. Water passes into a pharynx and out numerous gill slits, the only chordate
characteristic that remains in adults.
f. If the larvae became sexually mature without developing tunicate characteristics,
the urochordate larva may have been ancestral to vertebrates.
213
29.2 Vertebrates
1. As embryos, vertebrates have the four chordate characteristics.
2. Vertebrates also have these features:
a. Vertebral colum
1)
The embryonic notochord is replaced by a vertebral column.
2)
Remnants of the notochord are seen in the intervertebral disks.
3) The vertebral column is part of a flexible, strong endoskeleton that is also
evidence of segmentation.
b. Skull
1) A skull is an anterior component of the main axis of vertebrate endoskeleton;
it encases the brain.
2)
The high degree of cephalization in vertebrates is accompanied by
complex sense organs.
3)
The eyes developed as outgrowths of the brain.
4) The ears—equilibrium devices in water—function as sound-wave receivers in
land vertebrates.
c. Endoskeleton
1)
The endoskeleton and muscles together permit rapid and efficient
movement.
2) The pectoral and pelvic fins of fish evolved into jointed appendages allowing
vertebrates to move onto land.
d. Internal organs
1)
Vertebrates possess a complete digestive system and a large coelom.
2)
The circulatory system is closed and the blood is contained within blood
vessels.
3)
Gills or lungs provide efficient gas exchange.
4)
The kidneys efficiently excrete nitrogenous waste and regulate water.
5)
Reproduction is usually sexual with separate sexes.
A. Vertebrate Evolution
1. Chordates (including vertebrates) appeared at the start of the Cambrian period.
2. The earliest vertebrates were fishes; most of which have jaws.
3. Jawed fish and other vertebrates are gnathostomes – animals with jaws.
4. Fish also had a bony skeleton, lungs, and fleshy fins, which were preadaptive for a
land existence.
5. Amphibians are the first vertebrates to live on land and to have four limbs
(tetrapods).
6. Amphibians are not fully adapted to living on land because they still have to
reproduce in an aquatic environment.
7. Reptiles are fully adapted to living on land because they produce an amniotic egg.
8. Amniotes develop within an aquatic environment but of their own making.
9. In placental mammals, the fertilized egg develops inside the female, where it is
surrounded by an amniotic membrane.
10. Another feature for living on land includes watertight skin, and can be seen in reptiles
and mammals.
29.3 The Fishes
A. Jawless Fishes
214
1. Small, jawless, and finless ostracoderms are the earliest vertebrate fossils.
2. Today’s jawless fishes, or agnathans have a cartilaginous skeleton and persistent
notochord
3. They have smooth nonscaly skin.
4. They have cylindrical bodies and are up to a meter long.
5. Many lampreys are filter feeders similar to their ancestors.
6. Parasitic lampreys have a round muscular mouth equipped with teeth; they attach
themselves to fish and suck nutrients from the host’s circulatory system.
7. Marine parasitic lampreys entered the Great Lakes and devastated the trout
population in the 1950s.
B. Fishes with Jaws
1. Fishes with jaws have:
a. Ectothermy – they depend on the environment to regulate their body
temperature.
b. Gills are used for gas exchange.
1) Jawed fish have a single-looped, closed circulatory pathway with a heart that
pumps the blood first to the gills (for oxygen exchange) and then to the rest of
the body.
c. Cartilaginous or bony skeleton - the endoskeleton of jawed fishes include
vertebral column, skull with jaws, and paired pectoral or pelvic fins.
1) Jaws evolved from the first pair of gill arches of agnathans; the second pair of
arches became support structures for the jaws.
d. Scales cover and protect the fish skin.
2. Placoderms are extinct jawed fishes of the Devonian Period.
a. They were armored with heavy plates and had strong jaws.
b. Like extant fishes, they had paired pectoral and pelvic fins.
c. Paired fins allow a fish to balance and maneuver well in water; this helps
predation.
C. Cartilaginous Fishes
1. Sharks, rays, skates, and chimaeras are marine cartilaginous fishs (chondrichthyes).
2. They have a cartilaginous skeleton rather than bone.
3. Five to seven gill slits are on both sides of the pharynx; they lack the gill covers
found on bony fish.
4. They have many openings to the gill chamber located behind the eys called spiracles.
5. Their body is covered with dermal denticles.
6. The teeth of sharks are enlarged scales; there are many rows of replacement teeth
growing behind the front teeth.
7. They have three well developed senses to detect electric currents in water, pressure (a
lateral line system), and smell.
8. The largest sharks are filter feeders, not predators; the basking and whale sharks eat
tons of crustacea.
9. Most sharks are fast, open-sea predators; a great white shark eats dolphins, sea lions
and seals.
10. Rays and skates live on the ocean floor; their pectoral fins are enlarged into winglike
fins and they swim slowly.
11. Stingrays have a venomous spine.
215
12. Electric rays feed on fish that have been stunned with an electric shock that may
reach over 300 volts.
13. Sawfish rays have a large anterior “saw” that they use to slash through schools of
fish.
14. Chimaeras (ratfishes) live in cold marine waters and are known for their unusal shape
and iridescent colors.
D. Bony Fishes
1. There are about 25,000 species of bony fishes (osteichthyes).
2. Bony fishes have a skeleton of bone; most are ray-finned with thin, bony rays
supporting the fins.
3. The gills of bony fishes do not open separately but instead are covered by an
operculum.
4. The swim bladder is a gas-filled sac whose pressure can be altered to regulate
buoyancy and depth.
5. Bony fish have a single-loop, closed cardiovascular system.
6. They have a well-developed nervous system.
7.
Fish sperm and eggs are usually shed into water.
8. For most fish, the fertilization and embryonic development occur outside the female’s
body.
9. The lobe-finned fishes include six species of lungfishes and two species of
coelacanth.
a. Their fleshy fins are supported by central bones.
b. Lungfishes have lungs and gills for gas exchange.
c. Lungfishes and lobe-finned fishes are grouped together as sarcopterygii.
d. Lungfishes live in stagnant fresh water or in ponds that dry up annually; they are
found in Africa, South America, and Australia.
e. Coelacanths live in deep oceans; once considered extinct, more than 200 have
been captured since 1938.
29.4 The Amphibians
1. Today’s amphibians are tetrapods; they have four limbs.
a. The skeleton is well-developed for locomotion.
2. Amphibians have smooth and nonscaly skin.
a. The moist skin plays an active role in water balance, respiration, and temperature
regulation.
3. Amphibians usually have small lungs supplemented by gas exchange across porous
skin.
4. The single-loop circulatory path of fish is replaced by a closed double-loop
circulatory system; however oxygen-rich blood mixes with some oxygen-poor
blood.
a. A three-chambered heart with a single ventricle pumps mixed blood before and
after it has gone to the lungs.
5.
Amphibians have sense organs that are adapted to life on land.
a.
The brain is larger than that of fishes; their cerebral cortex is more
developed.
b.
A specialized tongue is used for catching prey.
c.
The eyelids keep their eyes moist.
216
d.
Amphibian ears are adapted for detecting sound waves; in turn, the larynx
produces sounds.
6. Amphibians are ectothermic, depending upon the environment to regulate body
temperature.
a. If winter temperature drops too low, temperate ectotherms become inactive and
enter torpor.
7. Amphibians return to the water to reproduce.
a.
They shed eggs into the water for external fertilization.
b.
Generally, amphibian eggs are protected by a coat of jelly but not
by a shell.
c.
The young hatch into aquatic larvae with gills (tadpoles).
d.
The aquatic larvae usually undergo metamorphosis to develop
into a terrestrial adult.
e. Some amphibians evolved mechanisms that allow them to bypass the aquatic
larval stage and produce on land.The lobe-finned fishes of Devonian are ancestral
to amphibians.
A. Evolution of Amphibians
1. Amphibians evolved from the lobe-finned fishes with lungs by way of transitional
forms.
2. Two hypotheses describe evolution of amphibians from lobe-finned fishes.
a. Lobe-finned fishes that could move from pond-to-pond had an advantage over
those that could not.
b. The supply of food on land and the absence of predators promoted adaptation to
land.
3. Paleontologists found a fossil, Tiktallik roseae, from the late Devonian period in
Arctic Canada that represents an intermediate between lobe-finned fishes and
tetrapods with limbs.
B. Diversity of Living Amphibians
1.
Modern amphibians include three groups: salamanders and newts, frogs and
toads, and caecilians.
2.
Salamanders and newts have a long body and tail, and two pairs of legs
3.
Their S-shaped locomotion is similar to fish movements.
4.
Salamanders and newts are carnivorous, feeding on insects, snails, etc.
5. Salamanders practice internal fertilization; the males produce a spermatophore that
females pick up with the cloaca (the common receptacle for the urinary, genital, and
digestive canals).
6. Frogs and toads are tailless as adults; the hind limbs are specialized for jumping.
7. Some skin glands secrete poisons; those tropical species often have brilliant warning
coloration.
8. Frogs and toads have the head and trunk fused; frogs live near or in fresh water while
toads live in damp places away from water.
9. Caecilians are legless; most burrow in soil and feed on worms, etc.
29.5
The Reptiles
1. Reptiles (class Reptilia) are a successful group of terrestrial animals.
2. Reptiles have many characteristics showing that they are fully adapted to living on
land.
217
a. Reptiles have paired limbs and are adapted for climbing, running, paddling, or
flying.
b.
Reptiles have a thick, scaly skin that is impermeable to water.
1)
Reptile’s protective skin prevents water loss but it also requires several
molts a year.
c. Reptile have efficient breathing - their lungs are more developed than in
amphibians; air rhythmically moves in and out of the lungs due to an expandable
rib cage.
d. Reptiles have efficient circulation - The heart prevents mixing of blood.
Oxygen-rich blood is more fully separated from oxygen-poor blood.
e. Reptiles are ectothermic.
1) They require a fraction of the food per body weight of birds and mammals.
2) They are behaviorally adapted to warm their body temperature by sunbathing.
f. Reptiles have well-adapted reproduction.
1)
The sexes are separate and fertilization is internal.
2)
The amniotic egg contains extraembryonic membranes.
3) Extraembryonic membranes are not a part of the embryo and are disposed of
after development.
4)
They protect the embryo, remove nitrogenous wastes, and provide oxygen,
food, and water.
5) The amnion is one extraembryonic membrane; it fills with fluid to provide a
“pond” for embryo to develop.
A. Evolution of Amniotes
1.
The amniotes consist of three lineages:
a.
The turtles, in which the skul has no openings behind the orbit –
eye socket.
b.
All the other repites, in which the skull has two openings behind
the orbit
c.
The mammals, in which the skull has one opening behind the orbit.
2.
The reptiles have no common ancestor; they are a paraphyletic group and
not a monophyletic group.
3.
Other reptiles are diapsids have a skull with two openings behind the eyes.
4. Thecodonts are diapsids that gave rise to the ichthyosaurs, which returned to the
aquatic environment, and the pterosaurs, which were terrestrial.
a.
The pterosaurs of the Jurassic period had a keel for attachment of
flight muscles and air spaces in bones to reduce weight.
b.
The thecodonts gave rise to the crocodiles and dinosaurs.
5. Dinosaurs varied in size and behavior; some had a bipedal stance and gave rise to
birds.
6. Dinosaurs dominated earth for about 170 million years; then most died out at the end
of the Cretaceous period.
7. One theory of mass extinction:
a. A large meteorite or comet at the end of the Cretaceous Period could have set off
earthquakes and fires, raising enough dust and smoke to block out the sun.
b. An iridium layer, a mineral common in meteorites, occurs in rocks at the end of
this period.
218
8. Diversity of Living Reptiles
a. Most reptiles today live in the tropics or subtropics; lizards and snakes live on
soil; turtles, crocodiles and alligators live in water.
b. Turtles have a heavy shell fused to the ribs and to the thoracic vertebrae.
1) Turtles lack teeth but use a sharp beak.
2)
Sea turtles must return to lay eggs onshore.
c. Lizards have four clawed legs and are carnivorous.
1) Marine iguanas on the Galapagos are adapted to spend long times in the sea.
2) Chameleons live in trees, have a long sticky tongue to catch insects, and
change color.
3) Geckos are nocturnal and have adhesive pads on their toes.
4) Skinks have reduced limbs and shiny scales.
d. Snakes evolved from lizards and lost legs as an adaptation to burrowing.
1) Their jaws can readily dislocate to engulf large food.
2) A tongue collects airborne molecules to transfer them to Jacobson’s organ for
tasting.
3)
Some snakes are poisonous and have special fangs to inject venom.
4)
Snakes have internal ears that can detect low-frequency sounds and
vibrations.
e. Tuataras are lizardlike animals found in New Zealand.
1) They possess a well-developed “third eye,” which is light sensitive and buried
beneath the skin in the upper part of the head.
2) They are the only member of an ancient group of reptiles that incuded the
common ancestor of modern lizards and snakes.
f. Crocodiles and alligators are largely aquatic, feeding on fishes and other animals.
1) Their powerful jaws have numerous teeth; a muscular tail is both a paddle to
swim and a weapon.
2) Male crocodiles bellow to attract mates; males of some species protect the
eggs and young.
B. Birds
1. Birds share a common ancestor with crocodilians and have scales (feathers are
modified scales), a tail with vertebrae, and clawed feed.
2. Feathers keep birds warm, and help birds fly and steer.
a. Feathers are modified scales.
b. Birds molt and replace their feathers annually.
3. Birds have a modified skeleton.
a. The collarbone and fused and sternum has a keel.
b. Other bones are fused to make the skeleton more rigid than the reptilian skeleton.
c. The breast muscles are attached to the keel.
4. Birds have modified respiration.
a. Bird respiratory air sacs are extensive, even extending into some larger bones.
1) Using a one-way flow of air, air sacs maximize gas exchange and oxygenation
of blood.
2) Efficient supply of oxygen to muscles is vital for the level of muscle activity
needed for flight.
5. Brids are endothermic; they have the ability to maintain a constant, relatively high
219
body temperature.
6. Birds have well-developed sense organs and nervous system.
a. Birds have very acute vision.
b. Birds muscle reflexes are excellent.
c. Bird migration allows use of widespread food sources; an enlarged portion of the
brain is responsible for instinctive behaviors.
7. Diversity of Living Birds
a. Most birds can fly; some, however are flightless.
b. Bird classification is based on beak and foot types, and some on habitats and
behaviors.
1) Birds of prey have notched beaks and sharp talons.
2) Shorebirds have long slender bills and long legs.
3) Waterfowl have webbed toes and broad bills.
C. Vertebrates and Human Medicine (Science Focus box)
1. There are many pharmaceutical products that come from vertebrates.
a. The venom of the Thailand cobra is the source of Immunokine, which has been
used for ten years in multiple sclerosis patients.
b. ABT-594 from the poison dart frog is about 50 times more powerful than
morphine without the addictive properties.
2. Animal pharming uses genetically altered vertebrates (mice, sheep, goats, cows,
chickens, pigs) to produce medically useful pharmaceutical products.
a. The human gene for some useful product is inserted into the embryo of the
vertebrate.
b. That embryo is implanted into a foster mother, which gives birth to the
transgenic animal.
3. Xenotransplantation is the transplantation of nonhuman vertebrate tissues and organs
into humans.
a. The use of transgenic vertebrates for medical purposes raises many health and
ethical concerns.
29.6
The Mammals
1. The following characteristics distinguish mammals:
a. Hair
1)
Hair provides insulation against heat loss.
2)
Hair color can provide camouflage to blend into its surroundings.
3)
Hair can serve sensory functions.
b. Mammary glands
1)
Mammary glands enable females to feed young without deserting them to
obtain food.
2) Nursing creates a bond between mother and offspring to ensure parental care
while the young are helpless.
c. Skeleton
1) The mammal skull is bigger than reptiles’, their teeth are differentiated into
molars and premolars, and the vertebral column provides more movement.
d. Internal organs
1)
Gas exchange is efficiently accomplished by lungs.
2) Mammals possess a four-chambered heart and a double-loop circulatory
220
system.
3) Kidneys are adapted to conserving water.
4) The nervous system and sensory organs are highly developed.
e. Internal development
1)
In most mammals, the young are born alive after a period of development
in uterus.
A. Evolution of Mammals
1. Mammals evolved during the Mesozoic Era from mammal-like synapsids.
2. True mammals appeared during the Triassic period, about the same time as the first
dinosaurs.
a. The first mammals were small, about the size of mice.
b. Some of the earliest mammalian groups were monotremes and marsupials.
c. Placental mammals evolved later to occupy habitats vacated by dinosaurs.
3. Monotremes
a. Monotremes are mammals that have a cloaca and lay hard-shelled amniote eggs.
b. They are represented by the duckbill platypus and two species of the spiny
anteaters.
c. A female duckbill platypus lays her eggs in a burrow in the ground where she
incubates them.
d. After hatching, the young lick milk seeping from modified sweat glands on the
abdomen.
e. The spiny anteater has a pouch formed by swollen mammary glands and muscle;
the egg moves from cloaca to pouch and hatches; the young remain for 53 days
and live in the burrow where the mother feeds them.
4. Marsupials
a. Marsupials begin development inside the mother’s body but are then born in a
very immature state.
b. The newborns crawl up into a pouch on their mother’s abdomen.
c. Inside a pouch they attach to the nipples of the mother’s mammary glands and
continue to develop.
d. Today, most marsupials are found in Australia where they underwent adaptive
radiation for several million years without competition from the placental
mammals, only introduced recently.
5. Placental Mammals
a. Developing placental mammals are dependent on a placenta, an organ of
exchange between maternal and fetal blood.
b. The placenta supplies nutrients to and removes wastes from the blood of
developing offspring.
c. A placenta also allows a mother to move about while the offspring develop.
d. The placenta enables young to be born in a relatively advanced stage of
development.
e. Placental mammals are very active animals; they possess acute senses and a
relatively large brain.
f. The brains of placental animals have cerebral hemispheres proportionately larger
than other animals.
g. The young go through a long period of dependency on their parents after birth.
221
h. Most are terrestrial, but some are aquatic, and bats can fly.
6. The main types of placental animals are:
a. Ungulates are hoofed animals, which make up about 1/3 of all living an extinct
mammal groups.
1) They have a reduced number of toes and divided according to wheather an
odd or even number of toes remain.
2)
They have elongated limbs adapted for running across open grassland.
3)
They are herbivorous and have large grinding teeth.
b. Carnivores are meat eaters with large and conical-shaped canine teeth.
1) Aquatic carnivores such as seals and sea lions must return to land to
reproduce.
c. Primates tree-dwelling fruit eaters.
1) Their digits have nails, not claws; the thumb is more opposable.
2) Primates, particularly humans, have well-developed brains.
d. Cetaceas are marine whales and dolphins.
1)
They lack substantial hair or fur.
2)
Baleen whales that strain plankton from the water.
3)
Toothed whales feed on fish and squid.
e. Chiroptera are nocturnal flying bats.
1) Wings are layers of skin and connective tissue stretched between the
elongated bones of all fingers but the first.
2) Many species use echolocation to locate their usual insect prey.
3) Some bats also eat birds, fish, frogs and plant tissues.
f. Rodents are most often small plant eaters.
1)
Rodents have incisors that grow continuously.
g.
Probiscideans are the herbivorous elephants.
1)
They are the largest living land mammals.
2)
The upper lip and nose have become elongated and muscularized
to form a trunk.
h.
Lagomorphans are rabbits, hares and pikas.
1) They resemble rodents but have two pairs of continuously growing incisors.
2) Their hind legs are longer than their front legs and they are herbivores.
i. Insectivores includes the shrews and moles, mammals with short snouts that live
underground.
1)
Insectivores were thought to be most like the original placentas. However,
recent analysis suggests that the edentates (anteaters) and the pangolins (scaly
anteaters) are the more primitive groups of placentals.
222
Chapter 30
30.1 Evolution of Primates
A. Primate Characteristics
1. Primates differ from other mammals by being adapted for arboreal life (living in
trees).
2. Mobile Forelimbs and Hindlimbs
a. In primates, the limbs are mobile and the hands and feet have five digits each.
b. In most primates, flat nails replace claws and sensitive pads develop on the
underside of fingers and toes.
c. Many primate hands have an opposable thumb (i.e., can touch each of the other
digits); some also have an opposable big toe.
d. These features allow the free grasping of tree limbs and easy harvesting of fruit.
3. Stereoscopic Vision
a. Primates have a reduced snout and the face is relatively flat.
b. The sense of smell is generally reduced.
c. The eyes are moved to the front of the face for overlapping views that provide
stereoscopic vision.
d. Cone cells provide greater visual acuity and color vision but require bright light.
4. Large, Complex Brain
a. Better senses requires both sense organs and a more complex brain to process the
input.
b. More of the brain becomes devoted to processing information received from the
hands and thumb, less to smell.
5. Reduced Reproductive Rate
a. Primates have more single births, which reduces the need for care for several
offspring.
b. The period of parental care is extended with an emphasis on learned behavior and
complex social interactions.
B. Sequence of Primate Evolution
1. Hominins are humans and species that closely resemble humans.
a. They first evolved about 6 MYA.
b. Hominins, chimpanzees, and gorillas shared a common ancestor during the
Miocene period.
2. Hominines include hominins, chimpanzees, and gorillas.
3. Hominids include hominines and orangutan.
4. Hominoids include hominids and gibbon.
a. The hominoid common ancestor first evolved about 23 MYA.
5. Anthropoids include hominoids and the Old World monkeys and New World
monkeys.
a. Old World monkeys don’t have tails and have protruding noses.
1)
Examples of Old World monkeys are: the baboon, and the rhesus monkey.
b. New World monkeys have long prehensile (grasping) tails and flat noses.
1)
Examples of New World monkeys are: the spider monkey and the
capuchin.
6. Primate fossils similar to monkeys are first found in Africa, about 45 MYA.
7. Prosimians (lemurs and tarsiers) were the first type of primate to diversge from the
223
common ancestor for all primates.
8. Primates share one common mammalian ancestor, which lived about 55 MYA.
9. Hominoid Evolution
a. About 15 MYA, dozens of hominoid species arose.
b. Proconsul was one species that lived at this time, and it is believed to be ancestral
to the dryopithecines, from which the hominoids arose.
c. About 10 MYA, Africarabia joined with Asia, and the hominoids migrated into
Europe.
d. During this period, two ancestral groups of primates were the dryomorphs and the
ramamorphs, the latter now believed to be the ancestral orangutan.
e. Dryopithecus was a tree-dweller that moved similar to orangutans but did not
walk along tree limbs as did Proconsul.
30.2 Evolution of Early Hominins
1. Molecular data is used to determine the beginning of hominin evolution.
2. When two lines of descent first diverge from a common ancestor the genes of the two
lineages are nearly identical.
3. However, as time passes, each lineage accumulated genetic changes.
4. Genetic changes suggest that hominin evolution began about 7 MYA.
A. Derived Characters of Hominins
1. Humans and chimpanzees have many traits in common.
2. Several distinct differences exist. In humans:
a. The skull is in the midline of the body.
b. The longer curved spine places the center of gravity over the feet.
c. The broader pelvis and hip joints prevent swaying when walking.
d. A longer neck on the femur in humans causes the femur to angle inward at the
knees.
e. The human knee joint is modified to support the body’s weight.
f. The human toe is not opposable but the foot has an arch for long distance
walking.
B. The Early Hominins
1. Until recently, science thought that the climate changed forests into savannas; there is
little evidence of a shift in vegetation at 7 MYA.
2. Additional advantages of bipedalism include reduction of heat stroke and carrying
food back to females.
3. While still living in trees, the first hominids may have walked upright on two feet
(bipedalism) to collect overhead fruit.
4. Early Hominid Fossils
a. The braincase of Sahelanthropus tchadensis has been dated at 7 MYA.
b. Skull fragments from Ardipithecus ramidus have been found and dated at 4.5
MYA. it was likely bipedal.
c. Fossils dated 4 MYA show a direct link between A. ramidus and australopiths.
30.3 Evolution of Later Hominins
1. Australopithecines (called australopiths for short) evolved in Africa 4 MYA.
2. Expanding fossil records show it is not an orderly sequence between forms.
3. Australopithecines evolved and diversified in Africa with gracile and robust forms
with varied diets; they show adaptations to different ways of life.
224
4. They were apelike above the waist and humanlike below the waist; human
characteristics probably did not evolve all together at the same time. This is an
example of mosaic evolution.
A. The Fossils
1. Australopithecus africanus, described by Raymond Dart in the 1920s, is a gracile
type from southern Africa.
2. Abundant fossils of A. africanus date about 2.8 MYA.
3. Paranthropus robustus was a robust type; it had a brain size of 500 cc similar to A.
africanus and dated from 2 to 1.5 MYA.
4. Both had forelimbs longer than hindlimbs but probably walked upright.
5. Africanus had a larger brain and is the best candidate as ancestor to early Homo.
6. Australopithecus afarensis is based on many skeletal fragments (Lucy) dated at 3.18
MYA.
a. Its brain was small at 400 cc.
b. This may have been ancestral to the robust types, P. aethiopicus and P. boisei,
that later died out.
c. They may be the species that left the Laetoli footprints in volcanic ash about 3.7
MYA.
d. This species is thought to have stood upright and walked bipedally.
e. It is possible that Australopithecus afarensis is ancestral to early Homo.
7. A 3.3-million-year-old juvenile A. afarensis was found in 2000, just 4 km away from
where Lucy had
been discovered.
a. This skeleton is often called “Lucy’s baby,” even though she is tens of thousands
of years older than Lucy.
b. This skeleton also represents the most complete A. afarensis fossil to date.
8. A fossil, A. garhi, may be the transitional link between the australopiths and the early
Homo species.
a. A. garhi is an australopith, but it made tools.
B. Origins of the Genus Homo (Science Focus box)
1. The genus Homo evolved from the genus Australopithecus.
2. The brain size of the two are very different: Homo has the brain about the size of a
grapefruit, while Australopithecus has a brain the size of an orange.
3. In Homo, the newborn has a high rate of retal brain growth through the first year after
birth, while Australopithecus does not.
4. However, some negatives that go along with a larger brain size include: weak and
uncoordinated newborns, unable to cling to mother.
5. This evolutionary compromise must have outweight the negative apsecies of infant
helplessness or else Homo would have never evolved.
6. As genetic information is increasing, we may discover a particular gene or gene
combinations that cuase Homo to have a large brain.
30.4 Evolution of Early Homo
1. Fossils are assigned to the genus Homo based on the following traits:
a. Brain size 600 cc or greater;
b. Jaw and teeth are human-like; and
c. Tool use seems evident.
2. Homo ergaster and Homo erectus
225
a.
b.
Homo ergaster evolved in Africal perhaps from H. rudolfensis.
Homo erectus fossils were found in Asia different than those of H. ergaster and
H. rudolfensis.
c. Fossils found in Africa, Asia, and Europe date between 1.9 and 0.3 million years
ago.
d. H. erectus had a brain capacity of 1000 cc, a fatter face and a projecting nose.
e. H. erectus fossils found in Java and the Republic of Georgia at 1.9 MYA and 1.6
MYA indicates an early migration from Africa, followed by H. erectus evolving
in Asia and spreading to other areas.
f. These are the first hominids to use fire, fashion more advanced tools, to be
systematic game hunters, and possibly to use home bases.
g. Fossil remains of Homo floresiensis were discovered in 2004 on the island of
Flores in the South Pacific; it was the size of a three-year-old human being but
with a braincase only one-third the size.
1) A study in 2007 supports that H. floresiensis evolved from normal-sized,
Homo erectus populations that readhed Flores about 840,000 years ago
2) H. floresiensis used tools and fire.
A. Biocultural Evolution Began with Homo (Ecology Focus box)
1. Homo habilis, from Africa, made simple stone tools (Oldowan toos) for hammering,
chopping, and digging.
a. Their diet most likely consisted of eating plants and the occasional animal.
2. Homo erectus, from Eurasia, made sharper stone tools (Acheulian tools).
a. They made a wider variety of tools using many types of sources compared to H.
habilis.
b. They ate plants and ate more meat than H. habilis.
c. H. erectus also made fire for cooking, protection, warmth.
d. H. erectus are considered hunter-gatherers – they hunted animals and gathered
plants.
3. Hunting most likely encourages the development and spread of culture between
individuals and generations.
4. The cultural achievements of H. erectus began a new phase of human evolution,
called bio-cultural evolution – in which natural selection is influenced by cultural
achievements rather than by anatomic phenotype.
30.5 Evolution of Later Homo
 Two contradicting hypotheses are suggested about the origin of modern humans:
1. The replacement model or out-of-Africa hypothesis states that modern humans
originated only in Africa and after migrating into Europe and Asia, they replaced the
archaic Homo species found there; current evidence leans toward this hypothesis.
a. All extant humans are descended from a few individuals from about 100,000
years ago.
b. Mitochondrial DNA analyses indicate a close genetic relationship among all
Europeans; although the first analysis was flawed, the data tend to support the
out-of-Africa hypothesis.
2. The multiregional continuity hypothesis proposes that modern humans originated
separately in Asia, Europe, and Africa.
a. If valid, then a distinctive continuity in anatomy and genetic variation is expected
226
in each location.
b. Evolution of modern humans would be essentially similar in several different
places.
A. Neandertals
1. Neandertals were named for Neander Valley in Germany where skeletons were dated
as early as 200,000 years ago.
2. Neandertals are classified as Homo neandertalensis.
3. Classic Neandertal anatomy includes massive brow ridges; a nose, jaws, and teeth
that protruded forward; a low sloping forehead; a lower jaw sloping back without a
chin; a longer pubic bone; a slightly larger brain than that of modern humans; shorter
and thicker limb bones; and heavier muscles in the shoulder and neck.
4. It is speculated that a larger brain than that of modern humans was required to control
the extra musculature.
5. The sturdy build of Neandertals was likely an adaptation to cold climate; they lived in
Eurasia during the last Ice Age.
6. The Neandertals give evidence of being culturally advanced.
a. Most lived in caves, but those who lived in the open may have built houses.
b. They manufactured a variety of stone tools, including spear points, scrapers, and
knives.
c. They used and could control fire, which probably helped in cooking frozen meat
and in keeping warm.
d. They buried their dead with flowers and tools and may have had a religion.
B. Cro-Magnons
1. Cro-Magnons are the olderst fossils to be designated H. sapiens; they were found in
Eurasia 100,000 years ago.
2. Cro-Magnons are named for a fossil location in France and had a thoroughly modern
appearance.
3. They were hunter-gatherers like H. erectus.
4. They had advanced stone tools and may have been the first to throw spears.
5. Cro-Magnons hunted cooperatively, and perhaps were the first to have had a
language.
6. They may have been responsible for the extinction of large mammals during the late
Pleistocene.
7. Cro-Magnon culture included figurines carved out of bone and antler, and cave
paintings.
C. Human Variation
1. Some human variation evolved as adaptation to local environmental conditions:
darker skin to protect from UV light, lighter skin for vitamin D production, etc.
2. A bulkier body also benefits in colder regions while hot climates favor a slight build
and longer limbs.
3. Hair texture, eyelid fold, and other traits are not explained as adaptations.
4. Variation among modern populations is considerably less than among archaic human
populations of 250,000 years ago.
5. Comparative studies of mDNA indicate that human populations had a common
ancestor no more than a million years ago.
6. The great majority of genetic variation, about 85%, occurs within ethnic groups, not
227
among them.
7. Genetic Evidence for a Common Ancestry
a. The replacement model suggests that modern humans have a relatively recent
common ancestor who evolved in Africa then spread to other regions.
b. Studies with mitochondrial DNA show that differences among human populations
are consistent with their having a common ancestor no more than a million years
ago..
228
Chapter 31
31.1 Types of Tissues
A tissue is composed of specialized cells of the same type that perform a common function in
the body.
A. Four Major Types of Tissue
1. Epithelial tissue covers body surfaces and lines body cavities.
2. Connective tissue binds and supports body parts.
3. Muscular tissue causes body parts to move.
4. Nervous tissue responds to stimuli and transmits impulses.
B. Epithelial Tissues
1. Epithelial tissue forms a continuous layer over the body surfaces including inner
cavities.
2. Epithelial tissue cells are packed tightly; they join to one another in one of three
ways:
a. Tight junctions have plasma proteins extending between neighboring cells to bind
cells tightly.
b. Adhesion junctions have cytoskeletal elements joining internal plaques in
neighboring cells.
c. Gap junctions form when two identical plasma membrane channels of
neighboring cells join so that ions and small molecules pass between cells.
3. Epithelial cells are exposed to the environment on one side; the other side is
basement membrane, a thin layer of various types of proteins that anchors the
epithelium to underlying connective tissue.
4. Simple Epithelia
a. Squamous epithelium is composed of flat cells (e.g., air sac linings of lungs,
walls of capillaries).
b. Cuboidal epithelium has cube-shaped cells.
c. Columnar epithelium has elongated cells that resemble pillars or columns (e.g.,
small intestine).
d. Simple epithelium has one cell layer; all cells contact a basement membrane.
e. Pseudostratified epithelium appears layered, but actually all cells contact the
basement membrane.
5. Stratified epithelia is composed of more than one layer of cells.
a. The outer layer of skin is stratified squamous epithelium, but the cells have been
reinforced by keratin.
6. Glandular epithelia
a. A gland can be a single epithelial cell or a group of cells that secrete products into
the lumen of or onto the lining of a tube or cavity, into blood, or to outside of the
body; they are classified in two types:
1) Exocrine glands secrete their products into ducts or directly into a tube or
cavity.
2) Endocrine glands secrete their product directly into the bloodstream.
C. Connective Tissue
1. Connective tissue binds structures together, provides support and protection, fills
spaces, stores fat, and forms blood cells.
2. Connective tissue provides source cells for muscle and skeletal cells in animals that
229
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
regenerate parts.
Connective tissue cells are separated widely by a matrix, a noncellular material
between cells.
Fibrous Connective Tissue
a. Cells of loose and fibrous connective tissues are fibroblasts.
b. Fibroblasts are spaced apart and are separated by a jelly matrix of white collagen
fibers and yellow elastic fibers.
c. Collagen fibers provide flexibility and strength; elastic fibers provide elasticity.
d. Loose fibrous connective tissue supports epithelium and provides support,
flexibility, and protective covering encasing many internal organs.
e. Adipose Tissue
1) This is loose connective tissue that insulates the body, provides protective
padding, and stores fat.
2)
In mammals, adipose tissue is beneath the skin, around the kidneys, and
on surface of the heart.
f. Dense fibrous connective tissue contains closely packed collagenous fibers; it is
found in tendons, which attach muscles to bone, and ligaments, which bind
bones to other bones at joints.
Supportive Connective Tissue
a. Cartilage and bone are rigid connective tissues.
b. Structural proteins (cartilage) or calcium salts (bone) are deposited in an
intercellular matrix.
c. Cartilage cells or chondrocytes lie in small chambers or lacunae embedded in a
strong, flexible matrix.
1) Hyaline cartilage is the most common type of cartilage; it is found in the
nose, the ends of long bones and the ribs, the rings of the respiratory passages,
and the human fetal skeleton.
2) Elastic cartilage is more elastic than hyaline cartilage; it is found in the outer
ear.
3) Fibrocartilage has a matrix of strong collagen fibers; it is found in areas that
must withstand tension and pressure (e.g., pads between vertebrae, knee joint).
Bone
1) In bone, a matrix of calcium salts is deposited around protein fibers.
2) Calcium salts give bone rigidity while protein fibers provide elasticity and
strength.
3) Compact bone has cells called osteocytes that lie within lacunae arranged in
concentric circles within osteons (Haversian systems) around tiny tubes called
central canals.
4) These canals contain nerve fibers and blood vessels.
5) Nutrients brought by the blood reach all of the cells via minute canals
(canaliculi) containing thin processes of osteocytes that connect them with one
another and with the central canals.
6) Spongy bone at end of long bones is designed for strength, and has many long
bony bars and plates.
Fluid Connective Tissue
a. Blood transports nutrients and oxygen to cells and removes CO2 and wastes;
230
blood also has a role in fluid, ion and pH balance and distributes heat.
b. Blood is a connective tissue with cells separated by liquid plasma.
c. In vertebrates, the blood cells are mainly of two types.
1) Red blood cells (erythrocytes) carry oxygen.
2) White blood cells (leukocytes) aid in fighting infection.
d. Platelets present in plasma are fragments of giant cells found in bone marrow and
play a role in blood clotting.
e. Lymph is a fluid connective tissue located in lymphatic vessels.
1) Lymphatic vessels absorb excess tissue fluid and transport it to vessels of the
cardiovascular system.
2) Lacteals, special lymphatic capillaries, absorb fat molecules from the small
intestine.
3) White blood cells congegrate in the lymph nodes; lymph is cleansed as it
passes through.
D. Muscular Tissue
1. Muscular (contractile) tissue is composed of cells called muscle fibers.
2. Muscle fibers contain actin and myosin filaments; interactions result in animal
movement.
3. The three types of vertebrate muscle tissue are skeletal, cardiac, and smooth muscle.
4. Skeletal muscle attaches by tendons to the bones of the skeleton.
a. Skeletal muscle moves body parts, is under voluntary control, and contracts faster
than other types.
b. Skeletal muscle fibers are long, cylindrical, multinucleate cells arising from the
fusion of several cells.
c. Skeletal fibers are striated due to the light and dark bands of overlapping actin
and myosin filaments.
5. Smooth (visceral) muscle is not striated.
a. Spindle-shaped fibers form layers with the thick middle portion of one fiber
opposite the thin ends of adjacent fibers.
b. The nuclei form an irregular pattern in the tissue.
c. Smooth muscle is not under voluntary control; it is therefore involuntary.
d. Smooth muscle is found in the walls of viscera (e.g., intestine, stomach, etc.) and
blood vessels.
e. Smooth muscles drive the intestinal contractions and blood vessel constrictions.
6. Cardiac muscle is found only in the heart wall and powers the heartbeat that pumps
blood.
a. Cardiac muscle combines the features of both smooth and skeletal muscle.
b. Unlike skeletal muscles with many nuclei, cardiac muscles have one centrally
placed nucleus.
c. Although it appears to be one mass of muscle fibers, the cardiac muscle fibers are
individual cells.
d. Cardiac muscle cells are bound end-to-end at intercalated disks where the folded
membranes between two fibers contain desmosomes and gap junctions
e. Impulses move from cell to cell so the heartbeat is coordinated.
E. Nervous Tissue
1. Nervous tissue contains neurons in the brain, spinal cord, and nerves.
231
2. A neuron has three parts.
a. Dendrites receive a stimulus and conduct signals to the cell body.
b. The cell body contains most of the cytoplasm and the nucleus of the neuron.
c. The axon conducts nerve impulses away from the cell body; long axons are
covered by myelin.
d. Long axons and dendrites form neuron fibers; bound together by connective
tissue, they form nerves.
e. Outside the brain and spinal cord, fibers bound by connective tissue form nerves.
3. Neuroglia
a. There are several types of neuroglia in the central nervous system.
b. Neuroglia outnumber neurons 50 to 1, and were once thought to only support or
nourish neurons.
c. Microglial cells support neurons and also phagocytize bacterial and cellular
debris.
d. Astrocytes provide nutrients and produce a growth factor known as glia-derived
growth factor that someday may be used to cure diseases of neural degeneration.
e. Oligodendrocytes form the myelin around an axon.
f. Neuroglia lack long processes but communicate among themselves and with
neurons.
F. Nerve Regeneration (Health Focus box)
1. In humans, axons cannot regenerate inside the brain and spinal cord.
2. This is especially important for central nervous system (CNS) degeneration victoms,
who may have permanent loss of nervous function.
3. Currently, one effective method for paralysis victoms is exercise.
4. For example, Christopher Reeves, who fell off his horse and became paralyzed from
the neck down, exercised for at least five hours a day, and after time, began to have
sensation throughout his body.
5. It is possible that Reeve’s advances were the result of improved strength and bone
density, which lead to stronger nerve signals.
6. Another method to regain axon regeneration, may from stem cells.
7. Research has shown that both embryonic and bone marrow stem cells can
differentiate into nerons in the laboratory.
31.2 Organs and Organ Systems
Organs are combinations of two or more different tissues performing common functions.
1. An organ system contains many different organs that cooperate to carry out a process
(e.g., digestion).
2. The integumentary system is composed of the skin and accessory organs (i.e., nails,
hair, glands, and sensory receptors).
A. Skin as an Organ
1. Human skin protects the underlying tissues from trauma, desiccation, radiation
damage, and microbial invasion.
2. The skin produces a precursor molecule that is converted to vitamin D after exposure
to UV light.
3. The skin also helps regulate body temperature.
4. Laden with sensory receptors, the skin collects information about the external
environment.
232
B. Regions of Skin
1. The skin has both an outer epidermal layer (epidermis) and a deeper layer (dermis);
a subcutaneous layer (hypodermis) is found between the skin and underlying
structures.
2. The epidermis is the outer, thinner layer of skin.
a. The epidermis is composed of stratified squamous epithelium.
b. Epidermal cells are derived from the basal layer of stem cells that undergo
continuous cell division underneath.
c. The newly formed cells push to the surface away from their blood supply; they
flatten and harden as they accumulate keratin, a hard, waterproof protein.
d. Eventually, the keratinized cells die and are sloughed off.
e. Melanocytes located in the basal layer produce a melanin pigment that absorbs
UV light, protecting deeper cells from radiation damage; certain cells in the
epidermis convert a steroid related to cholesterol into vitamin D, a chemical
required for proper bone growth.
f. Skin Cancer
1) Too much ultraviolet radiation is dangerous and can lead to skin cancer.
2) Excessive exposure to UV radiation can convert cells in the basal layer of the
epidermis into cancer cells (basal cell carcinoma); melanoma is skin cancer
derived from melanocytes.
3. The dermis is fibrous connective tissue that forms a thicker and deeper layer of skin.
a. The dermis contains both elastic fibers and collagen fibers; these run parallel with
the skin surface.
b. The dermis contains blood vessels that can constrict and dilate.
c. Many small sensory receptors are present in the dermis.
1) There are separate receptors for pressure, touch, temperature, and pain.
4. The subcutaneous layer is not technically a part of the skin; it is composed of loose
connnective tissue and adipose cells, which store fat.
a. The subcutaneous layer lies below dermis.
b. This is composed of loose connective tissue, including adipose tissue.
c. Adipose tissue helps insulate the body by minimizing both heat gain and heat loss.
d. This layer of adipose gives a rounded appearance to the body.
e. The excessive development of adipose tissue occurs with obesity.
C. Accessory Organs of the Skin
1. Nails grow from special epidermal cells at the base of the nail in a region called the
nail root.
a. The visible portion of a nail is the nail body.
b. Cells become keratinized as they grow out over the nail bed.
c. The vascular dermal tissue under the nail provides the pink color; the white
half-moon area is the thicker germinal area.
2. A hair follicle contains a nonliving hair shaft and the living hair root that produced
it.
a. The hair shaft is formed of dead, keratinized epidermal cells that protect the
surface of the skin.
b. The arrector pili muscle is a smooth muscle attached to the hair follicle;
contracting it causes the hair to erect.
233
c.
Follicles have oil (sebaceous) glands producing sebum, an oil secreted to
lubricate both the hair and the skin.
3. The sweat (sudoriferous) glands are coiled tubules present in most of the regions of
skin that secrete a fluid (sweat) onto the surface of the skin.
D. Organ Systems
 In most animals, individual organs function as part of organ systems.
 The organ systems carry out life processes common to organisms.
1. Body Cavities
a. The human body has two main cavities: the dorsal cavity holds the brain and
spinal cord, and the larger ventral cavity.
b. The ventral cavity located on the front side of the body develops from the coelom
and is divided by a muscular diaphragm in humans and other mammals.
c. The upper (thoracic or chest) cavity is located in the upper part of the ventral
cavity, above the diaphragm, and contains the heart and lungs.
d. The lower (abdominal) cavity is located in the lower part of the ventral cavity; it
contains the major portions of the digestive and excretory systems, and much of
the reproductive system.
31.3 Homeostasis
Homeostasis is the maintenance of internal conditions in a cell or organism by means of
self-regulating mechanisms that curtail fluctuations above and below a normal range.
1. The organ systems of the human body contribute to homeostasis.
a. The respiratory system adds oxygen and removes carbon dioxide; the amounts are
altered to meet needs.
b. The liver removes and stores glucose as glycogen and then replaces the blood
glucose levels when they lower.
c. The hormone insulin is secreted by the pancreas to regulate glucose levels.
d. The kidneys are under hormonal control to excrete wastes and salts and to
maintain blood pH.
2. Although homeostasis is controlled by hormones, it is ultimately controlled by the
nervous system.
3. The brain contains centers that regulate temperature and blood pressure.
4. Regulation requires a receptor that detects unacceptable levels and signals a regulator
center that can direct an adaptive response; once normalcy is obtained, the receptor is
no longer stimulated.
A. Negative Feedback
1. A negative feedback mechanism involves a response in which a variable is kept
close to a particular set point.
a. The process involves a sensor and a control center.
b. The sensor detects a change in the internal environment.
c. The control center brings about an effect to bring conditions back to normal.
d. Example: When blood pressure rises, sensory receptors signal a control ceneter in
the brain. This center stops sending nerve impulses to the arterial walls and the
relax. Once the blood pressure drops, signals no longer go to the control center.
e. A home heating system is a mechanical example of a negative feedback
mechanism.
f. Human Example: Regulation of Body Temperature
234
1) The sensor and control center are located in the hypothalamus.
2) When body temperature is above normal, the control center directs blood
vessels in the skin to dilate—heat is lost to the environment.
3) When body temperature is below normal, the the control center directs blood
vessels in the skin to constrict—heat is conserved in the body.
B. Positive Feedback
1. A positive feedback mechanism involves output that intensifies and increases the
input, thereby increasing the process; an ever-greater change in the same direction
occurs.
2. Once childbirth begins, each event amplifies; the process continues until birth occurs.
3. Positive feedback mechanisms can be harmful, e.g., when a fever causes metobolic
changes that push the fever even higher.
235
Chapter 32
32.1 Transport in Invertebrates
1. Sponges, cnidarians and flatworms are groups of organisms with a thin body wall that
makes a circulatory system unnecessary.
2. Hydras have each cell exposed to water and can independently exchange gases and
extrete wastes.
3. Planaria have a trilobed gastrovascular cavity and a small, flat body where nutrients
diffuse from cell to cell.
4. Pseudocoelomates, such as nematodes, use the coelomic fluid of the body cavity to
transport fluids.
5. Echinoderms rely on movement of coelomic fluid as a circulatory system.
A. Invertebrates with a Circulatory System
1. In a circulatory system, a pumping heart moves one of two types of circulatory
fluids.
a. Blood is a circulatory fluid and is always contained within blood vessels
b. Hemolymph is a circulatory fluid which flows into the hemocoel of certain
arthropods and molluscs; it is a mixture of blood and interstitial fluid.
2. Certain arthropods and molluscs have an open circulatory system.
a. Hemolymph is pumped by the heart into the body cavity or saclike sinuses.
b. Hemolymph bathes the internal organs and then drains back to the heart.
c. In grasshoppers, a dorsal heart pumps hemolymph into an aorta, which empties
into the hemocoel.
d. Hemolymph is colorless (it lacks hemoglobin or other respiratory pigments); a
system of tracheae provides oxygen.
3. Some invertebrates, including earthworms and cephalopods, have a closed
circulatory system in which blood never leaves the heart or vessels.
a. Valves prevent any backward flow of the blood as it moves through vessels.
b. Earthworms have five pairs of anterior lateral vessels that pump blood to every
segment.
c. Blood moves in capillaries where an exchange with tissue fluid takes place before
returning in veins.
d. Earthworms have a red respiratory pigment hemoglobin dissolved in the blood,
not inside blood cells.
e. With no special cavity for gas exchange, the gas must diffuse across a moist body
wall.
32.2 Transport in Vertebrates
1. Vertebrates have a closed circulatory system called a cardiovascular system.
2. The muscular heart keeps blood circulating through the blood vessels.
a. The atria are the chambers of the heart that receive blood.
b. The ventricles pump blood into arteries.
3. There are three kinds of blood vessels: arteries carry the blood away from the heart,
capillaries are where the exchange with tissue fluid takes place, and veins return the
blood to the heart.
a. Arteries
1)
have thick walls and are resilient.
2)
expand to accommodate sudden increase in blood volume that results after
236
heart contraction.
3)
divide into small arterioles.
b. Arteriole constriction and dilation is regulated by the nervous system to affect
blood pressure.
c. Capillaries are microscopic blood vessels with a wall formed of one layer of
simple squamous cells.
1) Capillary beds are so prevalent that, in humans, all cells are within 60–80 µm
of a capillary.
2) Only 5% of the capillaries are open at one time; after an animal has eaten, the
capillary beds of the digestive system open.
3) Capillaries are so narrow that red blood cells must pass through them in single
file.
4) Gas, nutrient, and waste exchange occurs across the thin capillary walls.
d. The venules are vessels that take blood from capillaries and join to form a vein.
e. Veins transport blood toward the heart.
1) The walls of a veins are much thinner than those of arteries; there is a lower
blood pressure in veins than in arteries.
2) One-way valves open in the direction of the heart, then close to prevent
backflow.
A. Comparison of Circulatory Pathways
1. In vertebrates, there are three different types of circulatory pathways.
2. Fishes have a one-circuit (single-loop) circulatory pathway.
a. The heart has a single atrium and a single ventricle and pumps the blood under
pressure to the gills.
b. Blood is oxygenated in the gills.
c. After passing through gills, blood is returned to the dorsal aorta, which distributes
the blood throughout the body.
3. Other vertebrates have a two-circuit (double-loop) circulatory pathway to breathe air
on land.
a. The systemic circuit transports the blood to tissues.
b. The pulmonary circuit pumps the blood to lungs.
4. In amphibians and most reptiles, the heart has two atria and a single ventricle.
5. In most reptiles, and in all birds and mammals, the heart is divided into left and right
halves.
a. With two atria and two ventricles, the oxygenated blood is always separate from
the deoxygenated blood.
b. The right ventricle pumps blood to the lungs; the left ventricle pumps blood to the
rest of the body.
c. This arrangement provides adequate blood pressure for both the pulmonary and
the systemic circulations.
32.3 Transport in Humans
A. The Human Heart
1. The pumping of the heart keeps the blood moving in arteries.
2. Skeletal muscle contraction is responsible for the blood movement in veins.
3. The heart is a cone-shaped, muscular organ about the size of a fist.
4. It is located between the lungs directly behind the sternum and is tilted so that the
237
apex is oriented to the left.
5. The myocardium is a major portion of the heart consisting mostly of cardiac muscle;
its muscle fibers are branched and tightly joined together.
6. The heart lies within the pericardium, a sac that secretes a lubricating fluid.
7. The endocardium lines the inner surface of the heart; it consists of connective tissue
and endothelial tissue.
8. An internal wall called the septum separates the heart into right and left halves.
9. The heart has two upper, thin-walled atria and two lower, thick-walled ventricles.
10. Heart valves direct the flow of blood and prevent any backward movement.
a. Valves are supported by strong fibrous tendons (chordae tendineae) which support
the valves and prevent them from inverting when the heart contracts.
b. Atrioventricular valves between the atria and ventricles prevent any back flow
from the ventricle to the atrium.
c. The right atrioventricular (tricuspid) valve on right side of the heart consists of
three cusps or flaps.
d. The left atrioventricular (bicuspid or mitral) valve on left side consists of two
cusps or flaps.
e. Semilunar valves are located between the ventricles and their attached vessels.
1) The pulmonary semilunar valve lies between the right ventricle and the
pulmonary trunk.
2) The aortic semilunar valve lies between the left ventricle and the aorta.
B. Path of Blood Through the Heart
1. The route of blood through the heart is as follows:
a. Oxygen-poor blood enters the right atrium from both the superior vena cava and
the inferior vena cava.
b. The right atrium sends blood through the right atrioventricular (tricuspid) valve to
the right ventricle.
c. The right ventricle sends blood through the pulmonary semilunar valve into the
pulmonary trunk and arteries to the lungs.
d. Oxygen-rich blood returns from the lungs through pulmonary veins and is
delivered to the left atrium.
e. The left atrium sends blood through the left atrioventricular (bicuspid or mitral)
valve to the left ventricle.
f. The left ventricle sends blood through the aortic semilunar valve into the aorta
and on to the body proper.
2. The heart is therefore a double pump serving the lungs and body circulations
simultaneously; O2-poor blood and O2-rich blood never mix.
3. Since the left ventricle has the harder job of pumping blood throughout the body, its
walls are thicker; accordingly, blood pressure is greatest in the aorta.
4. Blood pressure decreases as the cross-sectional area of the arteries and arterioles
increases.
C. The Heartbeat
1. The human heart contracts (beats) about 70 times a minute (2.5 billion times in a
lifetime); each heartbeat lasts about 0.85 seconds.
2. The heartbeat or cardiac cycle consists of phases.
3. The atria contract first while the ventricles relax (0.15 sec.), then the ventricles
238
contract while atria relax (0.30 sec.), and then all chambers rest (0.40 sec.).
4. Systole refers to the contraction of heart chambers and diastole refers to the
relaxation of the heart chambers.
5. The heart is in diastole about 50% of the time.
6. The short systole of the atria is needed only to send blood into the ventricles.
7. When the term “systole” is used alone, it refers to the left ventricle systole; the
volume of blood that the left ventricle pumps per minute into the systemic circuit is
called the cardiac output.
8. When the heart beats, the familiar lub-dub sound is heard as the valves of the heart
close.
a. Lub is caused by the vibrations of the heart when the atrioventricular valves close.
b. Dub is heard when the vibrations occur due to the closing of semilunar valves.
9. The pulse is a wave effect that passes down the walls of arterial blood vessels when
the aorta expands and then recoils following ventricular systole.
10. Since there is one arterial pulse per ventricular systole, the arterial pulse rate can be
used to determine the heart rate.
11. Rhythmic contraction of the heart is due to the cardiac conduction system.
a. The sinoatrial (SA) node is the “pacemaker” found in the upper dorsal wall of the
right atrium; it initiates the heartbeat by sending out an excitatory impulse every
0.85 seconds to cause the atria to contract.
b. The atrioventricular (AV) node is found in the base of the right atrium very near
the septum; when stimulated by impulses from the SA node, it sends out impulses
through the septum to cause the ventricles to contract.
c. Although the beat of the heart is intrinsic, it is regulated by the nervous system
which can increase or decrease the heartbeat rate.
d. The SA node is called the cardiac pacemaker because it usually keeps the
heartbeat regular.
e. The hormones epinephrine and norepinephrine also stimulate the heart.
12. An electrocardiogram (ECG) is a recording of the electrical changes that occur in
the myocardium during a cardiac cycle; it is used as a diagnostic tool to identify
abnormal cardiac function.
13. Normal Cardiac Cycle
a. The P wave represents excitation and occurs just before atrial contraction.
b. The QRS complex signals that the ventricles are about to contract.
c. The electrical changes that occur as the ventricular muscle fibers recover produce
the T wave.
14. Ventricular fibrillation is uncoordinated contraction of the ventricles; with the
application of a strong electric current, the SA node may reestablish a coordinated
beat.
D. Vascular Pathways
 The human cardiovascular system has two major circular pathways.
1. The Pulmonary Circuit
a. The pulmonary circuit circulates blood to the lungs.
b. Oxygen-poor blood from the body collects in the right ventricle, which pumps it
to pulmonary trunk.
c. The pulmonary trunk divides into right and left pulmonary arteries to carry blood
239
to each lung.
d. In the lungs, carbon dioxide (CO2) is unloaded and O2 is picked up by blood.
e. Oxygen-rich blood from the lungs is returned through pulmonary veins to the left
atrium.
2. The Systemic Circuit
a. The aorta and vena cavae are main pathways for blood in the systemic circuit.
b. Transport of oxygenated blood moves from the left ventricle through the aorta out
to all tissues.
c. Deoxygenated blood returns from all tissues via the vena cavae.
d. In a systemic circuit, arteries contain bright red oxygen-rich blood; the veins
contain dull red oxygen-poor blood that appears blue when viewed through the
skin.
3. The coronary arteries serve the heart muscle itself.
a. Coronary arteries originate from the base of the aorta just above the aortic
semilunar valve.
b. Coronary arteries lie on the external surface of the heart; they branch into
arterioles and capillaries.
c. Capillary beds enter the venules that join to form the cardiac veins.
d. Coronary veins collect oxygen-poor blood from the capillaries and empty it into
the right atrium.
4. The portal system is a pathway of blood flow that begins and ends in capillaries.
a. The hepatic portal vein transports blood from capillaries in the small intestinal
villi to capillaries in the liver.
b. The hepatic vein leaves the liver and enters the inferior vena cava.
c. In the liver, substances absorbed by the intestine are modified, toxins and bacteria
are removed, and the normal composition of blood is monitored.
5.
Tracing the Path of Blood
a. Branches from the aorta go to the organs and major body regions.
b. Generally, the artery and the vein that serve the same region are
given the same name.
c.
One blood goes through the artery, it travels to the arterioles, then into
branching capillaries where gas exchange occurs, and then venules join to form
the vein that enters a vena cava.
E. Blood Pressure
1. Systolic pressure results from blood being forced into the arteries during ventricular
systole.
2. Diastolic pressure is the pressure in arteries during ventricular diastole.
3. Human blood pressure is measured as the force pushing against the wall of the
brachial artery of the upper arm.
a. Blood pressure is measured by a sphygmomanometer, which has a pressure cuff.
b. Clinical blood pressure measures pressures produced by contraction and
relaxation of the left ventricle.
c. Blood pressure is stated in millimeters of mercury (e.g., 120/80 mm Hg) for
systolic/diastolic.
4. As blood flows from the aorta into arteries and arterioles, the blood pressure falls.
5. The difference in pressure between systolic and diastolic pressures gradually
240
diminishes.
6. Capillaries have a slow, even blood flow due to the high total cross-sectional area.
7. Blood pressure in the veins is low and cannot move blood back to heart, especially
from the limbs.
8. Venous return is dependent on these factors:
a. Skeletal muscle contraction on the walls of veins with valves, preventing
backflow of blood, is responsible for the flow of blood in veins.
b. Varicose veins are abnormal dilations that develop when the valves become weak
and ineffective.
c. A repiratory pump helps blood flor from the higher pressure (when we exhale) to
lower pressure (when we inhale).
F. Cardiovascular Disease

Cardiovascular disease (CVD) is the leading cause of untimely death in Western
countries.

The risk of CVD can be reduced by following guidelines for a heart-healthy life-style.
1. Hypertension
a. An estimated 20% of Americans suffer from hypertension (high blood pressure).
b. Under the age of 45, a reading above 130/90 is hypertensive.
c. Beyond the age of 45, a reading above 140/95 is hypertensive.
d. The diastolic pressure is what is emphasized when medical treatment is
considered.
2. Atherosclerosis
a. Hypertension is seen in individuals with atherosclerosis (formerly called
arteriosclerosis).
b. Soft masses of fatty materials, mostly cholesterol, accumulate beneath the inner
linings of arteries.
c. As this plaque accumulates, it protrudes into the vessel and interferes with blood
flow.
d. Atherosclerosis develops in early adulthood but the symptoms may not appear
until age 50 or older.
e. Plaque can cause a blood clot to form on irregular arterial walls.
f. As long as a clot remains stationary, it is a thrombus.
g. If a clot dislodges, it is an embolus, a blood clot that moves in the blood.
h. In some families, atherosclerosis is inherited as familial hypercholesterolemia.
3. Stroke and Heart Attack
a. Stroke, heart attack, and aneurysm are associated with hypertension and
atherosclerosis.
b. A stroke can result in paralysis or death; a small cranial arteriole bursts or is
blocked by an embolus.
1)
A stroke is also called a cardiovascular accident (CVA).
2) Whether paralysis or death occurs depends on the extent of the portion of the
brain that lacks O2.
3) Warning symptoms that foretell stroke include: numbness in hands or face,
difficulty speaking, blindness in one eye, etc.
c. A myocardial infarction (MI) is also called heart attack.
1) This occurs when a portion of heart muscle dies due to a lack of O2; this may
241
be caused by a thromboembolism blocking a coronary artery.
2) A partially blocked coronary artery causes angina pectoris causing pains or a
flash of burning.
3)
Nitroglycerin and related drugs dilate the blood vessels and relieve pain.
G. Prevention of Cardiovascular Disease (Health Focus box)
1.
The Don’ts
a.
Smoking
1) Smoking contritubes to hypertension.
2) When a person smokes, nicotine enters the bloodstream, causing arterioles
to constrict and blood pressure to rise.
3) Restricted bloodflow and cold hands are associated with smoking.
4) The heart then must pump harder to send the blood through the lungs at
the time when oxygen-carrying capacity of the blood is reduced.
b.
Drug Abuse
1)
Drugs, particularly stimulants, can lead to heart attacks and
strokes.
2) Drinking two to four drinks a week for men and one to three drinks for
women may actually lower the risk of heart disease.
c.
Weight Gain
1) People who are more than 20% above their recommended weight have a
higher risk of hypertension.
2) In overweight people, more tissue needs servicing, and the heart sends the
extra blood out under greater pressure.
2.
The Do’s
a.
Healthy Diet
1)
Eating food with monounsaturdated and polyunsaturdated fats may
lower LDL cholesterol.
2)
A diet high in antioxidants may prevent cardiovascaulr disease.
b.
Cholesterol Profile
1) An LDL level above 160 mg/100 ml and an HDL level below 40 mg/100
ml are matters of concern.
2)
An LDL level of below 100 mg/100 ml is recommended.
3)
Medications may be prescribed for individuals who do not meet
these minimum guidelines.
c.
Exercise
1)
Exercise may reduce the risk of cardiovascular disease.
2)
Exercsie helps keep weight under control, may help minimize
stress, and reduce hypertension
32.4 Blood, a Transport Medium
The blood of mammals has two components: plasma and formed elements (cells and platelets).
1. Plasma contains water and many types of molecules, including nutrients, wastes,
salts, and proteins.
2. Salts and proteins buffer the blood.
a. They effectively keep the blood pH near 7.4.
b. They maintain the blood osmotic pressure so water has a tendency to enter
capillaries.
242
3. Some plasma proteins are involved in blood clotting.
4. Some plasma proteins assist in transporting large organic molecules in the blood.
a. Lipoproteins that transport cholesterol are globulins.
b. Albumin, a common plasma protein, transports bilirubin, a breakdown product of
hemoglobin.
A. Formed Elements
1. Formed elements are of three types: red blood cells (RBCs), white blood cells
(WBCs), and platelets.
2. Red Blood Cells
a. Red blood cells (erythrocytes) are small biconcave disks.
b. When mature, RBCs lack a nucleus and contain hemoglobin.
c. There are 6 million RBCs per mm3 of whole blood.
d. Each RBC contains about 250 million hemoglobin molecules.
1) Hemoglobin contains four globin protein chains, each with an iron-containing
heme group.
2) The iron atom of a heme group loosely binds with an O2 molecule; thus, blood
carries oxygen.
3) Anemia is either a lack of enough RBC or insufficient hemoglobin; an
individual suffers from a tired, run-down feeling.
e. RBCs are manufactured in the red bone marrow of the skull, ribs, vertebrae, and
the ends of long bones.
f. The growth factor erythropoietin is produced when an enzyme from the kidneys
acts on a precursor made by the liver and stimulates production of red blood cells;
as a drug it helps people with anemia.
g. Before being released from bone marrow, the RBCs lose their nucleus and
synthesize hemoglobin.
h. Red blood cells have a life span of about 120 days; then they are destroyed chiefly
in the liver and spleen.
i. When the RBCs are destroyed, the hemoglobin is released; the iron is recovered
and returned to the bone marrow where it is reused.
j. The heme portions undergo chemical degradation and are excreted by the liver as
bile pigments; it colors the feces.
3. White Blood Cells
a. White blood cells (leukocytes) differ from RBCs in being larger and in having a
nucleus.
b. WBCs lack hemoglobin and appear translucent without staining.
c. Granular leukocytes contain conspicuous granules in their cytoplasm and have a
lobed nucleus.
1) Neutrophils have granules that stain slightly pink; they are amoeboid,
spherical cells that readily squeeze through capillary walls and phagocytize
foreign material.
2) Eosinophils have granules that take up the red dye eosin.
3) Basophils have granules that take up a basic dye, staining them deep blue.
d. A newly discovered stem cell growth factor (SGF) increases the production of all
WBCs, which helps patients with low immunity.
e. Agranular leukocytes lack granules in their cytoplasm and have a circular or
243
indented nucleus.
1) Monocytes are amoeboid and able to enter tissues where they transform into
macrophages.
2) Macrophages release white blood cell growth factors that increase the
number of leukocytes.
3) Pus is a thick, yellowish fluid that contains a large proportion of dead WBCs
that have fought infection.
4) Lymphocytes play a key role in fighting infection and include two types.
a) T cells are lymphocytes that directly attack virus-infected cells.
b) B cells can be stimulated to produce one type of antibody specific for one
type of antigen.
5) An antigen is any substance stimulating production of antibodies; antigen is
foreign to the body.
6) Antibodies combine with antigens to promote their being phagocytized by a
macrophage.
7) A person is actively immune when many B cells produce a specific antibody
for an infection.
4. Platelets
a. Platelets (thrombocytes) result from fragmented giant cells (megakaryocytes) in
the bone marrow.
b. 200 billion platelets are produced a day; blood contains 150,000–300,000 platelets
per mm3.
c. Platelets are involved in blood clotting, or coagulation.
5. Blood Clotting
a. When a blood vessel is damaged, platelets clump at the site of the puncture and
partially seal the leak.
b. The platelets and damaged tissue cells release a clotting factor called prothrombin
activator.
c. With calcium ions, prothrombin activator catalyzes a reaction converting
prothrombin to thrombin.
d. Thrombin acts as an enzyme to sever two amino acid chains from each fibrinogen
molecule.
e. These activated fragments join end-to-end forming long threads of fibrin.
f. Fibrin threads wind around the platelet plug and provide a framework for a clot.
g. RBCs are trapped within the fibrin threads, making the clot appear red.
h. When blood vessel repair is initiated, plasmin destroys the fibrin network and
restores plasma fluidity.
B. Capillary Exchange
1. Two forces control the movement of fluid through the capillary walls.
a. Osmotic pressure tends to cause water to move from tissue fluid to the blood.
b. Blood pressure tends to cause water to move from the blood to tissues.
c. At the arterial end of a capillary, blood pressure is higher than osmotic pressure:
water exits and moves into tissues.
d. Along the capillary, O2 and nutrients diffuse out into the tissue fluid, while CO2
and other metabolic wastes diffuse into the capillaries from the tissue fluid.
2. Midway along a capillary, there is no net movement of water.
244
3. The tissue fluid is intercellular fluid that surrounds the cells; the circulatory system
exchanges materials with this fluid.
4. The exchange between the blood and tissue fluid occurs by diffusion through the
one-cell-thick capillary walls.
a. At the venule end, osmotic pressure is higher than blood pressure and water
moves back into the blood.
b. Almost the same amount of fluid that left the capillary returns to it; there is
always some excess tissue fluid collected by the lymphatic capillaries.
5. The tissue fluid within lymphatic vessels is lymph.
6. Lymph returns to the systemic venous blood when lymphatic vessels enter the
subclavian veins in the shoulder.
7. Not all capillary beds are open at the same time; precapillary sphincters shunt blood
along various pathways.
8. Through capillary dilation and constriction, blood also distributes heat to body parts
and conserves heat when cold.
C. Blood Types
1. ABO System
a. The presence or absence of type A and B antigens on red blood cells determine a
person’s blood type.
b. If the person has type A blood, the A antigen is on the red blood cells; if the
person is type B, the B antigen is on the red blood cells.
c. In the ABO system, there are four blood types: A, B, AB, O
1) Individuals have naturally-occurring antibodies to blood type antigens not
present on their blood cells; these are called anti-A and anti-B
2) RBCs with a particular antigen agglutinate when exposed to corresponding
antibodies, e.g., type A RBCs will agglutinate in the presence of anti-A
antibody (as would be found in the blood of a type B individual).
3) Agglutination is the clumping of red blood cells due to a reaction between
antigens on the red blood cells.
4) To receive blood, the recipient’s plasma must not have an antibody that causes
donor cells to agglutinate.
a) Recipients with type AB blood can receive any type blood; they are the
universal recipient.
b) Recipients with type O blood cannot receive A, B, or AB; but they are a
universal donor.
c) Recipients with type A blood cannot receive B or AB.
d) Recipients with type B blood cannot receive A or AB.
D. Rh System
1. Rh factor is an important antigen in human blood types.
2. Rh positive (Rh+) has the Rh factor on red blood cells; Rh negative (Rh-) lacks the Rh
antigen on RBCs
3. Rh-negative individuals do not have antibodies to Rh factor but make them if exposed to
Rh+ blood.
4. Rh factor is particularly important during pregnancy.
a.
Hemolytic disease of the newborn is possible if the mother is Rh negative
and the father is Rh positive.
245
b.
Rh positive is a genetically dominant trait; an Rh negative mother and an
Rh positive father pose a Rh conflict.
c.
The child’s Rh positive RBCs can leak across the placenta into the
mother’s circulatory system when the placenta breaks down.
d.
The presence of the “foreign” Rh positive antigens causes the mother to
produce anti-Rh antibodies.
e.
Anti-Rh antibodies pass across the placenta and destroy the RBCs of the
Rh positive child.
246
Chapter 33
33.1 Lymphatic System
1. The mammalian lymphatic system consists of lymphatic vessels and lymphoid
organs.
2. This system is closely associated with the cardiovascular system and has four main
functions.
a. Lymphatic vessels absorb excess tissue fluid and return it to the bloodstream.
b. Lacteals receive lipoproteins at the intestinal villi and the lymphatic vessels
transport these fats to the bloodstream.
c. The lymphatic system is responsible for the production, maintenance, and
distribution of lymphocytes.
d. The lymphatic system helps defend the body against disease.
A. Lymphatic Vessels
1. Lymphatic vessels are extensive; most regions have lymphatic capillaries.
2. The structure of the larger lymphatic vessels resembles veins, including the presence
of valves.
3. The movement of fluid is dependent upon skeletal muscle contraction; when the
muscles contract, fluid is squeezed past a valve that closes, preventing it from flowing
backwards.
4. The lymphatic system is a one-way system that begins with lymphatic capillaries.
a. They take up fluid that has diffused out of the blood capillaries and has not been
reabsorbed.
b. If excess tissue fluid is produced or not absorbed, it will accumulates and result in
edema.
5. Once tissue fluid enters the lymphatic capillaries, it is called lymph.
6. Lymphatic capillaries join as lymphatic vessels that merge before entering one of two
ducts.
a. The thoracic duct is larger than the right lymphatic duct.
1) It serves the lower extremities, abdomen, left arm, left side of the head and
neck, and the left thoracic region.
2) It then delivers lymph to the left subclavian vein of the cardiovascular system.
b. The right lymphatic duct is smaller.
1) It serves the right arm, the right side of the head and neck, and the right
thoracic region.
2) It then delivers lymph to the right subclavian vein of the cardiovascular
system.
B. Lymphatic Organs
1. The red bone marrow is the origin for all blood cells including all leukocytes that
function in immunity.
a. Some lymphocytes become mature B cells in the bone marrow.
b. Most bones of a child have red bone marrow but in adults, red bone marrow is
only in the skull, sternum, ribs, clavicle, pelvic bones and vertebral column.
c. Red bone marrow consists of reticular fibers produced by reticular cells packed
around thin-walled sinuses.
d. Differentiated blood cells enter the bloodstream at these bone sinuses.
2. The thymus gland is located along the trachea behind the sternum in the upper
247
thoracic cavity.
a. T cells mature in the thymus.
b. The thymus gland is larger in children than in adults and may disappear
completely in old age.
c. The thymus produces thymic hormones, such as thymosin, that are thought to aid
in T cell maturation.
3. Lymph nodes are small (about 1–25 mm) ovoid structures located along lymphatic
vessels.
a. A lymph node contains nodules, each packed with B lymphocytes and contain a
sinus.
b. Lymph nodes cluster in certain regions of the body and are named accordingly:
inunal nodes in the groin and axillary nodes in the armpits.
4. The spleen is located in the upper left abdominal cavity just below the diaphragm.
The spleen is similar to a lymph node but it is much larger, about the size of a fist.
Instead of cleansing the lymph, the spleen cleanses the blood.
A capsule divides the spleen into lobules which contain sinuses filled with blood.
Red pulp consists of blood vessels and sinuses where macrophages remove old and
defective blood cells; lymphocytes cleanse the blood of foreign particles.
White pulp consists of little lumps of lymphatic tissue.
If the spleen ruptures due to injury, it can be removed; its functions are assumed by
other organs.
However, a person without a spleen is more susceptible to infections and may require
antibiotic therapy.
5. The tonsils are patches of lymphatic tissue located in a ring around the pharynx.
a. Peyer’s patches are located in the intestinal wall and the vermiform appendix is
attached to the cecum—both encounter pathogens that enter the body by way of
the intestinal tract.
33.2 Nonspecific Defense Against Disease
Immunity is the ability to repel infectious agents, foreign cells, and cancer cells.
1. Immunity begins with nonspecific defenses.
2. The four nonspecific defenses include barrier to entry, protective proteins, natural
killer cels, and inflammatory response.
A.
Barriers to Entry
Skin and the mucous membranes lining the respiratory, digestive, and urinary tracts are
non-chemical, mechanical barriers.
Ciliated cells lining the upper respiratory tract sweep mucous and particles up into the
throat to be swallowed.
Oil gland secretions inhibit the growth of bacteria on the skin.
The stomach has a low pH (1.2–3.0) that inhibits the growth of many bacteria.
B.
Inflammatory Response
1. If tissue is damaged, a series of events known as the inflammatory response, occurs.
2. The inflamed area has four symptoms: redness, pain, swelling, and heat.
3. Chemical signals, e.g. histamine, and mast cells, a type of white blood cell, cause
vasodilation and increased permeability of capillaries.
4. Enlarged capillaries produce redness and a local increase in temperature.
5. The swollen area stimulates free nerve endings, causing pain.
248
6. Neutrophils and monocytes migrate by amoeboid movement to the site of the injury;
they escape from the blood by squeezing through the capillary wall.
7. Dendritic cells and macrophages recognize the presence of pathogens and respond by
releasing cytokines.
8. The cytokines stimulate other immune cells.
9. Neutrophils, dendritic cells, and macrophages engulf pathogens.
10. As phagocytic cells die, they, along with dead bacteria, dead tissue cells, and living
white blood cells, form pus.
11. Dendritic cells and macrophages move to the lymph nodes and spleen, where they
activate B and T lymphocytes.
12. An inflammatory response may also involve the production of a fever, which serves
to inhibit the growth of microorganisms and stimulates immune cells.
C.
Phagocytes and Natural Killer Cells
1. Neutrophils are cells that are able to leave the bloodstream and phagocyatize
(engulf) bacteria in connective tissue.
2. Eosinophils are phagocytic, but are better known for attacking animal parasites that
are too large to be phagocytized.
3. Macrophages and dendritic cells are the most powerful phagocytic white blood
cells that engulf pathogens.
4. Natural killer (NK) cells kill virus-infected cells and tumor cells by cell-to-cell
contact.
a. After stimulation by dendritic cells, they look for a self protein on the body’s
cells.
b. NK cells are not specific; they have no memory and their numbers do not increase
after stimulation.
D.
Protective Proteins
1. Complement is composed of a number of plasma proteins designated by the letter C
and a subscript.
2. It “complements” certain immune responses, which accounts for its name.
3. It amplifies an inflammatory reaction by binding to mast cells and triggering
histamine release and by attracting phagocytic cells to the site of infection.
4. Some complement proteins binds to antibodies already on the surface of pathogens,
thereby increasing the probability that pathogens will be phagocytized by a neutrophil
or macrophage.
5. Some complement proteins form a membrane attack complex that produces holes in
bacterial cell walls and plasma membranes; fluids and salts then enter to the point
where the cell bursts.
6. Interferons are cytokines, proteins produced by virus-infected animal cells.
33.3 Specific Defense Against Disease
1. If nonspecific defenses fail to prevent an infection, specific defenses activate against
a specific antigen.
2. We do not ordinarily become immune to our own cells; the immune system can tell
“self” from “nonself.”
3. The steps to accomplish a specific defense are:
a. The immune system is able to recognize particular molecules, called antigens.
249
1)
An antigen is called a foreign antigen because the body does not produce
them; a self-antigen is an antigen that the body produces.
b. After recognizing antigens, the immune system can respond to them.
c. The immune system can remember antigens it has met before.
4. Specific immunity is primarily the result of the action of B lymphocytes (B cells) and
T lymphocytes (T cells).
a. B cells and T cells recognize antigens because they have antigen receptors—
plasma membrane proteins that allow them to combine with particular antigens.
b. B cells give rise to plasma cells that produce antibodies.
c. T cells differentiate into helper T cells, which regulate the immune response, or
cytotoxic T cells, which kill virus-infected and tumor cells.
5. B cells are responsible for antibody-mediated immunity.
a. Each type of B cell carries its specific receptor on its surface; this is called the B
cell receptor (BCR).
b. When a B cell in a lymph node of the spleen encounters an appropriate antigen, it
is activated to divide.
c. The resulting cells are plasma cells, mature B cells that produce antibodies in the
lymph nodes and spleen; the antibodies are identical to the BCR of the B cell that
produced them.
6. T cells are responsible for cell-mediated immunity.
a. Antigens must be presented to T cells by an antigen-presenting cell (APC).
b. T cells differentiate into either helper T cells, which release cytokines, or
cytotoxic T cells, which attack and kill virus-infected cells and cancer cells.
A.
B Cells and Antibody-Mediated Immunity
1. The clonal selection theory states that the antigen selects the B cell to produce a
clone of plasma cells.
a. Only one B cell has the BCRs that can combine with the specific antigen clone.
The antigen “selects” the B cell that will clone.
b. Defence by B cells is called antibody-mediated immunity because most members
of the cloen become plasma cells that produce specific antibodies.
c. Some cloned B cells do not participate in antibody production but remain in the
blood as memory B cells.
2. Active Immunity occurs when an individual produces a supply of antibiotics.
a. However, active immunity is often induced when a person is well so that future
infection is
prevented.
b. Immunization uses vaccines to provide the antigen to which the immune system
responds.
c. To prepare vaccines, usually pathogens are treated so they are no longer virulent.
d. Genetically engineered bacteria can also produce antigen proteins from
pathogens; the protein is then used as a vaccine.
e. After a vaccine is given, the immune response is measured by the antibody level
in serum—the antibody titer.
1)
After the first exposure, a primary response occurs from no
antibodies to a slow rise in titer.
2) After a brief plateau, a gradual decline follows as antibodies bind to
antigen or simply break down.
250
3) After a second exposure, a secondary response occurs and the antibody
titer rises rapidly to a level much greater than before; this is a “booster.”
4) The high antibody titer is now expected to prevent any disease symptoms
if the individual is infected.
f.
Active immunity depends on memory B and memory T cells responding
to lower doses of antigen.
g.
Active immunity is usually long-lived although a booster may be required
every so many years.
3. Passive immunity occurs when an individual is given prepared antibodies to combat
a disease.
a. It is short-lived because antibodies are not made by an individual’s own B cells.
b. Newborn infants are immune to some diseases because the mother’s antibodies
have crossed the placenta.
c. Breast-feeding also promotes passive immunity—the antibodies are in the
mother’s milk.
d. Passive immunity is also needed when a patient is in immediate danger from an
infectious disease or toxin.
e. A person may be given a gamma globulin injection (serum that contains
antibodies against the agent) taken from an individual or animal who has
recovered from it.
4. An antibody molecule is a Y-shaped protein molecule with two arms.
a. Each arm has a “heavy” and “light” polypeptide chain.
b. These chains have constant regions and variable regions.
c. The constant regions have amino acid sequences that do not change; the constant
regions are not identical among all antibodies.
d. The variable regions have portions of polypeptide chains whose amino acid
sequence changes providing antigen specificity; it forms the antigen binding sites
of antibodies—their shape is specific to antigen.
e. Another name for antibody is immunoglobulin (Ig).
f. IgG Antibodies
1) These are the major type in blood; less is in the lymph and tissue fluid.
2) IgG antibodies bind to pathogens and toxins.
g. IgM Antibodies
1) These are pentamers; they contain five Y-shaped structures.
2) IgM appears in blood soon after an infection begins and disappears before it is
over.
3) They are good activators of the complement system.
B. Monoclonal Antibodies
1. Every plasma cell derived from the same B cell secretes antibodies against the same
antigen; these are monoclonal antibodies.
2. Monoclonal antibodies can be produced in vitro.
a. B lymphocytes are removed from the body (usually mice are used) and exposed to
a particular antigen.
b. Activated B lymphocytes are fused with myeloma cells (malignant plasma cells
that divide indefinitely).
c. Fused cells are called hybridomas because they result from two different cells
251
C.
D.
(hybrid) and one is cancerous, therefore the suffix “-oma.”
3. Monoclonal antibodies are useful because of their extreme specificity for only a
particular moledule.
4. They can be used to select out a specific molecule among many others.
5. Monoclonal antibodies are used for quick, reliable diagnosis of various conditions
such as pregnancy.
6. They identify infections, sort out different T cells, and distinguish between normal
and cancer cells.
7. They can distinguish cancerous from normal cells and can be used to carry isotopes or
toxic drugs to kill tumors.
Antibody Diversity (Science Focus box)
1. Immunologists and geneticists knew that each B cell makes an antibody especially
equipped to recognize the specific shape of a particular antigen.
2. However, what was not known was how the human genome contained enough geneic
information to permit the production of up to 2 million different antibody types
needed to combat all of the pathogens an individual is likely to encounter throughout
their life.
3. Susumu Tonegawa examined the DNA sequences of lymphoblasts and compared
them to mature B cells.
4. He found that the DNA segments coding for the variable and constant regions of the
antibodies were present in each mature antibody-secreting B cells, where they
randomly came together and coded for a specific variable region.
5. Tonegawa became the first Japanese scientist to win the Nobel Prize in Physiology or
Medicine.
T Cells and Cell-Mediated Immunity
1. Like B cells, T cells have unique antigen receptors, called the T cell receptor, or
TCR..
2. However, the receptors of cytotoxic and helper T cells cannot recognize antigen
present in the tissues, lymph, or blood.
3. Instead, antigen must be presented to them by an antigen-presenting cell (APC).
4. When an APC presents a viral or cancer cell antigen, the antigen is first linked to a
major histocompatibility complex (MHC) protein; together they are presented to a
T cell.
a. The importance of the MHC was recognized when it was discovered it contributes
to the difficulty of transplanting tissues from one person to another.
b. When a donor and recipient are histocompatible, it is likely a transplant will be
successful.
5. When a macrophage antigen is presented to a T cell, the T cell recognizes the antigen.
a. Once a helper T cell recognizes the antigen, it undergoes clonal expansion and
produces cytokines stimulating immune cells to remain active and perform their
functions.
b. Once a cytotoxic T cell is activated, it undergoes clonal expansion and destroys
any cell that possesses antigen if the cell bears the correct HLA antigen presented
earlier.
c. As the infection disappears, the immune reaction wanes and few cytokines are
produced.
252
6. Apoptosis occurs in the thymus if the T cell bears a receptor to recognize a self
antigen; if apoptosis does not occur, T-cell cancers result (i.e., lymphomas and
leukemias).
7. Types of T Cells
a. Cytotoxic T Cells
1) They destroy antigen-bearing cells (e.g., virus-infected or cancer cells).
2) They have storage vacuoles that contain perforin molecules.
3) Perforin molecules perforate a plasma membrane; water, salts, and enzymes
(called granzymes) then enter causing the cell to burst.
4) This is called cell-mediated immunity.
b. Helper T Cells regulate immunity by enhancing the response of other immune
cells.
1) When exposed to an antigen, they enlarge and secrete cytokines.
2) Cytokines stimulate the helper T cells to clone and other immune cells to
perform their functions.
c. HIV infections
1)
The primary host for an HIV is a helper T cell.
2)
The host hlepr T cell then produces viruses that go on to destroy
more helper T cells.
3) At first, the individual is able to stay ahead of the virus by producing
enough helper T cells to keep their number within the normal range.
4)
Gradually the T cell count drops to way below normal.
5)
The infected individual comes down with opportunistic infections.
6)
Now the individual has AIDS.
7) An HIV infection is presently a treatable disease, but the regimen is
difficult to maintain, and viral resistance to the mediciations is becoming
apparent.
E. Opportunitistic Infections and HIV (Health Focus box)
1. AIDS (acquired immunodeficiency syndrome) is caused by the destruction of the
immune system, followed by an HIV (human immunodeficiency virus) infection.
2. HIV eventually destroys the immune system cells and the person succumbs to
infections that would not cause disease in a person with a healthy immune system.
3. HIV kills helper T cells by directly infecting them, and also causes uninfected T cells
to dy by mechanisms, including apoptosis.
4. It may take up to ten years for an individuals helper T cells to become depleted so the
immune system can no longer organize a specific respons to opportunistic infections
(Ols).
5. Some of the illnesses HIV patients may be susceptible to are: Shingles, Candidiasis,
Pneumoctosis pneumonia, Kaposi’s sarcoma, toxoplasmic encephalitis,
Mycobacterium avium complex (MAC), and cytomegalovirus.
6. However, due to the development of powerful drug therapies, people infected with
HIV in the U.S. are suffering lower incidence of Ols than in the 1980s and 1990s.
F. Cytokines and Cancer Therapy
1. Cytokines are signaling molecules produced by either lymphocytes, monocytes or
other cells.
2. Cytokines stimulate white blood cell formation; they may work as adjunct therapy for
253
cancer and AIDS.
3. Interferon and interleukins are used to improve the ability of an individual’s T cells to
fight cancer.
4. Cancer cells with altered proteins on their cell surface should be attacked by cytotoxic
T cells.
5. Cytokines may awaken the immune system and lead to the destruction of cancer.
a. Researchers withdraw T cells from a patient and culture them in the presence of
interleukin.
b. The T cells are re-injected into the patient; doses of interleukin then maintain the
killer activity of the T cells.
6. Interleukin antagonists may help prevent skin or organ rejection, autoimmune
diseases, and allergies when used as adjuncts for vaccines.
33.4 Immunity Side Effects
A. Tissue Rejection
1. Tissue rejection occurs because cytotoxic T cells cause disintegration of foreign
tissue; this is a correct distinguishing between self and nonself.
2. Selection of compatible organs and administration of immunosuppressive drugs
prevent tissue rejection.
3. Transplanted organs should have the same type antigens as in the recipient.
4. Cyclosporine and tacrolimus both act by inhibiting the response of T cells to
cytokines.
5. Xenotransplantation, the transplantation of animal tissues and organs into human
beings, is another way to solve the problem of organ rejection.
B. Disorders of the Immune System
1. Autoimmune diseases result when cytotoxic T cells or antibodies mistakenly attack
the body’s own cells as if they bear foreign antigens.
2. The cause is not known but autoimmune diseases sometimes appear following
recovery from an infection.
3. In myasthenia gravis, the neuromuscular junctions do not work properly and muscular
weakness results.
4. In multiple sclerosis (MS), the myelin sheath of nerve fibers is attacked.
5. Persons with systemic lupus erythematosus present many symptoms before dying
from kidney damage.
6. Heart damage following rheumatic fever and type I diabetes are also autoimmune
diseases.
7. There are no cures for autoimmune diseases, but they are controlled by drugs.
C. Allergies
1. Allergies are hypersensitivities to substances such as pollen and other everyday
substances.
2. A response to these antigens, called allergens, usually involves tissue damage.
3. Immediate and delayed allergic responses are two of four possible responses.
a. Immediate allergic responses occur within seconds of contact with an allergen.
b. Coldlike symptoms are common.
c. IgE antibodies are attached to the plasma membrane of mast cells in tissues and
basophils in blood.
d. When an allergen attaches to IgE antibodies on these mast cells, they release large
254
amounts of histamine and other substances, which cause the cold symptoms or
even anaphylactic shock.
e. Anaphylactic shock is an immediate allergic response that occurs because the
allergen has entered the blood stream; it is characterized by a sudden, lifethreatening drop in blood pressure.
4. Allergy shots sometimes prevent the onset of allergic symptoms.
a. Injections of the allergen cause the body to build up high quantities of IgG
antibodies.
b. These combine with allergens received from the environment before they have a
chance to reach IgE antibodies located on the plasma membrane of mast cells and
basophils.
5. Delayed Allergic Response
a. Delayed allergic responses are initiated by sensitized memory T cells at the site
of allergen in the body.
b. The allergic response is regulated by the cytokines secreted by both T cells and
macrophages.
c. The tuberculin skin test is an example: positive test shows prior exposure to TB
bacilli but requires some time to develop reddening of tissue.
255
Chapter 34
34.1 Digestive Tracts
1. Most animals need to digest food into small molecules that can cross plasma
membranes.
2.
Digestion provides the energy needed to carry out routine metabolic activities and
maintain homeostasis.
3. The digestive tract ingests food, breaks down food into small molecules that can cross
plasma membranes, absorbs these nutrient molecules, and eliminates nondigestible
remains.
A. Incomplete Versus Complete Tracts
1. Planarians are organisms with an incomplete digestive tract, a single opening
(usually called a mouth).
a. Planaria are carnivorous and feed largely on smaller aquatic animals.
b. The digestive system contains only a mouth, a pharynx, and an intestine.
c. To feed, its pharynx extends far beyond the mouth to suck up minute quantities at
one time.
d. Digestive enzymes in the tract allow some extracellular digestion.
e. Digestion is finished intracellularly by cells that line the digestive cavity; food
then diffuses to nearby cells.
f. The digestive system lacks regions of specialized function.
g. The tapeworm, relatives of planaria, lack a digestive system altogether; they
absorb food through a body wall with modified microscopic projections that
absorb nutrients from the host.
2. In contrast, the earthworm has a complete digestive tract.
a. The digestive system is composed of a tube with a mouth and an anus.
b. Earthworms feed on decayed organic matter in the soil.
c. Different regions of the gut have specialized functions (e.g., ingestion, mechanical
digestion, etc.).
d. A muscular pharynx draws in food with sucking action.
e. The crop is storage area with expansive walls.
f. The gizzard has thick muscular walls to grind food.
g. Digestion occurs in the intestine, outside of cells or “extracellular.”
h. The surface area for absorption is increased by an intestinal fold called the
typhlosole.
i. The undigested remains exit the body at the anus.
B. Continuous Versus Discontinuous Feeders
1. Clams are continuous feeders, or filter feeders.
a. Water moves into a mantle cavity through an incurrent siphon and deposits
particles on gills.
b. Ciliary action moves particles to the labial palps which direct them into the mouth
and into the stomach.
c. Digestive enzymes from a digestive gland help amoeboid cells in the tract
complete digestion.
2. Marine fanworms are sessile filter feeders; only small particles are consumed while
large particles are rejected.
3. Baleen whales are active filter feeders; baleen (fringe) filters small krill from water.
256
4. Squids are an example of discontinuous feeders.
a. The head of a squid has ten arms; two arms seize the prey and bring it to the
squid’s mouth.
b. Beaklike jaws and a radula (toothy tongue) reduce the food to pieces.
c. The esophagus leads to a stomach that holds food until digestion is complete.
d. Discontinuous feeders require a storage region in the gut.
C. Adaptation to Diet
1. Animals are herbivores (eat plants only) or carnivores (eat only other animals) or
omnivores (eat both).
2. Invertebrates demonstrate a wide variety of diets.
3. Mammal dentition differs according to their mode of nutrition.
a. Omnivores, including humans, have dentition that accommodates both a
vegetable and meat diet.
b. Omnivore teeth include incisors (cutting and shearing), canines (tearing),
premolars (crushing), and molars (grinding).
c. Herbivores have large, flat premolars and molars for grinding plant matter.
d. Grazers (e.g., horses) have sharp incisors for clipping off grass and leaves.
e. Hard-to-digest plant material requires extensive grinding to disrupt the plant cell
walls.
f. Animals that feed on plants may have long and complex digestive tracts and
bacteria in their digestive tracts that can digest cellulose, producing nutrients
(glucose) that the animal can use.
g. Some grazers have a rumen to digest chewed grasses; partially digested cud is
then rechewed.
h. Carnivores’ pointed incisors and canines tear off pieces small enough to swallow.
i. Meat is rich in protein and fatty acids and is easier to digest than plant material.
j. Carnivores have fewer molars for grinding and a shorter digestive tract with less
specialization.
34.2 Human Digestive Tract
1. The human digestive tract is a complete tube-within-a-tube system.
2. Each part of the digestive system has a specific function.
3. Food is never found within the accessory glands, only within the tract itself.
4. The digestion of food in humans is an extracellular process.
5. Enzymes are secreted into the digestive tract by nearby glands which never contain
food themselves.
6. Digestion requires a cooperative effort by the production of hormones and the actions
of the nervous system.
A. Mouth
1. Food is chewed in the mouth (oral cavity) and mixed with saliva; the mouth is the
beginning of the digestive tract.
a. Three pairs of salivary glands secrete saliva by way of ducts into the mouth.
b. Salivary amylase is the enzyme that begins starch digestion; maltose is the
common end product.
c. Food is manipulated by a muscular tongue containing both touch and pressure
receptors.
d. Taste buds are located primarily on the tongue but also on the surface of the
257
mouth; these chemical receptors are stimulated by the chemical composition of
food.
e. Food is chewed and mixed with saliva to form a bolus in preparation for
swallowing.
B. The Pharynx and the Esophagus
1. The digestive and respiratory passages come together in the pharynx, and then
separate.
a. During swallowing, the pathway of air to the lungs could be blocked if food
entered the trachea.
b. The epiglottis covers the opening into the trachea as muscles move a bolus of
food through the pharynx into the esophagus.
2. The esophagus is a muscular tube that moves swallowed food to the stomach by
peristalsis, a rhythmical contraction that moves the contents along in tubular organs.
C. Stomach
1. The stomach stores liters of partially digested food, freeing humans from continual
eating.
2. Dr. William Beaumont revealed much of the stomach’s functions in the mid-1800s.
a. Alexis St. Martin had an opening (fistula) into the stomach, received from a
gunshot, through which Dr. Beaumont could observe stomach activity.
b. Beaumont collected the gastric juice produced by cells of gastric glands.
c. Walls of the stomach contract vigorously and mix food with juices secreted when
the food enters.
d. Beaumont found that gastric juice contains hydrochloric acid and another
digestive substance, pepsin.
e. He discovered gastric juices are produced independently of the protective mucous
secretions.
f. His careful work pioneered the study of the physiology of digestion.
3. Hydrochloric acid (HCl) lowers pH of the gastric contents to about 2.
a. The epithelial lining of the stomach has millions of gastric pits leading to gastric
glands.
b. This acid kills most bacteria and other microorganisms.
c. The low pH also stops the activity of salivary amylase and promotes the activity
of pepsin, an enzyme that digests large proteins to smaller peptides.
4. A thick layer of mucus protects the wall of the stomach from the HCl and pepsin.
5. Ulcers develop when the lining is exposed to digestive action; recent research
indicates this is usually due to infection by Helicobacter pylori bacteria.
6. Stomach contents, a thick, soupy mixture, is called chyme.
7. At the base of the stomach is a narrow opening controlled by a sphincter (a circular
muscle valve).
a. When the sphincter relaxes, chyme enters the first part of the small intestine,
called the duodenum; a neural reflex causes the sphincter to contract, closing off
the opening.
c. The sphincter relaxes and allows more chyme to enter the duodenum.
d. The slow, rhythmic pace with which chyme exits the stomach allows for thorough
digestion.
D. The Small Intestine
258
1. The human small intestine is a coiled muscular tube about three meters long.
2. As chyme enters the duodenum, proteins and carbohydrates are partly digested but
no fat digestion occurs.
3. Additional digestion is aided by secretions from the liver and the pancreas (below).
a. Bile is a secretion of the liver temporarily stored in the gallbladder before being
sent to duodenum; bile emulsifies fat (allows fat droplets to disperse in water).
4. The lining of the small intestine has ridges and furrows; these surfaces are covered by
villi (sing. villus); the small intestine is specialized for absorption by the huge number
of villi that line the intestinal wall.
a.
Villi are fingerlike projections; their surface cells are covered by
microvilli.
b.
Microvilli are minute projections, called the “brush border,” on the
surface of the cells of the intestinal villi.
c.
Ridges, furrows, villi, and microvilli greatly increase the effective surface
area of the small intestine.
5. Each villus contains blood vessels and a lymphatic capillary, called a lacteal..
a. A lacteal aids in the absorption of fats.
6. Sugars and amino acids enter villi cells and are absorbed into bloodstream.
7. Glycerol and fatty acids enter villi cells; reassembled into fat molecules, they move
into lacteals.
8. After nutrients are absorbed, they are eventually carried throughout the body by the
bloodstream.
E. Large Intestine
1. The large intestine has four parts: the cecum, colon, rectum, and anal canal.
2. It is larger in diameter but shorter in length than the small intestine and is the region
following the small intestine.
3. Appendix
a. The appendix is a fingerlike projection extending from the cecum, a blind sac at
the junction of the small and large intestine.
b. It may play a role in fighting infections.
c. If an infected appendix bursts, it results in general abdominal infection , called
peritonitis.
4. The colon is subdivided into the ascending, transverse, descending, and sigmoidal
colon.
5. About 1.5 liters of water enter the digestive tract daily from ingestion and another 8.5
liters enter from various secretions.
a. About 95% of this total liquid is reabsorbed by the small intestine; most of the
remainder is absorbed by cells of the colon.
b. If the water is not reabsorbed, it causes diarrhea which can cause a serious
dehydration and ion loss.
6. In addition to water, the large intestine absorbs salts and some vitamins, including the
vitamin K produced by intestinal bacteria.
7. The large intestine terminates at the anus, the opening of the anal canal.
8. Feces
a. Feces consists of about 75% water and 25% solid matter.
b. One-third of the the solid matter is intestinal bacteria.
259
c. The remainder is undigested wastes, fats, organic material, mucus, and dead cells
from the intestinal lining.
9. Intestinal polyps are small growths arising from the epithelial lining.
a. Whether they are benign or cancerous, polyps can be removed surgically.
b. A low-fat, high-fiber diet promotes regularity and may provide protection against
mutagenic agents.
F. Three Accessory Organs
1. The Pancreas
a. The pancreas lies deep within the abdominal cavity, just below the stomach, and
rests on the posterior abdominal wall.
b. It is an elongated and somewhat flattened organ.
c. As an endocrine gland, it secretes glucagon and insulin hormone into the
bloodstream.
d. As an exocrine gland, it secretes pancreatic juice.
1) Pancreatic juice contains sodium bicarbonate that neutralizes acidic chyme.
2) Pancreatic enzymes digest carbohydrates, fats and proteins.
2. The Liver
a. The liver, the largest gland in the body, fills the top of the abdominal cavity, just
under the diaphragm.
b. The liver has numerous functions:
1) It detoxifies blood by removing and metabolizing poisonous substances.
2) It makes plasma proteins including albumin and fibrinogen.
3) It destroys old red blood cells and converts hemoglobin to bilirubin and
biliverdin in bile.
4) It produces bile stored in the gallbladder before it enters the duodenum to
emulsify fats.
5) It stores glucose as glycogen and breaks down glycogen to maintain a constant
blood glucose concentration.
6) The liver produces urea from amino groups and ammonia.
c. Blood vessels from both the large and small intestines lead to the liver as the
hepatic portal vein.
d. The liver maintains the blood glucose level at 0.1% by removing glucose from the
hepatic portal vein to store as glycogen; when needed, glycogen is broken down
and glucose re-enters the hepatic vein.
e. Amino acids can be converted to glucose but deamination (removal of amino
groups) must occur.
f. By a complex metabolic pathway, the liver converts amino groups to urea, the
nitrogenous breakdown product of amino acids.
g. Urea is the most common human nitrogenous waste; it is transported by the blood
to the kidneys.
3. Liver Disorders
a. Jaundice is a symptom involving a yellowish skin due to a large amount of
bilirubin in blood.
1) Jaundice can also result from hepatitis, inflammation of the liver.
b. Viral hepatitis is a viral liver infection.
1) Hepatitis A results from eating contaminated food.
260
2) Hepatitis B and C are spread by blood transfusions, kidney dialysis, and
unsterile needle use.
3) All three can be caused from sexual contact.
c. Cirrhosis is a chronic disease where the liver tissue is replaced by fatty tissue and
then scar tissue; alcoholics provide too much alcohol for the liver to break down.
4. The Gallbladder
a. The gallbladder is a pear-shaped, muscular sac attached to the surface of the liver.
b. Bile, produced in the liver, is stored in the gallbladder.
c. When needed, bile leaves the gallbladder and goes into the duodenum via the
common bile duct.
G.
Wall of the Digestive Tract (Health Focus box)
 The wall of the digestive tract has four layers.
1.
Mucosa (mucous membrane)
a. The mucosa is the first layer of the wall next to the lumen.
b. The mucosa produces mucus, which protects the wall from the digestive
enzymes inside the lumen.
c. Diverticulosis is the condition in which portions of the mucosa have pushed
through the other layers and formed pouches where food can collect.
d. When the pouches become inflamed or infected, the condition is called
diverticulitis.
2.
Submucosa
a. The submucosa is the second layer in the digestve wall.
b. This layer is a broad band of loose connective tissue that contains blood
vessels, lymphatic vessels, and nerves.
c. Because the submucosa contains blood vessels, it can be the site of an
inflammatory response that leads to inflammatory bowel disease (IBD), which is
categorized by chronic diarrhea, abdominal pain, fever, and weight loss.
3.
Muscularis
a. The muscularis is the third layer of the digestive tract wall.
b. This layer contains two layers of smooth muscle.
c. The contraction of these muscles accounts for movement of digested food
from the esophagus to the anus.
d. The muscularis can be associated with Irritable Bowel Syndrome (IBS), in which
contractions of the wall cause abdominal pain, constipation, and/or diarrhea.
4.
Serosa
a. The serosa is the fourth layer of the digestive tract wall.
b. This layer secretes a serous flude and is part of the internal lining of
the abdominal cavity.
c. An inflamed appendix (appendicitis) has to be removed because, should the
appendix burst, the result can be peritonitis, a life-threatening infection of the
peritoneum.
34.3 Digestive Enzymes
1. Salivary amylase is the enzyme that begins starch digestion; maltose is the common
end product.
a. Maltose cannot be absorbed in the small intestine; additional digestive action
breaks the maltose into glucose, which can be absorbed.
261
2. Protein digestion begins in the stomach.
a. Pepsinogen is converted to pepsin when exposed to the HCl in the stomach;
pepsin breaks proteins into smaller peptides.
3. Starch, proteins, nucleic acids, and fats are enzymatically broken down in the small
intestine.
a. Pancreatic amylase digests starch to maltose.
b. Trypsin, also a pancreatic enzyme, digests protein to peptides.
c. Peptidases and maltase, produced by the small intestine, complete the digestion
of protein to amino acids and starch to glucose, respectively.
d. Lipase, another pancreatic enzyme, digests fat droplets to glycerol and fatty acids.
34.4 Nutrition
A. Carbohydrates
1. Carbohydrates are present in food in the form of sugars, starch, and fiber.
2. After being absorbed from the digestive tract into bloodstream, all sugars are
converted to glucose for transport in the blood and use by cells.
3. Good sources of starch are: beans, pease, cereal, grains, and potatoes.
4. Fiber includesvarious undigestible carbohydrates derived from plants.
a. Food sources rich in fiber are: beans, peas, nuts, fruits, vegetables, and wholegrain products.
b. Fiber is not a nutrient because it canot be digested to small molecules that enter
the bloodstream.
c. Insoluble fiber (e.g., as found in wheat bran) has a laxative effect and may guard
against colon cancer.
d. Soluble fiber (e.g., as found in oat bran) combines with bile acids and cholesterol
in the intestine and prevents their absorption.
e. The recommended daily intake of fiber is 25 g for women and 38 g for men. The
average American is consuming 15 g of fiber per day.
5. Complex carbohydrates (e.g., whole grain cereals, breads, etc.) are recommended
because they are digested to sugars and contain fiber.
B. Lipids
1. Triglycerides (fats and oils) supply energy for cells, but fat is stored for the long
term in the body.
2. Nutritionists recommend that people include unsaturated (i.e. canola and soybean oil),
rather than saturated (i.e. butter, meat, cheese), fats in their diets.
3. Cholesterol is a lipid and can be synthesized by the body.
a. Cholesterol is not found in plant foods; only animal foods (chesse, egg yolk,
liver, shrimp and lobster) are rich in cholesterol.
4. Trans fatty acids are more likely to cause CV disease than saturated fats—any
packaged goods that contain partially hydrogenated vegetable oils (“shortening”) will
likely contain trans fat.
C. Proteins
1. Dietary proteins are digested to amino acids, which cells use to synthesize hundred
262
of cellular proteins.
2. Of the 20 different amino acids required for protein synthesis, 8 (9 in children) cannot
be synthesized by the body and are thus termed essential amino acids.
3. Some foods do not provide all the essential amino acids—vegetarians should combine
two or more plant products to acquire all the essential amino acids.
4. A high-protein diet can harm the body.
a. Dehydration can occur.
b. Calcium loss in the urine can occur, leading to kidney stones.
D. Diet and Obesity
1. Type 2 Diabetes
a. Diabetes mellitus is indicated by the presence of glucose in the urine.
b. Glocuse has spilled over into the urine because there is too high a level of
glucose in the blood.
c. In type 2 diabetes, the person is usually obese and displays iparied insulin
production and insulin resistance.
d. The body’s cells can’t take up glucose, even when insulin is present; the blood
level exceeds the mornal level and glucose appears in the urine.
e. Type 2 diabetes is increasing rapidly in most industrial countries of the world.
f. A healthy diet, increased physical activity, and weight loss have been seen to
improve the ability of insulin to function properly in type 2 diabetes.
2. Cardiovascular Disease
a. Cardiovascula disease (including hypertension, heart attack, and stroke) is
among the leading causes of death in the United States.
b. Cardiovascular is often due to arteries blocked by plaque.
c. Consuming saturated fats tend to raise LDL cholesterol levels, while eating
unsaturated fats lowers LDL cholesterol levels.
d. The American Heart Association recommends limiting total cholesterol intake
to 300 mg per day.
E. Vitamins and Minerals
1. Vitamins are essential organic compounds the body cannot make but still requires for
metabolic activities.
a. Many vitamins are portions of coenzymes: e.g., niacin is part of NAD+ and
riboflavin is a part of FAD.
b. Coenzymes are needed in small amounts because they are used repeatedly.
c. Vitamin A is not a coenzyme but a precursor for the visual pigment that prevents
night blindness.
d. Lack of vitamins results in vitamin deficiencies.
e. The 13 vitamins are divided into those that are fat soluble and those that are water
soluble.
2. Humans require 20 minerals (e.g., calcium, phosphorus).
a. They are constituents of cells and body fluids and structural components of
tissues.
b. Calcium is needed to build bones and teeth and for nerve conduction and muscle
contraction.
c. Many people consume too much sodium, which can cause water retention and
263
contribute to hypertension.
264
Chapter 35
35.1 Gas Exchange Surfaces
Respiration is the sequence of events that results in gas exchange between the environment and
the body’s cells.
1. Ventilation (breathing) includes inspiration (bringing air in) and expiration (moving
air out).
2. External respiration involves gas exchange with the external environment in the
lungs.
3. Internal respiration involves gas exchange between the blood and tissue fluid.
4. An effective gas exchange region must be moist, thin, and large in relation to the size of
the body.
5. Some animals are small and shaped to allow their surface to be an adequate
gas-exchange surface.
6. Larger animals are complex and have a specialized gas-exchange surface.
7. Diffusion improves with vascularization; gas delivery to cells is promoted if the blood
contains hemoglobin.
A. External Gas-Exchange Surfaces
1. It is more difficult for animals to obtain O2 from water than from air.
a. Water fully saturated with air contains only a fraction of the O2 as the same
volume of air.
b. Water is more dense than air; therefore aquatic animals must use more energy to
respire.
c. Fishes use up to 25% of their energy to respire, whereas land mammals use only
1–2% of their energy output.
2. Hydras and planaria have a large surface area in comparison to their size.
a. Gas exchange occurs directly across their body surface.
b. The hydra’s outer cell layer contacts the environment; an inner layer exchanges
gases with the water in the gastrovascular cavity.
c. The flat body of planaria permits cells to exchange gases with the external
environment.
3. A tubular shape and vascularized parapodia extensions in polychaete worms provide
surface areas for diffusion.
4. The earthworm is an invertebrate that uses its body surface for respiration.
a. An earthworm expends energy to secrete mucus and release fluids from excretory
pores.
b. The earthworm is also behaviorally adapted to stay in the moist soil during the
day when air is driest.
5. Aquatic animals often pass water over gills.
a. Gills are finely divided and vascularized outgrowths of either an outer or inner
body surface.
b. Among clams, water is drawn into the mantle cavity and flows over gills.
6. Insects have a system of air tubes called tracheae through which oxygen is delivered
directly to the cells without entering the blood.
7. Terrestrial vertebrates usually have lungs, which are vascularized outgrowths fron the
lower pharyngeal region.
a. The lungs of birds and mammals are subdivided into smaller passageways and
265
spaces.
B. The Gills of a Fish
1. Decapod gills are located in brachial chambers under the exoskeleton; water is
circulated by special mouthparts.
2.
Fish gills are outward extensions of the pharynx organized into arches.
3.
Ventilation is the result of the combined action of the mouth and gill covers.
4. When the mouth is open, the opercula are closed and water is drawn in; the mouth
then closes and the opercula open, drawing water from the pharynx through gill slits
located between the gill arches.
5. To the outside of the gill arches are gill filaments folded into platelike lamellae, each
of which contains capillaries; the result is a tremendous surface area for gas
exchange.
a.
Blood in capillaries of gill lamellae flows in a direction opposite to
that of water.
b.
This countercurrent flow of water and blood increases the
amount of O2 and CO2 exchanged.
c.
Such a countercurrent mechanism extracts about 80–90% of the
initial dissolved O2 in the water.
C.
The Tracheal System of Insects
1. Insects and certain terrestrial arthropods utilize air tubes called tracheae.
a. Oxygen enters a tracheal system at spiracles, which are valvelike openings at each
side of the body.
b. The tracheae branch and rebranch to end in tiny tracheoles that are in direct
contact with body cells.
c. Larger insects have air sacs located near major muscles to keep air moving in and
out of the trachea.
d. The tracheae effectively deliver adequate oxygen to the cells of insects; the
circulatory system has no role in gas transport.
2.
Larger insects have air sacs located near major muscles.
a.
Contraction and relaxation of these muscles draw in and empty air.
3. For insects that spend their larval or adult stages in water, the tracheae do not receive
air by way of spiracles.
a. Diffusion of oxygen across the body wall supplies the tracheae with oxygen.
D. The Lungs of Humans
1. The human respiratory system includes everything that conducts air to and from the
lungs; the lungs lie deep within the thoracic cavity for protection against drying.
2. Air moves into the nose, crosses the pharynx, flows through the glottis (an opening
into the larynx or voice box) to the trachea, bronchi, bronchioles, and finally the
alveoli, where gas exchange occurs.
a. This process filters debris, warms the air, and adds moisture.
b. When the air reaches the lungs, it is at body temperature and is saturated with
water.
c. The trachea and bronchi are lined with cilia that beat upward carrying mucus,
dust, and any food particles that went the wrong route.
d. The hard and soft palates separate the nasal cavities from the mouth.
e. When food is being swallowed, the glottis is closed by the epiglottis, and the soft
266
palate covers the entrance of the nasal passages into the pharynx.
f. At the edges of the glottis are vocal cords; as air passes across them, these tissues
vibrate creating sounds.
g. From the larynx, air flows down the trachea to the bronchi.
1) The larynx is held open by cartilage that forms the Adam’s apple.
2) The trachea walls are reinforced with C-shaped rings of cartilage.
h. The trachea divides into two bronchi; C-shaped rings of cartilage diminish as
bronchi branch.
i. Within the lungs, each bronchus branches into numerous bronchioles that
conduct air to alveoli.
j. Alveoli are microscopic air sacs.
E. Questions About Tobacco, Smoking, and Health (Science Focus box)
1. There is no safe way to smoke. All cigarettes can damage the human body.
2. Cigarette smoking contains nicotine, which is addictive.
3. Smoking does cause cancer: Tobacco use account for about one-third of all cancer
deaths in the United States.
4. Cigarette smoke affects the lungs by causing chronic bronchitis, emphysema, and
chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (as well as cancer).
5. Smokers have a “smoker’s cough” because cigarette smoke contains chemicals that
irritate the iar passages and lungs.
6. If you smoke, but don’t inhale, there is still danger. They are breathing the second
hand smoke from other smokers and are still at risk for lung cancer.
7. Cigarette smoking affects the heart by increasing the risk of heart disease.
8. Smoking while pregnant is linked to a greater chance of miscarriage, premature
delivery, stillbirth, infant death, low birth weight, and sudden infant death syndrome
(SIDS).
9. Some of the short-term effects of smoking cigarettes include shortness of breath and
nagging caugh, diminished ability to smell and taste, premature aging of skin, and
increased risk of sexual impotence in men. Long-term effects include cancer, heart
disease, neurysms, bronchitis, emphysema, stroke.
10. Environmental tobacco smoke (ETS) causes about 3,000 lung cancer deaths and
about 35,000 – 40,000 deaths from heart disease each year (in nonsmokers).
11. Chewing tobacco and snuff are not safe alternatives to cigarette smoking. The risk of
other cancers is still increased.
35.2 Breathing and Transport of Gases
A. Breathing
1. Inspiration (or inhalation) is the act of moving air into the lungs.
2. Expiration (or exhalation) is the act of moving air out of the lungs.
3. Mammals have both a rib cage and a diaphragm.
a. The diaphragm is a horizontal muscle that divides the thoracid cavity from the
abdominal cavity.
b.
As the thoracic cavity expands, the lung volume increases; air
flows in due to the difference in air pressure.
c. By lowering the ribs, pressure is exerted on the lungs, which forces air out.
d. All terrestrial vertebrates, except birds, use a tidal ventilation mechanism; air
moves in and out by the same route.
267
1) The lungs of reptiles, amphibians and mammals are not completely emptied
during each breathing cycle.
2) With incomplete ventilation, entering air mixes with used air in the lungs.
3) This conserves moisture but decreases gas-exchange efficiency.
e. The high oxygen requirements of flying birds requires a one-way ventilation
mechanism.
1) Incoming air is carried past the lungs by a trachea that takes it to a set of
posterior air sacs.
2) Air then passes forward through the lungs into a set of anterior air sacs and is
finally expelled.
3) The one-way flow means that oxygen-rich air does not mix with used air; this
maximizes gas exchange.
4. Adults typically have a breathing rate of 12 to 20 ventilations per minute.
5. The rhythm of ventilation is controlled by a respiratory center in the medulla
oblongata of the brain.
6. Even though the respiratory center automatically controls the rate and depth of
breathing, the activity can be influenced by nervous and chemical inputs.
a. The chemoreceptors in the carotid bodies, located in the carotid arteries, and in
the aortic bodies, located in the aorta, will stimulate the respiratory center during
intense exercise.
B. Gas Exchange and Transport
1. Respiration includes external and internal respiration.
2. Gas exchange between the air in the alveoli and the blood in the pulmonary
capillaries is primarily by diffusion.
3. The amount of pressure each gas exerts is called the partial pressure (PO2 and PCO2)
a. CO2 diffuses from higher concentration in the blood across the walls of alveolar
capillaries to lower concentration in the air in the alveoli.
b. Oxygen diffuses from higher concentration in alveoli across the walls of the
alveolar capillaries to the lower concentration in the blood.
C. Transport of Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide
1. Most O2 entering the pulmonary capillaries combines with hemoglobin (Hb) to form
oxyhemoglobin (HbO2).
Hb +
O2
→
HbO2
deoxyhemoglobin
oxygen
oxyhemoglobin
2. Each hemoglobin molecule has four polypeptide chains; each chain folds over an
iron-containing heme.
a. Each RBC has 250 million hemoglobin molecules.
b. Each RBC can carry a billion molecules of O2 oxyhemoglobin.
c. The iron atom of a heme group loosely binds with an O2 molecule.
3. The oxygen-binding ability of hemoglobin can be graphed.
a. The percentage of oxygen-binding sites of hemoglobin carrying O2 varies with
partial pressure of O2 in the immediate environment.
b. The partial pressure is the amount of pressure exerted by a particular gas among
all of the gases present.
c. At a normal partial pressure of O2 in lungs, hemoglobin becomes practically
saturated with O2.
268
d. At the O2 partial pressures in the tissues, oxyhemoglobin quickly unloads much
of its O2.
HbO2 → Hb + O2
e. The acid pH and warmer temperature of the tissues also promote this dissociation.
4. In tissues, some hemoglobin combines with CO2 to form carbaminohemoglobin.
5. However, most CO2 is transported in the form of bicarbonate ion (HCO3 -).
a. First, CO2 combines with water, forming carbonic acid (H2CO3).
b. This then dissociates to a H+ and a HCO3CO2 + H2O → H2CO3 → H+ + HCO3carbonic acid bicarbonate ion
c. Carbonic anhydrase, an enzyme in red blood cells, speeds this reaction.
d. Release of H+ ions could drastically lower blood pH; however, the hydrogen ions
are absorbed by the globin portions of hemoglobin and the HCO3- diffuses out of
the RBCs and into the plasma.
e. Hemoglobin combines with H+ ions as reduced hemoglobin (HHb); HHb plays a
vital role in maintaining normal blood pH.
f. As blood enters the pulmonary capillaries, most of the CO2 is in plasma as HCO3-.
g. The little free CO2 remaining diffuses out of the blood across the walls of the
pulmonary capillaries and into alveoli.
h. Any decrease in plasma CO2 concentration causes the following reaction also
catalyzed by carbonic anhydrase:
H+ + HCO3- → H2CO3 → CO2 + H2O
i. At the same time, hemoglobin unloads H+ and HHb becomes Hb.
35.3 Respiration and Health
A. Lower Respiratory Tract Disorders
1. Acute bronchitis is an infection of the primary and secondary bronchi and is usually
preceded by a viral upper respiratory infection.
2. Pneumonia
a. Pneumonia is usually caused by a bacterial or viral lung infection.
b. The bronchi and alveoli fill with fluid.
c. Pneumonia can be localized in specific lobules.
d. AIDS patients are subject to a rare form of pneumonia caused by the protozoan
Pneumocystis carinii.
3. Pulmonary Tuberculosis
a. Pulmonary tuberculosis is caused by the tubercle bacillus, a type of bacterium.
b. A TB skin test is a highly diluted extract of the bacilli injected into the patient’s
skin; if a person has been exposed, the immune response will cause an area of
inflammation.
c. Bacilli that invade lung tissue are isolated by the lung tissue in tiny capsules
called tubercles.
d. If the person is highly resistant, the imprisoned bacteria die.
e. If resistance is low, the bacteria can eventually be liberated.
f. A chest X ray detects active tubercles.
g. Appropriate drug therapy can ensure localization and the eventual destruction of
live bacteria.
269
h. Resurgence has accompanied increases in AIDS, homeless, and poor.
i. The new strains are resistant to standard antibiotics.
C. Disorders
1. Pulmonary Fibrosis
a. Inhaling particles of silica, coal dust, fiberglass and asbestos can lead to
pulmonary fibrosis.
b. These agents result in a build up of fibrous connective tissue—the lungs then
cannot inflate properly.
c. Asbestos was used widely for fireproofing and widespread exposure occurred; it
is estimated that a possible 2 million deaths could be caused by asbestos between
1990 and 2020.
2. Chronic Bronchitis
a. In chronic bronchitis, airways are inflamed and filled with mucus; often a cough
brings mucus up.
b. The bronchi degenerate, losing cilia and normal cleansing action and making an
infection likely.
c. Smoking cigarettes and cigars is the most common cause, but other pollutants are
also involved.
3. Emphysema
a. Emphysema is a chronic and incurable disorder; it involves distended and
damaged alveoli.
b. The lungs often balloon due to trapped air and ineffective alveoli.
c. Emphysema is often preceded by chronic bronchitis.
d. The elastic recoil of the lungs is reduced and the airways are narrowed, making
expiration difficult.
e. Since the surface area for gas exchange is reduced, insufficient O2 reaches the
heart and the brain.
f. This triggers the heart to work furiously to force more blood through the lungs;
this can then lead to a heart condition.
g. Lack of oxygen to the brain makes the patient feel depressed, sluggish, and
irritable.
h. Exercise, drug therapy, and supplemental oxygen may relieve the symptoms and
slow the progress.
4. Asthma
a. Asthma is a disease of the bronchi and bronchioles; it causes wheezing,
breathlessness, and a cough.
b. The airways are sensitive to specific allergens (e.g., pollen, dust, cold air, etc.)
c. Exposure to the irritant causes the smooth muscle in bronchi to spasm; chemical
mediators given off by the immune cells in the bronchioles result in the spasms.
d. Bronchial inflammation reduces the diameter of the airways.
e. Special inhalers can control the inflammation and sometimes prevent an attack;
other inhalers can stop muscle spasms.
5. Lung Cancer
a. Formerly more common in men, lung cancer now surpasses breast cancer as the
cause of death in women due to smoking.
b. Lung cancer develops in the lung tissue in steps.
270
1) First, a thickening and callusing of the cells lining the bronchi appears.
2) Cilia are lost so it becomes impossible to prevent dust and dirt from settling in
the lungs.
3) Next, cells with atypical nuclei appear in the callused lining.
4) A tumor consisting of disordered cells with atypical nuclei develops as cancer
in situ (cancer at one location).
5) When some tumor cells break free and penetrate other tissue (metastasis), the
cancer spreads.
6) A tumor may grow until the bronchus is blocked, cutting off the air supply to
the lungs.
7) The entire lung then collapses; the trapped secretions become infected causing
pneumonia or lung abscess.
c. The only treatment is surgery (pneumonectomy) where a lobe or whole lung is
removed before metastasis occurs.
271
Chapter 36
36.1 Excretion and the Environment
A. Nitrogenous Waste Products
1. The breakdown of nucleic acids and amino acids results in nitrogenous wastes.
2. Amino acids derived from protein synthesize body proteins or nitrogen-containing
molecules.
3. Unused amino acids are oxidized to generate energy or are stored as fats or
carbohydrates.
4. In both cases, amino groups (—NH2) must be removed.
5. Nitrogenous wastes are excreted as ammonia, urea, or uric acid, depending on the
species.
6. The removal of amino groups requires a fairly constant amount of energy that differs
for each conversion.
7. Amino groups removed from amino acids form ammonia (NH3) by adding a third
hydrogen ion (H+).
a. This requires little or no energy.
b. Ammonia is quite toxic but it is water soluble; it requires the most water to wash
it away from the body.
c. Bony fishes, aquatic invertebrates, and amphibians excrete this ammonia through
gills and skin surfaces.
8. Terrestrial amphibians and mammals usually excrete urea as their main nitrogenous
waste.
a. Urea is much less toxic than ammonia; excreted in a moderately concentrated
solution, it also conserves body water.
b. Production of urea requires energy; it is produced in the liver as a product of the
energy-requiring urea cycle.
c. In the urea cycle, carrier molecules take up carbon dioxide and two molecules of
ammonia, finally releasing urea.
9. Insects, reptiles, and birds excrete uric acid as their main nitrogenous waste.
a. Uric acid is not very toxic and is poorly soluble in water; uric acid is readily
concentrated for water conservation.
b. In reptiles and birds, a dilute solution of uric acid passes from the kidneys to the
cloaca, a common reservoir for products of the digestive, urinary, and
reproductive systems.
c. After any water is absorbed by the cloaca, the uric acid passes out with the feces.
d. Reptiles and bird embryos are enclosed in eggshells; the uric acid that builds up is
nontoxic in storage.
e. Uric acid is synthesized by enzymatic reactions using even more ATP than urea
synthesis.
f. Therefore, there is a trade-off between water conservation and energy
expenditure.
B. Excretory Organs Among Invertebrates

Most animals have tubular organs to regulate salt-water balance and excrete metabolic
wastes.
1. Planaria have two strands of branching excretory tubules that open to the outside
through excretory pores.
272
a.
C.
Located along the tubules are flame cells (photonephridia) containing tufts of
cilia that appear to flicker.
b. The cilia beat back and forth, propelling a hypotonic fluid through canals
emptying at the body surface.
c. This system functions in the excretion of excess water and wastes.
2. An earthworm’s body is divided into segments and nearly every segment has a pair of
nephridia.
a. A nephridium is a tubule with a ciliated opening, the nephridiostome, and an
excretory nephridiopore.
b. Fluid from the body cavity is propelled through this tubule by cilia.
c. Nutrients are reabsorbed and carried away by the network of capillaries
surrounding the tubules.
d. The nephridia form urine that contains only metabolic wastes, salts, and water.
e. Each day, an earthworm produces urine equal to 60% of its body weight, enough
water that it can safely excrete ammonia.
3. Insects have a unique excretory system consisting of long, thin Malpighian tubules
attached to the gut.
a. The Malpighian tubules take up metabolic wastes and water from the
hemolymph—these follow the salt gradient established by active transport of K+
ions.
b. At the rectum, water and other useful substances are reabsorbed.
c. Uric acid remains and eventually passes out the anus.
d. Insects that live in the water or that eat large quantities of moist food reabsorb
very little water.
e. Insects in dry climates reabsorb most of the water and excrete a dry, semisolid
mass of uric acid.
f. Crayfish (an arthropod) have antennal glands (green glands) in the head which
perform selective secretion of certain salts.
g. In shrimp and pillbugs, the excretory organs, called maxillary glands, are located
in the maxillary segments.
h. Arachnids (spiders, scorpions, etc.) have coxal glands used in excretion near the
joint of one or more appendages.
Osmoregulation Among Aquatic Vertebrates
1. Most vertebrates osmoregulate – maintain particular ion concentrations in their
blood.
2. The excretory system regulates body fluid concentrations by regulating the water
and ions in body fluids.
3. This regulation depends on the concentration of mineral ions (i.e., Na+, CI-, K+, and
HCO3- ).
4. Only cartilaginous fishes (sharks, rays) and marine invertebrates (molluscs,
arthropods) have body fluids that are isotonic to seawater, yet those fluids do not
contain the same amount of salt as seawater
a. Their blood has high concentrations of urea to match the tonicity of seawater; for
some unknown reason, this is not toxic to the fishes.
5. Marine bony fishes have a moderate salt level compared to seawater; their common
ancestor probably evolved in fresh water.
273
a.
They are prone to water loss and could become dehydrated, therefore they
constantly drink seawater.
b. They swallow water equal to 1% of their weight every hour to counteract
dehydration.
c. To remove excess salt, they actively transport Na+ and CI- ions (salt) at the gills.
6. The body fluids of freshwater bony fish are hypertonic to freshwater; they passively
gain water.
a. Freshwater fishes never drink water.
b. They take in salts at the gills and pass large quantities of dilute, hypotonic urine.
c. They discharge a quantity of urine equal to one-third their body weight each day.
d. Because this causes them to lose salts, they actively import Na+ and CI- ions into
the blood at the gills.
D. Osmoregulation Among Terrestrial Vertebrates
1. The kangaroo rat lives in the desert and is threatened by dehydration.
a. Their fur prevents loss of water, and during the day, it remains in a cool burrow.
b. The kangaroo rat have convoluted nasal passages that absorb moisture from
exhaled air.
c. Most terrestrial animals must drink fresh water often; however, the kangaroo rat
completely avoids drinking water.
1) It forms a very concentrated urine.
2) It defecates fecal matter that is almost completely dry.
3) It meets its water requirements with the metabolic water derived from aerobic
respiration.
2. Some terrestrial animals that live near oceans are able to drink seawater despite its
high osmolarity.
a. Such birds and reptiles have a salt gland that excretes concentrated salt solution.
36.2 Urinary System in Humans

The human urinary system is an organ system with four parts.
1. The human kidneys are two bean-shaped, reddish brown organs, each about the size
of a fist.
a. They are located on either side of the vertebral column, below the diaphragm, and
partly protected by the lower rib cage.
b. The kidneys are the sites of urine formation.
2. Each kidney is connected to a ureter; each conducts urine from a kidney to the
urinary bladder.
3. The urinary bladder stores urine until it is voided from the body through the
urethra.
4. A single urethra conducts urine from the urinary bladder to the exterior of the body.
5. The male urethra runs through the penis and also carries semen; in females, it opens
the ventral to the vaginal opening.
A. Kidneys
1. If a kidney is sectioned longitudinally, three major regions can be distinguished.
a. The renal cortex is the thin, outer region and it appears granular.
b. The renal medulla consists of the striped, pyramid-shaped regions that lie on the
inner side of the cortex.
c. The renal pelvis is the innermost hollow chamber.
274
B.
C.
D.
E.
2. Each human kidney is composed of about one million tiny tubules called nephrons.
3. Some nephrons are located primarily in the cortex but others dip down into the
medulla.
Nephrons
1. Each nephron is comprised of several parts.
2. The end of a nephron pushes in to form a cuplike structure called the glomerular
capsule.
a. The outer layer is composed of simple squamous epithelium.
b. The inner layer is made of specialized cells that allow easy passage of molecules.
3. Nearest the glomerular capsule is the proximal convoluted tubule, lined by cells
with many mitochondria and tightly packed microvilli.
4. Simple squamous epithelium forms the loop of the nephron, the middle portion of
the nephron tubule with a descending and ascending limb.
5. The distal convoluted tubule is the distal portion of the nephron tubule; several join
to deliver the urine into collecting ducts.
6. The loop of nephron and the collecting duct give pyramids of the medulla their
striped appearance.
7. Each nephron has its own blood supply.
a. The renal artery branches into smaller arteries, which then branch into afferent
arterioles, one for each nephron.
b. Each afferent arteriole divides to form a capillary bed or glomerulus.
c. The glomerular capillaries drain into an efferent arteriole which branches into a
peritubular network.
d. The peritubular capillaries drain into a venule; the venules from many nephrons
drain into a small vein; small veins join to form the renal vein, a vessel that enters
the inferior vena cava.
Urine Formation
1. Urine production requires three distinct processes.
2. Glomerular filtration occurs at the glomerular capsule.
3. Tubular reabsorption occurs at the proximal convoluted tubule.
4. Tubular secretion occurs at the distal convoluted tubule.
Glomerular Filtration
1. When blood enters the glomerulus, blood pressure moves small molecules from the
glomerulus across the inner membrane of the glomerular capsule into the lumen of
the glomerular capsule; this is glomerular filtration.
2. The glomerular walls are 100 times more permeable than the walls of most
capillaries.
3. Molecules that leave the blood and enter the glomerular capsules are the glomerular
filtrate.
4. Plasma proteins and blood cells are too large to be part of the glomerular filtrate.
5. Failure to restore fluids would soon cause death from loss of water, nutrients, and low
blood pressure.
Tubular Reabsorption
1. Tubular reabsorption of fluids from the nephron back to the blood occurs through
the walls of the proximal convoluted tubule.
2. Reabsorption recovers much of the glomerular filtrate.
275
a. The osmolarity of the blood equals the filtrate so osmosis of water does not occur.
b. Sodium ions are actively reabsorbed; chlorine ions follow passively.
c. This changes the osmolarity of the blood so that water moves passively from the
tubule back to the blood.
d. About 60–70% of salt and water are reabsorbed at the proximal convoluted
tubule.
3. Cells of the proximal convoluted tubule have numerous microvilli, increasing the
surface area for absorption, and numerous mitochondria, which supply the energy
needed for active transport.
4. Only molecules with carrier molecules for them are reabsorbed.
5. If there is more glucose, for example, than carriers, excess glucose will appear in the
urine.
6. In diabetes mellitus, there is a too much glucose because the liver fails to store
glucose as glycogen.
F. Tubular Secretion
1. Tubular secretion moves substances from the blood to the tubular lumen by other
than glomerular filtration.
2. Secretion back into the filtrate is primarily associated with the distal convoluted
tubule.
3. This helps rid the body of potentially harmful compounds that were not filtered into
the glomerular capsule.
4. Uric acid, hydrogen ions, ammonia, and penicillin are eliminated this way.
G. The Kidneys and Homeostasis
1. The kidneys regulate the water balance of the blood, thereby maintaining the blood
volume and blood pressure.
H. Maintaining the Salt-Water Balance
1. The long loop of nephron is comprised of a descending limb and an ascending limb.
2. Salt (NaCl) passively diffuses out of the lower portion of the ascending limb, but the
upper, thick portion of the limb actively transports salt out into the tissue of the outer
renal medulla.
3. Less salt is available for transport from the tubule as fluid moves up the thick portion
of the ascending limb; the ascending limb is impermeable to water.
4. Urea leaks from the lower portion of the collecting ducts, causing the concentration in
the lower medulla to be highest.
5. Because of the solute concentration gradient within the renal medulla, water leaves
the descending limb of the loop of nephron along its length.
6. The decreasing water concentration in the descending limb encounters an increasing
solute concentration; this is a countercurrent mechanism.
7. Fluid received by a collecting duct from the distal convoluted tubule is isotonic to the
cells of the cortex; as this fluid passes through the renal medulla, water diffuses out of
the collecting duct into the renal medulla.
8. The urine finally delivered to the renal pelvis is usually hypertonic to the blood
plasma.
9. Antidiuretic hormone (ADH) is released from the posterior lobe of the pituitary.
a.
ADH acts on the collecting ducts by increasing its permeability to H2O,
thereby increasing H2O retention.
276
b.
When ADH is released, more water is reabsorbed and there is less urine.
c.
When ADH is not released, more water is excreted and more urine forms.
d.
If an individual does not drink much water, the pituitary releases ADH; if
hydrated, ADH is not released.
e.
Diuresis means increased urine; antidiuresis means a decreased amount of
urine.
10. Reabsorption of Salt
a. Usually more than 99% of the sodium filtered out at the glomerulus is returned to
the blood.
b. Most is reabsorbed at the proximal tubule, 25% is extruded by the ascending limb
of the loop of nephron and the rest is from the distal convoluted tubule and
collecting duct.
c. Aldosterone is a hormone secreted by the adrenal cortex.
1) It acts on the distal convoluted tubules to increase the reabsorption of Na+ and
the excretion of K+.
2) Increased Na+ in the blood causes water to be reabsorbed, increasing blood
volume and pressure.
3) If the blood pressure is insufficient to promote glomerular filtration, the
afferent arteriole cells secrete renin.
4) Renin catalyzes the conversion of angiotensinogen (a protein produced by the
liver) into angiotensin I.
5) Later, angiotensin I is converted to angiotensin II by angiotensin-converting
enzyme.
6) Angiotensin II stimulates cells in the adrenal cortex to produce aldosterone.
7) Angiotensin II increases the blood pressure as a vasoconstrictor.
11. The Atrial natriuretic hormone (ANH) is produced by the atria of the heart when
cardiac cells stretch.
a.
When blood pressure rises, the heart produces ANH to inhibit the
secretion of renin and the release of ADH.
b.
Therefore, this hormone decreases blood volume and pressure.
I. Maintaining the Acid-Base Balance
1. The bicarbonate buffer system and breathing work together to maintain blood pH.
2. The excretion of H+ ions and NH3, and reabsorption of bicarbonate ions (HCO3 - ) is
adjusted.
a. If the blood is basic, fewer hydrogen ions are excreted and fewer sodium and
bicarbonate ions are reabsorbed.
H+ + HCO3-  H2CO3  H2O + CO2
b. If the blood is acidic, H+ ions are excreted with ammonia, while Na+ and HCO3ions are reabsorbed; Na+ ions promote formation of hydroxide ions and
bicarbonate takes up H+ ions when carbonic acid is formed.
NH3 + H+ → NH4+
c. Ammonia is produced in the tubule cells by deamination of amino acids.
3. Reabsorption or excretion of ions by the kidneys is a homeostatic function that
maintains the pH of the blood and osmolarity.
277
Chapter 37
37.1 Evolution of the Nervous System
A. Invertebrate Nervous Organization
1. Comparative study shows the evolutionary steps leading to the centralized nervous
system of vertebrates.
2. Even primitive sponges, with only a cellular level of organization, respond by closing
the osculum.
3. Hydra (cnidarians) possesses two cell layers separated by mesoglea.
a. The hydra can contract, extend, and move tentacles to capture prey and even turn
somersaults.
b. A simple nerve net extends throughout the hydra body within the mesoglea.
c. The hydra nerve net is composed of neurons in contact with one another and with
contractile epitheliomuscular cells.
d. The more complex cnidaria (sea anemones and jellyfish) may have two nerve
nets.
1) A fast-acting nerve net enables major responses, particularly in times of
danger.
2) Another nerve net coordinates slower and more delicate movements.
4. The planarian nervous system is bilaterally symmetrical.
a. It has two lateral nerve cords that allow rapid transfer of information from
anterior to posterior.
b. The nervous system of planaria is called a ladderlike nervous system.
c. The nervous system of planaria exhibits cephalization; at their anterior end,
planaria have a simple brain composed of a cluster of neurons or ganglia.
d. Cerebral ganglia receive input from photoreceptors in eyespots and sensory cells
in auricles.
e. The transverse nerve fibers between the sides of the ladderlike nerve cords keep
the movement on both sides of a planarian body coordinated.
f. Bilateral symmetry plus cephalization are important trends in nervous system
development.
g. The organization of the planarian nervous system foreshadows both the central
and peripheral system of vertebrates.
5. The annelids, arthropods, and mollusks are complex animals with true nervous
systems.
a. The nerve cord has a ganglion in each segment of the body that controls muscles
of that segment.
b. The brain still receives sensory information and controls the activity of the
ganglia so the entire animal is coordinated.
c. The presence of a brain and other ganglia indicate an increased number of
neurons among invertebrates.
B. Vertebrate Nervous Organization
1. Vertebrate nervous systems exhibit cephalization and bilateral symmetry.
a. The vertebrate nervous system is composed of both central and peripheral nervous
systems.
1) The central nervous system (CNS) develops a brain and spinal cord from the
embryonic dorsal nerve cord.
278
2) The peripheral nervous system consists of paired cranial and spinal nerves.
b. Paired eyes, ears, and olfactory structures gather information from the
environment.
c. A vast increase in number of neurons accompanied evolution of the vertebrate
nervous system; an insect may have one million neurons while vertebrates may
contain a thousand to a billion times more.
2. The Vertebrate Brain
a. The vertebrate brain is at the anterior end of the dorsal tubular nerve cord.
b. The vertebrate brain is customarily divided into the hindbrain, midbrain, and
forebrain.
1) A well-developed hindbrain regulates organs below a level of consciousness;
in humans it regulates lung and heart function even when sleeping; also, it
coordinates motor activity.
2) The optic lobes are part of a midbrain which was originally a center for
coordinating reflex responses to visual input.
3) The forebrain receives sensory input from the other two sections and regulates
their output.
4) The cerebrum is highly developed in mammals and is associated with
conscious control; the outer layer, called the cerebral cortex, is large and
complex.
C.
The Human Nervous System
1. Three specific functions of the nervous system are to:
a.
receive sensory input,
b.
perform integration, and
c.
generate motor output to muscles and glands.
2. The central nervous system (CNS) consists of the brain (in the skull) and the spinal
cord (in the vertebral column).
3. The peripheral nervous system (PNS) lies outside the CNS and contains the cranial
and spinal nerves.
4. The PNS is divided into the somatic and autonomic systems.
a.
The somatic system controls the skeletal muscles.
b.
The autonomic system controls the smooth muscles, cardiac muscles, and
glands.
5. The CNS and PNS of the human nervous system are connected and work together to
perform the functions of a nervous system.
37.2 Nervous Tissue
 Nervous tissue is made up of neurons (nerve cells) and neuroglia (which support and
nourish the neurons).
A. Neurons and Neuroglia
1. Neurons vary in appearance, depending on their function and location, but they all
have three parts.
a. The cell body contains the nucleus and other organelles.
b. Dendrites receive information and conduct impulses toward the cell body.
c. A Single axon conducts impulses away from the cell body to stimulate or inhibit a
neuron, muscle, or gland.
1) A long axon is called a nerve fiber.
279
2) The long axons are covered by a white myelin sheath.
2. Types of Neurons
a. Motor (efferent) neurons have many dendrites and a single axon; they conduct
impulses from the CNS to muscles or glands.
b. Sensory (afferent) neurons are unipolar; they conduct impulses from the
periphery toward the CNS.
1) The process that extends from the cell body divides into two processes, one
going to the CNS and one to periphery.
c. Interneurons (association neurons) are multipolar
1) They have highly-branched dendrites within the CNS.
2) Interneurons convey messages between the various parts of the CNS.
3) They form complex brain pathways accounting for thinking, memory,
language, etc.
B. Transmission of the Nerve Impulses
1. Julius Bernstein (early 1900s) proposed that the nerve impulse is the movement of
unequally distributed ions on either side of an axonal membrane, the plasma
membrane of an axon.
2. A. L. Hodgkin and A. F. Huxley later confirmed this theory.
a. They and other researchers inserted a tiny electrode into the giant axon of a squid.
b. The electrode was attached to a voltmeter and an oscilloscope to trace a change in
voltage over time.
c. The voltage measured the difference in the electrical potential between the inside
and outside of the membrane.
d. An oscilloscope indicated any changes in polarity.
3. Resting Potential
a. When an axon is not conducting an impulse, an oscilloscope records a membrane
potential equal to negative 70 mV, indicating that the inside of the neuron is more
negative than the outside.
b. This is the resting potential because the axon is not conducting an impulse.
c. This polarity is due to the difference in electrical charge on either side of the
axomembrane.
1) The inside of the plasma membrane is more negatively charged than the
outside.
2) Although there is a higher concentration of K+ ions inside the axon, there is a
much higher concentration of Na+ ions outside the axon.
3) The plasma membrane is more permeable to K+ ions, so this gradient is less
and the K+ ion potential is less.
4) The sodium-potassium pump maintains this unequal distribution of Na+ and
K+ ions.
d. The sodium-potassium (Na+-K+) pump is an active transport system that moves
Na+ ions out and K+ ions into the axon.
e. The pump is always working because the membrane is permeable to these ions
and they tend to diffuse toward the lesser concentration.
f. Since the plasma membrane is more permeable to potassium ions than to sodium
ions, there are always more positive ions outside; this accounts for some polarity.
g. The large negatively charged proteins in the cytoplasm of the axon also contribute
280
to the resting potential of – 70 mV.
4. Action Potential
a. When an axon conducts a nerve impulse, the rapid change in the membrane
potential is the action potential.
b. Protein-lined channels in the axomembrane open to allow either sodium or
potassium ions to pass; these are sodium and potassium gated ion channels.
c. The oscilloscope goes from –70 mV to +40 mV in a depolarization phase,
indicating the cytoplasm is now more positive than the tissue fluid.
d. The trace returns to –70 mV again in the repolarization phase, indicating the
inside of the axon is negative again.
5. Propagation of Action Potentials
a. If an axon is unmyelinated, an action potential stimulates an adjacent
axomembrane to produce an action potential.
b. In myelinated fibers, the action potential at one neurofibril node causes action
potential at the next node.
1) The myelinated sheath has neurofibril nodes, gaps where one neurolemmocyte
ends and the next begins.
2) The action potential “leaps” from one neurofibril node to another—this is
called saltatory conduction.
3) Saltatory conduction may reach rates of over 200 meters/second, compared to
1 meter/second without it.
c. As each impulse passes, the membrane undergoes a short refractory period
before it can open the sodium gates again; this ensures a one-way direction to the
impulse.
C. Transmission Across a Synapse
1. The minute space between the axon bulb and the cell body of the next neuron is the
synapse.
2. A synapse consists of a presynaptic membrane, a synaptic cleft, and the postsynaptic
membrane.
a. Synaptic vesicles store neurotransmitters that diffuse across the synapse.
b. When the action potential arrives at the presynaptic axon bulb, synaptic vesicles
merge with the presynaptic membrane.
c. When vesicles merge with the membrane, neurotransmitters are discharged into
the synaptic cleft.
d. The neurotransmitter molecules diffuse across the synaptic cleft to the
postsynaptic membrane where they bind with specific receptors.
e. The type of neurotransmitter and/or receptor determines if the response is
excitation or inhibition.
f. Excitatory neurotransmitters use gated ion channels and are fast acting.
g. Other neurotransmitters affect the metabolism of the postsynaptic cells and are
slower.
3.
Neurotransmitters and Neuromodulators
a. At least 100 different neurotransmitters have been identified.
b. Acetylcholine (ACh) and norepinephrine (NE), dopamine, and serotonin are
present in both the CNS and the PNS.
1) ACh can have either an excitatory or an inhibitory effect, depending on the
281
tissue.
2) NE is important to dreaming, waking, and mood.
3) Dopamine is involved in emotions, learning, and attention.
4) Serotonin is involved in thermoregulation, emotions, and perception.
c. Once a neurotransmitter is released into a synaptic cleft, it initiates a response and
is then removed from the cleft.
d. In some synapses, the postsynaptic membrane contains enzymes that rapidly
inactivate the neurotransmitter.
e. Acetylcholinesterase (AChe) breaks down acetylcholine.
f. In other synapses, the presynaptic membrane reabsorbs the neurotransmitter for
repackaging in synaptic vesicles or for molecular breakdown.
g. The short existence of neurotransmitters in a synapse prevents continuous
stimulation (or inhibition) of postsynaptic membranes.
h. Many drugs that affect the nervous system act by interfering with or potentiating
the action of neurotransmitters.
i. Neuromodulators are molecules that block the release of a neurotransmitter or
modify a neuron’s response to one.
1) Substance P is released by sensory neurons when pain is present; endorphins
block the release of substance P and therefore act as natural painkillers.
D. Synaptic Integration
1. A neuron has many dendrites and may have one to ten thousand synapses with other
neurons.
2. A neuron receives many excitatory and inhibitory signals.
3. Excitatory neurotransmitters produce a potential change (signal) that drives the
neuron closer to an action potential; inhibitory signals produce a signal that drives the
neuron further from an action potential.
4. Thus excitatory signals have a depolarizing effect and inhibitory signals have a
hyperpolarizing effect.
5. Integration is the summing up of excitatory and inhibitory signals.
a. If a neuron receives many excitatory signals, or at a rapid rate from one synapse,
the axon will probably transmit a nerve impulse.
b. If both positive and inhibitory signals are received, the summing may prohibit the
axon from firing.
37.3 Central Nervous System: Brain and Spinal Cord
1. The central nervous system (CNS) is where sensory impulses are received and motor
control is initiated.
2. Both the brain and the spinal cord are protected by bone.
3. Both are wrapped in three connective tissue coverings called meninges; meningitis is
a disease caused by many different bacteria or viruses that invade the meninges.
4. The spaces between the meninges are filled with cerebrospinal fluid to cushion and
protect the CNS.
5. The cerebrospinal fluid is contained in the central canal of the spinal cord and within
the ventricles of the brain.
6. The ventricles are interconnecting spaces that produce and serve as reservoirs for the
cerebrospinal fluid.
A. The Spinal Cord
282
1. The spinal cord has two main functions.
a. It is the center for many reflex actions (automatic responses to external stimuli).
b. It provides the means of communication between the brain and the spinal nerves.
2. The spinal cord is composed of white and gray matter.
a. Gray Matter
1) The unmyelinated cell bodies and short fibers give gray matter its color.
2) In a cross section, the gray area looks like a butterfly or the letter H.
3) It contains portions of sensory neurons and motor neurons; short interneurons
connect them.
b. White Matter
1) Myelinated long fibers of interneurons run together in tracts and give the
white matter its color.
2) Tracts conduct impulses between the brain and the spinal nerves; ascending
tracts are dorsal and descending tracts from the brain are ventral.
3) Tracts cross over near the brain; therefore the left side of the brain controls the
right side of the body.
c. If a spinal cord injury occurs in the cervical region, the condition of quadriplegia
(paralysis of all four limbs) results.
d. If the injury is in the thoracic region, the lower limbs may be paralyzed
(paraplegia).
B. The Brain
1. The brain has four ventricles: two lateral ventricles and a third and fourth ventricle.
2. The cerebrum is associated with the two lateral ventricles, the diencephalon with the
third, and the brain stem and cerebellum with the fourth.
3. The Cerebrum
a. The cerebrum, also called the telencephalon, is the largest part of the brain in
humans.
b. It is the last center receiving sensory input and carrying out integration to
command motor responses.
c. The right and left cerebral hemispheres (the two halves of the cerebrum) are
connected by a bridge of nerve fibers, the corpus callosum; different functions are
associated with the two hemispheres.
d. The outer portion is a highly convoluted cerebral cortex consisting of gray matter
containing cell bodies and short unmyelinated fibers.
e. The cerebral hemisphere is divided into four surface lobes:
1) Frontal lobe – located towards the front of the hemispheres and is associated
with motor control, memory, reasoning, and judgment.
a.
The left frontal lobe has Broca’s area for our ability to speak.
2) Parietal lobe – located behind the frontal lob and involved with sensory
reception and integration, and taste.
3) Temporal lobe – located laterally and receives information from our ears.
4) Occipital lobe – located in the back side of the brain, it receives information
from our eyes.
f. The cerebral cortex contains motor, sensory, and association areas.
1) The human hand takes up a large proportion of the primary motor area.
2) The ventral to the primary motor area is a premotor area that organizes motor
283
functions before the primary area sends signals to the cerebellum.
3) Sensory information from the skin and skeletal muscles arrives at a primary
somatosensory area.
4) A general interpretation area receives information from all of the sensory
association areas and allows us to quickly integrate signals and send them to
the prefrontal area for immediate response.
g. Basal Nuclei
1) Aside from the tracts, there are masses of gray matter located deep within the
white matter.
2) These basal nuclei integrate motor commands; malfunctions cause
Huntington and Parkinson disease.
4.
The Diencephalon
a. The hypothalamus and thalamus are in a portion of the brain known as the
diencephalon, where the third ventricle is located.
b. The hypothalamus forms the floor of the third ventricle.
c. The hypothalamus maintains homeostasis.
1) It is an integrating center that regulates hunger, sleep, thirst, body
temperature, water balance, and blood pressure.
2) It controls the pituitary gland and thereby serves as a link between the nervous
and endocrine systems.
d. The thalamus consists of two masses of gray matter in the sides and roof of the
third ventricle.
1) It is the last portion of the brain for sensory input before the cerebrum.
2) It is a central relay station for sensory impulses traveling up from the body or
from the brain to the cerebrum.
3) Except for smell, it channels sensory impulses to specific regions of the
cerebrum for interpretation.
e. The pineal gland, which secretes the melatonin hormone, is in the diencephalon.
5. The Cerebellum
a. The cerebellum is separated from the brain stem by the fourth ventricle.
b. The cerebellum is in two portions joined by a narrow median portion.
c. It receives information from the eyes, inner ear, muscles, etc. indicating body
position, integrates the information and sends impulses to muscles maintaining
balance.
d. The cerebellum assists in the learning of new motor skills, as in sports or playing
the piano; it may be important in judging the passage of time.
6. The Brain Stem
a. The brain stem contains the medulla oblongata, pons, and midbrain.
b. Besides acting as a relay station for tracts passing between the cerebrum and
spinal cord or cerebellum, the midbrain has reflex centers for visual, auditory,
and tactile responses.
c. The pons (“bridge”) contains bundles of axons traveling between the cerebellum
and rest of the CNS.
1) The pons functions with the medulla to regulate the breathing rate.
2) It has reflex centers concerned with head movements in response to visual or
auditory stimuli.
284
d.
The medulla oblongata lies between the spinal cord and the pons, anterior to the
cerebellum.
1) It contains reflex centers for regulating heartbeat, breathing, and
vasoconstriction.
2) It contains reflex centers for vomiting, coughing, sneezing, hiccupping, and
swallowing.
3) It contains nerve tracts that ascend or descend between the spinal cord and the
brain’s higher centers.
7. The Reticular Activating System (RAS)
a. The reticular formation consists of gray matter and nerve fibers that extend the length
of the brain stem and is a major component of the RAS.
b. The RAS receives sensory signals that it sends up to higher centers, and motor signals
that it sends to the spinal cord.
c. The RAS sources the cerebrum and causes a person to be alert.
d. The RAS can filter out unnecessary sensory stimuli, which explains why you can
study with the TV on.
e. General anesthetics function by suppressing the RAS.
f. A severe injury to the RAS can cause a person to be comatose, from which recovery
may be impossible.
8. The Limbic System
a. The limbic system is a complex network of tracts and nuclei that incorporate
medial portions of cerebral lobes, subcortical nuclei, and diencephalon.
b. It blends higher mental functions and primitive emotions.
c. Its two major structures are the hippocampus and amygdala, essential for learning
and memory.
1) The hippocampus makes prefrontal area aware of past experiences stored in
association areas.
2) The amygdala causes experiences to have emotional overtones.
3) Inclusion of the frontal lobe in the limbic system allows reasoning to keep us
from acting out strong feelings.
d. Learning and Memory
1) Memory is the ability to hold thoughts in the mind and to recall past events.
2) Learning takes place when we retain and utilize past memories.
3) The prefrontal area in the frontal lobe is active in short-term memory (e.g.,
telephone numbers).
4) Long-term memory is a mix of semantic memory (numbers, words) and
episodic memory (persons, events).
5) Skill memory is the ability to perform motor activities.
6) The hippocampus serves as a go-between to bring memories to mind.
7) The amygdala is responsible for fear conditioning and associates danger with
sensory stimuli.
8) Long-term potentiation (LTP) is an enhanced response at synapses within the
hippocampus.
9) LTP is essential to memory storage; excited postsynaptic cells may die due to
a glutamate neurotransmitter.
10) Extinction of too many cells in the hippocampus is the underlying cause of
285
Alzheimer disease.
37.4 Peripheral Nervous System
1. The peripheral nervous system lies outside the CNS.
a. Cranial nerves connect to the brain.
b. Spinal nerves lie on either side of the spinal cord.
2. Axons in nerves are called nerve fibers.
3. The cell bodies of neurons are found in the CNS or in ganglia.
4. Ganglia are collections of cell bodies in the PNS.
5. Humans have 12 pairs of cranial nerves attached to the brain.
a. Sensory nerves only contain sensory nerve fibers.
b. Motor nerves only contain motor nerve fibers.
c. Mixed nerves contain both sensory and motor nerve fibers.
d. Cranial nerves mostly connect to the head, neck, and facial regions.
e. The vagus nerve also branches to the pharynx, larynx, and some internal organs.
6. Humans have 31 pairs of spinal nerves emerging from the spinal cord.
a. The paired spinal nerves leave the spinal cord by two short branches, or roots.
b. The dorsal root contains fibers of sensory neurons conducting nerve impulses to
the spinal cord; the cell body of a sensory neuron is in the dorsal root ganglion.
c. The ventral root contains the axons of motor neurons that conduct nerve impulses
away from the spinal cord.
d. All spinal nerves are mixed nerves that conduct impulses to and from the spinal
cord.
e. Spinal nerves are mixed nerves with sensory and motor fibers; each serves its own
region.
A. Somatic System
1. The peripheral nervous system has two divisions: somatic and autonomic.
2. The somatic system includes the nerves that carry sensory information to the CNS
and motor commands away from the CNS to skeletal muscles.
3. Any voluntary control of muscles involves the brain; reflexes, involuntary responses
to stimuli, involve the brain or just the spinal cord.
4. Outside stimuli can initiate reflex actions, some of which involve the brain.
B. The Reflex Arc
1. A reflex arc involves the following pathway:
a. Sensory receptors generate an impulse in a sensory neuron that moves along
sensory axons toward the spinal cord.
b. Sensory neurons enter the cord dorsally and pass signals to interneurons.
c. Impulses travel along motor axons to an effector, which brings about a response
to the stimulus.
d. The immediate response is that muscles contract to withdraw from source of pain.
2. Reflex response occurs because the sensory neuron stimulates several interneurons.
3. Some impulses extend to the cerebrum, which makes a person conscious of the
stimulus and the reaction.
C. Autonomic System
1. The autonomic system is a part of the PNS and regulates cardiac and smooth muscle
and glands.
2. There are two divisions: the sympathetic and parasympathetic systems.
286
D.
a. Both function automatically and usually in an involuntary manner.
b. Both innervate all internal organs.
c. Both utilize two neurons and one ganglion for each impulse.
1) The first neuron has a cell body within the CNS and a preganglionic fiber.
2) The second neuron has a cell body within the ganglion and a postganglionic
fiber.
d. Breathing rate and blood pressure are regulated by reflex actions to maintain
homeostasis.
3. Sympathetic Division
a. Most preganglionic fibers of the sympathetic system arise from the middle
(thoracic-lumbar) portion of the spinal cord and almost immediately terminate in
ganglia that lie near the cord (thoracic-lumbar portion).
b. Therefore the preganglionic fiber is short, but the postganglionic fiber that
contacts an organ is long.
c. The sympathetic system is especially important during emergency situations (the
“fight or flight” response).
d. To defend or flee, muscles need a supply of glucose and oxygen; the sympathetic
system accelerates heartbeat, and dilates bronchi.
e. To divert energy from less necessary digestive functions, the sympathetic system
inhibits digestion.
f. The neurotransmitter released by the postganglionic axon is mainly
norepinephrine, similar to epinephrine (adrenaline) used as a heart stimulant.
4. Parasympathetic Division
a. The parasympathetic system consists of a few cranial nerves, including the
vagus nerve, and fibers that arise from the bottom craniosacral portion of the
spinal cord.
b. In this case, the preganglionic fibers are long and the postganglionic fibers are
short.
c. This system is a “housekeeper system”; it promotes internal responses resulting in
a relaxed state.
d. The parasympathetic system causes the eye pupil to constrict, promotes digestion,
and retards heartbeat.
e. The neurotransmitter released is acetylcholine.
Drugs of Abuse (Science Focus box)
1. Alcohol
a. Alcohol consumption is the most socially accepted form of drug use worldwide.
b. Alcohol (ethanol) acts as a depressant on many parts of the brain where it affects
neurotransmitter release or uptake.
c. Depending on the amount consumed, the effects of alcohol on the brain can lead
to a feeling of relaxation, lower inhibitions, impaired concentration and
coordination, slurred speech, and vomiting.
d. Coma or death can occur if blood level of alcohol becomes too high.
e. Chronic consumption can damage the frontal lobes, decrease overall brain size,
and increase ventricle size.
f. Prolonged alcohol use can permanently damage the liver, even to a point where a
liver transplant may be necessary.
287
2. Nicotine
a. When tobacco is smoked, nicotine is delivered to the CNS where it binds to the
neurons, causing the release of dopamine.
b. In the PNS, nicotine acts as a stimulant by mimicking acetylcholine and
increasing heart rate, blood pressure and muscle activity.
c. Nicotine withdrawal symptoms include irritability, headache, insomnia, poor
cognitive performance, the urge to smoke and weight gain.
3. Club and Date Rape Drugs
a. The chemical structure of methamphetamine (also called meth or speed) is similar
to that of dopamine, and its stimulatory effects mimic that of cocaine.
b. The initial rush of methamphetamine is typically followed by a state of high
agitation that may lead to violent behavior.
c. Chronic use is characterized by paranoia, auditory and visual hallucinations, selfabsorption, irritability, and aggressive, erratic behavior.
d. Excessive intake can lead to hyperthermia, convulsions, and death.
e. Ecstasy is a drug with similar effects to those of methamphetamine.
f. Ecstasy has an overstimulatory effect on neurons that produce serotonin which
elevates our moods.
g. Date rape drugs have sedative effects such as relaxation, amnesia and
disorientation.
h. They are also popular at clubs because they enhance the effect of heroin and
Ecstasy.
4. Cocaine
a. Cocaine is a stimulant in the CNS that interferes with the up-take of dopamine at
synapses, resulting in a rush of well-being that lasts 5 – 30 minutes.
b. Result of cocaine use is sleeplessness, lack of appetite, increased sex drive,
tremors and “cocaine psychosis.”
c. Cocaine related deaths are usually due to cardiac and/or respiratory arrests.
5. Heroin
a. Heroin acts as a depressant in the nervous system.
b. Opiates (of which heroin belongs) depress breathing, block pain pathways, cloud
mental function, and sometimes cause nausea and vomiting.
c. Long-term effects are addiction, hepatitis, HIV/AIDS, and bacterial infections due
to using shared needles.
6. Marijuana
a. The active ingredient in marijuana is the resin that is rich in THC
(tetrahydrocannabinol).
b. When THC reaches the CNS, the person experiences mild euphoria, along with
alterations in vision and judgment.
c. In heavy users, hallucinations, anxiety, depression, rapid flow of ideas, body
image distortions, paranoia, and psychotic symptoms can result.
d. Regular usage of marijuana can cause cravings that make it difficult to stop.
7. Treatment for Addictive Drugs
a. Treatment for addiction to drugs consists mainly of behavior modifications.
b. New treatment techniques involve administering antibodies to block the effects of
cocaine and methamphetamine.
288
c. A vaccine for cocaine that would stimulate antibody production is being tested.
289
Chapter 38
38.1 Chemical Senses
A. Chemoreceptors are responsible for taste and smell by being sensitive to chemicals in food,
liquids, and air.
1. Chemoreception is found universally in animals; it is thought to be the most primitive
sense.
2. Chemoreceptors are present all over a planarian but concentrated in the auricles at the
side of the head.
3. Insects, such as houseflies, taste with their feet.
4. Crustacea have chemoreceptors on their antennae and appendages.
5. In amphibians, chemoreceptors are located in the nose, mouth, and all over the skin.
6. In mammals, receptors for taste are in the mouth, and receptors for smell are in the
nose.
B. Sense of Taste
1. Human taste buds are located primarily on the tongue.
2. Many lie along the walls of papillae, the small elevations on the surface of the tongue.
3. Isolated ones are present on the surfaces of the hard palate, pharynx, and epiglottis.
4. Taste buds are embedded in tongue epithelium and open at a taste pore.
5. Taste buds have supporting cells and elongated taste cells that end in microvilli.
6. Microvilli bear receptor proteins for certain chemicals.
a. Molecules bind to receptor proteins and impulses are generated in associated
sensory nerves
b. Nerve impulses go to the brain cortical areas which interpret them as tastes.
7. Humans have four primary types of taste.
a. Taste buds for each are concentrated in particular regions.
1) Sweet receptors are most plentiful near the tip of the tongue.
2) Sour receptors occur primarily along the margins of the tongue.
3) Salty receptors are most common on the tip and upper front portion.
4) Bitter receptors are located near the back of the tongue.
5) A fifth type, called umami, may exist for certain flavors (MSG, cheese, beef
broth, seafood).
b. The brain appears to take an overall “weighted average” of taste messages as the
perceived taste.
C. Sense of Smell
1. The sense of smell depends on olfactory cells located in the olfactory epithelium high
in the roof of the nasal cavity.
2. Olfactory cells are modified neurons.
3. Each cell has a tuft of five olfactory cilia that bear receptor proteins for an odor
molecule.
a. There are around 1,000 different types of odor receptors; many olfactory cells
carry the same type.
b. Nerve fibers from like olfactory cells lead to the same neuron in the olfactory
bulb.
c. An odor activates a characteristic combination of cells; this information is pooled
in the olfactory bulb.
d. Interneurons communicate this information via the olfactory tract to areas of the
290
cerebral cortex.
4. Olfactory bulbs are directly connected with the limbic system; smells are associated
with emotions and memory.
5. Taste and smell supplement each other.
a. “Smelling” food also involves the taste receptors.
b. Losing taste when you have a cold is usually due to a loss of smell.
38.2 Sense of Vision
A. Animals lacking photoreceptors, sensory receptors sensitive to light, depend on their senses
of hearing and smell rather than sight.
B. Photoreceptors vary in complexity.
1. In its simplest form, a photoreceptor indicates only the presence of light and its
intensity.
2. “Eyespots” of planaria allow flatworms to determine direction of light.
3. Image-forming eyes occur in four invertebrate groups: cnidaria, annelids, molluscs,
and arthropods.
4. Arthropods have compound eyes composed of many independent visual units
(ommatidia), each possessing all of the elements needed for light reception.
a. The cornea and crystalline cone of each visual unit focus rays toward the
photoreceptors.
b. Photoreceptors generate nerve impulses, which pass to the brain by way of optic
nerve fibers.
c. The image resulting from all stimulated visual units is crude; the small size of
compound eyes limits the number of visual units.
d. Insects have color vision but utilize a narrower range of the electromagnetic
spectrum and can see some ultraviolet.
5. Some fishes, reptiles, and most birds are believed to have color vision, but among
mammals, only humans and other primates have color vision; this is adaptive for day
activity.
6. Vertebrates and certain molluscs (e.g., the squid and the octopus) have a cameratype eye.
a. Molluscs and vertebrates are not closely related; therefore this is convergent
evolution.
b. A single lens focuses an image of the visual field on closely packed
photoreceptors.
c. In vertebrates the lens changes shape to aid in focusing; in molluscs the lens move
back and forth.
d. The human eye is considerably more complex than a camera.
7. Animals with two eyes facing forward have three-dimensional, or stereoscopic,
vision.
8. Animals with eyes facing sideways (e.g., rabbits) have panoramic vision—the visual
field is wide.
C. The Human Eye
1. The human eye is an elongated sphere 2.5 cm in diameter with three layers.
2. The sclera is the outer, white fibrous layer that covers most of the eye; it protects and
supports the eyeball.
3. The cornea is a transparent part of the sclera at the front of the eye; it is the window
291
of the eye.
4. The conjunctiva is a thin layer of epithelial cells that covers the sclera and keeps the
eyes moist.
5. The middle, thin, dark-brown layer is the choroid containing many blood vessels and
pigments absorbing stray light rays.
6. To the front of the eye, the choroid thickens and forms a ring-shaped ciliary body
and finally becomes the iris that regulates the size of an opening called the pupil.
7. The lens divides the cavity into two portions: aqueous humor fills the anterior cavity
and vitreous humor fills the posterior.
8. Retina
a. The inner layer is the retina that contains photoreceptors called rod cells and
cone cells.
b. The fovea centralis is a small area of retina that contain only cones; this area
produces acute color vision in daylight.
c. Cone cells are not very sensitive in low intensity light; at night, the rods are still
active.
9. Focusing of the Eye
a. Light rays enter the eye through the pupil and are focused on the retina.
b. Focusing involves light passing through the cornea, the lens, and the humors.
c. Because of refraction, the image on the retina is inverted 180º from actual but is
perceived righted in the brain.
d. The shape of the lens is controlled by the ciliary muscle.
e. The lens is flatter when the ciliary muscle is relaxed when we are viewing distant
objects.
f. The lens is naturally elastic and becomes rounder for viewing near objects where
light rays must bend to a greater degree.
g. This change is called visual accommodation.
h. An aging lens loses its ability to accommodate for near objects and we may need
reading glasses by middle age.
i. The lens is also subject to cataracts, or becoming opaque; surgery, using a
cryoprobe, is the only current treatment.
j. Persons who can see well close up but not far away are nearsighted (myopia).
1) They often have an elongated eyeball that focuses a distant image in front of
the retina.
2) They can wear corrective concave lenses to refocus the image on the retina.
3) Radial keratotomy is a new treatment that surgically cuts and flattens the
cornea.
k. Persons who can see far away but not up close are farsighted (hyperopia)
1) They often have a shortened eyeball that focuses near images behind retina.
2) They can wear corrective convex lenses to refocus the image on retina.
l. When the cornea or lens is uneven, the image is fuzzy; this is astigmatism
corrected by an unevenly ground lens to compensate for unevenness.
D. Photoreceptors of the Eye
1. Vision begins when light has been focused on photoreceptors in the retina.
2. Rod cells and cone cells have an outer segment joined to an inner segment by a stalk.
3. The outer segment contains stacks of membranous disks (lamellae) with many
292
molecules of rhodopsin.
4. The rhodopsin molecules contain a protein opsin and the pigment molecule retinal
derived from Vitamin A.
5. When a rod absorbs light, rhodopsin splits into opsin and retinal, leading to a cascade
of reactions and the closure of ion channels in the rod cell plasma membrane.
6. This stops the release of inhibitory molecules from the rod’s synaptic vesicles and
starts signals that result in impulses to brain.
7. The rods are stimulated by low light and provide night vision.
8. Because rods are distributed throughout the retina, rods detect our peripheral vision
and motion but not color or detail.
9. Cones located primarily in the fovea centralis are activated by bright light and detect
detail and color.
10. The three kinds of cones contain blue, green, or red pigment.
11. Each pigment is composed of retinal and opsin, but the structure of opsin varies
among the three.
12. Combinations of cones are stimulated by intermediate colors; the combined nerve
impulses are interpreted in the brain.
E. Integration of Visual Signals in the Retina
1. The retina has three layers of neurons.
a. The rods and cones are nearest the choroid.
b. Bipolar cells form the middle layer.
c. Ganglion cells, whose fibers become the optic nerve, form the innermost layer.
2. Since only rod and cone cells are sensitive to light, light must penetrate through the
ganglion cells.
3. Rods and cones synapse with bipolar cells which pass the impulse to ganglion cells.
4. There are more rods and cones than nerve fibers leaving ganglionic cells.
5. Up to 150 rods may synapse with a ganglion cell; this results in indistinct vision.
6. Each cone synapses with one ganglionic cell; this accounts for the detailed images of
cones, mostly found in the fovea.
7. Integration occurs as signals pass from the bipolar to the ganglion cells.
a. If all rod cells in a receptive field are stimulated, the ganglion cell is weakly
stimulated or neutral.
b. If only the center is lit, it is stimulated; if only the edge is lit, it is inhibited.
c. Therefore considerable processing occurs in the retina before an impulse is sent to
the brain.
8. The blind spot is an area where the optic nerve passes through the retina; it lacks rods
and cones.
F. Protecting Vision and Hearing (Health focus box)
1. Preventing a Loss of Vision
a. The most frequent loss blindness is caused from reinal disorders, glaucoma, and
cataracts.
b. Diabetic retinopathy results in the bursting of capillaries to the retina.
1)
Careful blood glucose level regulation may protect them from diabetic
retinopathy.
c. Macular degeneration results in thickened choroids vessels not functioning and
destroying the cones.
293
d. Glaucoma results when the drainage system of the eyes fail and fluid builds up
and destroys nerve fibers that are responsible for peripheral vision.
e. Cataracts are cloudy spots on the lens of the eye and eventually pervade the whole
lens.
1) In addition, men smoking 20 cigarettes or more a day, and women who smoke
more than 35 cigarettes a day, double their risk of cataracts.
f. Additional preventative measures include wearing large lens, glass sunglasses to
absorb ultraviolet light.
2. Preventing a Loss of Hearing
a. In the ear, the mobility of ossicles decreases with age.
b. In a condition called otosclerosis, new filamentous bone grows over the stirrup,
impeding its movement.
1)
The only remedy for this type of conduction deafness is surgical treatment.
c. Age-associated nerve deafness due to stereocilia damage from exposure to loud
noises is preventable.
d. Noise above a level of 80 decibels could result in damage to the hair cells of the
organ of Corti.
e. The sterocilia and then the hair cells disappear completely.
f. Noise that can result in hearing loss includes: loud music, noisy indoor or outdoor
equipment, motorcycles and recreational vehicles, burst of gunfire.
g. Additional causes of hearing loss can result from taking medicines such as some
anticancer drugs and certain antibiotics.
h. Symptoms include temporary hearing loss, a “full” feeling in the ears, muffled
hearing, or ringing in the ears.
i. Preventative measures include reducing exposure to the noise, wearing noisereduction earmuffs, wearing compressible earplugs.
38.3
Senses of Hearing and Balance
1. The ear has two sensory functions: hearing and balance (equilibrium).
2. The sensory receptors for both are in the inner ear, and each consists of hair cells
with stereocilia that are sensitive to mechanical stimulation; they are
mechanoreceptors.
A. Anatomy of the Ear
1. The human ear has three divisions: an outer, middle, and inner ear.
2. The outer ear consists of the pinna (external flap) and the auditory canal.
a. The auditory canal opening is lined by fine hairs that filter air.
b. Modified sweat glands in the auditory canal secrete earwax to guard against
foreign matter.
3. The middle ear begins at the tympanic membrane and ends at a bony wall with
membrane-covered openings (the oval window and the round window).
a. It contains small bones called ossicles: malleus (hammer), incus (anvil), and
stapes (stirrup).
b. The malleus adheres to the tympanum; the stapes touches the oval window.
c. The auditory (eustachian) tube extends from the middle ear to the pharynx to
equalize the inside and outside air.
4. The inner ear has three regions: the semicircular canals, vestibule, and cochlea.
5. The cochlea resembles a snail shell because it spirals.
294
B. Process of Hearing
1. The process of hearing begins when sound waves enter the auditory canal, causing the
ossicles to vibrate.
2. Sound is amplified about 20 times by the size difference between the tympanic
membrane and the oval window.
3. The stapes strikes the membrane of the oval window, passing pressure waves to the
fluid in the cochlea.
4. Three canals are located within the cochlea: vestibular canal, cochlear canal, and
tympanic canal.
5. The vestibular canal connects with the tympanic canal, which leads to the oval
window membrane.
6. Along the basilar membrane are hair cells whose stereocilia are embedded in a
tectorial membrane.
7. The hair cells of the spiral organ (organ of Corti) synapse with nerve fibers of the
cochlear (auditory) nerve.
8. When the stapes strikes the membrane of the oval window, pressure waves move
from the vestibular canal to the tympanic canal and across the basilar membrane, and
the round window bulges.
9. The basilar membrane vibrates up and down bending the stereocilia of hair cells
embedded in the tectorial membrane.
10. This generates nerve impulses in the cochlear nerve that travel to the brain stem.
11. When they reach the auditory areas of the cerebral cortex, this is interpreted as sound.
12. The spiral organ is narrow at its base and widens at its tip; each part is sensitive to
different pitches.
13. Nerve fibers from each region (high pitch base or low pitch tip) lead to slightly
different regions of the brain, producing the sensation of pitch.
14. Sound volume is caused by more vibration; the increased stimulation is interpreted as
louder sound intensity.
15. Tone is an interpretation by the brain based on the distribution of the hair cells
stimulated.
C. Sense of Balance
1. The sense of balance is divided into:
a. rotational equilibrium (angular or rotational movement of the head), and
b. gravitational equilibrium (vertical or horizontal movement).
2. Rotational equilibrium utilizes the semicircular canals.
a. The semicircular canals are oriented at right angles to one another in three
different planes.
b. The enlarged base of each semicircular canal is called an ampulla.
c. Fluid flowing over and displacing a cupula causes the stereocilia of the hair cells
to bend; the pattern of impulses carried by the vestibular nerve to the brain
changes.
d. Continuous movement of the fluid in the semicircular canals causes vertigo
motion sickness.
e. By spinning and stopping, we see a room still spin; this indicates that vision is
also involved in balance.
3. Gravitational equilibrium utilizes the utricle and saccule.
295
a. A vestibule or space between the semicircular canals and the cochlea contains the
utricle and the saccule.
b. The utricle and saccule are small membranous sacs, each of which contains hair
cells.
c. Hair cell stereocilia are embedded within a gelatinous material called the otolithic
membrane.
d. Calcium carbonate granules (otoliths) rest on this membrane.
e. The utricle is sensitive to horizontal movements; the saccule responds best to
up-down movements.
f. When the head is still, otoliths in the utricle and saccule rest on the otolithic
membrane above the hair cells.
g. As the head bends or the body moves, otoliths are displaced and the otolithic
membrane sags, bending the larger stereocilia (kinocillium) of hair cells beneath;
this tells the brain the direction of movement.
D. Sensory Receptors in Other Animals
1. The lateral line system of fish and amphibians detects water currents and pressure
waves.
2. Primitive fishes have the system on the surface; advanced fishes enclose it in a canal
on the side.
3. The lateral line receptor is a collection of hair cells with cilia embedded in a mass of
gelatinous material (cupula).
4. Static equilibrium organs called statocysts are found in cnidaria, mollusks, and
crustacea.
5. A small particle called a statolith stimulates cilia that generate impulses, indicating
the position of the head.
296
Chapter 39
39.1 Diversity of Skeletons
1. Three types of skeletons occur in the animal kingdom.
2. A hydrostatic skeleton occurs in cnidarians, flatworms, roundworms and annelids.
3. An exoskeleton is found in molluscs and arthropods, respectively.
4. An endoskeleton is found in sponges, echinoderms, and vertebrates.
A. Hydrostatic Skeleton
1. A fluid-filled gastrovascular cavity or coelom can act as a hydrostatic skeleton.
2. It offers support and resistance to the contraction of muscles for motility.
3. Many animals have hydroskeletons.
a. Hydras use a fluid-filled gastrovascular cavity to support tentacles that rapidly
contract.
b. Planaria easily glide over substrate with muscular contractions of body walls and
cilia.
c. Roundworms have a fluid-filled pseudocoelom and move when their longitudinal
muscles contract against it.
d. Earthworms are segmented with septa dividing the coelom into compartments;
circular and longitudinal muscles contract in each segment to coordinate
elongation and contraction.
e. Animals with exoskeletons or endoskeletons move selected body parts by means
of muscular hydrostats, i.e., fluid contained within certain muscle fibers assists
movement of that part.
B. Exoskeletons and Endoskeletons
1. An exoskeleton is an external skeleton.
a. Molluscs have exoskeletons that are predominantly calcium carbonate (CaCO3).
b. Insects and crustacea have jointed exoskeletons composed of chitin, a strong,
flexible, nitrogenous polysaccharide.
c. The exoskeleton provides protection against damage frm enemies and also keeps
tissues from drying out.
d. Although stiffness provides support for muscles, the exoskeleton is not as strong
as an endoskeleton.
e. The clam and snail exoskeletons grow with the animals; their thick nonmobile
CaCO3 shell is for protection.
f. The chitinous exoskeleton of arthropods is jointed and moveable.
g. Arthropods must molt when their exoskeleton becomes too small; a molting
animal is vulnerable to predators.
2. Vertebrates have an endoskeleton composed of bone and cartilage that grows with
the animal.
a. The endoskeleton does not limit the space available for internal organs and it can
support greater weight.
b. Soft tissues surround the endoskeleton to protect it; injuries to soft tissue are
easier to repair.
c. Usually an endoskeleton has elements that protect vital internal organs.
d. The jointed exoskeleton of arthropods and endoskeletons of vertebrates allow
flexibility and helped arthropods and vertebrates colonize land.
39.2 The Human Skeletal System
297
1. Skeletons protect organs: skull (brain), vertebral column (spinal cord), and rib cage
(heart and lungs).
2. The large, heavy leg bones support the body against the pull of gravity.
3. Leg and arm bones permit flexible body movement.
4. The flat bones of the skull, ribs, and breastbone contain red bone marrow that
manufactures blood cells.
5. All bones store inorganic calcium and phosphorous salts.
A. Bone Growth and Renewal
1. The prenatal human skeleton is cartilaginous; cartilage structures serve as “models”
for bone construction.
a. The cartilaginous models are converted to bones when calcium salts are deposited
in the matrix, first by cartilaginous cells and later by bone-forming cells called
osteoblasts.
b. Conversion of cartilaginous models to bones is called endochondral ossification.
c. Some bones (e.g., facial bones) are formed without a cartilaginous model.
2. During endochondral ossification, there is a primary ossification center at the middle
of a long bone; latter secondary centers form at the ends.
3. A cartilaginous growth plate occurs between primary and secondary ossification
centers.
4. As long as the growth plate remains between the two centers, bone growth occurs.
5. The rate of growth is controlled by hormones, including growth hormone (GH) and
sex hormones.
6. Eventually plates become ossified and bone stops growing; this determines adult
height.
7. In adults, bone is continually being broken down and built up again.
a. Bone-absorbing cells (osteoclasts) break down bone, remove worn cells, and
deposit calcium in the blood.
b. Osteoblasts form new bone, taking calcium from the blood.
c. Osteoblasts become entrapped in the bone matrix and become osteocytes in the
lacunae of osteons.
d. This continual remodeling allows bones to gradually change in thickness.
e. Osteoclasts also determine the calcium level in the blood; calcium level is
important for muscle contraction and nerve conduction and levels are controlled
by the hormones PTH and calcitonin.
8. Adults need more calcium in the diet than do children to promote the work of
osteoblasts.
B. Anatomy of a Long Bone
1. A long bone illustrates the principles of bone anatomy.
a. A long bone consists of a central medullary cavity surrounded by compact bone.
b. Ends are composed of spongy bone surrounded by a thin layer of compact bone
and covered with hyaline cartilage.
c. Compact bone contains many osteons (Haversian systems); bone cells in tiny
chambers (lacunae) are arranged in concentric circles around central canals.
d. Central canals contain blood vessels and nerves.
e. The lacunae are separated by a matrix that contains protein fibers of collagen and
mineral deposits.
298
2. Spongy bone has numerous plates and bars separated by irregular spaces.
a. Spongy bone is lighter but designed for strength; solid portions of bone follow the
lines of stress.
b. Bone spaces are often filled with red bone marrow, a specialized tissue that
produces blood cells.
C. The axial skeleton lies at the midline of the body and consists of the skull, vertebral column,
sternum and ribs.
1. The Skull
a. The skull is formed by the cranium and the facial bones.
b. Newborns have membranous junctions called fontanels that usually close by the
age of two.
c. The bones of the cranium contain sinuses, air spaces lined with mucous
membrane that reduce the weight of skull and give a resonant sound to the voice.
d. Two mastoid sinuses drain into the middle ear; mastoiditis is an inflammation
that can lead to deafness.
e. The cranium is composed of eight bones: a frontal, two parietal, an occipital,
two temporal, a sphenoid, and an ethmoid.
f. The spinal cord passes through the foramen magnum, an opening at the base of
the skull in the occipital bone.
g. Each temporal bone has an opening that leads to the middle ear.
h. The sphenoid bone completes the sides of the skull and forms the floors and walls
of the eye sockets.
i. The ethmoid bone is in front of the sphenoid, part of the orbital wall, and a
component of the nasal septum.
j. Fourteen facial bones include: mandible, two maxillae, two palatine, two
zygomatic, two lacrimal, two nasal, and vomer.
k. The mandible or lower jaw is the only movable portion of the skull; it contains
tooth sockets.
l. The maxilla forms the upper jaw and the anterior of the hard palate; it also
contains tooth sockets.
m. The palatine bones make up the posterior portion of the hard palate and the floor
of the nasal cavity.
n. The zygomatic gives us our cheekbone prominences.
o. Nasal bones form the bridge of the nose.
p. Other bones make up the nasal septum which divides the nose cavity into two
regions.
q. The ears are elastic cartilage and lack bone; the nose is a mixture of bone,
cartilage, and fibrous connective tissue.
2. The Vertebral Column and Rib Cage
a. The vertebral column supports the head and trunk and protects the spinal cord
and the roots of the spinal nerves.
b. The vertebral column serves as an anchor for all of the other bones of the
skeleton.
c. Seven cervical vertebrae are located in the neck.
d. Twelve thoracic vertebrae are in the thorax or chest.
e. The lumbar vertebrae are in the small of the back.
299
f.
g.
h.
One sacrum is formed from five fused sacral vertebrae.
One coccyx is formed from four fused coccygeal vertebrae.
Normally, the spinal column has four normal curvatures that provide strength and
resiliency in posture.
i. Scoliosis is an abnormal sideways curvature; hunchback and swayback are also
abnormal.
j. Intervertebral disks between the vertebrae act as a padding to prevent the
vertebrae from grinding against each other, and to absorb shock during running,
etc.; they weaken with age.
k. Vertebral disks allow motion between vertebrae for bending forward, etc.
l. The rib cage: all twelve pairs of ribs connect directly to the thoracic vertebrae in
back; seven attach directly to the sternum.
1) Three pairs connect via cartilage to the sternum at front.
2) The two ribs totally unattached to the sternum are called “floating ribs.”
3) The rib cage protects the heart and lungs, yet is flexible enough to allow
breathing.
D. The Appendicular Skeleton
1. The appendicular skeleton consists of the bones within the pectoral girdle and upper
limbs and the pelvic girdle and lower limbs.
2. The pectoral girdle and arms are specialized for flexibility; the pelvic girdle and
legs is built for strength.
3.
The components of the pectoral girdle are only loosely linked by ligaments.
a.
The clavicle (“collarbone”) connects with the sternum in front and
the scapula (“shoulderblade”) in back.
b.
The scapula connects with the clavicle; it is freely movable and
held in place only by muscles.
4. The humerus is the long bone of the upper arm; its smoothly rounded head fits into a
socket of the scapula.
5. The radius is the more lateral of the bones of the lower arm; it articulates with the
humerus at the elbow joint, a hinge joint, and the radius crosses in front of the ulna
for easy twisting.
6. The ulna is the more medial of the two bones of the lower arm; its end is the
prominence in your elbow.
7.
The many hand bones increase its flexibility.
a.
The wrist has eight carpal bones which look like small pebbles.
b.
Five metacarpal bones fan out to form the framework of the palm.
c.
The phalanges are the bones of fingers and thumb.
8.
The pelvic girdle consists of two heavy, large coxal (hip) bones.
a.
The coxal bones are anchored to the sacrum; together with the
sacrum they form a hollow cavity that is wider in females than in males; it
transmits weight from the vertebral column via the sacrum to the legs.
b.
The femur is the largest bone of the body; it is limited in the
amount of weight that it can support.
c.
The tibia has a ridge called the “shin”; its end forms the inside of
the ankle.
d.
The fibula is the smaller of the two bones; its end forms the outside
300
of the ankle.
e.
Seven tarsal bones are in each ankle; one receives the weight and
passes it to the heel and ball of foot.
f.
The metatarsal bones form the arch of the foot and provide a
springy base.
g.
The phalanges are the bones of the toes, which are stouter than the
fingers.
E. Classification of Joints
1. Bones are joined at joints that are classified as fibrous, cartilaginous, or synovial.
2. Fibrous joints, such as those between the cranial bones, are immovable.
3. Cartilaginous joints, such as those between the vertebrae, are slightly moveable; the
two hipbones are slightly movable because they are ventrally joined by cartilage and
respond to pregnancy hormones.
4. Synovial joints are freely movable.
a. Most joints are synovial joints, with the two bones separated by a cavity.
b. Ligaments are fibrous connective tissue that bind bone to bone, forming a joint
capsule.
c. In a “double-jointed” individual, the ligaments are unusually loose.
d. The joint capsule is lined with a synovial membrane that produces a lubricating
synovial fluid.
e. The knee represents a synovial joint.
1) Knee bones are capped by cartilage; a crescent-shaped piece of cartilage, the
meniscus, is between the bones.
2) Athletes who injure the meniscus have torn this cartilage.
3) The knee joint also contains 13 fluid-filled sacs called bursae to ease friction
between the tendons and ligaments and tendons and bones.
4) Inflammation of the bursae is bursitis; “tennis elbow” is a form of bursitis.
5) The knee and elbow are hinge joints; the shoulder and hip are ball-and-socket
joints.
f. Synovial Joints
1) Synovial joints are subject to arthritis.
2) In rheumatoid arthritis, the synovial membrane becomes inflamed and
thickened.
3) The joint degenerates and becomes immovable and painful.
4) This is likely caused by an autoimmune reaction.
5) In osteoarthritis from old age, the cartilage at the ends of bones disintegrates;
the bones then become rough and irregular.
F.
You Can Avoid Osteoporosis (Health focus box)
1. Osteoporosis is a condition in which the bones are weakened due to a decrease in
the skeleton bone mass.
2. After the age of 40 – 50, the bone reabsorption exceeds bone formation, and the
total bone mass slowly decreases.
3. Men have a lower risk for osteoporosis because they tend to have denser bones
and testosterone levels do not begin to significantly decline until after the age of 65.
4. Consuming adequate dietary calcium throughout life is an effective measure to
prevent ostoporosis.
301
a.
During puperty, boys and girls are recommended to take 1,200 – 1,500 mg
of calcium per day.
b.
Males and females require 1,000 mg of calcium per day until the age of
65.
5. Consuming vitamin D is also recommended to prevent osteoporosis.
a.
Vitamin D helps the absorption of calcium.
b.
Although the body can synthesis vitamin D from the sun, people in
colder climates should find alternate sources of vitamin D.
6. Regular physical activity, such as walking or jogging, may also reduce the risk of
osteoporosis.
7. People who may be considered high risk, should consisder having a bone density
scan.
8. There is hormone therapy and medication prescribed to increase bone density.
39.3 The Human Muscular System
1. Skeletal muscle contraction assists homeostasis by helping maintain constant body
temperature.
2. Skeletal muscle contraction also causes ATP breakdown, releasing heat that is
distributed about the body.
A. Macroscopic Anatomy and Physiology
1. Skeletal muscles are attached to the skeleton by tendons made of fibrous connective
tissue.
2. When muscles contract, they only shorten or pull; therefore, skeletal muscles must
work in antagonistic pairs.
a. One muscle of an antagonistic pair bends the joint and brings a limb toward the
body.
b. The other one straightens the joint and extends the limb.
3. If a muscle is given a rapid series of stimuli, it responds to the next stimulus before
completely relaxing.
4. Muscle contraction summates until it reaches a maximal sustained contraction, called
tetanus.
5. Even at rest, muscles maintain tone by some fibers contracting; this is essential to
maintaining posture.
B. Microscopic Anatomy and Physiology
1. A whole skeletal muscle consists of a number of muscle fibers in bundles.
2. Each muscle fiber is a cell with some special features.
a. A plasma membrane called the sarcolemma forms a T (transverse) system.
1) Transverse (T) tubules penetrate down into the cell and contact with, but do
not fuse with, the modified endoplasmic reticulum (the sarcoplasmic
reticulum).
2) Expanded portions or sacs of the sarcoplasmic reticulum are modified for Ca2+
ion storage; this encases hundreds and sometimes thousands of myofibrils.
b. The myofibrils are contractile portions of fibers that lie parallel and run the
length of the fiber.
c. A light microscope shows light and dark bands called striations.
d. An electron microscope shows that these striations of myofibrils are formed by
placement of protein filaments within sarcomeres.
302
e. The two protein filaments are either thick (made of myosin) or thin (made of
actin).
f. A sarcomere has repeating bands of actin and myosin that occur between two Z
lines in a myofibril.
1) The I band contains only actin filaments.
2) The H zone contains only myosin filaments.
3. Sliding Filament Model
a. As a muscle fiber contracts, sarcomeres within the myofibrils shorten.
b. As a sarcomere shortens, actin filaments slide past the myosin; the I band shortens
and the H zone disappears.
c. Sliding filament model: actin filaments slide past myosin filaments because
myosin filaments have cross-bridges that pull actin filaments inward, toward their
Z line.
d. The contraction process involves the sarcomere shortening although the filaments
themselves remain the same length.
e. ATP supplies the energy for muscle contraction.
f. Myosin filaments break down ATP to form cross-bridges that attach to and pull
the actin filaments toward the center of the sarcomere.
4. ATP
a. Muscle cells contain myoglobin that stores oxygen; cellular respiration does not
immediately supply all of the ATP needed.
b. Muscle fibers rely on a supply of stored creatine phosphate (phosphocreatine), a
storage form of high-energy phosphate.
c. Creatine phosphate does not directly participate in muscle contraction but
regenerates ATP rapidly: creatine — P + ADP → ATP + creatine
d. This reaction occurs in the midst of sliding filaments and is speedy.
e. When all creatine phosphate is depleted, and if O2 is in limited supply,
fermentation produces a small amount of ATP, but this results in a buildup of
lactate.
f. The buildup of lactate partially accounts for muscle fatigue and represents oxygen
debt.
g. Lactate is transported to the liver; 20% is completely broken down to CO2 and
H2O in aerobic respiration.
h. The ATP gained from this respiration is then used to reconvert 80% of the lactate
to glucose.
i. In persons who train, the number of mitochondria increases, reducing the need for
fermentation.
C. Muscle Innervation
1. Muscles are stimulated to contract by motor nerve fibers.
2. The neuromuscular junction is a region where an axon bulb is in close association
with the sarcolemma of a muscle fiber.
3. An axon bulb contains synaptic vesicles filled with the neurotransmitter
acetylcholine.
4. When nerve impulses travel down a motor neuron to the axon bulb, vesicles merge
with the presynaptic membrane and acetylcholine molecules are released into the
synaptic cleft.
303
5. Acetylcholine rapidly diffuses to and binds with receptors on the sarcolemma.
6. The sarcolemma generates impulse spreading down the T tubule system to the
sarcoplasmic reticulum where it triggers the release of Ca2+ ions out amongst the
myofilaments.
7. The Ca2+ ions then initiate muscle contraction.
8. Ca2+ ions bind to troponin, which causes tropomyosin threads to shift position.
9. The change in the structure of tropomyosin exposes the myosin heads with ATP
binding sites.
10. The myosin heads function as ATPase enzymes, splitting ATP into ADP and Pi .
11. After attaching to actin filaments, the myosin cross-bridges bend forward and the
actin filament is pulled along.
12. While ATP and Ca2+ ions are available, cross-bridges attach; as ADP and P are
released, the cross-bridges change their positions and cause a power stroke as
filaments pull together.
13. When another ATP molecule binds to the myosin head, the cross-bridge detaches and
the cycle begins again.
14. When a nerve impulse ceases, active transport proteins in the sarcoplasmic reticulum
pump calcium ions back into calcium storage sites and muscle relaxation occurs.
15. Without ATP, the myosis heads can’t detach from actin, nor can calcium be pumped
back into the sacroplasmic reciculum, and the muscles remain contracted, called rigor
mortis.
304
Chapter 40
40.1 Endocrine Glands
1. The endocrine system functions differently from the nervous system.
2. An endocrine system consists of glands that coordinate body activities through
hormones.
3. In contrast to the exocrine glands, which have ducts leading to other organs or outside
the body, the endocrine glands secrete their products into the bloodstream, which
delivers them throughout the body.
4. Chemical signals are used between individuals, between body parts, and between
cells.
5. Both the nervous system and the endocrine system rely on negative feedback
mechanisms.
A. Hormones Are Chemical Signals
1. Chemical signals are a means of communication between cells, body parts, or
individuals.
2. In general, they affect the metabolism of the cells that have receptors for them.
3. Most hormones act at a distance between body parts, traveling through the
bloodstream from the gland to the target cell.
4. Some hormones (e.g., prostaglandins, growth factors) are local hormones—they
affect only neighboring cells.
5. Pheromones are environmental signals that act at a distance between individual
organisms.
a. Women may synchronize their menstrual cycles with women who live in their
household, and a particular pheromone released by men may reduce premenstrual
nervousness and tension in women.
B. The Action of Hormones
1. The Action of Peptide Hormones
a. The term peptide hormone is used to include hormones that are peptides,
proteins, glycoproteins, and modified amino acids.
b. Epinephrine is a peptide hormone that binds to a receptor protein in the target
cell’s plasma membrane; a relay system leads to conversion of ATP to cyclic
AMP (cAMP).
c. Cyclic adenosine monophosphate (cAMP) is made from ATP; it has one
phosphate group attached to adenosine at two locations.
d. Peptide hormones are the first messenger; cAMP and calcium are the second
messenger.
e. The peptide hormone does not enter the cell; the second messenger sets an
enzyme cascade in motion.
2. The Action of Steroid Hormones
a. Steroid hormones are lipids and cross cell membranes freely; they do not bind to
plasma membrane receptors.
b. Inside the cytoplasm or a nucleus, steroid hormones (e.g., estrogen, progesterone)
bind to a specific receptor.
c. The hormone-receptor complex binds to DNA, resulting in activation of genes
(transcription) that produce enzymes (translation).
d. Steroids act more slowly than peptide hormones because it takes more time to
305
synthesize new proteins than to activate enzymes already present in cells;
however, their action lasts longer.
e. Steroid hormones are produced in the adrenal cortex, the ovaries, and the testes.
40.2 Hypothalamus and Pituitary Gland
1. The hypothalamus regulates the internal environment through the autonomic system.
a. It controls heartbeat, temperature, water balance, as well as glandular secretions
of the pituitary gland.
2. The pituitary gland (hypophysis) is connected to the hypothalamus by a stalklike
structure.
a. It is about 1 cm in diameter and lies just below the hypothalamus.
b. It is comprised of two portions: the posterior pituitary and the anterior pituitary.
A. Posterior Pituitary
1. Neurons in the hypothalamus called neurosecretory cells produce antidiuretic
hormone (ADH) and oxytocin, which pass through axon endings in the posterior
pituitary and are stored until released.
2. Antidiuretic hormone (ADH) promotes reabsorption of water from the collecting
ducts in the kidneys.
3. Nerve cells in the hypothalamus determine when the blood is too concentrated; ADH
is released and the kidneys respond by reabsorbing water.
a. As the blood becomes dilute, ADH is no longer released; this is a case of negative
feedback.
b. Inability to produce ADH causes diabetes insipidus (watery urine), in which the
individual produces copious amounts of urine and a resultant loss of ions from the
blood.
4. Oxytocin is also made in the hypothalamus and stored in the posterior pituitary.
a. Oxytocin stimulates uterine muscle contraction in response to uterine wall nerve
impulses.
b. It also stimulates the release of milk from mammary glands.
c. This positive feedback mechanism increases intensity; such positive feedback
does not maintain homeostasis.
d. Oxytocin also may play a role in the propulsion of semen through the male
reproductive tract.
B. Anterior Pituitary
1. Stimulation by the hypothalamus controls the release of anterior pituitary hormones
through a portal system consisting of two capillary systems connected by a vein.
2. The hypothalamus produces hypothalamic-releasing and hypothalamic-inhibiting
hormones which pass to the anterior pituitary by this portal system.
a. Thyroid-releasing hormones released from the hypothalamus act on cells in the
anterior pituitary to stimulate the production and secretion of a specific hormone.
b. Thyroid-inhibiting hormones produced in and released from the hypothalamus
act on cells in the anterior pituitary to inhibit the production and secretion of a
specific hormone.
3. The anterior pituitary produces six different hormones.
a. Three of these anterior pituitary hormones affect other glands.
1) The thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH) stimulates the thyroid to produce
and secrete thyroxin.
306
2) Adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH) stimulates the adrenal cortex to
release cortisol.
3) Gonadotropic hormones (follicle-stimulating hormone [FSH] and luteinizing
hormone [LH]) act on the gonads (ovaries and testes) to secrete sex hormones.
b. The other three hormones do not affect other glands.
1)
Prolactin (PRL) is produced in quantity only after childbirth.
a) Prolactin causes the mammary glands to produce milk.
b) It also plays a role in carbohydrate and fat metabolism.
2) Melanocyte-stimulating hormone (MSH) causes skin color changes in
fishes, amphibians, and reptiles with melanophores, special skin cells.
3) Growth hormone (GH or somatotropic hormone)
a) GH promotes skeletal and muscular growth.
b) GH acts to stimulate the transport of amino acids into cells and to increase
the activity of ribosomes.
c) GH promotes fat metabolism rather than glucose metabolism.
d) Too little GH during childhood makes an individual a pituitary dwarf.
e) Too much forms a giant; life expectancy is less because GH affects blood
glucose levels and promotes diabetes mellitus.
f) The overproduction of GH in adults results in acromegaly; since long bone
growth is no longer possible, only the feet, hands, and face grow.
40.3 Other Endocrine Glands and Hormones
A. Thyroid and Parathyroid Glands
1. The thyroid gland is in the neck and attached to the trachea just below the larynx.
2. The parathyroid glands are embedded in the posterior surface of the thyroid gland.
3. Thyroid Gland
a. The thyroid gland is the largest endocrine gland.
b. The two hormones produced by the many follicles of the thyroid gland both
contain iodine.
1) Thyroxine (T4) contains four iodine atoms.
2) Triiodothyronine (T3) contains three iodine atoms.
c. Lack of iodine causes enlargement of the thyroid (simple goiter).
1) Simple goiter is easily prevented by supplementing iodine intake in salt.
d. Thyroid hormones increase the metabolic rate; there is no one target organ—all
organs respond.
e. Congenital hypothyroidism (cretinism) occurs in individuals who have suffered
from low thyroid function since birth.
1) Affected individuals are short and stocky and have had hypothyroidism since
infancy.
2) Thyroid treatment helps but unless it is begun in the first two months, mental
retardation can occur.
f. Myxedema is hypothyroidism in adults; thyroid hormones can restore normal
function.
g. Hyperthyroidism (Graves disease) occurs when the thyroid gland is enlarged or
overactive.
1) The eyes protrude because of edema in the eye socket tissue; this is called
exophthalmic goiter.
307
2) Removal or destruction of some thyroid tissue by surgery or radiation often
cures the condition.
h. The thyroid gland also produces calcitonin.
1) Calcitonin lowers the calcium level in the blood and increases deposits in the
bone by reducing osteoclasts.
2) Calcitonin is also necessary for blood clotting.
3) If blood calcium is lowered to normal, the release of calcitonin is inhibited.
4) Too low calcium levels stimulate the release of parathyroid hormone (PTH)
by the parathyroid glands.
4. Parathyroid Glands
a. Parathyroid glands produce parathyroid hormone (PTH).
1) Under the influence of PTH, the calcium level in blood increases and the
phosphate level decreases.
2) PTH stimulates the absorption of Ca2+ by activating vitamin D, the retention
of Ca2+ (and excretion of phosphate) by the kidneys and demineralization of
bone by promoting the activity of osteoclasts.
3) When the blood calcium level reaches the right level, the parathyroid glands
no longer produce PTH.
4) If PTH is not produced in response to low blood Ca2+, tetany results because
the Ca2+ plays an important role in both nerve conduction and muscle
contraction.
b. In tetany, the body shakes from continuous muscle contraction due to the
increased excitability of nerves that fire spontaneously and without rest; this
condition may be due to hypoparathyroidism.
c. In hyperparathyroidism, the abnormally high blood calcium levels can cause the
bones to be soft and fragile, and the individual to be prone to kidney stones.
d. PTH and calcitonin are antagonistic hormones because their action is opposite to
one another, and both hormones work together to regulate the blood calcium
level.
B. Adrenal Glands
1. Two adrenal glands sit atop the kidneys.
2. Each gland consists of two parts: an outer adrenal cortex and an inner adrenal
medulla.
3. The cortex and medulla have no physiological connection between them.
4. The hypothalamus exerts control over both portions.
a. Nerve impulses travel via the brain stem to the spinal cord to sympathetic nerve
fibers to the medulla.
b. The hypothalamus uses ACTH-releasing hormone to control the anterior
pituitary’s secretion of ACTH.
5. Adrenal hormones increase during times of physical and emotional stress.
6. Both epinephrine and norepinephrine are produced by the adrenal medulla.
7. Both hormones bring about body changes corresponding to an emergency.
a. The blood glucose level rises and metabolic rate increases.
b. The bronchioles dilate and breathing rate increases.
c. Blood vessels to the digestive tract and skin constrict; those to the skeletal
muscles dilate.
308
d. The cardiac muscle contracts more forcefully and the heart rate increases.
8. The adrenal cortex hormones provide a sustained response to stress.
a. The adrenal cortex secretes two types of hormones: glucocorticoids and
mineralocorticoids.
Glucocorticoids help to regulate blood glucose levels.
Mineralocorticoids regulate the levels of minerals in the blood.
The adrenal cortex also secretes a small amount of both male and female sex
hormones in both sexes.
9. Glucocorticoids: Cortisol is a biologically significant glucocorticoid.
a. Cortisol promotes the breakdown of muscle protein into amino acids taken up by
the liver from the blood.
b. Cortisol breaks down fatty acids rather than carbohydrates; cortisol therefore
raises blood glucose levels.
c. Cortisol counteracts the inflammatory response; it helps medicate arthritis and
bursitis.
10. Mineralocorticoids: Aldosterone is the most important of the mineralocorticoids.
a. The primary target organ is the kidney where it promotes the reabsorption of Na+
and the excretion of K+.
b. Mineralocorticoid secretion is controlled by the renin-angiotensin-aldosterone
system
1) Under low blood volume and sodium levels, the kidneys secrete renin.
2) The enzyme renin converts the plasma protein angiotensinogen to angiotensin
I; this becomes angiotensin II by a converting enzyme in the lungs.
3) Angiotensin II stimulates the adrenal cortex to release aldosterone.
4) Angiotensin I constricts the arterioles directly; aldosterone causes the kidneys
to absorb calcium.
5) When the blood sodium rises, water is reabsorbed as the hypothalamus
secretes ADH; blood pressure then increases to normal.
c. Atrial natriuretic hormone (ANH) causes the excretion of sodium.
1) When the atria of the heart are stretched due to increased blood volume,
cardiac cells release ANH.
2) ANH inhibits the secretion of renin by the kidneys and the secretion of
aldosterone from the adrenal cortex.
3) When sodium is excreted, so is water; the blood volume and pressure then
return to normal.
11. Malfunction of the Adrenal Cortex
a. Low levels of adrenal cortex hormones (hyposecretion) result in Addison disease.
1) When ACTH is in excess, like MSH, it can lead to the buildup of melanin and
a bronzing of the skin.
2) The lack of cortisol results in low glucose levels; a stressed person has
insufficient energy.
3) The lack of aldosterone drops blood sodium levels; a person then has low
blood pressure and dehydration.
4) Left untreated, Addison disease can be fatal.
b. High levels of adrenal cortex hormones from hypersecretion result in Cushing
syndrome.
309
1) Excess cortisol causes a tendency toward diabetes mellitus.
2) Muscular protein then decreases and subcutaneous fat forms an obese trunk
but normal arms and legs.
C. Pancreas
1. The pancreas lies transversely in the abdomen between the kidneys and near the
duodenum.
2. The pancreas is composed of two types of tissue.
a. Exocrine tissue produces and secretes digestive juices into the small intestine by
way of ducts.
b. Endocrine tissues called pancreatic islets (islets of Langerhans) produce insulin
and glucagon.
3. All body cells utilize glucose; therefore its level must be closely regulated.
4. Insulin is secreted when the blood glucose level is high after eating; insulin has three
actions.
a. Insulin stimulates liver, fat, and muscle cells to take up glucose.
b. Insulin stimulates the liver and muscles to store glucose as glycogen.
c. Insulin promotes buildup of fats and proteins and inhibits their use as an energy
source.
5. Glucagon is secreted between meals in response to low blood glucose level.
a. Liver and adipose tissue are the main targets.
b. Adipose tissue cells break the fat into glycerol and fatty acids.
c. The liver uses glycerol and fatty acids as substrates for glucose, raising the blood
glucose levels.
6. Diabetes Mellitus
Diabetes mellitus is a fairly common disease where the body cells do not take up or
metabolize sugar.
Blood glucose level becomes high enough for the kidneys to excrete glucose; therefore
this is detected by a urine test.
The liver is not storing glucose as glycogen and cells are not utilizing glucose for
energy.
Since carbohydrate is not being metabolized, the body breaks down protein and fat for
energy.
Ketones then build up in blood; the resulting reduced blood volume and acidosis can
lead to coma and death.
In type 1 (insulin-dependent) diabetes, the pancreas does not produce insulin.
A viral infection can cause cytotoxic T cells to destroy pancreatic islets.
This is treated with a daily administration of insulin; an overdose or lack of eating
results in hypoglycemia.
The brain also has constant sugar requirements; low blood sugar can result in
unconsciousness.
An immediate intake of sugar is a simple and effective treatment.
7. Of 18 million diabetics in the U.S., most have type 2 (noninsulin-dependent) diabetes.
This form of diabetes usually occurs in obese and inactive individuals of any age.
The pancreas does produce insulin but live muscle cells do not respond to it.
Initially, this is a result of cells lacking the receptors for insulin.
Untreated, type II diabetes can have serious symptoms: blindness, kidney disease,
310
D.
E.
F.
G.
circulatory disorders, strokes, etc.
A low fat diet and regular exercise help; oral drugs can make cells more sensitive to
insulin or stimulate higher levels of insulin production by the pancreas.
Isolation of Insulin (Science focus box)
1. In 1920, physician Frederick Banting decided to try to isolate insulin.
2. He decided to try to tie off the pancreatic duct, which he knew would lead to the
degeneration only of the cells that produce digestive juices, and not of the pancreatic
islets where insulin is made.
3. He and Charles Best worked and obtained pancreatic extracts that did lower the blood
glucose level in diabetic dogs.
4. A biochemist was brought in to purify the extract.
5. Insulin therapy for the first human patient began in 1922, and large-scale production
of purified insulin from pigs and cattle followed.
6. Banting, and his professor Mcleod received a Nobel Prize for their work in 1923.
7. The amino acid sequence of insulin was determined in 1953.
8. Insulin is presently synthesized by using recombinant DNA technology.
Testes and Ovaries
1. The testes located in the scrotum function as gonads and produce androgens (e.g.,
testosterone).
a. Testosterone is the male sex hormone.
b. It stimulates the development of male secondary sex characteristics: large vocal
cords, pubic hair, etc.
c. Testosterone is largely responsible for the sex drive.
d. Anabolic steroids are supplemental testosterone or similar chemicals with serious
side effects.
e. Testosterone also affects sweat glands, expression of baldness genes, and other
effects.
2. The ovaries, located in the pelvic cavity, produce the female sex hormones estrogens
and progesterone.
a. Estrogens secreted at puberty stimulate the maturation of ovaries and other
sexual organs.
b. Estrogen is necessary for oocyte development.
c. It is responsible for the development of female secondary sex characteristics: a
layer of fat beneath the skin, a larger pelvic girdle, etc.
d. Estrogen and progesterone are required for breast development and the regulation
of the uterine cycle.
Pineal Gland
1. The pineal gland, located in the brain, produces melatonin, primarily at night.
2. The pineal gland and melatonin help establish circadian rhythms, 24-hour
physiological cycles.
3. The pineal gland may also be involved in human sexual development; children in
whom a brain tumor has destroyed the pineal gland experience puberty earlier.
Thymus Gland
1. The thymus gland is a lobular gland that lies just beneath the sternum in the upper
thoracic cavity.
2. It reaches its largest size and is most active during childhood; with age, it shrinks and
311
becomes fatty.
3. Some lymphocytes that originate in the bone marrow pass through the thymus and
change into T lymphocytes.
4. The thymus produces thymosins, which aid in the differentiation of T cells and may
stimulate immune cells.
H. Other Hormones
1. Leptin is a peptide hormone secreted by adipose tissue.
Its main function is its role in the feedback control of appetite; it can suppress appetite.
2. Erythropoietin (EPO) is a peptide hormone produced in the kidneys.
It stimulates the production of red blood cells and speeds up their maturation.
3. Local hormones such as prostaglandins are produced by certain cells and act on
neighboring cells.
a. Prostaglandins are potent chemical signals which have several known functions.
b. They cause the contraction of uterine muscle, and they mediate the effects of
pyrogens (chemicals believed to affect the temperature regulatory center of the
brain).
c. Certain prostaglandins reduce gastric secretions, others lower blood pressure.
d. Aspirin reduces temperature and controls pain because of its effect on
prostaglandins.
312
Chapter 41
41.1 How Animals Reproduce
There are two patterns of reproduction:
1. Asexual–only one parent is involved and the offspring are identical to the parent.
2. Sexual–two parents are involved and the offspring are genetically unique.
A. Asexual Reproduction
1. Sponges produce asexual gemmules that develop into new individuals.
2. Hydra reproduce asexually by budding; a new individual arises as an outgrowth (bud)
of a parent.
3. Obelia undergoes an alternation of generations: an asexual colonial stage and a sexual
medusa stage.
4. Flatworms can constrict into two halves, each half becoming a new individual.
5. Fragmentation followed by regeneration is seen among annelids, sponges, and
echinoderms.
6. Parthenogenesis is found among some insects, worms, fish, lizards and some other
animals; an unfertilized egg develops into a complete individual.
7. In honeybees, the queen can fertilize or not fertilize the eggs, producing diploid
female workers (if fertilized) or haploid male drones (if unfertilized).
B. Sexual Reproduction
1. In sexual reproduction, the egg of one parent is fertilized by the sperm of the other;
most animals are dioecious (having separate sexes).
2. Hermaphroditic organisms possess both male and female organs.
a. Earthworms undergo cross-fertilization.
b. Tapeworms are capable of self-fertilization.
c. Sequential hermaphroditism, or sex reversal, involves the changing of sex; a male
wrass (a reef fish) has a harem but if the male dies, the largest female becomes a
male.
3. Gonads are organs specialized to produce gametes.
a. Sponges are an exception since their collar cells give rise to sperm and eggs.
b. Hydras produce only temporary gonads in the fall when sexual reproduction
occurs.
c. Animals in other phyla have permanent gonads.
4. There are two types of gonads: testes produce sperm and ovaries produce eggs.
5. Eggs and sperm cells derive from germ cells that specialize early for this
development.
6. Other cells in the gonads support and nourish the developing gametes or produce
hormones for reproduction.
7. Accessory organs form ducts and storage areas that aid in bringing gametes together.
8. Sexually-reproducing animals have various methods to ensure that the gametes unite.
a. Aquatic animals that practice external fertilization must synchronize egg release.
b. The lunar cycle is one trigger that cues animals by tides.
c. Hundreds of thousands of palolo worms rise to the surface to release eggs during
a 2–4 hour period.
9. Copulation is sexual union to facilitate the reception of sperm by a female.
a. The penis is a male copulatory organ typical of terrestrial males; it deposits sperm
into the female’s vagina.
313
b. Birds lack a penis or vagina; they transfer sperm from cloaca to cloaca.
c. Female damselflies curls her abdomen forward to receive sperm previously
deposited in a pouch by the male, and copulation doesn’t occur.
C. Life History Strategies
1. Many aquatic animals use external fertilization; eggs and sperm join outside the body
in the water.
2. Terrestrial animals tend to practice internal fertilization; eggs and sperm join inside
the female’s body.
3. Both types of animals are usually oviparous; they deposit eggs in the external
environment.
4. Insect eggs are produced in ovaries; they mature and increase in size as a result of the
accumulation of yolk.
a. Yolk is stored food to be used by the developing embryo.
b. To prevent insect eggs from drying out, their eggshell has several layers of protein
or wax.
c. In insects, small holes are left at one end to allow for the entry of sperm.
5. Some insects have a special organ to store sperm so the eggs can be fertilized later.
6. A larval stage is often quite different in appearance and way of life from the adult
form.
a. The larva is able to seek its own food to sustain itself until it becomes an adult.
b. Metamorphosis is a major change in form that some animals undergo during
development.
c. Incomplete metamorphosis lacks a pupal stage and the nymphs look more like
adults.
d. Larval aquatic forms can utilize a different food source than the adults.
e. The bilaterally symmetrical sea star larvae attach to a substrate and become
radially symmetrical adults.
f. The free-swimming barnacle larvae metamorphose into sessile adults with
calcareous plates.
g. The crayfish lacks a larval stage; eggs hatch into tiny juveniles with the same
form as the adults.
7. Reptiles and birds provide their eggs with plentiful yolk; there is no larval stage.
a. Complete development takes place within a shell containing extraembryonic
membranes.
b. The chorion is the outermost membrane that lies next to the shell and functions in
gas exchange.
c. The amnion forms a water-filled sac around the embryo ensuring that it will not
dry out.
d. A yolk sac holds yolk which nourishes the embryo.
e. The allantois holds nitrogen waste products.
f. A shelled egg frees an animal from any need to reproduce in water and also helps
it live completely on land.
8. Birds tend their eggs.
a. Newly hatched birds have to be fed before they develop to where they can seek
food on their own.
b. Parent bird’s reproductive behaviors involve complex hormone and neural
314
regulation.
9. In oysters and sea horses; the eggs remain inside the body until they hatch fullydeveloped.
10. Garter snakes, water snakes, and pit vipers also retain eggs until they hatch and give
birth to live young.
11. Mammals are viviparous, producing living young.
a. The nutrients needed for development are constantly supplied by the mother.
b. Viviparity represents the ultimate in caring for the zygote and the embryo.
c. The evolution of viviparity can be seen in the primitive mammals.
1) The exceptions are the duckbill platypus and the spiny anteater, which are
egg-laying mammals.
2) Marsupials give birth to immature offspring that finish developing within a
pouch.
3) In all other mammals, development occurs in a placenta.
12. The placenta is a complex organ comprised of maternal and embryonic tissues.
a. A placenta exchanges O2, CO2, nutrients, wastes, etc., between the fetal and
maternal circulations.
b. Evolution allowed embryos to exchange materials with the mother; this made the
shell unnecessary.
41.2 Male Reproductive System
1. Paired testes are suspended in the scrotal sacs of the scrotum.
2. The testes begin development in the abdominal cavity but descend into the scrotal sac
during development.
3. If the testes do not descend, without surgery or hormonal therapy, sterility results.
4. The lower temperature of the scrotum is vital to normal sperm production.
5. Sperm produced in the testes mature within the epididymides.
a. These are tightly coiled tubules outside of the testes in which the sperm undergo
maturation.
b. The maturation time in the epididymis is required for the sperm to develop the
ability to swim to the egg.
6. Once sperm have matured, they are propelled into the vasa deferentia by muscular
contractions.
7. Sperm are stored in both the epididymides and the vasa deferentia.
8. When a male is sexually aroused, the sperm enter the urethra, part of which extends
through the penis.
9. a vasectomy is a surgical form of birth control in which the vasa deferentia are
severed or blocked and sperm cannot complete their journey down the male
reproductive tract.
A. Orgasm in Males
1. The penis is a cylindrical copulatory organ used to introduce spermatozoa into the
female vagina.
a. The penis has a long shaft and an enlarged tip called the glans penis.
b. The glans penis is normally covered by a layer of skin called the foreskin;
circumcision is the surgical removal of the foreskin soon after birth.
c. Three columns of spongy, erectile tissue extend down the penile shaft.
d. During sexual arousal, nervous reflexes cause an increase in the arterial blood
315
flow to the penis.
e. Increased blood flow fills and distends the erectile tissue, and the penis stiffens
and increases in size.
f. These changes cause an erection; failure to achieve an erection is called erectile
dysfunction.
2. Semen (seminal fluid) is thick, whitish fluid that contains sperm and glandular
secretions.
a. The seminal fluid is formed by the seminal vesicles, prostate gland, and
bulbourethral glands.
b. The seminal vesicles lie at the base of the urinary bladder.
1) Each joins a vasa deferensia to form an ejaculatory duct that enters the
urethra.
2) They secrete into the ejaculatory duct a thick fluid containing nutrients for use
by the sperm.
c. The prostate gland is located just below the urinary bladder and surrounds the
upper portion of the urethra.
1) It secretes a milky, slightly alkaline solution that promotes sperm motility and
viability.
2) In older men, the prostate gland may become enlarged and constrict the
urethra.
3) Prostate cancer is also common in older men.
d. The bulbourethral glands are located below the prostate gland and on either side
of the urethra; they release mucus secretions that provide lubrication.
3. The urethra also conducts urine from the bladder during urination.
4. Ejaculation results in the expulsion of semen; this is achieved at the peak of sexual
arousal.
5. The first phase of ejaculation is emission.
a. Nerve impulses from the spine trigger the epididymides and vasa deferentia to
contract.
b. Subsequent motility causes the sperm to enter the ejaculatory duct; seminal
vesicles, the prostate gland, and the bulbourethral glands release their secretions.
c. A small amount of secretion from the bulbourethral glands may leak from the end
of penis; it functions to clean the urethra of acid but it may contain sperm.
6. The second phase of ejaculation is expulsion.
a. Rhythmical contractions at the base of the penis and within the urethral wall expel
the semen in spurts.
b. Rhythmical contractions are a release from myotonia, or muscle tenseness, an
important sexual response.
7. An erection lasts for a limited time and the penis generally returns to a flaccid state
following ejaculation.
8. A refractory period follows during which stimulation does not bring about an
erection.
9. Orgasm is the physiological and psychological sensations that occur at the climax of
sexual stimulation.
B. The Testes
1. A longitudinal section shows compartments called lobules, each of which contains
316
one to three seminiferous tubules.
a. Altogether, seminiferous tubules have a combined length of about 250 meters.
b. In a microscopic cross section, tubules show cells undergoing spermatogenesis, a
process of meiosis.
c. The sustentacular (Sertoli) cells support, nourish, and regulate spermatogenic
cells.
2. Mature sperm (spermatozoa) have three parts.
a. The sperm head contains a nucleus covered by an acrosome.
1) An acrosome is a caplike covering over the anterior end of nucleus; it stores
enzymes to penetrate the egg.
2) A human egg is surrounded by several layers of cells and thick membrane; the
enzymes allow the sperm to penetrate.
b. The middle piece contains mitochondria wrapped around microtubules of the
flagellum; the mitochondria provide the energy for movement.
c. The tail also contains microtubules as components of a flagellum; its movement
propels sperm.
3. The ejaculate of a normal human male contains several hundred million sperm.
4. Fewer than 100 ever reach the vicinity of an egg; and only one sperm normally enters
an egg.
C. Hormonal Regulation in Males
1. The hypothalamus has ultimate control of the testes’ sexual function through
secreting of gonadotropic-releasing hormone (GnRH) that stimulates the pituitary to
produce gonadotropic hormones.
2. There are two gonadotropic hormones: follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) and
luteinizing hormone (LH) found in both males and females.
3. In males, FSH stimulates spermatogenesis in the seminiferous tubules.
4. In males, luteinizing hormone (LH) is also called interstitial cell-stimulating hormone
(ICSH); it stimulates testosterone secretion by interstitial cells of the testes.
5. The seminiferous tubules also release the hormone inhibin.
6. The hypothalamus-pituitary-testis system are involved in a negative feedback
relationship that maintain a fairly constant production of sperm and testosterone.
7.
Functions of Testosterone
a. Testosterone is the main sex hormone in males.
b. Testosterone is essential for the development of male secondary sex
characteristics that develop at puberty, and for the maturation of sperm.
1) It causes the tallness, longer legs and broader shoulders of males.
2) Testosterone causes the larynx and vocal cords to enlarge, thus causing a
deeper voice.
3) It is responsible for greater muscle strength of males; some athletes take
supplemental anabolic steroids (that are natural or synthetic testosterone).
4) Testosterone causes males to develop hair on the face, chest, and back.
5) Testosterone is also involved in triggering baldness if baldness genes are
present.
41.3 Female Reproductive System
1. The female reproductive system includes: ovaries, oviducts, uterus, and vagina.
2. The ovaries produce a secondary oocyte each month; the ovaries are located in the
317
pelvic cavity.
3. The oviducts (uterine tubes, fallopian tubes) extend from the ovaries to the uterus.
a. The oviducts are not attached to the ovaries.
b. Fingerlike projections called fimbriae sweep over the ovaries and waft in the egg
when it erupts.
c. This is the normal site for fertilization; the embryo is slowly moved by ciliary
movement toward the uterus.
d. Tubal ligation is a surgery in which oviducts are either burned or clipped shut so
that sperm cannot reach the oocyte.
4. The uterus is a hollow, thick-walled muscular organ the size and shape of an inverted
pear.
a. An embryo completes development by embedding itself in uterine lining, the
endometrium.
b. The narrow end of the uterus is the cervix.
c. A small opening at the cervix of the uterus leads to the vaginal canal.
5. The vagina is a tube at a 45o angle with the small of the back.
a. Its mucosal lining lies in folds and it can extend, as necessary in childbirth.
b. It receives the penis during copulation and also serves as the birth canal.
A. Orgasm in Females
1. The external genitalia of women are known collectively as the vulva.
a. The mons pubis, labia minora, and labia majora are to the side of the vaginal and
urethral openings.
b. At the front juncture of the labia minora is the clitoris.
1) This is homologous to the penis in males.
2) The clitoris has a short shaft of erectile tissue and is capped by a pea-shaped
glans.
3) It contains many sensory receptors that allow it to function as a sexually
sensitive organ.
c. Orgasm involves the release of neuromuscular tension in the muscles of the
genital area, vagina, and uterus.
B. The Ovaries
1. The ovaries alternate in producing one oocyte each month.
2. The ovaries produce the egg (ovum) and the female sex hormones, estrogens and
progesterone, during the ovarian cycle.
3. The Ovarian Cycle
a. In a longitudinal section, an ovary shows many cellular follicles, each containing
an oocyte (egg).
b. As a follicle matures during the ovarian cycle, it develops from a primary follicle
to a secondary follicle to a vesicular (Graafian) follicle.
c. As oogenesis is occurring, a secondary follicle contains a secondary oocyte
pushed to one side of fluid-filled cavity.
d. The vesicular follicle fills with fluid until the follicle wall balloons out on the
surface and bursts, releasing a secondary oocyte surrounded by a zona pellucida
and follicular cells.
e. Ovulation is the rupture of the vesicular follicle with the discharge of the
secondary oocyte into the oviduct.
318
f.
The secondary oocyte completes a second meiotic cell division when fertilization
occurs.
g. Meanwhile, the follicle develops into the corpus luteum; if pregnancy does not
occur, the corpus luteum begins to degenerate in 10 days.
4. Phases of the Ovarian Cycle
a. The ovarian cycle is under the control of gonadotropic hormones:
follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) and luteinizing hormone (LH).
b. The gonadotropic hormones are not present constantly but are secreted at different
rates during the cycle.
c. During the follicular phase, FSH promotes the development of a follicle that
secretes estrogens.
d. As the estrogen level in the blood rises, it exerts feedback control over the
anterior pituitary secretion of FSH; the follicular phase comes to an end.
e. Estrogen levels in the blood rise, causing the hypothalamus to secret more GnRH;
this causes a surge in LH secretion.
f. The LH surge then triggers ovulation.
g. The luteal phase is the second half of the ovarian cycle following ovulation.
1) LH promotes the development of the corpus luteum, which secretes large
amounts of progesterone.
2) As the blood level of progesterone rises, negative feedback to the anterior
pituitary’s secretion of LH causes the corpus luteum to degenerate.
3) As the luteal phase ends, menstruation occurs.
C. The Uterine Cycle
1. Estrogens and progesterone affect the endometrium of the uterus to cause a cycle of
events known as the uterine cycle.
2. An average 28-day uterine cycle is divided into four sections.
a. During days 1–5, low levels of estrogen and progesterone in the body cause
menstruation.
b. During days 6–13, an increased production of estrogens by an ovarian follicle
causes the endometrium to thicken and become vascular and glandular
(proliferative phase).
c. Ovulation usually occurs on day 14 of the 28-day cycle.
d. Days 15–28 see increased production of progesterone by the corpus luteum that
causes the endometrium to double in thickness; uterine glands mature, producing
a thick mucoid secretion; this is the secretory phase.
1) The endometrium is now prepared to receive a developing embryo.
2) If no pregnancy occurs, the progesterone and estrogen levels decline and the
corpus luteum degenerates.
3) With low levels of progesterone, the uterine lining also begins to degenerate.
3. Menstruation is the periodic shedding of tissue and blood from the endometrium;
this lining disintegrates and the blood vessels rupture.
a. A flow of blood and tissues passes out through the vagina.
b. The enzyme fibrinolysin prevents the blood from clotting.
c. The first menstrual period, menarche, typically occurs between the ages of 11
and 12.
d. If menarche does not occur by age 16, amenorrhea exists.
319
1) Primary amenorrhea is usually caused by nonfunctional ovaries or
developmental abnormalities.
2) Secondary amenorrhea may be caused by weight loss or excessive exercise.
e. Menopause, when menstruation ceases because the ovaries are no longer
functioning, usually occurs between the ages of 45 and 55.
1) Menopause is not complete until menstruation is absent for a year.
D. Fertilization and Pregnancy
1. If fertilization occurs, the embryo begins development as it travels down the oviduct
to the uterus.
2. The embryo becomes embedded in the endometrium several days following
fertilization.
3. The placenta develops from both maternal and embryonic tissues.
a. The placenta functions to exchange gases and nutrients between the fetal and
maternal circulation.
b. There is normally no mixing of the blood between the maternal and fetal
circulations.
4. Initially, the placenta produces human chorionic gonadotropin (HCG) which
maintains the corpus luteum.
5. The corpus luteum is maintained by the HCG until the placenta produces its own
progesterone and estrogens.
6. The progesterone and estrogens have two effects at this stage.
a. They shut down the anterior pituitary so that no new follicles mature.
b. They maintain the lining of the uterus so the corpus luteum is not needed.
7. There is no menstruation during pregnancy.
E. Estrogen and Progesterone
1. Estrogens maintain the normal development of the related organs and are responsible
for the secondary sex characteristics of females.
2. There is less body and facial hair, and more fat beneath the skin provides a more
rounded appearance.
3. The pelvic girdle enlarges and the pelvic cavity is larger; therefore, women have
wider hips.
4. Both estrogen and progesterone are required for breast development.
F. The Female Breast
1. The female breast contains 15–24 lobules, each with a mammary duct.
2. The mammary duct begins at the nipple and divides into numerous ducts which end in
alveoli (blind sacs).
3. The hormone prolactin is needed for lactation (milk production) to begin.
4. Production of prolactin is suppressed by the feedback inhibition that estrogens and
progesterone have on the anterior pituitary during pregnancy; therefore, it takes a
couple of days after delivery of a baby for milk production to begin.
5. The breasts produce a watery, yellowish white fluid (colostrum) similar to milk but
containing more protein and less fat, and it is rich in IgA antibodies providing some
immunity to a newborn.
6. Breast cancer is the most common form of cancer in females; women should have
regular breast checks and mammograms when recommended.
41.4 Control of Reproduction
320
A. Birth Control Methods
 The most reliable method of birth control is abstinence; it has the advantage of preventing
transmission of a sexually transmitted disease.
1. Contraceptive Injections
a. Contraceptive injections are now being developed—possibilities include
vaccination against HCG or sperm.
2. Morning-After Pills
a. These regimens either prevent fertilization or stop a fertilized egg from
implanting.
b. Preven is a kit of four synthetic progesterone pills; the medication makes it
difficult for the embryo to implant in the endometrium; it is considered 85%
effective.
c. Mifepristone, also known as RU-486, causes the loss of an implanted embryo.
1) It blocks the progesterone receptors of the endometrial cells.
2) Without functioning receptors for progesterone, the uterine lining sloughs off
carrying the embryo with it.
3) Taken in conjunction with a prostaglandin to induce uterine contractions, it is
95% effective.
B. Reproductive Technologies
 Infertility is the inability of a couple to achieve pregnancy after one year of regular,
unprotected intercourse.
1. Sometimes the causes of infertility may be corrected by medication intervention so
that couples can have children.
a. It is possible for women to take fertility drugs; these treatments may cause
multiple ovulations and multiple births.
2. If unable to have children, many couples choose to adopt children.
3. Assisted reproductive technologies (ART) have been developed to increase the
chance of pregnancy.
a. Sperm and/or oocytes are retrieved from the testes and ovaries, and fertilization
takes place in a clinical or laboratory setting.
4. Artificial Insemination by Donor (AID)
1. A sperm sample is injected into the vagina.
2. If the husband’s sperm count is low, many samples can be combined.
3. Artificial insemination from a donor is necessary when the husband lacks viable
sperm.
4. Intrauterine insemination can be coordinated with drugs used to stimulate the
ovaries.
5. With artificial insemination, sperm can be sorted into those that are X-bearing
(producing a girl) or Y-bearing (producing a girl).
5. In Vitro Fertilization (IVF)
1. In IVF, conception occurs in laboratory glassware.
2. Ultrasound machines spot maturing follicles and a laparoscope is used to harvest
the eggs using a needle.
3. When sperm and egg are combined in glassware, they can be transferred to the
uterus after 2–4 days.
4. While in glassware, the new embryos can be tested for genetic diseases.
321
6.
Gamete Intrafallopian Transfer (GIFT)
1. A gamete is a sex cell, either a sperm or an egg.
2. Due to the low success rate of IVF (15–20%), GIFT immediately places the sperm
and egg in the oviduct.
3. A variation is to fertilize the eggs in the laboratory and then place the zygotes in
the oviducts.
7. Surrogate Mothers
1. Women can be contracted and paid to have babies; they are then surrogate
mothers.
2. The sperm and/or egg can be contributed by the contracting parents.
8. Intracytoplasmic Sperm Injection (ICSI)
1. A single sperm is injected into an egg.
2. This is used when a man has severe infertility problems.
C. Preimplantation Genetic Diagnosis (Health focus box)
1. Parents may want to determine whether their offspring will be free of a genetic
disorder.
2. This testing can be done by determining the genotype of the embryo.
3. Following in vitro fertilization (IVF), only embryos that will not have the genetic
disorders of interest are placed in the uterus to continue developing.
4. It is possible to test the oocyte if the disorder of concern is recessive.
a. By testing the polar body for the recessive mutated allele, those embryos are
rejected, and only the oocyte that has the normal dominant alleles are placed in
the uterus for development.
41.5 Sexually Transmitted Diseases
1. Sexually transmitted diseases (STDs) are caused by organisms ranging from viruses
to arthropods.
2. Humans cannot develop lasting immunity to any STDs; therefore, prompt medical
treatment should be received when exposed to an STD.
3. To prevent STDs, a condom can be used.
4. It is difficult to cure STDs caused by viruses; treatment is available for AIDS and
genital herpes.
5. STDs caused by bacteria (e.g., gonorrhea, chlamydia, and syphilis) are treatable with
antibiotics.
A. AIDS
1. Acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS) is caused by the human
immunodeficiency virus (HIV).
2. HIV attacks the helper T cells that stimulate the activity of B lymphocytes to produce
antibodies.
3. After an HIV infection begins, helper T cells decline in number and a person becomes
more susceptible to infections.
4. Symptoms
5. AIDS has three stages of infection called category A, B, and C
a. The category A stage may last about a year.
1) An individual is asymptomatic but can pass on the infection.
2) Immediately after infection but before testing positive, a large number of
infectious viruses are in the blood.
322
3) After testing positive, a person may remain well for as long as he or she can
maintain sufficient helper T cells (above 500 mm3).
b. The category B stage may last six to eight years.
1)
Lymph nodes swell.
2)
There is weight loss, night sweats, fatigue, fever, and diarrhea.
3)
Infections such as thrush and herpes reoccur.
c. The category C stage is full-blown AIDS.
1) Nervous disorders and opportunistic diseases (e.g., an unusual type of
pneumonia or skin cancer) occur.
2) Without intensive medical treatment, an AIDS patient usually dies by about
7–9 years after infection.
3) A recent combination therapy of several drugs allows AIDS patients in the
United States to live longer.
6. Transmission
a. AIDS is transmitted by sexual contact with an infected person (vaginal or rectal
intercourse and oral/genital contact).
b. Needle sharing among intravenous drug users is a high-risk behavior.
c. Transfusions of blood or clotting factors is now a rare mode of transmission and
can be screened.
d. The largest increases in AIDS cases now involve heterosexual contact and
intravenous drug use.
e. Women now account for 19% of all newly diagnosed cases of AIDS.
7. Treatment
a. Even though there is no cure for AIDS, a treatment called highly active
antiretroviral therapy (HAART) is usually able to stop HIV replication.
b. HAART uses a combination of drugs that interfere with the life cycle of HIV.
c. Entry inhibitors stop HIV from entering a cell.
d. Reverse transcriptase inhibitors (e.g., AZT) interfere with the enzyme reverse
transcriptase.
e. Integrase inhibitors prevent HIV from inserting its own genetic material into that
of the host.
f. Protease inhibitors prevent protease from processing newly created polypeptides.
B. Genital Warts
1. Genital warts are caused by the human papillomaviruses (HPVs).
2. Many carriers are asymptomatic or they have minimal symptoms.
3. If visible warts are removed, they may recur.
4. HPVs are now associated with cancer of the cervix as well as tumors of the vulva,
vagina, anus, and penis.
5. Some researchers believe viruses are involved in 90–95% of all cases of cancer of the
cervix.
C. Genital Herpes
1. Genital herpes is caused by the herpes simplex virus.
2. Type 1causes cold sores and fever blisters; type 2 more often causes genital herpes.
3. Individuals infected with this type of virus can be asymptomatic carriers.
4. Symptoms include painful ulcers on the genitals, fever, painful urination, and swollen
lymph nodes.
323
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
5. Exposure to herpes in the birth canal can cause neurological disorders and even death
in a newborn; birth by cesarean section avoids this possibility.
Hepatitis
1. Hepatitis A is usually acquired from sewage-contaminated drinking water but is also
an STD contracted by oral/anal contact.
2. Hepatitis B is spread in the same manner as AIDS but is more infectious; a vaccine is
available.
3. Hepatitis C is called post-transfusion hepatitis, but it can be transmitted through
sexual contact.
4. Hepatitis infections infect the liver and can lead to liver failure, liver cancer, and
death.
Chlamydia
1. Chlamydia is named for the bacterium that causes it: Chlamydia trachomatis.
2. New chlamydial infections have increased faster than any other STD.
3. It also causes cervical ulcerations which increase the risk of acquiring AIDS.
4. It also causes pelvic inflammatory disease (PID).
5. If a baby is exposed at birth, inflammation of the eyes or pneumonia can result.
Gonorrhea
1. Gonorrhea is caused by the bacterium Neisseria gonorrhoeae.
2. Male diagnosis is not difficult: typical symptoms include urination pain and a thick,
greenish yellow discharge.
3. In males and females, latent infections lead to pelvic inflammatory disease (PID); the
vasa deferentia or the oviducts become infected and inflamed.
4. As these tubes heal, they may become partially blocked, resulting in sterility or
infertility.
5. If a baby is exposed at birth, an eye infection can lead to blindness; therefore all
newborns are given eye drops.
6. Gonorrhea proctitis is an infection of the anus; gonorrhea can infect the mouth, throat,
tonsils, heart, and joints.
7. Previously easily cured by antibiotics, nearly 40% of modern strains are now
antibiotic resistant.
Syphilis
1. Syphilis is caused by the bacterium Treponema pallidum.
2. This disease has three stages typically separated by latent periods.
a. The primary stage involves the appearance of a hard chancre (ulcerated sore).
b. The second stage involves the appearance of a rash all over the body, including
the palms and feet.
c. The third stage involves neurological and cardiac disorders.
1) An infected individual may become mentally retarded, blind, walk with a
shuffle, or become insane.
2) Large destructive ulcers (gummas) develop on the skin or within internal
organs.
3. Syphilitic bacteria can cross the placenta, causing birth defects or stillbirth.
4. Unlike the other STDs discussed, there is a blood test to diagnose syphilis.
5. Tracing sexual partners is very important in controlling syphilis.
Two Other Infections
324
1. Bacterial vaginosis is caused by Gardnerella vaginalis, Trichomonas vaginalis (a
flagellated protozoa), or Candida albicans (a yeast).
2. The protozoan infection causes a frothy, foul-smelling discharge with itching.
3. Trichomoniasis is most often transmitted through sexual intercourse.
4. The Candida yeast infection causes a white, curdy discharge with itching.
5. Candida albicans is a normally-occurring organism in the vagina; yeast infections
can result from taking birth-control pill or antibiotics.
I. Preventing Transmission of STDs (Health Focus box)
1. Sexual activities transmit STDs
a. Ways to prevent the transmission of STDs include:
1)
Abstain from sexual intercourse.
2) Refrain from multiple sex partners or having relations with someone who has
multiple sex partners.
3) Remember that the highest rate of increase of AIDS is in heterosexuals.
4) Be aware that having relations with an intravenous drug user is risky.
5) Uncircumcised males are more likely to become infected with an STD than a
circumcised male.
6) Avoid anal-rectal intercourse.
2. Unsafe sexual practices transmit STDs
a. To reduce the risk of transmitting or contracting an STD:
1)
Always use a latex condom during sexual intercourse.
2) Avoid fellatio (kissing and inserting of the penis into the partner’s mouth) and
cunnilingus (kissing and insertion of the tongue into the vagina).
3) Be cautious about the use of alcohol or any drug that may prevent you from
being able to control your behavior.
3. Drug use transmits Hepatitis and HIV
a. Stop or do not start the habit of injecting drugs into your veins.
b. Always use a new sterile needle for injection or one that has been cleaned in
bleach.
325
Chapter 42
42.1 Early Developmental Stages
1. Fertilization requires that sperm and egg interact to form a zygote.
a. A human sperm cell has three parts.
1) The head contains a haploid nucleus covered by a caplike acrosome
containing enzymes, allowing the sperm to penetrate the egg.
2) A middle piece contains ATP-producing mitochondria.
3) The tail is a flagellum that allows the sperm to swim.
2. The plasma membrane of the egg is surrounded by the zona pellucida.
a. The zona pellucida is surrounded by a few layers of adhering follicular cells,
collectively called the corona radiata.
b. These cells nourished the egg when it was in a follicle of the ovary.
3. Fertilization involves the following steps.
a. Several sperm penetrate the corona radiata and several sperm attempt to penetrate
the zona pellucida.
b. One sperm enters the egg and their nuclei eventually fuse.
c. After the sperm head binds tightly to the zona pellucida, the acrosome enzymes
digest and form a pathway for the sperm through the zona pellucida.
d. The head, middle piece and usually the tail enters the egg.
e. Prevention of polyspermy depends on changes in the egg plasma membrane when
the sperm touches the egg and depolarizes the egg plasma membrane; this is
called Fast block.”
f. Vesicles in the egg called cortical granules secrete enzymes that turn the zona
pellucida, forming an impenetrable fertilization membrane; this is called “Slow
Block.”
g. As soon as plasma membranes of the sperm and egg fuse, the zona pellucida lifts
away from the surface of the egg, forming a moat that prevents entrance of any
other sperm.
h. The diploid zygote forms when a nuclear envelope surrounds the sperm and egg
chromosomes.
A. Embryonic Development
1. Cellular Stages of Development
a. Development is all of the changes that occur during the life cycle of an organism.
b. An organism is an embryo during the first stages of development.
c. After fertilization, a zygote undergoes cleavage, cell division without growth.
d. DNA replication and mitosis occur repeatedly, and the cells get smaller with each
division.
e. In the lancelet, the cell divisions are equal in the resulting morula.
f. A cavity called the blastocoel develops forming a hollow ball called the blastula.
2. Tissue Stages of Development
a. The tissue stages of development are early gastrula and late gastrula.
b. The early gastrula stage begins with the invagination of certain cells into the
blastocoel to form two of the three primary germ layers.
c. The outer layer of cells becomes ectoderm; ectoderm gives rise to the epidermis
of the skin, the epithelial lining of the mouth and rectum, and the nervous system.
326
d.
The inner layer of cells becomes the endoderm that gives rise to the epithelial
lining of the digestive tract and the respiratory tract, associated glands of the
digestive and respiratory system, and the lining of the urinary bladder; a pore
created by invagination is the blastopore.
e. The late gastrula has, in addition to ectoderm and endoderm, a middle layer of
cells called the mesoderm.
1) The outpocketings grow and fuse, forming a two layered mesoderm.
2) The space between them is the coelom that contains the body organs.
3) The mesoderm gives rise to the skeleton, the dermis of the skin, the skeletal
system, the muscular system, the excretory system, the reproductive system
(including most epithelial linings), and the outer layers of respiratory and
digestive systems.
f. These germ layers then develop into those future organs.
3. Organ Stages of Development
a. The newly formed mesoderm cells along the main axis coalesce to form a dorsal
notochord; it persists in lancelets but is replaced in frogs, chicks, and humans by
the vertebral column.
b. The nervous system develops from the midline ectoderm located just above the
notochord.
1) At first, the cells on the dorsal surface of the embryo thicken, forming the
neural plate.
2) Then neural folds develop on either side of a neural groove which becomes
the neural tube when the folds fuse.
3) At this point the embryo is called a neurula.
4) Later, the anterior end of the neural tube develops into the brain; the rest
becomes the spinal cord.
c. Midline mesoderm cells that did not contribute to the formation of the notochord
now become two longitudinal masses of tissue.
1) The two tissue masses become blocked off into somites.
2) The somites give rise to segmental muscles in all chordates; in vertebrates the
somites also form the vertebral bones.
42.2 Developmental Processes

Development requires growth, differentiation, and morphogenesis.
1. Cellular differentiation occurs when cells become specialized in their structure and
function.
2. Morphogenesis produces a change in the shape and form of a body part; this includes
both early cell movement and later pattern formation.
A. Cellular Differentiation
1. Each body cell contains a full set of chromosomes; therefore differentiation is not due
to parceled out genes.
2. Cells in the adult body are totipotent; each contains all of the instructions to form
any specialized cell.
3. Since only muscle cells produce myosin, only red blood cells produce hemoglobin,
and only skin cells produce keratin, there must be differential gene expression.
4. Two mechanisms–cytoplasmic segregation and induction–seem especially important.
5. Cytoplasmic Segregation
327
a.
b.
Differentiation begins long before we can recognize specialized cell types.
Eggs contain substances called maternal determinants that influence the course of
development.
c. Cytoplasmic segregation parcels out the maternal determinants as mitosis occurs
and determines how the various cells of morula develop.
d. Early experiments showed the cytoplasm of a frog egg is not uniform in content.
e. After the first cleavage of a frog embryo, only a daughter cell that receives a
portion of the gray crescent develops into a complete embryo.
f. Hans Spemann (Nobel Prize in 1935) found particular chemical signals within the
gray crescent turn on the genes that control development.
6. Induction and Frog Experiments
a. As development proceeds, differentiation involves signals from neighboring cells.
b. Induction is the ability of one tissue to influence the development of another
tissue.
c. Cell migration occurs during gastrulation; one set of cells can influence the
migratory path of another set.
d. Spemann showed that the dorsal lip of a blastopore (primary organizer) was
necessary for development.
1) The cells closest to the primary organizer become endoderm, those farthest
away become ectoderm, and the intermediate cells became mesoderm.
2) A molecular concentration gradient likely acts as a signal to induce germ layer
differentiation.
e. Spemann and Hilde Mangold worked on the dorsal side of the embryo where the
notochord and the nervous system develop.
1) The presumptive notochord tissue induces the formation of the nervous
system when placed beneath belly ectoderm.
2) Warren Lewis found that a developing lens induces the optic vesicle to form
the optic cup in a frog embryo.
7. Induction in Caenorhabditis elegans
a. Caenorhabditis elegans is a transparent worm, 1mm long and easily raised in
Petri dishes or liquid media.
b. It is hermaphroditic and self-fertile; therefore induced recessive mutations appear
in the next generation.
c. Its entire genome has been sequenced.
d. Worm development takes only three days and an adult worm contains only 959
cells.
e. The destiny of each cell can be followed in specialization and fate maps drawn.
f. The anchor cell receives the most inducers to become the inner vulva;
neighboring cells receive less and become the outer vulva.
g. Work with C. elegans shows that induction requires transcriptional regulation of
genes in a particular sequence.
B. Morphogenesis
1. Morphogenesis in Drosophila melanogaster (the fruit fly)
a. The first event in successful development is the establishment of the
anterior/posterior axes.
b. In Drosophila eggs, there is a greater concentration of bicoid protein at one end.
328
1) Bicoid means “two-tailed”; a maternal mutation causes the egg to lack a head
and it has two tails.
2) By cloning the bicoid gene and using it as a probe, mRNA was found in a
gradient from anterior to posterior.
3) Proteins that influence morphogenesis are morphogens.
4) The bicoid gradient switches on the expression of segmentation genes; a
gradient has a range of effects.
c. The Segmentation Pattern
1) The bicoid gradient begins a cascade of segmentation genes.
2) By exposing flies to mutagens and then mapping mutated genes, they located
segmentation abnormalities.
3) The first genes activated are gap genes; if mutated, they cause missing blocks
of segments.
4) The pair-rule genes ensure 14 segments; a mutation reduces this to half.
5) Segment-polarity genes cause each segment to have an anterior and posterior
half.
6) Morphogen gradients turn on genes because they are transcription factors that
regulate which genes are active in which parts of the embryo in what order.
d. Homeotic Genes
1) Homeotic genes control pattern formation in animal morphogenesis.
2) In normal fruit fly development, homeotic genes are activated after the
segmentation genes.
3) Homeotic genes have been found in many organisms; they all contain the
same sequence of nucleic acids called a homeobox.
4) Because homeotic genes contain a homeobox in mammals, they are called
Hox genes.
5) Each homeobox has a homeodomain, a sequence of sixty amino acids.
6) A homeodomain protein produced by one homeotic gene binds to and turns on
the next homeotic gene, and this orderly process determines the overall pattern
of the embryo.
7) Homeoboxes are derived from an original nucleic acid sequence that has been
conserved because of its importance in regulation of animal development.
e. Apoptosis
1) Apotosis (programmed cell death) is important in morphogenesis.
2) When a cell-death signal is received, an inhibiting protein becomes inactive,
allowing a cell-death cascade to proceed.
42.3 Humans Embryonic and Fetal Development
1. Development covers events from conception (fertilization followed by implantation) to
birth (parturition).
a. The time of birth is calculated by adding 280 days to the start of last menstruation.
b. Only about 5% of babies arrive on the forecasted date due to so many variables.
2. Human development is divided into embryonic and fetal development.
a. The embryonic period, during months 1 and 2 of pregnancy, is when the major
organs are formed.
b. Fetal development is during months 3–9, during which organ systems are refined.
3. Development can also be divided into trimesters.
329
a. First trimester: embryonic and early fetal development occurs.
b. Second trimester: development of organs and organ systems; the fetus is distinctly
human at the end of the second trimester.
c. Third trimester: the fetus grows rapidly and the organ systems become functional.
4. Extraembryonic membranes
a. Evolution of extraembryonic membranes in reptiles made development on land
possible.
1) If an embryo develops in water, the water supplies the oxygen and takes away the
wastes.
2) The surrounding water prevents desiccation and provides a protective cushion.
3) For an embryo on land, these functions are performed by extraembryonic
membranes.
b. Chick extraembryonic membranes develop from extensions of germ layers, which
spread over yolk.
1) The chorion lies next to the shell and carries on gas exchange.
2) The amnion contains protective amniotic fluid that bathes a developing embryo.
3) The allantois collects nitrogenous wastes.
4) A yolk sac surrounds the remaining yolk that provides nourishment.
c. Humans also have these membranes; their function is modified for internal
development.
1) The chorion develops into the fetal half of the placenta.
2) A yolk sac is the first site of blood cell formation.
3) Allantoic blood vessels become the umbilical blood vessels.
4) The amnion surrounds the embryo and cushions it with amniotic fluid.
d. Therefore, all chordate animals develop in water, either in bodies of water or within
the amniotic fluid.
A. Embryonic Development
1. The First Week
a. Fertilization occurs in the upper third of the oviduct; cleavage begins as the
embryo moves down this tube to the uterus.
b. By the time the embryo reaches the uterus on the third day, it is a morula.
c. By the fifth day, the morula is transformed into a blastocyst.
1) A blastocyst is a hollow ball of cells, resulting from cleavage.
2) The trophoblast is an outer single layer of cells, which later gives rise to the
chorion.
3) The inner cell mass is the mass of cells from which the embryo, and
eventually the fetus, will develop.
2. The Second Week
a. At end of the first week, an embryo begins the process of implantation in the wall
of the uterus.
b. The trophoblast secretes enzymes to digest away some of the tissue and blood
vessels of the uterine wall.
c. The trophoblast begins to secrete human chorionic gonadotropin causing the
corpus luteum to be maintained.
d. As the week progresses, the inner cell mass detaches itself from the trophoblast,
and two more extraembryonic membranes form: the yolk sac and amnion.
330
e. The yolk sac forms below the embryonic disk; with no nutritive function in
humans, it is the site of blood cell formation.
f. As in chick development, a human amnion and its cavity are where the embryo
(and then the fetus) develops.
g. In humans, amniotic fluid insulates against any thermal changes; it also cushions
and protects the fetus from trauma.
h. Gastrulation occurs during this week resulting in the inner cell mass flattening
into an embryonic disk.
1) The embryonic disk is composed of two cell layers: the ectoderm above and
the endoderm below.
2) Once an embryonic disk elongates to form the primitive streak (similar to that
found in birds), a third germ layer, the mesoderm, forms by invagination of
the cells along the streak.
i. The trophoblast is reinforced by mesoderm and becomes the chorion.
3. The Third Week
a. The nervous system is the first organ system to become visually evident.
1) It appears as a thickening along the entire dorsal length of the embryo;
invagination occurs as the neural folds appear.
2) When the neural folds meet at the midline, the neural tube is formed.
3) After the notochord is replaced by the vertebral column, the nerve cord is
called the spinal cord.
b. The development of the heart begins in the third week and continues into the
fourth.
1) The right and left heart tubes fuse; the heart begins pumping blood, although
the chambers are not fully formed.
2) The veins enter this largely tubular heart posteriorly, and the arteries exit
anteriorly.
3) Later the heart twists so that all of the major vessels are located anteriorly.
4. The Fourth and Fifth Weeks
a. A bridge of mesoderm (the body stalk) connects the caudal (tail) end of the
embryo with the chorion, which has projections called chorionic villi.
b. The fourth extra embryonic membrane (the allantois) is contained in this stalk; its
blood vessels become the umbilical blood vessels.
c. The head and tail then lift up, and the body stalk moves anteriorly by constriction.
d. Once this process is complete, the umbilical cord is fully formed.
e. Limb buds appear from which the arms and legs will later develop.
f. The head enlarges and the sense organs become more prominent.
g. Rudiments of the eyes, ears, and nose are evident.
5. The Sixth Through Eighth Weeks
a. The developing human becomes more humanlike in appearance.
b. As the brain develops, the head achieves its normal relationship with the body as
a neck region develops.
c. The nervous system is developed well enough to permit reflex actions (e.g., the
startle response to touch).
d. At the eighth week, the embryo is about 38 mm long and weighs no more than an
aspirin tablet; all organs are established.
331
B. The Structure and Function of the Placenta
1. Providing gas, nutrient and waste exchange, the placenta begins formation once the
embryo is fully implanted.
2. Chorionic villi are treelike extensions of the chorion.
a. Chorionic villi project into the maternal tissues.
b. Later, the chorionic villi disappear in all areas except where the placenta
develops.
3. By the tenth week, the placenta is fully formed and has already begun to produce
progesterone and estrogen.
a. Due to the negative feedback control by the hypothalamus and anterior pituitary,
no new follicles mature.
b. They maintain the lining of uterus and there is no menstruation during pregnancy.
4. The chorionic villi are surrounded by maternal blood sinuses; the maternal and fetal
blood do not mix.
5. Exchange of molecules between the fetal and maternal blood takes place across the
walls of the chorionic villi.
6. CO2 and wastes move across from the fetus; O2 and nutrients flow from the maternal
side.
7. The umbilical cord stretches between the placenta and the fetus.
8. Umbilical arteries transport CO2 and other waste molecules to the placenta for
disposal; the umbilical vein transports O2 and nutrient molecules from the placenta to
the rest of the fetal circulatory system.
9. Harmful chemicals can cross the placenta.
a. This is of particular concern during the embryonic period, when various structures
are first forming.
b. Each organ has a sensitive period during which a substance can alter the normal
development.
c. A pregnant woman who takes thalidomide tranquilizer between days 27 and 40 is
likely to have an infant born with deformed limbs; after this time period, the
infant is born normal.
C. Fetal Development and Birth
1. Fetal development (months 3–9) involves an extreme increase in size; the weight
multiplies 600 times.
2. The genitalia appear in the third month and gender can be identified anatomically.
3. A fetus soon acquires hair, eyebrows, eyelashes, and nails.
4. Fine, downy hair (lanugo) covers the limbs and trunk; it later disappears.
5. The skin grows so fast that it wrinkles; a waxy vernix caseosa protects the skin from
the watery amniotic fluid.
6. A fetus at first only flexes its limbs and nods its head; later it moves its limbs
vigorously; a mother feels movements from the fourth month onward.
7. After 16 weeks, a fetal heartbeat is heard through a stethoscope.
8. A fetus born at 24 weeks may survive; the lungs are still immature and often cannot
capture O2 adequately.
D. Stages of Birth
1. When the fetal brain matures, the hypothalamus causes the pituitary to stimulate the
adrenal cortex so that androgens are released.
332
2. The placenta uses androgens as precursors for estrogens that stimulate the production
of prostaglandin and oxytocin.
3. The hormones estrogen, prostaglandin, and oxytocin all cause the uterus to contract
and expel the fetus.
4. The process of birth (parturition) has three stages: dilation of the cervix, birth of the
baby, and expulsion of the placenta.
E. Preventing and Testing for Birth Defects (Health Focus box)
1. One way to prevent birth defects is by consuming a nutritious diet and avoid
potentially harmful substances, radiation, and pathogens.
a. For example, women of childbearing age are encouraged to consume adequate
amounts of the vitamin folic acid in order to prevent neural tube defects such as
spina bifida and anencephaly in their children.
b. The CDC recommends that women of childbearing age consume at least 400
micrograms of folic acid every day through vitamin supplements and fortified
foods.
2. To reduce the risk of fetal alcohol syndrome (FAS) it is strongly recommended not to
consume alcohol while pregnant.
a. It is also recommended not to smoke cigarettes or consume illegal drugs in order
to reduce the risk of birth defects.
3. Some medications can cause birth defects in newborns.
a. In the late 1950s and early 1960s, thalidomide was prescribed as a sleeping pill.
1) Thalidomide use resulted in thousands of children were born with flipper-like
structures instead of limbs.
2) Thalidomide was promptly taken off the market.
b. Between 1938 – 1971 DES (diethylstilbestrol) was prescribed to prevent
premature labor and miscarriage.
1) Daughters of women who took DES while pregnant have an increased risk
of vaginal and cervical cancer.
2) Sons of women who took DES while pregnant have an increased frequency
of noncancerous cysts of the epididymis.
4. Viruses such as rubella or HIV cause infections in newborns; most newborns die.
5. X-rays can hinder cell division and damage fetal DNA.
a. If an X-ray is unavoidable, notify the X-ray technician so that the fetus can be
protected as much as possible.
333
Chapter 43
43.1 Inheritance Influences Behavior
1. Behavior is any action that can be observed and described.
2. The nature versus nurture question asks to what extent both our genes (nature) and
environmental influences (nurture) affect behavior.
A. Experiments That Suggest Behavior Has a Genetic Basis
1. Several species of lovebirds differ in the way the build nests.
2. Hypothesis: if the behavior for obtaining and carrying nesting material is inherited,
then hybrids might show intermediate behavior.
a. When two species of lovebirds were mated, the hybrid birds had difficulty
carrying nesting material.
b. These studies supported the hypothesis that behavior has a genetic basis.
3. Experiments with the garter snake (Thamnophis elegans) were conducted to
determine if food preference have a genetic basis.
a. Inland populations are more aquatic and feed on frogs and fish; they refused to
feed on slugs.
b. Coastal populations are more terrestrial and feed on slugs.
c. The hybrid newborn garter snakes have an intermediate acceptance of slugs.
d. Work with smell receptors and tongue flicks showed that physiological
differences underlie the behavior.
4. Experiments with Humans
a. Twin studies in the humans have been used to probe the nature-versus-nurture
question.
b. The studies with twins support the hypothesis that at least certain types of
behavior are primarily influenced by nature.
B. Experiments That Show Behavior Has a Genetic Basis
1. Behavior of the marine snail Aplysia shows endocrine involvement in behavior.
a. Following copulation, the slug extrudes long strings of eggs and uses its head
movements to attach the eggs to rocks.
b. Scientists isolated an egg-laying hormone (ELH) that causes the animal to lay
eggs even if it has not mated.
c. ELH is a small protein of 36 amino acids that excites the reproductive tract and
causes egg expulsion.
d. Recombinant DNA studies isolated the ELH gene and showed it controls the
egg-laying behavior.
2. Maternal behavior in mice activated by gene fosB.
a. When mothers first inspect their newborn, various sensory information travel to
the hypothalamus.
b. The sensory information causes fosB alleles to be activated and product a protein.
c. This protein changes the neural circuitry within the hypothalamus, which
manifests itself in good behavior.
d. Mice that lack good maternal behavior also lack fosB alleles.
43.2 The Environment Influences Behavior
1. Fixed action patterns (FAPs) were believed to be behaviors that were always
performed the same way, and they were elicited by a sign stimulus.
2. Many behaviors formerly thought to be fixed action patterns are found to have
334
developed after practice.
3. Learning is defined as a durable change in behavior brought about by experience.
4. Deer grazing on the side of a busy highway, oblivious to traffic, is an example of
habituation.
A. Instinct and Learning
1. Laughing gull chicks beg food from parents by pecking at the parents’ beaks;
however, their accuracy improves with practice.
2. The chicks first peck at any beak model; later they only peck at models resembling
the parents.
3. This interaction between chicks and parents appears to be a FAP.
B. Imprinting
1. Imprinting, another form of learning, involves a sensitive period.
a. Chicks, ducklings, and goslings follow the first moving object they see after hatching
(usually their mother).
b. A sensitive period is the only period during which a particular behavior such as
imprinting, develops.
C. Social Interactions and Learning
1. Song Learning
a. Song learning in birds involves a sensitive period when an animal is primed to
learn; songs heard outside this period have no effect.
b. When provided with an adult tutor, birds learned other species’ songs, indicating
that social interactions assist in learning.
D. Associative Learning
1. A change in behavior that involves an association between two events is termed
associative learning.
2. Classical Conditioning
a. In classical conditioning, the paired simultaneous presentation of two different
types of stimuli causes an animal to form an association between them.
b. This suggests that an organism can be trained (conditioned) to associate any
response with any stimulus.
c. Unconditioned responses are those that occur naturally; conditioned responses are
those that are learned.
3. Operant conditioning
a. In operant conditioning, a stimulus-response connection is strengthened.
b. This resulted from reinforcing a particular behavior.
c. F. Skinner was famous for his studies in operant conditioning, always rewarding
animals for the proper response.
E. Orientation and Migratory Behavior
1. Migration is long-distance travel from one location to another.
a. Loggerhead sea turtles hatch on a Florida beach and then travel across the
Atlantic Ocean to the Mediterranean.
b. Monarch butterflies fly from North America to Mexico so they can continue
breeding.
2. Migration requires orientation, which is the ability to travel in a particular direction,
such as south in the winter and north in the spring.
a. Many birds use the sun during the day or the stars at night to orientate themselves.
335
3. Experienced birds can navigate, or able to change their direction in response to other
environmental clues that tell them they are currently headed in the wrong direction.
F. Cognitive Learning
Animals also learn through imitation and insight.
Insight learning occurs when an animal suddenly solves a problem without any prior
experience with the problem.
G. Do Animals Have Emotions? (Science focus box)
1. Scientists believe they have sufficient data to suggest that at least other vertebrates
and/or mammals have feelings, including fear, joy, embarrassment, jealousy, anger,
love, sadness, and grief.
2. Iguanas tend to stay where it is warm.
a. Warmth rises the iguanas’ body temperature and increase in heart rate.
b. These biological responses are those associated with emotions in humans.
3. Researchers have found a high level of dopamine in the brain when rats play, and the
dopamine level increases even when rats anticipate the opportunity to play.
4. Studying animal emotions may best be left to field research; laboratory animals may
be too stressed to provide convincing data on emotions.
43.3 Animal Communication
1. Some animals are largely solitary and join with a member of the opposite sex only to
reproduce.
2. Others pair, bond, and cooperate in raising offspring.
3. Society members are organized in a cooperative manner extending beyond sexual or
parental behavior.
A. Communicative Behavior
1. Communication is an action by a sender that influences the behavior of a receiver.
2. When the sender and receiver are members of the same species, signals will benefit
both the sender and the receiver.
3. Chemical Communication
a. These signals are chemicals (e.g., pheromones, urine, and feces) and have the
advantage of working both night and day.
b. A pheromone is a chemical released to cause a predictable reaction of another
member of the same species.
c. Female moths attract males with tail gland pheromones; cats mark territory with
urine, etc., and antelope mark twigs with eye gland secretions.
4. Auditory Communication
a. Auditory (sound) communication has advantages.
1) It is faster than chemical communication.
2) It is effective both night and day.
3) It can be modified by loudness, pattern, duration, and repetition.
b. Male crickets have calls for reproduction.
c. Birds have various songs for distress, courting and marking territories.
d. Whale songs have six basic themes for sexual and group identification.
e. Only humans can produce many different sounds and assemble them in many
different ways.
f. Nonhuman primates are limited to about 40 distinct vocalizations with limited
meaning.
336
g.
Chimpanzees using artificial language cannot advance beyond the level of a
2-year-old child.
h. Chimps appear incapable of using language to reason or of using grammar.
5. Visual Communication
a. Visual signals are most often used by species that are active during the day.
b. Contests between males make use of threat postures and may prevent fighting.
c. Defense and courtship displays are exaggerated and always performed in the same
way so the meaning is clear.
d. Visual communication allows animals to signal others of their intentions without
the need to provide any auditory or chemical messages.
6. Tactile Communication
a. Tactile communication occurs when one animal touches another.
b. Gull chicks peck at the parent’s beak in order to induce the parent to feed them.
c. A male leopard nuzzles the female’s neck to calm her and to stimulate her
willingness to mate.
d. Honeybees use tactile communication to impart information about the
environment.
43.4 Behaviors That Increase Fitness
1. Behavioral Ecology assumes that behavior is subject to natural selection.
A. Territoriality
1. A territory is an animal’s home range where they can be found during the course of
the day, and will defend for their exclusive use.
2. Territoriality involves the type of behavior needed to defend a particular territory.
3. Gibbons maintain territories by loud singing.
4. Defending territories exerts a lot of energy; the defender may also be wounded.
5. The optimal foraging model states that it is adaptive for foraging behavior to be as
energetically efficient as possible.
a. For example, shore crabs eat intermediate-sized mussels because the net energy
gain was more than if they ate larger-sized mussel
B. Reproductive Strategies
1. Some animals, such as gibbons, are monogamous; they pair bond, and both male
and female help with the rearing of the young.
2. Most other primates are polygamous; males monopolize multiple females.
3. A limited number of primates are polyanthrus.
a. Tamarins live together in groups of one or more families in which one female
mates with more than one male.
4. Sexual selection refers to adaptive changes in males and females that lead to an
increased ability to secure a mate.
3) In males, this may result in an increased ability to compete with other males for a
mate.
4) Females may select a mate with the best fitness (ability to produce surviving
offspring), thereby increasing her own fitness.
C. Sexual Selection in Male Bowerbirds (Science focus box)
1. Male bowerbirds create elaborate nests (or bower) to attract female bowerbirds
during mating season.
2. When a female bowerbird approaches the male bowebird’s bower, the male begins
337
his courtship display of fluffing his feathers, and flapping his wings to the beat of a
call.
3. If the female enters the bower and crouches, the two bowerbirds mate.
4. The male bowerbirds’ displays are highly intense and aggressive and it scares off
some females.
5. A study in Australia looked at the ability of male bowerbirds responding to female
bowerbird signals by giving their highest-intensity courtship displays for females
who crouched the fastest and are least likely to be startled.
6. The study found that males who modulate their displays more effectively in response
to female signals are more successful in courting females.
7. Male responsiveness to female signals may be an important part of successful
courtship in many species.
D. Societies
1. The principles of evolutionary biology can be applied to the study of social behavior
in animals.
2. It is based on a reproductive cost-benefit analysis of the value of living in a society.
3. There are both benefits and costs to living in a social group.
4. Only if the benefits, in terms of reproductive success, outweigh the disadvantages will
societies evolve.
a. Advantages to living in a social group might include help to avoid predators, to
raise young, and to find food.
1) A group of impalas has more eyes to see approaching predators, etc.
2) Many fish moving rapidly in a school can distract a predator.
3) The trumpet manucode (a bird) pair bonds for life; both sexes are needed to
raise the young.
4) Weaver birds form giant colonies to protect them from predators.
5) Primate members signal the group when they find a bountiful fruit tree.
6) Lions working together can capture larger prey, such as a zebra or buffalo.
b. There are also disadvantages to living in a social group.
1) Disagreements occur between members over the best feeding places and
resting sites.
2) Among red deer, subordinate females are at a disadvantage in producing more
prolific sons.
3) Primate grooming may be necessary to keep them healthy since parasites
spread easily in groups.
E. Altruism Versus Self-Interest
1. Altruism is defined as behavior that has the potential to decrease the lifetime
reproductive success of the altruist, while benefitting the reproductive success of
another member of the society.
2. Fitness, judged by reproductive success, may explain altruistic behavior.
3. Genes can be passed directly from parents to offspring.
4. Genes are also passed by relatives; an individual helping a relative survive and
reproduce passes on the individual’s genes.
5. Direct selection is adaptation to the environment due to the reproductive success of
an individual.
6. Indirect selection, also called ken selection, involves adaptation to the environment
338
due to the reproductive success of an individual’s relatives.
7. Thus, the inclusive fitness of an individual includes personal reproductive success
plus that of its close relatives.
8. In social insects, altruism is extreme and is explained on the basis that it helps
reproducing siblings survive.
a. Only the queen among an army ant colony reproduces; the three castes of ants
have given up reproducing.
b. In social bees and wasps, the queen is diploid but the drone is haploid; therefore
sterile female workers are 75% related to their nest mates but would be only 50%
related to their own offspring if they reproduced; thus, it is an advantage to care
for the queen and her offspring.
9. Male chimpanzees in Africa did not interfere with each other’s matings because they
shared genes.
10. Reciprocal Altruism
a. In some species, bird offspring from one clutch of eggs may stay at the nest to
help parents rear and feed the next batch of offspring.
b. For Florida scrub jays, the number of fledglings produced by an adult pair
doubled when they had helpers.
c. Mammal offspring also help their parents; African jackals raise 1.4 pups alone;
with helpers they raise 3.6.
d. The above are examples of reciprocal altruism: an animal helps or cooperates
with another animal with no immediate benefit, but the animal that was helped
will repay the debt at a later time.
339
Chapter 44
44.1 Scope of Ecology
1. Ecology is the study of the interactions of organisms with other organisms and with
the physical environment.
2. Ecology studies how environmental factors determine the distribution and abundance
of populations.
3. Ecology and evolution are related because ecological interactions are natural selection
pressures that have long-term effects.
4. A habitat is the place where an organism exists.
5. A population is a group of the same species occupying a certain area.
6. A community consists of all populations at one locale (e.g., a coral reef population).
7. An ecosystem contains the community organisms and abiotic factors (e.g., energy
flow, chemical cycling).
8. The biosphere is the layer on the earth where living organisms can live.
9. Modern ecology is both descriptive and predictive, with applications to wildlife
management, agriculture, and many other problems.
44.2 Demographics of Populations
 Demography is the statistical study of a population, e.g., its density, distribution, rate of
growth.
A. Density and Distribution
1. The population density is the number of individuals per unit area.
2. The population distribution is the pattern of dispersal of individuals across an area.
3. Resources are nonliving and living components of an environment that support living
organisms.
4. Limiting factors are those environmental aspects that particularly determine where
an organism lives.
a. Such factors include oxygen supply, light availability, space, temperature, and
precipitation amounts.
5. Distribution can be due to biotic (living) factors.
a. Biotic factors can be illustrated by red kangaroos that are limited to inland
Australia by the grasses that grow there.
6. Clumped, random, and uniform are terms used to describe patterns of distribution.
a. In certain cases, the pattern of distribution can change as the organisms under
consideration mature; thus, distribution patterns are not necessarily constant.
7. Other factors, such as territoriality, seed dispersal, etc., can influence distribution
patterns.
B. Population Growth
1. The rate of natural increase (r) is dependent on the number of individuals born
every year and the number of individuals that die every year. (It is assumed that
immigration and emigration are equal and are thus not considered.)
2. The highest possible rate of natural increase for a population when resources are
unlimited is called its biotic potential, and it depends on the following:
a. Usual number of offspring per reproduction
b. Chances of survival until age of reproduction
c. How often each individual reproduces
d. Age at which reproduction begins
340
3. Mortality Patterns
a. A cohort is all members of a population born at the same time.
b. Survivorship is the probability of newborn individuals of a cohort surviving to
particular ages.
c. A survivorship curve, obtained by plotting the number of individuals surviving at
each age, is characteristic of each species.
1) In the Type I survivorship curve, most individuals live out their life span and
die of old age (e.g., humans in well-developed countries).
2) In the Type II survivorship curve, individuals die at a constant rate across their
lifespan (e.g., birds, rodents, and perennial plants).
3) In the Type III survivorship curve, most individuals die early in life (e.g.,
fishes, invertebrates, and plants).
4. Age Distribution
a. A population contains three age groups: prereproductive, reproductive, and
postreproductive.
b. Because populations differ according to what proportion of the population falls
into each group, three different age structure diagrams are possible; an age
structure diagram is a representation of the number of individuals in each age
group in a population
1) A pyramid-shape indicates the population has high birthrates; the population
is undergoing exponential growth.
2) A bell-shape indicates that prereproductive and reproductive age groups are
more nearly equal, with the postreproductive group being smallest due to
mortality; this is characteristic of stable populations.
3) An urn-shaped diagram indicates the postreproductive group is largest and the
prereproductive group is smallest, a result of the birthrate falling below the
death rate; this is characteristic of declining populations.
4) Information obtained from these graphs is used to determine past and future
history of a population.
44.3 Population Growth Models
1. There are two patterns of population growth.
a. In a pattern called semelparity, organisms reproduce once and cease to grow as
adults; they expend energy in reproduction and then die.
b. In a pattern called iteroparity, organisms reproduce throughout their lifetime,
which invests energy in their future survival.
2. Some organisms do not exactly fit these two patterns.
a. Aphids can switch between sexual and asexual reproduction according to the
season.
b. Annual plants can reproduce both by seeds and by vegetative extensions.
A. Exponential Growth
1. The J-shaped growth curve depicts exponential growth, and it has two phases.
a.
In the lag phase, growth is slow because the population is small.
b.
In the exponential growth phase, growth is accelerating.
2. A mathematical equation can be used to calculate the exponential growth and size for
any population that has discrete generations.
3. With exponential growth, the number of individuals added each generation increases
341
as the total number of females increases.
4. For exponential growth to continue unchecked, each member of the population has to
have unlimited resources.
5. As the population increases in size so do the effects of competition between members,
predation, parasites, and disease.
B. Logistic Growth
1. When growth encounters environmental resistance, populations experience logistic
growth, and the growth curve has a characteristic sigmoidal or S-shaped curve.
2. In addition to the lag phase and exponential growth phase, there is a deceleration
phase where the rate of population growth slows, and a stable equilibrium phase with
little if any growth, because births equal deaths.
3. This curve is called “logistic” because the exponential portion of the curve would plot
as a straight line as log of N.
4. A mathematical equation calculates logistic growth.
5. Environmental resistance results in the deceleration phase and the stable equilibrium
phase; population is at the carrying capacity of the environment.
6. Carrying Capacity
a. The carrying capacity (K) is the maximum number of individuals of a species
that can be supported by the environment.
b. The closer population size gets to the carrying capacity, the greater is the
environmental resistance.
c. When N is small, a large portion of the carrying capacity has not been utilized,
but as N approaches K, population growth slows because K
is nearing zero.
K
d. For example, over-fishing drives a population into the lag phase.
e. It is best to maintain desirable populations in the exponential phase of the logistic
growth curve.
f. Farmers can reduce the carrying capacity for a pest by alternating rows of
different crops.
44.4 Regulation of Population Size
1. The J-shaped and S-shaped growth curve models do not always predict real
populations.
a. In the winter moth, many eggs did not survive the winter and exponential growth
did not occur.
b. The growth curve of a reindeer herd introduced to St. Paul Island in Alaska
overshot its carrying capacity and crashed.
A. Factors That Regulate Population Growth
1. Some populations are considered to be regulated primarily by density-independent
factors; these are also considered abiotic factors.
a. The number of organisms present does not affect the influence of the factor.
b. The damage to a population from, for example, a flash flood does not change with
or depend on the number of organisms present.
c. Thus, density-independent factors show no correlation with the size of the
population.
2. Populations regulated by density-dependent factors are affected by the number of
organisms present.
342
a. Predation, parasitism, and competition are considered density-dependent; the
more these organisms crowd together, the more damaging are the food shortages,
the parasites, and the predators.
b. Thus, density-dependent factors have some effect relative to the size of the
population.
3. Other considerations
a. Intrinsic factors (e.g., anatomy, physiology, behavior) can also influence
population size: territoriality, recruitment, immigration and emigration.
b. Populations can sometimes show extreme fluctuations in size and growth rates in
spite of extrinsic and intrinsic regulating mechanisms—such wild fluctuations
with no recurring pattern are termed chaos.
44.5 Life History Patterns
1. Populations vary on particulars such as:
a. Fecundity – the number of births per reproduction
b. Maturity – the age of reproduction
c. Parity – the number of episodes of reproductions
A. The logistic population model predicts two main life history patterns.
1. r-Selection
a.
Species that underwent selection to maximize their rate of natural increase
are categorized as r-selected.
b. These populations are often opportunistic species, and tend to be colonizers.
c. Their strategy for continued existence is based on individuals having the
following traits:
1) small size,
2) short life span,
3) mature fast,
4) produce many offspring, and
5) engage in little care of offspring.
d. Such organisms rely on rapid dispersal to new unoccupied environments.
2. K-Selection
a. Species that hold their populations fairly constant near the carrying capacity are
called K-selected.
b. Such populations are equilibrium species; they are strong competitors, tend to be
specialists rather than colonizers, and may become extinct when their evolved
way of life is disrupted (e.g., the grizzly bear, Florida panther, etc.).
c. Their overall strategy for continued existence is based on having the following
traits:
1) large size,
2) long life span,
3) slow to mature,
4) produce few offspring, and
5) expend considerable energy in care.
3. Most populations cannot be characterized as either r- or K-strategists; they have
intermediate characteristics.
B. When a Population Grows Too Large (Ecology focus box)
1. About 100 years ago the white-tailed deer population across the eastern United States
343
was less than 500,000, and now, it is over 200 million deer.
2. The increase in population size can be attributed to the lack of predators.
a. Hunting is tightly controlled, or banned altogether.
b. Natural predators such as wolves and mountain lions are absent from most
regions.
3. In areas where the deer populations have become too large, the deer suffer from
starvation as they deplete their own food supply.
4. The large deer population also causes economic loss due to loss of agriculture,
forestry, and even insurance claims due to deer-vehicle collisions.
5. Deer overpopulation also harms other species.
a. In areas where there are many deer, there are fewer understory plants.
b. The number of songbirds, insects, squirrels, mice, and other animals declines with
an increasing deer population.
6. Some states are working on effective deer management plans.
a. Texas landowners can set aside a portion of their property for a deer herd, and in
return, can charge people for the opportunity to hunt on their land.
44.6 Human Population Growth
1. The human population is now in an exponential part of a J-shaped growth curve.
2. World population increases the equivalent of one medium-sized city (216,000) per
day and 79 million per year.
3. The doubling time is the length of time for a population size to double, now 53 years.
4. Zero population growth is when the birthrate equals the death rate and the population
size remains steady.
5. The world population may level off at 8, 10.5 or 14.2 billion, depending on the
decline in net reproductive rate.
A. More-Developed Versus Less-Developed Countries
1. The more developed countries underwent a demographic transition from 1950–
1975; their growth rate is now low.
a. The more developed countries (MDCs) (e.g., Europe, North America, Japan,
etc.) have low population growth and people enjoy a good standard of living.
b. Less developed countries (LDCs) (e.g., countries in Africa, Asia, and Latin
America) are those in which population growth is expanding rapidly and the
majority of people live in poverty.
c. LDC growth rate peaked at 2.5% between 1960–1965; it has been declining
slowly to about 1.6%.
d. Demographic transition is a decline in death rate followed by declining
birthrate; it results in slower growth, about 0.1%.
2. The less developed countries (LDCs) are now undergoing demographic transition.
3. Most of the explosive growth will occur in Africa, Asia and Latin America unless
a. family planning or birth control are strengthened,
b. the desire for more children is reduced, and
c. the onset of childbearing is delayed.
B. Age Distributions
1. Age structure diagrams divide populations into: dependency, reproductive, and
postreproductive.
2. Replacement reproduction, or each couple having just two children, will still cause
344
population growth to continue due to the age structure of the population.
3. Mere replacement does not produce zero population growth (no increase in
population) because more women enter reproductive years than leave them.
4. The LDCs have a higher growth rate because of a youthful age structure and more
women entering reproductive ages than leaving.
5. The MDCs have a low growth rate because of a stabilized age structure.
C. Population Growth and Environmental Impact
1. Environmental Impact (E.I.)
a. Both the growing populations of LDCs and the high consumption of MDCs stress
the environment.
b. An average American family, in terms of consumption and waste production, is
equal to thirty people in India.
c. MDCs account for one-fourth the world population but provide 90% of the
hazardous waste production.
d. Resource consumption affects the cycling of chemicals and contributes to
pollution and extinction of species.
e. Conservation biology seeks sustainable practices to prevent mass extinction of
species.
345
Chapter 45
45.1 Ecology of Communities
 A community is a group of populations that interact with one another in the same
environment.
1. Communities vary in size and may have boundaries that are difficult to determine.
2. A fallen log supports a community but a passing bird can eat one of its members.
3. A forest may appear distinct but it gradually fades into the surrounding areas.
A. Community Structure
1. The species richness of a community is a listing of the species within a community;
it does not reveal the relative abundance of organisms.
a. For example, a coniferous forest has a different composition from a tropical rain
forest in species of plants and animals.
2. Species diversity of a community includes not only a listing of the species in the
community, but also the abundance of each species.
a. The greater the diversity, the greater the number and the more even the
distribution of the species.
b. A forest with 36 poplar trees and 41 American elms is more diverse than a forest
with 76 poplar trees but only one American elm.
B. Community Interactions
1. A habitat is where an organism lives and reproduces in the environment.
2. The ecological niche is the role an organism plays in its community, including its
habitat and its interactions with other organisms.
a. The fundamental niche is the range of conditions under which it can survive and
reproduce.
b. The realized niche is the set of conditions under which it exists in nature.
3. Generalist species (e.g., raccoons, roaches, humans) have a broad range of niches.
a. They have a survival advantage when environmental conditions are apt to change.
4. Specialist species (e.g., pandas, spotted owls, freshwater dolphins) have a narrow
range of niches.
a. They have a survival advantage in stable environments.
5. Competition occurs when different species utilize a resource (e.g., light, nutrient)
that is in limited supply.
6. If the resource is not in limited supply, there is no competition.
7. Lotka and Volterra (1920s) developed a formula: competition favors one species and
can eliminate the other.
8. Gause grew two species of Paramecium in one test tube; only one survived if they
were grown together.
9. Competitive exclusion principle: no two species can indefinitely occupy the same
niche at the same time.
10. Over time, either one population replaces the other or the two species evolve to
occupy different niches.
11. If it appears two species occupy the same niche, there must be slight differences;
Gause found two species of paramecium coexisted if one fed on bacteria at the
bottom of the tube and the other fed on suspended bacteria.
12. Resource partitioning occurs when species shift niches; they no longer directly
compete.
346
a. Three species of Galapagos Island finches have three sizes of beaks for small,
medium, and large seeds.
b. When species live on separate islands, their beak sizes are intermediate; when
they live together, their beak sizes are diversified; this is character
displacement.
c. Five species of warblers in the same tree spent time in different tree zones to
avoid competition; they had different niches.
d. Swallows, swifts, and martins fly in mixed flocks eating aerial insects but have
different nesting sites, etc.
e. The above examples are deduced from already completed partitioning.
f. Joseph Connell studied the competition occurring in barnacles that consistently
shift to match shoreline tidal zones.
1) By removing the larger Balanus barnacles from the lower zone, the smaller
barnacles easily moved in.
2) The smaller barnacle is more resistant to drying out; but the larger one can
overgrow it.
C. Predator-Prey Interactions
1. Predation occurs when one organism (predator) feeds on another (prey).
2. In a broad sense, it includes not only single predator-prey kills, but also filter feeding
whales that strain krill, parasitic ticks that suck blood, and even herbivorous deer that
eat leaves.
3. Predator-Prey Population Dynamics
a. Some predators reduce the densities of their prey.
1) When Gause reared the protozoans Paramecium caudatum and Didinium
nasutum together in culture, Didinium ate all the Paramecium and then died of
starvation.
2) When prickly-pear cactus was introduced to Australia from South America, it
spread wildly without competition on the desert; a natural predator moth from
South America was introduced and the cactus and moth populations
plummeted dramatically.
b. Natural predator-prey relationships allow persistent populations of both predator
and prey populations, though both may fluctuate over time.
1) Often a graph of predator-prey population densities shows regular peaks and
valleys with the predator population lagging slightly behind the prey; two
reasons are possible.
a) The biotic potential of the predator may be great enough to overconsume
the prey; the prey population declines and the predator population then
follows.
b) Or the biotic potential of the prey is unable to keep pace and the prey
population overshoots the carrying capacity and suffers a crash.
4. The Classic Case of the Snowshoe Hare and the Canadian Lynx
a. Careful records of pelts of both animals for over a century have demonstrated
regular fluctuations.
b. To test whether the lynx or hare food supply was causing the cycling, three
experiments were done.
1) A hare population was given a constant supply of food and predators were
347
excluded; the cycling ceased.
2) The hare populations were given a constant food supply but predators were
not excluded; the cycling continued.
3) Predators were then excluded but no extra food was added; the cycling
continued.
c. The interpretation of these results is that both a hare-food cycle and a
predator-hare cycle combine to produce the overall effect.
d. The grouse population also cycle, perhaps because the lynx switches to grouse
when the hare populations decline; thus predators and prey do not normally exist
as simple two-species systems.
D. Prey Defenses
1. Prey have evolved a variety of antipredator defenses.
2. Plant adaptations for discouraging predation include:
a. Sharp spines,
b. Tough leathery leaves,
c. Poisonous chemicals in their tissues, and
d. chemicals that act as hormone analogues to interfere with insect larval
development.
3. Animals have defenses that include:
a. Camouflage for concealment; this also requires behavior (stillness),
b. Cryptic coloration to blend into the surroundings,
c. Fright of the predator,
d. Warning coloration,
e. Vigilance and association with other prey for better warning.
E. Mimicry
1. Mimicry occurs if one species (the mimic) resembles another species (the model)
possessing an antipredator defense.
2. Batesian mimicry, named for Henry Bates, is a form of mimicry in which one species
that lacks defense mimics another that has successful defenses.
3. Müllerian mimicry, named for Fritz Müller, is where several different species with
the protective defenses mimic one another (e.g., stinging insects all share same black
and yellow color bands).
F. Symbiotic Relationships
1. Symbiosis is a close relationship between members of two populations.
2. Parasitism
a. Parasitism is similar to predation; the parasite derives nourishment from the
host.
b. Viruses are always parasitic; parasites occur in all kingdoms of life.
c. Endoparasites are small and live inside the host.
d. Ectoparasites are larger and remain attached to the body of hosts by specialized
organs or appendages.
e. Many parasites have two hosts.
1) The primary host is the main source of nutrition.
2) The secondary host may serve to transport (vector) the parasite to other hosts.
f. Parasites are specific and require certain species as hosts.
3. Commensalism
348
G.
a. In commensalism, one species benefits and the other is neither harmed nor
benefitted.
b. It is difficult to determine true commensalism because it is difficult to ensure that
the host is not harmed.
c. Barnacles secure a home by attaching themselves to the backs of whales and the
shells of horseshoe crabs.
d. Remora fish attach themselves to the bellies of sharks, securing a free ride and the
remains of the shark’s meals.
e. Epiphytes (Spanish moss) grow in the branches of trees to receive light but take
no nourishment from the tree.
f. Clownfish live within the tentacles of sea anemones for protection.
g. Some relationships are so loose that it is difficult to know if they are true
commensalism.
1) Cattle egrets feed near cattle because the egrets flush insects as they graze.
2) Baboons and antelopes forage together for added protection.
4. Mutualism
a. In mutualism, both species benefit.
b. Mutualism can be found among organisms in all kingdoms of life.
c. Examples include the following:
1) Bacteria in the human intestinal tract are provided with some of our food but
also provide us with vitamins.
2) Termites can only feed on wood because their gut contains the protozoa that
digest cellulose.
3) Mycorrhizae are symbiotic associations between the roots of fungal hyphae
and plants.
4) Flowers and insect pollinators represent a shift from insects eating pollen to
eating nectar.
5) Lichens are made of algae that produce food and fungi that preserve water,
although the algae can survive alone.
d. Classic Example of the Ant and the Acacia Tree
1) In tropical America, the bullhorn acacia provides a home for ants in its hollow
thorns.
2) The acacia also provides ants with food from its nectaries, and protein in
nodules called Beltian bodies.
3) In return, the ant protects the plant from herbivores and other plants that might
shade it.
4) When ants on an experimental tree were killed with insecticide, the tree also
died.
f. Cleaning Symbiosis
1) Crustacea, fish, and birds act as cleaners to a variety of vertebrate clients; this
is called cleaning symbiosis.
2) Large fish in coral reefs line up at cleaning stations and wait their turn to be
cleaned by small fish.
3) The possibility of feeding on host tissues as well as on ectoparasites
complicates this case of mutualism.
Interactions and Coevolution (Ecology focus box)
349
1.
Coevolution occurs when two species adapt in response to selective pressure
imposed by the other.
2.
Symbiotic associations are especially prone to the process of coevolution.
a. An example of coevolution is between flowers and their pollinators. Flowers
pollinated by animals have features that attract them.
b. Another example of coevolution occurs between predators and prey.
1)
Cheetahs print forward to catch prey, and gazelles that are fast
enough avoid capture. Over generations, a fast running speed may put selective
pressure on the predator for an adaptation to the prey’s defense mechanism.
c.
Coevolution can also take form as the relationship between parasite and
host.
1)
When snails of the genus Succinea are parasitized by worms of the
genus Leucochloridium, they are eaten by birds. As worm matures, they invade
the snail’s eyestalks, making them resemble edible caterpillars. The birds then eat
the snails, and the parasites release their eggs.
H.
Island Biogeography Pertains to Biodiversity (Science focus box)
1. Robert MacArthur and E. O. Wilson developed the general theory of island
biogeography.
2. Nearby islands have more species because immigration is easier.
3. Larger islands have more species because a large island has more resources.
4. “Islands” can also include patches of forest surrounded by cropland, housing
developments, etc.
a. The spatial heterogeneity model describes the patchiness of an environment.
b. The greater the number of habitat patches, the greater the diversity.
5. Stratification is an increase in vertical living spaces; a tree canopy provides a
high-rise habitat and vertical patchiness.
6. An equilibrium point is reached when the rate of species immigration matches the
rate of species extinction.
7. An equilibrium point can be dynamic with many species arriving and departing, or
steady unless disturbed.
45.2 Community Development
 Communities change over both short and long intervals of time due to continental drift,
glaciation, etc.
A. Ecological Succession
1. Ecological succession is a change involving a series of species replacements in a
community following a disturbance.
2. Primary succession begins in a habitat lacking soil; this might occur following a
volcanic eruption.
3. Secondary succession begins when soil is already present but it has been disturbed
and returns to a natural state, as in an abandoned cornfield.
a. In the first years, wild grasses and other pioneer species (plants that are invaders
of disturbed areas) invade.
b. Soon sedges and shrubs invade.
c. Later, there is a mixture of shrubs and trees.
4. In 1916, Clements proposed the climax-pattern model of succession: that succession
leads to a climax community that is characteristic for an area.
350
a. A climax community has a community composition that depends on climate.
1) Dry climates eventually produce deserts.
2) Wet climates proceed to forests.
3) Intermediate moisture will result in grasslands, shrubs, etc.
4) Soils will also influence the developing community.
b. Each stage facilitates the occurrence of the next stage (called the facilitation
model).
1) Shrubs cannot grow on dunes until the dune grass has developed the soil.
2) Therefore the grass-shrub-forest must occur sequentially.
5. The inhibition model challenged Clements’s view of succession.
a. Colonists hold onto their space and inhibit the growth of other plants until the
colonists die.
b. Death releases resources that allow different, longer-lived species to invade.
6. The tolerance model provides yet another view of succession.
a. Sheer chance may determine which seeds arrive first; in this case, the
successional stages may merely reflect the maturation time.
b. Trees merely take more time to develop; however, both facilitation and inhibition
of growth may be taking place.
7. All models are probably involved and succession may not often reach the same final
potential natural community.
45.3 Dynamics of an Ecosystem
 In an ecosystem, populations interact among themselves and with the physical
environment.
A. Autotrophs
1. Autotrophs capture energy (e.g., sunlight) and use it, along with inorganic nutrients, to
produce organic compounds; therefore they are also called producers.
2. Photosynthetic organisms possess chlorophyll and carry on photosynthesis.
a.
Algae are the main producers in freshwater and marine environments.
b.
Green plants are the main land photosynthesizers.
3. Chemoautotrophs are bacteria that obtain energy from the oxidation of inorganic
compounds such as ammonia, nitrites, and sulfides; they synthesize carbohydrates and
are found in cave communities and ocean depths.
B. Heterotrophs
1. Heterotrophs need a source of preformed organic nutrients and consume tissues of
other organisms; they are called consumers.
2. Herbivores are animals that feed directly on green plants.
3. Carnivores are animals that eat other animals.
4. Omnivores can feed upon a variety of organisms, including plants and animals;
humans are omnivores.
5. Decomposers are nonphotosynthetic bacteria and fungi that extract energy from dead
matter, including animal wastes in the soil, and make nutrients available.
6. Some animals (e.g., earthworms) feed on detritus
organisms—these organisms are called detritivores.
C. Energy Flow and Chemical Cycling
1. All ecosystems are dependent upon solar energy flow and finite pools of nutrients.
2. Most ecosystems cannot exist without a continual supply of solar energy.
351
3. Energy flow in an ecosystem is a consequence of two fundamental laws of
thermodynamics:
a. The first law of thermodynamics states energy can neither be created nor
destroyed; it can only be changed from one form of energy to another.
b. The second law of thermodynamics states when energy is transformed from one
form to another, there is always some loss of energy from the system, usually as
low grade heat.
D. Energy Flow
1. The complex trophic (feeding) relationships that exist in nature are called food webs.
2. A grazing food web begins with leaves, stems and seeds eaten by herbivores and
omnivores.
3. A detrital food web begins with detritus, followed by decomposers (including bacteria
and fungi).
4. Detrital food chains are connected to a grazing food chain when consumers of a
grazing food chain feed on the decomposers of the detrital food chain.
5. In some ecosystems, more energy may move through the detrital food web than
moves through the detritus food web.
6. A food chain represents a single path sequence of organisms that form links.
7. A trophic level is a feeding level of one or more populations in a food web; those
organisms in an ecosystem that are the same number of food chain steps from the
energy input into the system:
a. First trophic level—primary producers,
b. Second trophic level—all the primary consumers,
c. Third trophic level—all the secondary consumers, etc.
8. About 10% of the energy at a particular trophic level is incorporated into the next
trophic level.
a.
Thus, 1,000 kg (or kcal in an energy pyramid) of plant material converts to
100 kg of herbivore tissue, which converts to 10 kg of first carnivores, which can
support 1 kg of second level carnivores.
b.
This rapid loss of energy is the reason food chains have from three to four
links, rarely five.
c.
This rapid loss of energy is also the reason there are few large carnivores.
9. An ecological pyramid shows this trophic structure of an ecosystem as a graph
representing biomass, organism number, or energy content of each trophic level in a
food web.
10. The base of the pyramid represents the producer trophic level, and from there the
consumer trophic level is stacked, with the apex representing the highest consumer
trophic level.
11. A pyramid of numbers is based on the number of organisms in each trophic level.
12. A pyramid of biomass is based on the weight (biomass) of organisms at each trophic
level at one time; this eliminates size of the organisms as a factor.
a. Usually a large mass of plants supports a medium mass of herbivores and a small
mass of carnivores.
b. However, at one point in time at seashores, herbivores can have greater biomass
feeding on algae that reproduce fast but are eaten, producing an inverted pyramid;
over long time periods, the biomass is a normal pyramid.
352
13. One problem is where to fit in the decomposers; a large portion of energy becomes
detritus in many ecosystems.
E. Chemical Cycling
1. Biogeochemical cycles are the pathways by which chemicals circulate through the
biotic and abiotic components of an ecosystem.
2. Some cycles are primarily gaseous cycles (carbon and nitrogen); others are
sedimentary cycles, (phosphorus).
3. A reservoir is that portion of the earth that acts as a storehouse for the element.
4. An exchange pool is the portion of the environment from which producers take
chemicals, such as the atmosphere or soil.
5. The biotic community is the pathway through which chemicals move through food
chains.
F. The Water Cycle
1. A transfer rate is defined as the amount of a substance that moves from one
component of the environment to another within a specified period of time.
2. In the water or hydrologic cycle, freshwater evaporates and condenses on the earth.
3. The evaporation of water from the oceans leaves behind salts; during condensation,
a gas is exchanged into a liquid—vaporized fresh water rises into the atmosphere and
returns to Earth in the form of precipitation.
4. Precipitation that percolates into the earth forms a water table at the surface of the
groundwater.
5. An aquifer is an underground storage of fresh water in porous rock trapped by
impervious rock.
6. Freshwater makes up about 3% of the world’s supply of water and is considered a
renewable resource.
7. However, freshwater becomes unavailable when consumption exceeds supply or is so
polluted that it is not usable; when water withdrawal from aquifers exceeds
replenishment, it is called “groundwater mining.”
G. The Carbon Cycle
1. Both terrestrial and aquatic organisms exchange carbon dioxide with the
atmosphere—this is called the carbon cycle.
2. On land, photosynthesis removes CO2 from the atmosphere; respiration then returns
CO2 to the atmosphere.
3. CO2 from the air combines with water to produce bicarbonate (HCO3), which is a
source of carbon for aquatic producers, primarily protists.
4. Similarly, when aquatic organisms respire, the CO2 they release combines with water
to form bicarbonate ions (HCO3-).
5. The reservoir for the carbon cycle is largely composed of organic matter, calcium
carbonate in shells, and limestone, as well as fossil fuels.
6. The transfer rates between photosynthesis and respiration (including decay) are about
even.
7. Because we burn fossil fuels and forests, there is now more CO2 entering the
atmosphere than is removed.
8. CO2, nitrous oxide, and methane are greenhouse gases that contribute to the rise in
Earth’s temperature, a phenomenon called global warming.
9. The above gases and water vapor increase the greenhouse effect that holds heat next
353
to the Earth.
10. The increased heat may cause more clouds that in turn increase global warming.
11. Computer models cannot incorporate all variables; predictions are for 1.5–4.5oC
increase by 2100.
12. Possible results may include glaciers melting, sea levels rising, a redistribution of dry
and wet regions, and an increase in species extinctions.
H. The Phosphorus Cycle
1. In the phosphorus cycle, weathering makes phosphate ions (PO4 and HPO42 )
available to plants that take up phosphate from the soil.
2. Some of this phosphate runs off into aquatic ecosystems where algae incorporate it
into organic molecules before it is entrapped in sediments.
3. Phosphate that is not taken up by algae is incorporated into sediments in the oceans.
4. Sediment phosphate only becomes available when geological upheaval exposes
sedimentary rocks.
5. Phosphate taken up by producers is incorporated into a variety of organic compounds.
6. Animals eat producers and incorporate some of the phosphate into phospholipids,
ATP, and nucleotides of DNA; however what is in teeth, bones, and shells does not
decay for long periods.
7. Decay of organisms and decomposition of animal wastes eventually makes phosphate
ions available again.
8. Available phosphate is generally taken up quickly; it is usually the limiting nutrient in
most ecosystems.
9. Human Activities and the Phosphorus Cycle
a. Humans boost the supply of phosphate by mining phosphate ores for fertilizers,
detergents, etc.
b. Run-off of animal wastes from livestock feedlots and commercial fertilizers from
cropland as well as discharge of untreated and treated municipal sewage can all
add excess phosphate to nearby waters.
c. Eutrophication is the name of this over-enrichment that leads to algal blooms;
when the algae die off, decomposers use up all of the oxygen and this can cause a
massive fish kill.
I. The Nitrogen Cycle
1. Nitrogen gas (N2) is 78% of the atmosphere, yet nitrogen deficiency can limit plant
growth.
2. In the nitrogen cycle, plants cannot incorporate N2 into organic compounds and they
therefore depend on the various types of bacteria to make nitrogen available to them.
3. Nitrogen fixation occurs when N2 is converted to a form that plants can use.
a. Other nitrogen-fixing bacteria, living in nodules on the roots of legumes, make
reduced nitrogen and organic compounds available to a host plant.
b. Some cyanobacteria in water and the free-living bacteria in soil are able to reduce
N2 to ammonium (NH4+ ).
c. Plants take up both NH4+ and nitrate (NO3 ) from the soil.
d. After plants take up NO3 , it is enzymatically reduced to NH4+ that is then used to
synthesize amino and nucleic acids.
4. Nitrification is the production of nitrates (NO3 ).
a. Nitrogen gas is converted to NO3 in the atmosphere when cosmic radiation,
354
meteor trails, and lightning provide the high energy for nitrogen to react with
oxygen.
b. Nitrifying bacteria convert NH4+ to NO3 .
c. Ammonium in the soil is converted to NO3 by nitrifying bacteria in the soil in a
two-step process that does not depend on nitrogen gas.
1) First, nitrite-producing bacteria convert NH4+ to nitrite (NO3 ).
2) Then, nitrate-producing bacteria convert NO2 to NO3 .
5. Denitrification is conversion of NO3 to nitrous oxide (N2O) and N2.
a. There are denitrifying bacteria in both aquatic and terrestrial ecosystems.
b. Denitrification counterbalances nitrogen fixation, but not completely; more
nitrogen fixation occurs.
6. Human Activities and the Nitrogen Cycle
a. Production of fertilizers and burning of fossil fuels adds three times the nitrogen
oxides to the atmosphere as normal.
b. Acid deposition occurs when nitrogen oxides and sulfur oxides combine with
water vapor in the atmosphere.
J. Ozone Shield Depletion (Science focus box)
1. In the stratosphere, ozone forms the ozone shield, which absorbs most of the
ultraviolet (UV) rays of the sun so that fewer rays strike the Earth.
2. UV radiation can cause some harmful effects.
a. It causes mutations that can lead to skin cancer and make the eye lens develop
cataracts.
b. UV radiation can adversely affect our immune system, making use more
susceptible to infection.
c. UV radiation impairs crop and tree growth and skills algae and krill that are at the
base of many food webs.
3. In the 1980s, scientists became concerned that ozone depletion was occurring worldwide and most serious above the Antarctic every spring.
a. Ozone holes have also been detected above the Arctic, and within northern and
southern latitudes, where many people live.
4. The cause of ozone depletion was found to be chlorine atoms (Cl), which can destroy
up to 100,000 molecules of ozone before settling back to the Earth’s surface.
5. Chlorine atoms entered the stratosphere from the breakdown of chlorofluorocarbons
(CFCs)
a. The best-known CFC is Freon, which is a coolant found in refrigerators and air
conditioners.
b. CFCs are also used in cleaning agents and in styrafoam inflation, insulation, and
paddings.
6. The United States stopped the production of CFCs in 1995, and since then the amount
of Clorine atoms in the stratosphere has started to decline.
7. However, currently there are more polar clouds (which contribute to ozone depletion)
than previously thought.
a. As the surface of the Earth warms, due to global warming, less heat reradiates
into the stratosphere.
b. It is speculated that once polar stratospheric clouds become twice as persistent,
there could still be an ozone loss of 30%.
355
Chapter 46
46.1 Climate and the Biosphere
1. Climate is the prevailing weather conditions in a region over time.
2. Climate is primarily dictated by temperature and rainfall which is influenced by two
factors:
a. variations in solar radiation due to the tilt of the spherical Earth, and
b. other effects such as topography and whether a body of water is nearby.
A. Effect of Solar Radiation
1. The Earth is a sphere; the sun’s rays are more direct near the equator and spread out
near the poles.
2. The tropics are therefore warmer than temperate areas.
3. The tilt of the Earth’s axis as it rotates about the sun causes one pole to be more
directly exposed to sunlight.
4. Cold air is heavy and sinks; hot air is lighter and rises.
a. Therefore if the Earth were standing still, equatorial air would rise and move
toward the poles.
b. This would replace heavy polar air that sinks and flows toward the equator, now a
low pressure area.
c. In a world that stood still, this would produce high winds moving toward the
poles and surface winds moving toward the equator.
5. The Earth’s Rotation Has an Effect
a. The wet equatorial air loses its moisture as it rises and cools near the equator.
b. By the time it moves 30o to the north, the air descends, reheats and is dry; this is a
zone of deserts.
c. Because of the Earth’s rotation, from the equator to 30o north and south, surface
winds blow from east-southeast in the Southern Hemisphere and from the eastnortheast in the Northern Hemisphere making east coasts wet.
d. Between 30o and 60o north and south, strong winds called the prevailing
westerlies blow from west to east.
e. The west coasts of continents in these latitudes are wet as is the Pacific
Northwest.
f. Weaker polar easterlies blow from east to west between 60o north or south and the
respective poles.
g. The Earth’s rotation, continents, and oceans alter the three circulation cells
between the equator and poles.
B. Other Effects
1. Topography is the physical features or “lay” of the land.
2. Mountains cause rain and rain shadows.
a. Air blowing up over a mountain range rises and cools; the windward side
therefore receives more rainfall.
b. The leeward side of the mountain range receives dry air; it is in a rain shadow.
c. The Hawaiian Islands experience over 750 cm of rain on the windward side but
only average 50 cm in the rain shadow.
d. The western side of the Sierra Nevada Mountains is lush; the eastern side is a
semidesert.
3. Coastal Breezes
356
a. Since the land heats up and cools down faster than oceans, it causes a daily
pattern.
b. In the day, land heats up and warm air rises; then cool sea breezes blow inland to
replace the rising air.
c. At night, the land cools first and the cold air sinks and blows out to sea.
4. Monsoon Climates
a. The India and south Asia climate have a monsoon climate and generates wet
ocean winds for almost half the year.
b. The land heats more rapidly than the waters of the Indian Ocean during spring.
c. The difference in temperature causes a gigantic circulation of air with warm air
rising and cooler air continuously coming in from the ocean to replace it.
d. As the warm air rises, it loses its moisture and the monsoon season begins.
5. The “lake effect”
a. Winter Arctic winds blowing across the Great Lakes become warm and moisture
laden.
b. When these winds rise and lose their moisture, a large amount of snow falls.
46.2 Terrestrial Ecosystems
A. Biome Distribution
1. The biosphere is divided into large biogeographic units called biomes.
2. A biome has a particular mix of plants and animals adapted to live under certain
environmental conditions.
3. The average temperature and rainfall influences where the different biomes are found
on the surface of the Earth.
4. Climate, and mainly solar radiation and topography, is the principle determinant of
the distribution of biomes.
5. A latitude temperature gradient is also seen when we consider altitude; the rain
forest–deciduous forest–coniferous forest–tundra sequences are also seen when
ascending a mountain.
a. The mountain coniferous forest is a montane coniferous forest.
b. The tundra near the peak is an alpine tundra.
B. Tundra
1. The Arctic tundra encircles the Earth south of the ice-covered polar seas in the
Northern Hemisphere.
2. Arctic tundra covers 20% of the Earth’s land surface; it is cold and dark much of the
year.
3. The tundra receives about 20 cm of rainfall annually; this would constitute a desert
but the melting snow provides water during summer and very little evaporates.
4. Only the topmost layer of Earth thaws; the permafrost beneath is always frozen.
5. Trees are not found in the tundra because
a. the growing season is too short,
b. their roots cannot penetrate the permafrost, and
c. trees cannot become anchored in the boggy soil of summer.
6. In the summer, the ground is covered with sedges and short-grasses with patches of
lichens and mosses.
7. Dwarf woody shrubs flower and seed quickly while there is sunlight for
photosynthesis.
357
8. Only a few animals adapted to cold live in the tundra year-round (e.g., lemming,
ptarmigan, and musk-ox).
9. During the summer, the tundra contains many insects, birds, and migratory animals
(e.g., shore birds, waterfowl, caribou, reindeer, and wolves).
C. Coniferous Forests
1. Conifer forests are found in three locations: taiga, montane coniferous forests, and
temperate coniferous forests.
2. Taiga is coniferous forest extending across northern Eurasia and North America.
3. Near a mountain top is a similar conifer forest called a montane coniferous forest.
4. On the Pacific Coast from Canada down to California is part of the temperate rain
forest.
5. Conifer forests contain great stands of spruce, fir, hemlock, and pine; these trees have
thick protective leaves or needles and bark.
6. The needlelike leaves can withstand the heavy weight of snow.
7. There is a limited understory of plants; the floor is covered by low-lying mosses and
lichens beneath the layer of needles.
8. Birds harvest the seeds of conifers; bears, deer, moose, beaver and muskrat live
around the cool lakes and streams.
9. Major carnivores include wolves, wolverines, and mountain lions.
10. The temperate rain forest along the Pacific Coast has the largest trees in existence,
some as old as 800 years.
D. Temperate Deciduous Forests
1. Temperate deciduous forests are found south of the taiga in eastern North America,
eastern Asia, and much of Europe.
2. Climate in these areas is moderate with a relatively high annual rainfall (75–150 cm).
3. The seasons are well-defined with a growing season that ranges between 140 and 300
days.
4. The trees of a deciduous forest (e.g., oak, beech, and maple) have broad leaves which
they lose in the fall and grow again in the spring.
5. Enough sunlight penetrates the canopy to support a well-developed understory
composed of shrubs, a layer of herbaceous plants, and a ground cover of mosses and
ferns.
6. Stratification beneath the canopy provides a variety of habitats for insects and birds.
7. Deciduous forest contains many rodents that provide food for bobcats, wolves, and
foxes.
8. Deciduous forest also contains deer and black bears.
9. Compared to the taiga, the winters are milder and allow many amphibians and reptiles
to survive.
10. Minerals are washed into the ground and eventually brought back up by deep roots of
trees.
E. Wildlife Conservation and DNA (Ecology focus box)
1. After DNA analysis, scientist discovered that 60% of loggerhead turtles drowning in
the nets and hooks of fisheries in the Mediterranean Sea were from beaches in the
southeastern United States.
358
a. More than half of the young turtles living in the Mediterranean Sea had hatched
from nests in Florida, Georgia, and South Carolina.
2. DNA sequencing from Alaskan brown bears showed that there are two types of
brown bears in Alaska.
a. One type of bear, who only resides in the Admiralty, Baranof, and Chichagof
islands (ABC islands) may be important wildlife conservation effort.
b. The logging industry has expressed interest in logging the ABC islands.
c. The new DNA analysis, may have protected the ABC bear’s habitat.
3.
Another example of DNA sequencing was an experiment discretely conducted at
sushi restaurants in Japan.
a. Scientists discovered that of the 16 pieces of whale sushi they examined, many
were from whales that are endangered or protected under an international
moratorium on whaling.
4. DNA sequencing is now being used in wildlife crimes in the United States and 122
other countries.
E. Tropical Forests
1. Tropical rain forests are found in South America, Africa, and the Indo-Malayan
region near the equator.
2. The climate is warm (20o–25o C) and rainfall is plentiful with a minimum of 190 cm
per year.
3. This is probably the richest biome, both in number of species and in their abundance.
4. A tropical rain forest has a complex structure, with many levels of life.
5. Although there is animal life on the ground (e.g., pacas, agoutis, peccaries, and
armadillos), most of the animals live in the trees.
6. Insects are abundant in tropical rain forests; the majority have not been identified.
7. Termites are critical in the decomposition of woody plant material.
8. Various birds tend to be brightly colored.
9. Amphibians and reptiles are represented by many species of frogs, snakes, and
lizards.
10. Lemurs, sloths and monkeys feed on fruits.
11. The largest carnivores are cats (e.g., jaguars in South America and leopards in Africa
and Asia).
12. Epiphytes are air plants that grow on other plants.
a. They have roots of their own to absorb moisture and minerals leached from the
canopy.
b. Others catch rain and debris in hollows of overlapping leaf bases.
c. Common epiphytes are related to pineapples, orchids and ferns.
13. Tropical forests in India, Southeast Asia, West Africa, West Indies, and Central and
South America are seasonal.
a. They have deciduous trees that shed leaves in the dry season; layers of
undergrowth are below.
b. Certain of these forests contain elephants, tigers and hippopotami.
14. A year-long growing season and high temperatures mean productivity is high.
15. But the warm, moist climate that supports high productivity also promotes rapid
recycling of litter.
16. The soil is called laterite and the iron and aluminum oxides give it a red color and a
359
brick texture when it bakes in the hot sun.
17. Consequently the soil is relatively poor because the nutrients are rapidly cycled into
the biomass; this makes a poor agricultural soil.
F. Shrublands
1. Shrubland is dominated by shrubs with small but thick evergreen leaves coated with
a thick, waxy cuticle, and with thick underground stems that survive dry summers and
frequent fires.
2. Shrubland is found more along the coasts in South America, western Australia,
central Chile, and around the Mediterranean Sea..
3. The dense shrubland in California, where the summers are hot and very dry, is
chaparral.
a. This Mediterranean-type shrubland lacks an understory and ground litter and is
highly flammable.
b. Seeds of many species require heat and the scarring action of fire to induce
germination.
4. West of the Rocky Mountains is a cold desert region dominated by sagebrush and
dependent birds.
G. Grasslands
1. Grasslands occur where rainfall is greater than 25 cm but is insufficient to support
trees.
2. In temperate areas with rainfall between 10 and 30 inches a year, grassland is the
climax community; it is too wet for desert and too dry for forests.
3. Natural grasslands once covered over 40% of the Earth’s land surface.
4. Most grasslands now grow crops, especially wheat and corn.
5. Grasses generally grow in different seasons; therefore some grassland animals
migrate and ground squirrels hibernate when there is little grass.
6. The temperate grasslands include the Russian steppes, South American pampas, and
North American prairies.
7. Tall-grass prairie occurs where moisture is not sufficient to support trees.
8. Short-grass prairie survives on less moisture and is between a tall-grass prairie and
desert.
9. Animal life includes mice, prairie dogs, and rabbits and the animals that feed on
them: hawks, snakes, badgers, coyotes, and foxes.
10. Prairies once contained large herds of buffalo and pronghorn antelope.
11. Savannas are tropical grasslands that contain some trees.
a. The savanna occurs in regions where a relatively cool dry season is followed by a
hot, rainy one.
b. The savanna contains the greatest variety and numbers of herbivores (e.g.,
antelopes, zebras, wildebeests, water buffalo, rhinoceroses, elephants, and
giraffes).
c. Any plant litter not consumed by grazers is attacked by termites and other
decomposers.
d. Termites also build towering nests and tend fungal gardens.
e. The savanna supports a large population of carnivores (e.g., lions, cheetahs,
hyenas, and leopards).
H. Deserts
360
1. Deserts usually occur at latitudes about 30o both north and south of the equator.
2. Deserts have an annual rainfall of less than 25 cm because incoming descending
winds lack moisture.
3. Lacking cloud cover, the desert days are hot and the nights are cold.
4. The Sahara and a few other deserts are nearly devoid of vegetation.
5. Most have a variety of plants, all adapted to heat and scarcity of water (e.g.,
succulents).
6. Animal life includes many insects, reptiles such as lizards and snakes, running birds
(e.g., roadrunner), rodents (e.g., kangaroo rat), and a few larger birds and mammals
such as hawks and coyotes.
46.3 Aquatic Ecosystems
1. Aquatic ecosystems are classified as freshwater (inland) or saltwater (marine).
2. Wetlands near the sea have mixed fresh and saltwater and are brackish.
3. Seawater evaporates and then precipitates and flows through lakes and ponds, streams
and rivers, and groundwater.
a. The top of the saturation zone defines the water table.
b. Groundwater sometimes occurs in underground layers called aquifers.
4. Wetlands are areas that are wet for at least part of the year; they are generally
classified by their vegetation.
5. Marshes are wetlands that are frequently or continually inundated by water; they are
characterized by the presence of rushes, reeds, and other grasses.
6. Bogs are wetlands that a characterized by acidic waters, peat deposits, and sphagnum
moss; they receive most of their water from precipitation and are nutrient-poor.
7. Wandering streams are often channelized into straight channels; this eliminates
storage for flood control.
8. The elimination of wetlands removes unique habitat for fish, waterfowl and other
wildlife.
9. Wetlands also filter toxic wastes and use excess nutrients.
A. Lakes
1. Lakes are freshwater bodies classified by their nutrient status.
a. Oligotrophic (nutrient-poor) lakes have low organic matter and therefore low
productivity.
b. Eutrophic (nutrient-rich) lakes are highly productive from natural nutrients or
agricultural runoff.
c. Eutrophication occurs when added nutrients change an oligotrophic lake to
eutrophic; this process is called eutrophication.
2. In the temperate zone, deep lakes are stratified in summer and winter.
a. Epilimnion is the surface layer warmed from solar radiation; it soon becomes
nutrient-poor but photosynthesis keeps oxygen levels high.
b. At the thermocline, there is an abrupt drop in temperature.
c. The hypolimnion is the lower cold region; it becomes depleted in oxygen but is
nutrient rich from detritus falling from above.
d. The less dense epilimnion floats on the heavier cold hypolimnion; this prevents
mixing.
3. Fall and Spring Overturns
a. In the fall, the upper epilimnion waters become cooler than the hypolimnion.
361
b. This causes the surface water to sink and deep water to rise.
c. This fall overturn continues until the temperature is uniform.
d. In the winter, ice forms on top because ice is lighter; this provides an insulating
cover and organisms can live through a harsh winter in this moderate water.
e. In spring, the ice melts and the cooler water on top sinks below the warmer water
on the bottom.
f. After the spring overturn, water returns to a more uniform temperature and sun
warms the surface.
g. Fish and other aquatic life are adapted to the strata and seasonal changes; for
instance, cold water fish move deeper in the summer.
B. Life Zones
1. Plankton includes freshwater and marine microscopic organisms that freely drift in
fresh or saltwater.
2. Phytoplankton are the photosynthetic plankton, including algae.
3. Zooplankton are animals that feed on phytoplankton.
4. The littoral zone is shallow and closest to shore; plants root in this zone and harbor
some animals.
5. The limnetic zone is the open sunlit layer of body of a lake; it contains plankton, a
few insect larvae, and fish.
6. The profundal zone is that portion of a lake below any significant sunlight
penetration; it contains zooplankton and fishes that feed on the debris that falls from
above.
7. The benthic zone is at the soil-water interface with the bottom-dwelling organisms; it
includes worms, mollusks, and crustaceans.
C. Coastal Ecosystems Border the Oceans
1. An estuary is a partially enclosed body of water at the end of a river where the fresh
water and sea water mix.
a. Not many organisms are tolerant of this mix of fresh river water and salty tidal
water.
b. For organisms suited to the rapid changes in salinity, estuaries provide abundant
nutrients.
c. Estuaries are a nutrient trap since nutrients are
1) delivered by the river,
2) brought in from the sea by tides, and
3) released from decaying vegetation.
d. Estuaries are a nursery estimated as spawning and rearing over half of all marine
fishes.
2. Seashores are constantly bombarded by tidal seas.
a. The littoral zone is between high and low tide and is covered and uncovered
daily.
b. The upper littoral is covered by barnacles.
c. The midportion harbors brown algae that may overlie barnacles.
d. The lower portion has oysters and mussels attached to rock by byssal threads;
various snails hide in crevices or seaweed.
e. Below the littoral zone, seaweeds are the main photosynthesizers and are
anchored to rocks by holdfasts.
362
f. Sandy beaches have no anchor holds; therefore permanent beach organisms are
burrowing or tube-living.
D. Oceans
1. Shallow ocean waters (called the euphotic zone) contain a greater concentration of
organisms than the rest of the sea.
a. This contains a greater concentration of organisms than are in the oceanic province.
b. It is a more productive part of the ocean because of the concentration of sunlight and
nutrients.
c. It provides the base of the food web leading to commercially valuable fishes (e.g.,
herring, cod, and flounder).
d. Coral reefs are areas of biological abundance found in shallow, warm waters just
below the surface; there is much concern about future survival of coral reefs since
they are vulnerable to environmental changes, temperature shifts, salinity, and light
availability.
2. The pelagic division includes the neritic and oceanic provinces.
a. The neritic province lies over the continental shelf.
b. The epipelagic zone extends from the surface to the maximum depth that
photosynthesis significantly occurs.
1) It does not have a high concentration of phytoplankton because it lacks nutrients.
2) However, the numbers of producers in this zone still support a large assembly of
zooplankton, which support large numbers of other marine organisms, when the
entire ocean is considered.
3) The epipelagic animals include mackerels, tunas, and sharks.
c. The mesopelagic zone extends below maximum depth at which photosynthesis
significantly occurs.
1) This zone is dominated by carnivores adapted to the absence of light (e.g.,
luminescent shrimps, squids, and fishes).
2) Organisms here tend to be translucent or red colored.
d. The bathypelagic zone is in absolute darkness except for an occasional flash of
bioluminescent light.
1) Animals here are carnivores and scavengers.
2) This level supports a variety of very strange carnivores.
e. The abyssal plain is located on and immediately above the abyssal plane.
1) This is a region of extreme cold and intense pressure.
2) It contains a detrital food web in which the detritivores (e.g., sponges, worms,
tube worms, sea cucumbers, sea lilies, and sea urchins) comprise the first trophic
level.
3) Starfishes, crabs, brittle stars, and some bottom-dwelling fish occupy the upper
trophic levels.
4) Hydrothermal vents are areas where seawater percolates through cracks.
a. The water is heated to about 350oC.
b. This causes sulfate to react with water to form hydrogen sulfide (H2S).
c. Chemosynthetic bacteria obtain energy by oxidizing hydrogen sulfide.
E. Ocean Currents
1. Moisture that evaporates into the air carries the heat used to evaporate it with it.
2. Water is warm at the equator and cold at the poles due to the distribution of the sun’s
363
rays.
3. Air takes on the temperature of the water below and warm air moves from the equator
toward the poles.
4. Therefore, the oceans make winds blow.
5. Oceans hold heat or remain cool longer than landmasses.
6. Winds generate ocean currents due to friction at the ocean surface.
7. Since ocean currents are bounded by land, they move in a circular path,
counterclockwise in the Northern Hemisphere and clockwise in the Southern
Hemisphere.
8. Ocean currents take heat from the equator to the polar regions.
a. The Gulf Stream brings warmer tropical Caribbean water to the east coast of
North America and to upper western Europe.
b. Without the Gulf Stream, Great Britain would be as cold as Greenland.
c. A major Atlantic Ocean current warms the eastern coast of South America.
d. The Humboldt Current in the Pacific flows toward the equator off the west coast
of South America.
9. Upwellings occur when cold nutrient-rich water rises to supplant warm nutrient-poor
water.
a. The Humboldt Current brings rich nutrients north; this supports rich marine life
and the fisheries of Peru and northern Chile.
b. Seabirds deposit droppings (guano) on land where it is a major source of
phosphorus mining.
c. When the Humboldt Current is not as cool as usual, upwelling does not occur,
stagnation results, fisheries decline, and climate patterns change globally; this is
called an El-Niño-Southern Oscillation.
F. El Niño-Southern Oscillation (Ecology focus box)
1. El Niño-Southern Oscillation (ENSO) refers to a sever weather change brought on by
an interaction between the atmosphere and the ocean currents.
2. Ordinarily, the southeast trade winds move along the coast of South America and turn
east because of the Earth’s daily rotation on its axis.
a. The winds bring warm ocean waters from east to west.
b. There is also an upwelling of nutrient-rich cold water from the depths of the
ocean, resulting in a large Peruvian harvest of anchovies.
c. The warm ocean waters also bring monsoon rain to India and Indonesia.
3. During an El Niño, the northeast and southeast trade winds slacken.
a. There is no upwelling, and anchovy harvest plummets.
b. Waters from the east may never reach the west.
c. Winds lose moisture in the middle of the Pacific, rather than the Indian Ocean.
d. Drought occurs in India, Indonesia, Africa, and Australia.
4. Some parts of the United States benefit from an El Niño.
a. The Northeast is warmer than usual.
b. Fewer hurricanes hit the east coast.
c. Tornadoes decrease in the Midwest.
5. Following El Niño, normal conditions occur, which is known as La Niña.
6. As climate changes, the severity of El Niños remains somewhat unpredictable.
364
Chapter 47
47.1 Conservation Biology and Biodiversity
1. Conservation biology is a new discipline studying aspects of biodiversity in order to
conserve natural resources.
2. Conservation biology involves both scientific concepts and their application to
practical problems.
3. It supports four ethical principles.
a. Biodiversity is desirable for both the biosphere and for humans.
b. Extinctions due to human actions are undesirable.
c. The complex interactions in ecosystems support biodiversity and are therefore
desirable.
d. Biodiversity from evolutionary change has value by itself regardless of any
practical benefit.
4. Estimates vary but at least 10–20% of all species now living will most likely become
extinct in 20–50 years.
5. Bioinformatics, the collecting and analyzing of biological information, is used in the
study of conservation biology.
A. Biodiversity
1. Biodiversity is the variety of life on Earth; it is generally described as the number of
species of the various groups of organisms.
2. Most estimates place the number of species living on earth as between 10 and 50
million species; most are yet to be found and described.
3. A threatened species is one that is likely to become an endangered species (in
danger of immediate extinction) in the foreseeable future
4. Biodiversity also includes genetic diversity, community diversity, and landscape
diversity.
5. Genetic diversity helps maintain reproductive vitality and assists adaptation.
a. The 1846 potato blight in Ireland was due to too little genetic diversity.
b. 1922 saw a similar Soviet wheat failure.
c. Florida had an outbreak of citrus canker in 1984 made worse by limited genetic
variation.
d. Such limited genetic variation creates the risk of extinction in natural populations.
6. Community diversity refers to the variation in species composition in a community.
a. Different communities have different species; therefore different communities add
to species diversity.
b. Attempts to save just one species are shortsighted when the community itself is
threatened.
c. Disrupting a community can threaten many species.
7. Landscape diversity incorporates a number of interacting ecosystems: plains,
mountains, rivers, etc. within one landscape.
a. Fragmented landscapes reduce reproductive capacity, food availability, and affect
seasonal behavior.
8. Distribution of Biodiversity
a. Biodiversity is not evenly distributed; saving some areas saves more species than
saving others.
b. Biodiversity is highest in the tropics and declines toward the poles on land, in
365
fresh water, and in the ocean.
c. Biodiversity hotspots contain unusually large concentrations of species; hotspots
cover only about 1.4% of Earth’s land area but contain 44% of the higher plant
species and 35% of the terrestrial vertebrate species.
d. Madagascar, the Cape of South Africa, and the Great Barrier Reef of Australia are
all biodiversity hotspots.
e. Biodiversity frontiers such as the rain forest canopies and the deep sea benthos
have more species than formerly suspected.
47.2 Value of Biodiversity
A. Direct Value
1.
Medicinal Value
a. Most U.S. prescription drugs were originally derived from living organisms.
b. The rosy periwinkle from Madagascar provides chemicals that treat the two
cancers: leukemia and Hodgkin disease.
c. Based on the past rate of drug discovery, there are perhaps 328 more drugs likely
to be found in tropical rain forests with $147 billion value.
d. Fungi and soil bacteria have provided penicillin, tetracycline, and streptomycin.
e. The nine-banded armadillo is the only other animal to contract human leprosy;
this allowed research to find a cure.
f. The blood of horseshoe crabs contains limulus amoebocyte lysate that keeps
pacemakers free of bacteria.
2. Agricultural Value
a. Wheat, corn and rice crops are uniform; when devastated by pests, the wild strains
they came from are a source of genes for disease resistance.
b. When rice crops were devastated by a virus in Africa, it was necessary to locate a
wild rice plant that was resistant and breed the gene into the high yield rice.
c. Biological pest controls are economically important replacements when pests are
pesticide-resistant.
d. Most flowering plants are pollinated by animals (e.g., bees, wasps, butterflies,
birds, bats, etc.).
e. The honeybee is a multi-faceted example.
1) Domesticated bees pollinate over $10 billion worth of food crops annually.
2) Tracheal mites have wiped out more than 20% of commercial honeybees in
the U.S.
3) Any hope for a resistant bee depends on wild bees; wild pollinators provide a
$4.1 to $6.7 billion service each year.
3. Consumptive Use Value
a. The cultivation of crops and domestication of animals (farming) have been
successful enterprises.
b. However, fishing of wild species has not yet been replaced by aquaculture.
c. Harvesting wild fruits, vegetables, skins, fibers, beeswax, seaweed, and hunting
meat are important to many peoples.
d. Calculations show that the timber harvested from the natural environment in the
Peruvian Amazon is of less value than harvest of tree fruits and rubber
production.
B. Indirect Value
366
1. Biogeochemical Cycles
a. Biodiversity contributes to the water, carbon, nitrogen, and phosphorus cycles of
our ecosystem.
b. We depend upon normal cycles to provide fresh water, remove carbon dioxide,
etc.
c. Technology cannot artificially create these cycles in place of the ecosystem.
2. Waste Disposal
a. Decomposers break down organic matter and other wastes into nutrients used by
producers.
b. Decomposition in nature is more economical and complete than sewage
treatment.
c. Biological communities purify water and break down pollutants; Canada
estimates this wetland value at $50,000 per hectare.
3. Provision of Fresh Water
a. Most terrestrial organisms, including humans, need freshwater ecosystems.
b. Desalination plants cost four to eight times the average cost of water taken from
the water cycle.
c. Forests are “sponges” that hold and release water over time; the value of
marshland outside of Boston, Massachusetts, is estimated at $72,000 per hectare
based on its ability to reduce floods.
4. Prevention of Soil Erosion
a. Intact ecosystems naturally retain soil and prevent erosion.
b. Deforestation results in silt that fills reservoirs and denudes hillsides; a dam in
Pakistan is filling much faster due to silt.
c. Silt from deforestation also smothers mangrove and coastal ecosystems and ruins
fisheries.
5. Regulation of Climate
a. Trees provide both shade and natural “air conditioning.”
b. Globally, tropical rain forests act as a sink for carbon dioxide; when trees are
burned the CO2 is released back into the atmosphere.
c. CO2 is a greenhouse gas and contributes to global warming; not all life may be
able to adjust to the climate change.
6. Ecotourism
a. In the U.S., 100 million people spend a total of $4 billion a year on fees, travel,
lodging, and food in order to enjoy natural environments.
b. Activities include sport fishing, boating, hiking, bird watching, whale watching,
etc.
C. Biodiversity and Natural Ecosystems
1. Massive changes in biodiversity impact ecosystems and the ability to provide the
previous values.
2. Research indicates that high diversity improves the efficiency of ecosystems.
a. Minnesota grassland plots with more species had lower inorganic soil nitrogen.
b. California plots with more diversity had greater overall resource usage.
c. Net primary productivity increased as diversity increased at all trophic levels.
d. Computer modeling predicts 30% more photosynthesis with nine different tree
species rather than one single species.
367
3. Additional research may determine the effects of environmental change, invasion,
pathogens, and fragmentation.
47.3 Causes of Extinction
1. 1,880 threatened and endangered species were examined for the cause of their status.
a. Habitat loss was involved in 85% of cases.
b. An alien (exotic or introduced) species was involved in nearly 50%.
c. Pollution was a factor in 24%.
d. Overexploitation occurred in 17%.
e. Disease was involved in 3%.
2. As an example, the decline in macaws is the result of timber and mining activities,
and hunting for food and pet trade.
A. Habitat Loss
1. Rain forest destruction follows a pattern.
a. A highway is constructed into the forest interior.
b. Small towns, industry and roads then branch off into the forest.
c. Settlers, often subsidized, burn the trees and raise crops on the three-year supply
of nutrients.
d. After the land degrades, the farmers must move to another portion of forest.
2. Coastal degradation is due to high human populations that live along the shore.
3. Already 60% of coral reefs are destroyed or near destruction; all coral reefs could
disappear in 40 years.
4. 45% of Indonesia’s mangrove forests have already been destroyed.
5. Wetlands, estuaries and seagrass beds are being rapidly destroyed.
B. Exotic Species
1. Exotic species, or alien species, are introduced accidently or deliberately into new
ecosystems.
2. Natural ecosystems have evolved with their native organisms in balance.
3. Migration out of ecosystems is blocked by barriers; however, humans circumvent
these barriers by various means.
a. Colonization of European pioneers brought the dandelion as a salad green and
they introduced pigs to North America.
b. Horticulture and agriculture have resulted in some exotic plants like kudzu (a
vine from Japan) escaping into the countryside.
c. Accidental transport due to global trade carried the European zebra mussels in
ballast water to the U.S. where it now squeezes out native mussels.
4. Alien species disrupt food webs; an opossum shrimp introduced into Montana lakes
led to less food for eagles and grizzly bears.
5.
Exotics on Islands
a. Islands are especially susceptible to disruption by introduction of exotics.
1) When myrtle trees from the Canary Islands were introduced to Hawaii,
symbiotic bacteria gave them a competitive edge over native trees.
2) The brown tree snake introduced to Guam has reduced ten bird species to the
point of extinction.
368
3) On the Galapagos Islands, black rats have reduced the giant tortoise; goats and
feral pigs have harmed cactus and converted forest to grassland.
4) Mongooses introduced into Hawaii to control rats have preyed on native birds.
C. Pollution
1. Pollution is any environmental change that adversely affects the lives and health of
living things.
2. Pollution is directly the third main cause of extinctions and can lead to disease, the
fifth main cause of extinction.
3. Acid Deposition
a. Automobile exhaust and sulfur dioxide from power plants form acids when
combined with water vapor in the air.
b. These acids return to Earth as acid rain/snow or dry deposition.
c. Although sulfur and nitrogen oxides are emitted in one locale, deposition occurs
elsewhere across boundaries.
d. Acid deposition causes trees to weaken, kills small invertebrates and
decomposers, and kills the life in northern lakes.
4. Eutrophication
a. Lakes are stressed by excess nutrients from sewage treatment and agricultural
runoff.
b. Algae grow in abundance and then die off; the bacterial decomposers then use up
all of the oxygen and kill the fish.
5. Ozone Depletion
a. The ozone shield is a layer of ozone (O3) in the stratosphere, some 50 km above
Earth’s surface.
b. It absorbs most of the harmful ultraviolet (UV) radiation, preventing it from
reaching Earth’s surface.
c. The cause of ozone depletion traces to chlorine (Cl- ) atoms that come from the
breakdown of CFCs.
d. Freon is a common CFC that was used in refrigerators and air conditioners.
e. Ozone shield depletion will lead to depression of the human immune system,
impaired crop and tree growth, and death of plankton.
6. Organic Chemicals
a. A wide variety of organic chemicals are produced and enter the environment.
b. Nonylphenols are used in plastics, spermicides, cosmetics, etc.; such chemicals
mimic the effects of hormones.
c. Salmon switch development between fresh and salt water but this chemical
prevents adaptation in 20–30% of young fish.
7. Global Warming
a. Global warming refers to an expected increase in the average temperature in the
21st Century.
b. Greenhouse gases (named for their ability to trap heat like greenhouse glass)
contribute to warming:
1) carbon dioxide (CO2) is produced by burning fossil fuels; and
2) methane (CH4) is produced by animal guts, oil and gas wells, and flooded rice
paddies.
c. Data collected worldwide show a rise in greenhouse gases.
369
d.
Computer models predict rising average temperatures.
1) The global climate appears to have risen since the industrial revolution.
2) Some computer models predict a rise of from 1.5o C to 4.5o C by 2060.
e. As oceans warm, temperatures in polar regions would likely rise to a greater
degree than other areas.
f. Glaciers would melt and sea levels would rise; a one meter rise would inundate
20–50% of coastal wetlands.
g. Regions of suitable climate for species would shift rapidly, probably faster than
plants could migrate.
h. Coral reefs would suffer from high temperature driving off algae and the higher
water “drowning” them.
D. Overexploitation
1. Overexploitation occurs when removal of individuals from the wild population
drastically reduces their numbers.
2. Rarity causes a positive feedback cycle: the fewer specimens left, the more valuable
they are.
3. There are many cases of overexploited organisms.
a. “Rustlers” dig up rare cacti to sell to gardeners.
b. Parakeets and macaws are sold to pet stores.
c. Tropical fish are harvested using dynamite and cyanide that kill many more.
d. Siberian tigers are hunted for hides.
e. Rhinoceros horn is ground up as medicine.
f. Elephant tusk ivory is used for jewelry.
4. Fish stocks are being depleted by overfishing.
a. The U.N. Food and Agricultural Organization considers 11 of 15 major oceanic
fishing areas “overexploited.”
b. Purse-seine fishing surrounds tuna.
c. Huge trawling nets capture bottom-dwelling fish; this has been called the marine
equivalent of clear-cutting trees.
5. Overfishing perch and herring caused a decline in seals and sea lions; orca killer
whales had to switch to eating sea otters; sea otters ate the sea urchins that fed on kelp
and without sea otters, the urchins decimated the kelp beds.
E. Overexploitation of Asian Turtles (Ecology focus box)
1. Terrestrial tortoises and freshwater turtles are collected and traded for human
consumption and other uses.
2. The trade started in Bangladesh and has now spread worldwide.
3. Most of the wild caught turtles and tortoises are already endangered, and this practice
has virtually wiped out many populations.
4. One of the main difficulties in regulating the trade of these animals is the lack of
knowledge about the range, natural history and conservation needs.
5. It is essential that nations and states with wild turtle populations ensure that their
domestic legislation is adequate in protecting the future of these animals.
6. Another threat include the release of these turtles into new areas and spread disease.
47.4 Conservation Techniques
A. Habitat Preservation
1. Biodiversity hotspots merit preservation first.
370
2. In Madagascar tropical rain forests, 93% of primates, 99% of frog species, and over
80% of plant species are endemic (unique and native).
3. When keystone species, species that influence the viability of a community although
their numbers might not be high, are lost, their extinction leads to other extinctions.
a. Bats pollinate and disperse seeds of tropical trees; loss of the bats leads to loss of
the trees.
b. Grizzly bears disperse berry seeds in their dung, keep prey populations healthy,
and turn over soil.
4. A flagship species is one treasured for its beauty, cuteness, etc. Examples are
pandas, dolphins, tigers, etc.
5. Metapopulations
a. Metapopulations are subdivided into several small, isolated populations due to
habitat fragmentation.
b. A source population lives in a favorable habitat and has a higher birth than death
rate.
c. Sink populations have death rates that equal or exceed birth rates.
d. When trying to save a species, it is best to prevent it from moving into a sink
habitat.
6. Landscape Dynamics
a. Organisms like grizzly bears utilize many ecosystems; saving just one system
would not save the species.
b. Saving diverse ecosystems connected by corridors involves national forests,
refuges and private land.
c. Landscape protection for one species helps protect others; the grizzly range
overlaps 40% of Montana’s vascular plants of special concern.
d. The Edge Effect
1) The edge of a habitat is different from the interior; the smaller the patch, the
more edge produced.
2) Forest edges are brighter, warmer, drier, windier and they have more vines.
3) Forest nesting songbirds have less success at the edge; cowbirds are nest
parasites at the edge.
B. Habitat Restoration
1. Restoration ecology seeks scientific ways to return ecosystems to their former state.
2. Restoration involves three principles.
a. Restoration should begin immediately before the remaining fragments are lost.
b. Techniques that mimic natural processes should be used (i.e., controlled burning,
biological pest control, etc.).
c. The goal is sustainable development where the resulting ecosystem should be
able to maintain itself.
3. The Everglades
a. The Everglades is a natural wet sawgrass prairie with cypress or hardwood
islands.
b. Early settlers drained the land to the south and established a dike around the
feeder lake; water was also channeled to prevent flooding.
c. The water supplied by natural cycles of wet and dry seasons has been replaced by
discharges from conservation lakes timed for public convenience.
371
d. The resulting abnormal water supply has devastated the Everglades ecology; bird
populations are dramatically reduced, etc.
e. Restoration involves providing a natural seasonal flow of water to the Everglades.
f. Sustainable development involves switching agriculture to sugarcane and rice and
establishing an extended buffer zone with interconnected marshes.
372